J-Web User Guide for SRX Series Devices

Published

2021-12-16
 ii

Juniper Networks, Inc.

1133 Innovation Way
Sunnyvale, California 94089
USA
408-745-2000
www.juniper.net

Juniper Networks, the Juniper Networks logo, Juniper, and Junos are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc.
in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks, service marks, registered marks, or registered service
marks are the property of their respective owners.

Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document. Juniper Networks reserves the right
to change, modify, transfer, or otherwise revise this publication without notice.

J-Web User Guide for SRX Series Devices

Copyright © 2021 Juniper Networks, Inc. All rights reserved.

The information in this document is current as of the date on the title page.

YEAR 2000 NOTICE

Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant. Junos OS has no known time-related
limitations through the year 2038. However, the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036.

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

The Juniper Networks product that is the subject of this technical documentation consists of (or is intended for use
with) Juniper Networks software. Use of such software is subject to the terms and conditions of the End User License
Agreement ("EULA") posted at https://support.juniper.net/support/eula/. By downloading, installing or using such
software, you agree to the terms and conditions of that EULA.
 iii

Table of Contents
About This Guide | xxv

1 Juniper Web Device Manager

Getting Started | 2

Juniper Web Device Manager Overview | 2

What is J-Web? | 2

Benefits of J-Web | 3

Access the J-Web User Interface | 3

Prerequisites for Using J-Web | 3

Log in to J-Web | 4

The J-Web Setup Wizard | 8

Configure SRX Devices Using the J-Web Setup Wizard | 8

Example: J-Web Wizard for Standalone Mode | 10

J-Web Setup Wizard Parameters | 22

Explore J-Web | 40

J-Web: A First Look | 41

J-Web Launch Pad | 41

J-Web Top Pane | 42

J-Web Side Pane | 44

J-Web Main Pane | 46

J-Web Workflow Wizards | 49

Summary | 49

2 Add SRX Device to Security Director Cloud

Add an SRX Series Device to Juniper Security Director Cloud | 51

3 Dashboard
J-Web Dashboard | 54

Dashboard Overview | 54

What is J-Web Dashboard | 54

Work with Widgets | 55

 iv

4 Monitor
Network | 60

Monitor Interfaces | 60

Monitor DHCP Server Bindings | 61

Monitor IPsec VPN | 63

Logs | 67

Monitor Session | 67

Monitor Threats | 72

Monitor Web Filtering | 77

Monitor ATP | 81

Monitor VPN | 86

Monitor All Events | 89

Monitor Alarms | 95

Maps and Charts | 97

Monitor Traffic Map | 97

Monitor Threats Map | 100

Monitor Applications | 107

Monitor Users | 110

Statistics | 112

Monitor Threat Prevention | 112

Monitor VPN Phase I | 113

Monitor VPN Phase II | 115

Reports | 118

About Reports Page | 118

Overview | 119

Threat Assessment Report | 124

Application and User Usage | 124

 v

Top Talkers | 125

IPS Threat Environment | 125

Viruses Blocked | 125

URL Report | 126

Virus: Top Blocked | 126

Top Firewall Events | 126

Top Firewall Deny Destinations | 126

Top Firewall Denies | 126

Top IPS Events | 126

Top Anti-spam Detected | 127

Top Screen Attackers | 127

Top Screen Victims | 127

Top Screen Hits | 127

Top Firewall Rules | 127

Top Firewall Deny Sources | 127

Top IPS Attack Sources | 127

Top IPS Attack Destinations | 127

Top IPS Rules | 127

Top Web Apps | 128

Top Applications Blocked | 128

Top URLs by User | 128

Top Source Zone by Volume | 128

Top Applications by User | 128

Top Botnet Threats By Source Address via IDP Logs | 128

Top Botnet Threats by Destination Address via IDP Logs | 128

Top Botnet Threats by Threat Severity via IDP Logs | 129

Top Malware Threats by Source Address via IDP Logs | 129

Top Malware Threats by Destination Address via IDP Logs | 129

Top Malware Threats by Threat Severity via IDP Logs | 129

Top Blocked Applications via Webfilter Logs | 129

Top Permitted Application Subcategories by Volume via Webfilter Logs | 130

Top Permitted Application Subcategories by Count via Webfilter Logs | 130

5 Device Administration
Basic Settings | 133

Configure Basic Settings | 133

 vi

Cluster Management | 152

Configure Cluster (HA) Setup | 152

About the Cluster Configuration Page | 167

Edit Node Settings | 170

Add an HA Cluster Interface | 171

Edit an HA Cluster Interface | 173

Delete HA Cluster Interface | 173

Add a Redundancy Group | 174

Edit a Redundancy Group | 176

Delete Redundancy Group | 177

User Management | 178

About the User Management Page | 178

Add a User | 182

Edit a User | 183

Delete User | 184

Multi Tenancy—Resource Profiles | 185

About the Resource Profiles Page | 185

Global Settings | 187

Add a Resource Profile | 188

Edit a Resource Profile | 192

Delete Resource Profile | 192

Multi Tenancy—Interconnect Ports | 194

About the Interconnect Ports Page | 194

Add a LT Logical Interface | 196

Edit a LT Logical Interface | 203

Delete Logical Interface | 203

 vii

Search for Text in an Interconnect Ports Table | 203

Multi Tenancy—Logical Systems | 205

About the Logical Systems Page | 205

Add a Logical System | 207

Edit a Logical System | 218

Delete Logical System | 218

Search Text in Logical Systems Table | 219

Multi Tenancy—Tenants | 220

About the Tenants Page | 220

Add a Tenant | 222

Edit a Tenant | 230

Delete Tenant | 230

Search Text in Tenants Table | 231

Certificate Management—Device Certificates | 232

About the Device Certificates Page | 232

Import a Device Certificate | 234

Export a Device Certificate | 235

Add a Device Certificate | 236

Delete Device Certificate | 239

View Details of a Device Certificate | 239

Search Text in the Device Certificates Table | 243

Certificate Management—Trusted Certificate Authority | 244

About the Trusted Certificate Authority Page | 244

Generate Default Trusted Certificate Authorities | 246

Enroll a CA Certificate | 247

Import a CA Certificate | 248

 viii

Add a Certificate Authority Profile | 249

Edit a Certificate Authority Profile | 253

Delete Certificate Authority Profile | 254

Search Text in the Trusted Certificate Authority Table | 255

Certificate Management—Certificate Authority Group | 256

About the Certificate Authority Group Page | 256

Import a Trusted CA Group | 257

Add a CA Group | 258

Edit a CA Group | 259

Delete CA Group | 260

Search Text in the Certificate Authority Group Table | 260

License Management | 262

Manage Your Licenses | 262

About License Management Page | 262

Add License | 263

Delete Installed Licenses | 264

Update Installed Licenses | 264

Update Trial Licenses | 264

Display License Keys | 264

Download License Keys | 265

Software Feature Licenses | 265

Security Package Management | 267

About the Security Package Management Page | 267

Install or Upload IPS Signatures Package | 271

IPS Signatures Settings | 273

Install Application Signatures Package | 275

Application Signatures Settings | 275

Install URL Category Package | 277

 ix

URL Categories Settings | 277

ATP Management | 280

Enroll Your Device with Juniper ATP Cloud | 280

About the Diagnostics Page | 283

Operations | 286

Maintain Files | 286

About Files Page | 286

Clean Up Files | 286

Download and Delete Files | 287

Delete Backup JUNOS Package | 289

Maintain Reboot Schedule | 290

Maintain System Snapshots | 291

Software Management | 294

Upload Software Packages | 294

Install Software Packages | 295

Rollback Software Package Version | 296

Configuration Management | 298

Manage Upload Configuration Files | 298

Manage Configuration History | 299

Manage Rescue Configuration | 303

Alarm Management | 304

Monitor Chassis Alarm | 304

About Chassis Alarm Page | 304

Create Chassis Alarm Definition | 304

Edit Chassis Alarm Definition | 309

Monitor System Alarm | 310

About System Alarm Page | 310

Create System Alarm Configuration | 310

Edit System Alarm Configuration | 314

 x

RPM | 315

Setup RPM | 315

View RPM | 324

Tools | 330

Troubleshoot Ping Host | 330

About Ping Host Page | 330

Troubleshoot Ping MPLS | 334

About Ping MPLS Page | 335

Troubleshoot Traceroute | 340

About Traceroute Page | 340

Troubleshoot Packet Capture | 343

About Packet Capture Page | 343

Access CLI | 350

About CLI Terminal Page | 351

View CLI Configuration | 353

About CLI Viewer Page | 353

Edit CLI Configuration | 354

About CLI Editor Page | 354

Point and Click CLI | 355

About Point and Click CLI Page | 355

Reset Configuration | 362

Reset Configuration and Rerun Setup Wizard | 362

6 Network
Connectivity—Interfaces | 365

About the Interfaces Page | 365

Add a Logical Interface | 369

Edit a Logical Interface | 376

Delete Logical Interface | 376

 xi

Connectivity—VLAN | 377

About the VLAN Page | 377

Add a VLAN | 379

Edit a VLAN | 381

Delete VLAN | 381

Assign an Interface to VLAN | 382

Connectivity—Link Aggregation | 384

About the Link Aggregation Page | 384

Link Aggregation Global Settings | 386

Add a Logical Interface to Link Aggregation | 387

Add a Link Aggregation | 388

Edit an Aggregated Interface | 390

Delete Link Aggregation | 391

Search for Text in the Link Aggregation Table | 391

Connectivity—PPPoE | 393

Configure PPPoE | 393

Connectivity—Wireless LAN | 395

About the Settings Page | 395

Create an Access Point | 397

Edit an Access Point | 398

Delete Access Point | 399

Create an Access Point Radio Setting | 399

Edit an Access Point Radio Setting | 403

Delete Access Point Radio Settings | 403

DHCP Client | 405

About the DHCP Client Page | 405

 xii

Add DHCP Client Information | 406

Delete DHCP Client Information | 408

DHCP Server | 409

About the DHCP Server Page | 409

Add a DHCP Pool | 411

Edit a DHCP Pool | 415

Delete DHCP Pool | 416

DHCP Groups Global Settings | 416

Add a DHCP Group | 417

Edit a DHCP Group | 417

Delete DHCP Group | 418

Firewall Filters—IPv4 | 419

About the IPv4 Page | 419

Add IPv4 Firewall Filters | 420

Firewall Filters—IPv6 | 437

About the IPv6 Page | 437

Add IPv6 Firewall Filters | 438

Firewall Filters—Assign to Interfaces | 453

About the Assign to Interfaces Page | 453

NAT Policies | 455

About the NAT Policies Page | 455

Create a Source NAT | 457

Edit a Source NAT | 463

Delete Source NAT | 463

NAT Pools | 464

About the NAT Pools Page | 464

Global Options | 466

 xiii

Create a Source NAT Pool | 467

Edit a Source NAT Pool | 471

Delete Source NAT Pool | 472

Add a Destination NAT Pool | 472

Edit a Destination NAT Pool | 474

Delete Destination NAT Pool | 474

Destination NAT | 475

About the Destination Page | 475

Add a Destination Rule Set | 477

Edit a Destination Rule Set | 480

Delete Destination Rule Set | 480

Static NAT | 481

About the Static Page | 481

Add a Static Rule Set | 483

Edit a Static Rule Set | 487

Delete Static Rule Set | 487

NAT Proxy ARP/ND | 489

About the Proxy ARP/ND Page | 489

Add a Proxy ARP | 490

Edit a Proxy ARP | 492

Delete a Proxy ARP | 492

Add a Proxy ND | 493

Edit a Proxy ND | 494

Delete Proxy ND | 494

Static Routing | 496

About the Static Routing Page | 496

 xiv

Add a Static Route | 497

Edit a Static Route | 499

Delete Static Route | 499

RIP Routing | 500

About the RIP Page | 500

Add a RIP Instance | 502

Edit a RIP Instance | 504

Delete RIP Instance | 504

Edit RIP Global Settings | 504

Delete RIP Global Settings | 508

OSPF Routing | 509

About the OSPF Page | 509

Add an OSPF | 511

Edit an OSPF | 520

Delete OSPF | 520

BGP Routing | 522

About the BGP Page | 522

Add a BGP Group | 526

Edit a BGP Group | 531

Delete a BGP Group | 532

Edit Global Information | 532

Routing Instances | 538

About the Routing Instances Page | 538

Add a Routing Instance | 540

Edit a Routing Instance | 541

Delete Routing Instance | 542

 xv

Routing—Policies | 543

About the Policies Page | 543

Global Options | 545

Add a Policy | 546

Clone a Policy | 558

Edit a Policy | 558

Delete Policy | 558

Test a Policy | 559

Routing—Forwarding Mode | 560

About the Forwarding Mode Page | 560

CoS—Value Aliases | 562

About the Value Aliases Page | 562

Add a Code Point Alias | 563

Edit a Code Point Alias | 564

Delete Code Point Alias | 565

CoS—Forwarding Classes | 566

About the Forwarding Classes Page | 566

Add a Forwarding Class | 567

Edit a Forwarding Class | 568

Delete Forwarding Class | 568

CoS Classifiers | 570

About the Classifiers Page | 570

Add a Classifier | 572

Edit a Classifier | 573

Delete Classifier | 574

CoS—Rewrite Rules | 575

About the Rewrite Rules Page | 575

 xvi

Add a Rewrite Rule | 576

Edit a Rewrite Rule | 578

Delete Rewrite Rule | 578

CoS—Schedulers | 580

About the Schedulers Page | 580

Add a Scheduler | 581

Edit a Scheduler | 583

Delete Scheduler | 584

CoS—Scheduler Maps | 585

About the Scheduler Maps Page | 585

Add a Scheduler Map | 586

Edit a Scheduler Map | 587

Delete Scheduler Map | 588

CoS—Drop Profile | 589

About the Drop Profile Page | 589

Add a Drop Profile | 590

Edit a Drop Profile | 592

Delete Drop Profile | 592

CoS—Virtual Channel Groups | 593

About the Virtual Channel Groups Page | 593

Add a Virtual Channel | 594

Edit a Virtual Channel | 595

Delete Virtual Channel | 596

CoS—Assign To Interface | 597

About the Assign To Interface Page | 597

Edit a Port | 599

 xvii

Add a Logical Interface | 599

Edit a Logical Interface | 601

Delete Logical Interface | 602

Application QoS | 603

About the Application QoS Page | 603

Add an Application QoS Profile | 606

Edit an Application QoS Profile | 608

Clone an Application QoS Profile | 608

Delete Application QoS Profile | 609

Add a Rate Limiter Profile | 609

Edit a Rate Limiter Profile | 610

Clone a Rate Limiter Profile | 611

Delete Rate Limiter Profile | 611

IPsec VPN | 613

About the IPsec VPN Page | 613

IPsec VPN Global Settings | 616

Create a Site-to-Site VPN | 619

Create a Remote Access VPN—Juniper Secure Connect | 636

Create a Remote Access VPN—NCP Exclusive Client | 654

Edit an IPsec VPN | 667

Delete an IPsec VPN | 668

Manual Key VPN | 670

About the Manual Key VPN Page | 670

Add a Manual Key VPN | 671

Edit a Manual Key VPN | 674

Delete Manual Key VPN | 675

 xviii

Dynamic VPN | 676

About the Dynamic VPN Page | 676

Global Settings | 678

IPsec Template | 680

Add a Dynamic VPN | 681

Edit a Dynamic VPN | 682

Delete Dynamic VPN | 683

7 Security Policies and Objects

Security Policies | 685

About the Security Policies Page | 685

Global Options | 690

Add a Rule | 693

Clone a Rule | 709

Edit a Rule | 710

Delete Rules | 710

Zones/Screens | 711

About the Zones/Screens Page | 711

Add a Zone | 713

Edit a Zone | 716

Delete Zone | 716

Add a Screen | 716

Edit a Screen | 727

Delete Screen | 728

Zone Addresses | 729

About the Zone Addresses Page | 729

Add Zone Addresses | 731

 xix

Clone Zone Addresses | 733

Edit Zone Addresses | 734

Delete Zone Addresses | 734

Search Text in a Zone Addresses Table | 734

Global Addresses | 736

About the Global Addresses Page | 736

Add an Address Book | 737

Edit an Address Book | 741

Delete Address Book | 741

Services | 742

About the Services Page | 742

Add a Custom Application | 744

Edit a Custom Application | 747

Delete Custom Application | 747

Add an Application Group | 748

Edit an Application Group | 749

Delete Application Group | 750

Dynamic Applications | 751

About the Dynamic Applications Page | 751

Global Settings | 754

Add Application Signatures | 757

Clone Application Signatures | 762

Add Application Signatures Group | 763

Edit Application Signatures | 764

Delete Application Signatures | 764

Search Text in an Application Signatures Table | 765

 xx

Application Tracking | 766

About the Application Tracking Page | 766

Schedules | 768

About the Schedules Page | 768

Add a Schedule | 770

Clone a Schedule | 772

Edit a Schedule | 772

Delete Schedule | 773

Search Text in Schedules Table | 773

Proxy Profiles | 774

About the Proxy Profiles Page | 774

Add a Proxy Profile | 776

Edit a Proxy Profile | 777

Delete Proxy Profile | 777

8 Security Services
UTM Default Configuration | 780

About the Default Configuration Page | 780

Edit a Default Configuration | 782

Delete Default Configuration | 782

UTM Antivirus Profiles | 784

About the Antivirus Profiles Page | 784

Add an Antivirus Profile | 786

Clone an Antivirus Profile | 792

Edit an Antivirus Profile | 792

Delete Antivirus Profile | 793

UTM Web Filtering Profiles | 794

About the Web Filtering Profiles Page | 794

 xxi

Add a Web Filtering Profile | 796

Clone a Web Filtering Profile | 802

Edit a Web Filtering Profile | 803

Delete Web Filtering Profile | 804

UTM Antispam Profiles | 805

About the Antispam Profiles Page | 805

Add an Antispam Profile | 807

Clone an Antispam Profile | 808

Edit an Antispam Profile | 809

Delete Antispam Profile | 810

UTM Content Filtering Profiles | 811

About the Content Filtering Profiles Page | 811

Add a Content Filtering Profile | 813

Clone a Content Filtering Profile | 817

Edit a Content Filtering Profile | 818

Delete Content Filtering Profile | 819

UTM Custom Objects | 820

About the Custom Objects Page | 820

Add a MIME Pattern List | 823

Add a File Extension List | 825

Add a Protocol Command List | 825

Add a URL Pattern List | 826

Add a URL Category List | 827

Add a Custom Message List | 829

Clone Custom Objects | 830

Edit Custom Objects | 830

 xxii

Delete Custom Objects | 831

UTM Policies | 833

About the UTM Policies Page | 833

Add a UTM Policy | 835

Clone a UTM Policy | 838

Edit a UTM Policy | 839

Delete UTM Policy | 839

IPS Policies | 841

About the IPS Policies Page | 841

Import IPS Predefined Policies | 843

Add an IPS Policy | 844

Clone an IPS Policy | 844

Edit an IPS Policy | 845

Delete an IPS Policy | 846

Add Rules to an IPS Policy | 846

Edit an IPS Policy Rule | 856

Delete IPS Policy Rule | 857

IPS Sensor | 858

About the Sensor Page | 858

ALG | 866

About the ALG Page | 866

Advanced Threat Prevention | 877

About the Advanced Threat Prevention Page | 877

Add a Threat Prevention Policy | 879

Edit a Threat Prevention Policy | 881

Delete Threat Prevention Policy | 881

 xxiii

SSL Initiation Profiles | 882

About the SSL Initiation Profile Page | 882

Add an SSL Initiation Profile | 884

Edit an SSL Initiation Profile | 887

Delete SSL Initiation Profile | 888

SSL Proxy Profiles | 889

About the SSL Proxy Page | 889

Add an SSL Proxy Profile | 892

Clone an SSL Proxy Profile | 898

Edit an SSL Proxy Profile | 899

Delete SSL Proxy Profile | 899

Firewall Authentication—Access Profile | 901

About the Access Profile Page | 901

Add an Access Profile | 903

Edit an Access Profile | 908

Delete an Access Profile | 909

Firewall Authentication—Address Pools | 910

About the Address Pools Page | 910

Add an Address Pool | 912

Edit an Address Pool | 913

Delete Address Pool | 914

Search for Text in an Address Pools Table | 914

Firewall Authentication Settings | 916

About the Authentication Settings Page | 916

Firewall Authentication—UAC Settings | 919

About the UAC Settings Page | 919

Firewall Authentication—Active Directory | 923

 xxiv

About the Active Directory Page | 923

Firewall Authentication—Local Authentication | 929

About the Local Authentication Page | 929

Add a Local Auth Entry | 930

Delete a Local Auth Entry | 931

Firewall Authentication—Authentication Priority | 932

About the Authentication Priority Page | 932

Firewall Authentication—JIMS | 934

About the Juniper Identity Management Service Page | 934

Add a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile | 935

Edit a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile | 939

Delete a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile | 940

ICAP Redirect | 941

About the ICAP Redirect Profile Page | 941

Add an ICAP Redirect Profile | 943

Edit an ICAP Redirect Profile | 946

Delete ICAP Redirect Profile | 946

 xxv

About This Guide

Use this guide to understand the Junos Web Device Manager, its capabilities, and features.
1 PART

Juniper Web Device Manager

Getting Started | 2
 2

CHAPTER 1

Getting Started

IN THIS CHAPTER

Juniper Web Device Manager Overview | 2

Access the J-Web User Interface | 3

The J-Web Setup Wizard | 8

Explore J-Web | 40

Juniper Web Device Manager Overview

IN THIS SECTION

What is J-Web? | 2

Benefits of J-Web | 3

What is J-Web?
Juniper Networks SRX Series Services Gateways are shipped with the Juniper Networks Junos operating
system (Junos OS) preinstalled.

Junos OS has the following primary user interfaces:

• Juniper Web Device Manager (J-Web) GUI

• Junos OS CLI

The J-Web interface allows you to monitor, configure, troubleshoot, and manage your device by means
of a Web browser enabled with HTTP over Secure Sockets Layer (HTTPS) by default.
 3

Benefits of J-Web
• Provides a simple user interface that enables new users to quickly become proficient.

• Enables effective threat management while producing detailed data access and user activity reports.
An action-oriented design enables the network administrator to detect threats across the network as
they occur, quickly block the traffic going to or coming from a specific region, and apply immediate
remedial action with a single click.

• Enables administrators to assess the effectiveness of each firewall rule and quickly identify the
unused rules, which results in better management of the firewall environment.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Access the J-Web User Interface | 3

Explore J-Web | 40

Access the J-Web User Interface

IN THIS SECTION

Prerequisites for Using J-Web | 3

Log in to J-Web | 4

Prerequisites for Using J-Web

To access the J-Web interface for all SRX Series devices, your management device requires the following
software:

• Supported browsers—Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome, and Microsoft Internet Explorer.

NOTE: By default, you establish a J-Web session through an HTTPS-enabled Web browser.

• Language support— English-version browsers.

 4

Log in to J-Web

NOTE: This document assumes that you are accessing the device to launch J-Web for the first
time using a factory default configuration. If your SRX Series device is already configured with a
management IP address, you simply point your browser to the device's management address to
access J-Web.

The factory default settings vary between SRX Series devices. In addition, some SRX Series devices have
interface while others use a revenue (network interface) port for Ethernet based management. When
running a factory default configuration SRX 300 and 500 Series devices typically provide DCHP services
on specific network interface ports that are enabled for host management access.

On SRX Series devices with a dedicated management interface, DHCP services may or may not be
present in the factory default. Some devices provide DHCP server functions on the dedicated
management interface (fxp0). When using a device that does not offer DHCP services, for example an
SRX5400, you must ensure the management device has a compatible IP address. This address can be
manually assigned or be allocated by an external DHCP server on the management network.

Table 1 on page 4 provides the factory defaults relating to J-Web access for SRX Series devices. If
your SRX Series device is not listed, refer to the corresponding hardware guide for details on the factory
defaults.

Table 1: SRX Series Device Factory Defaults Relating to J-Web Access

SRX Series Device Management DHCP Server Ports DHCP Subnet J-Web Server IP
Interface

SRX300, SRX320 ge-0/0/1 through ge-0/0/1 through 192.168.1.0/24 192.168.1.1

ge-0/0/6 ge-0/0/6

SRX340, SRX345 MGMT/fxp0 fxp0 192.168.1.0/24 192.168.1.1

ge-0/0/1 through 192.168.2.0/24 192.168.2.1

ge-0/0/14

SRX380 MGMT/fxp0 fxp0 192.168.1.0/24 192.168.1.1

ge-0/0/1 through 192.168.2.0/24 192.168.2.1

ge-0/0/18
 5

Table 1: SRX Series Device Factory Defaults Relating to J-Web Access (Continued)

SRX Series Device Management DHCP Server Ports DHCP Subnet J-Web Server IP
Interface

SRX550 HM ge-0/0/1 through ge-0/0/1 through 192.168.1.0/24 192.168.1.1

ge-0/0/5 ge-0/0/5 through through
192.168.5.0/24 192.168.5.1

SRX1500 MGMT/fxp0 ge-0/0/1 192.168.2.0/24 192.168.2.1

SRX4100, SRX4200 MGMT/fxp0 NA NA 192.168.1.1

SRX4600 MGMT/fxp0 xe-1/1/1 NA (no DHCP 192.168.1.1

address pool in the
default
configuration)

SRX5400, MGMT/fxp0 NA NA 192.168.1.1

SRX5600, SRX5800

vSRX fxp0 NA NA NA

To log into the J-Web interface on a new device:

1. Connect the appropriate Ethernet network port on your device to the Ethernet port on the
management device (laptop or PC), using an RJ-45 cable. See Table 1 on page 4.
2. If you are using an SRX Series device that provides DHCP services for the management device,
confirm that the management device successfully acquires an IP address from the SRX Series device.
When using an SRX Series device that does not provide DHCP services for the management device,
you must manually configure the management device with a compatible IP address. See Table 1 on
page 4.
3. Open a browser and enter https://<IP address> in the address bar.
Where, <IP address> is the IP address of the SRX Series device.

NOTE: In a factory default configuration, a self-signed certificate is used to support the

HTTPS connection. You can safely accept the security exception to perform initial
configuration.
 6

As the device is running a factory default configuration, the J-Web Setup Wizard screen opens. See
Figure 1 on page 6.

Figure 1: J-Web Setup Wizard Page

Two examples are given to better illustrate the use of the information in Table 1 on page 4:

a. You have an SRX380 device:

i. You connect your management PC, which is configured for DHCP address assignment, to
the fxp0 port, or to port ge-0/0/1 through ge-0/0/18.

ii. If connected to the fxp0 port, you access J-Web at https://192.168.1.1.

iii. If connected to ge-0/0/1 through ge-0/0/18, you access J-Web at https://192.168.2.1.

b. You have an SRX5400 device:

i. You connect your management PC, which is statically configured with an IP address from
192.168.1.0/24 subnet, to the fxp0 port.

NOTE: The static IP address assignment cannot use 192.168.1.1 for fxp0 on the
management subnet as the SRX Series device uses this IP address.

ii. You access J-Web at https://192.168.1.1.

 7

After a successful user login, J-Web opens the Basic settings page.
4. Optional. If you do not want to perform the initial configuration, then:

a. Click Skip Setup.

The J-Web Device Password screen appears. See Figure 2 on page 7.

Figure 2: Device Password

b. Enter the root password.

c. Click OK.

The password is committed to the device and the J-Web login page appears.

d. Enter the username and password again and click Log In.

The J-Web application window appears.

NOTE: You can choose Device Administration > Reset Configuration through the J-Web
menu to reset and reconfigure the SRX Series device.

Congratulations! Now that you have access to the J-Web interface, you are ready to use J-Web to
configure, manage, and monitor your SRX device.
 8

• Get a quick overview of the J-Web user interface: "Explore J-Web" on page 40

• Use the setup wizard for initial configuration: "The J-Web Setup Wizard" on page 8

• Access the device dashboard: "Dashboard Overview" on page 54

• Monitor device traffic: "Monitor Traffic Map" on page 97

• Configure your device: "Configure Basic Settings" on page 133

• Watch a Learning Bytes video showing J-Web usage on a vSRX: SRX J-Web Access

The J-Web Setup Wizard

IN THIS SECTION

Configure SRX Devices Using the J-Web Setup Wizard | 8

Example: J-Web Wizard for Standalone Mode | 10

J-Web Setup Wizard Parameters | 22

Configure SRX Devices Using the J-Web Setup Wizard

Using the Setup wizard, you can perform step-by-step configuration of a services gateway that can
securely pass traffic.

For information on how to start and access the J-Web user interface, see "Access the J-Web User
Interface" on page 3.

You can choose one of the following setup modes to configure the services gateway:

• Standalone mode—Configure your SRX Series device to operate in a standalone mode. In this mode,
you can configure basic settings such as device credentials, time, management interface, zones and
interfaces, and DNS servers and default gateways.

• Cluster (HA) mode—Configure your SRX Series device to operate in a cluster (HA) mode. In the
cluster mode, a pair of devices are connected together and configured to operate like a single node,
providing device, interface, and service level redundancy.
 9

NOTE: You cannot configure Standalone or Passive mode when your device is in the HA
mode.

• Passive (Tap) mode—Configure your SRX Series device to operate in a TAP mode. TAP mode allows
you to passively monitor traffic flows across a network. If IPS is enabled, then the TAP mode inspects
the incoming and outgoing traffic to detect the number of threats.

NOTE: SRX5000 line of devices, SRX4600, and vSRX devices do not support the passive
mode configuration.

To help guide you through the process, the wizard:

• Determines which configuration tasks to present to you based on your selections.

• Flags any missing required configuration when you attempt to leave a page.

To configure SRX Series devices using the J-Web Setup wizard:

1. Select the configuration mode that you want to setup and click Start.

The Setup Wizard page appears.

2. For standalone and passive (Tap) modes, complete the configuration according to the guidelines
provided in Table 3 on page 22.

If you select Cluster (HA) Mode, for the configuration information see "Configure Cluster (HA) Setup"
on page 152.

NOTE: The root password is mandatory in the setup wizard. All other options are optional. In
the passive mode, configuration of the management interface, Tap interface, and services are
mandatory.

3. Review the configuration details. If you want to change the configuration, click Edit Configuration,
else click Finish.

Wait till the configuration is committed. A successful message is displayed once the entire
configuration is committed to the device.

NOTE:
 10

• If the commit fails, J-Web displays you the error message received from CLI and you
remain on the wizard’s last page. Check over your configuration and make changes as
necessary so that the commit succeeds.

• For SRX300 line of devices and SRX550M devices in passive mode, an additional message
is displayed about the device reboot if you have enabled Juniper ATP Cloud or Security
Intelligence services. For other SRX devices, the device will not reboot.

4. Read if any instructions are available and then click Open J-Web Login Page.

The J-Web Login page appears.

5. Enter the root username and password and click Log In.

Launch Pad screen appears until the J-Web UI is loaded. See "J-Web: A First Look" on page 41.

Example: J-Web Wizard for Standalone Mode

In this section, we'll show you a typical J-Web setup wizard workflow for standalone mode operation.
The J-Web interface is updated and modified over time. The below example is representative of the
typical workflow. This specific example is based on the Junos 21.3R1 release.

Table 2 on page 10 provide details on the configuration parameters used for initial setup.

Table 2: Standalone Setup Wizard Parameters

Configuration Parameter Example Value

Root Password "Sample_psswd_for_doc-only!"

Hostname SRX-300

Management interface ge-0/0/1

Management IP and CIDR 10.102.70.79/24

Access Protocols HTTPS, SSH, Ping

Static route for management 10.0.0.0/8, next hop 10.102.70.254

 11

Table 2: Standalone Setup Wizard Parameters (Continued)

Configuration Parameter Example Value

NTP and DNS • NTP: north-america.pool.ntp.org

• DNS: 8.8.8.8 and 8.8.4.4

• Time zone: PST/Los Angeles

Remote access SSH with root login allowed

Non root user (Admin/super user account) user "lab", password "Sample_psswd_for_doc-only!"

Security Policy Default

Refer to "Access the J-Web User Interface" on page 3 for information on how to access the J-Web
interface. This example is based on an SRX300. Based on the information in Table 1 on page 4, the
management device is set for DHCP is and is attached to the ge-0/0/1 interface. When running a
factory default configuration, the ge-0/0/1 interface is configured as a DCHP server and assigns an
address to the PC from the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet. To access J-Web in this scenario, you point the
browser to https://192.168.1.1.
 12

1. We begin at the J-Web setup wizard screen. You click on the option for Standalone Mode and then
on the Start button.

Figure 3: J-Web Setup Wizard Modes

2. Configure the device name, root user, and non-root (administrator) user login information on the
Device Credentials page.
 13

NOTE: Enable SSH for root user.

Figure 4: J-Web Setup Wizard Device Credentials

3. Click Next.

The Time page opens.

 14

4. Configure the timezone, time source, and in the case of NTP, the desired server(s).

Figure 5: J-Web Setup Wizard Time Servers

5. Click Next.

The Management Interface page opens.

6. Again, this setup example is based on a SRX 300 series device. This SRX device does not have a
dedicated management interface. In many cases, their role in branch offices results in their being
managed remotely through the WAN interface (ge-0/0/0). On larger SRX devices, a dedicated
management interface (fxp0) is provided for attachment to an out-of-band (OOB) management
 15

network. In this example, you configure the ge-0/0/1 interface as a dedicated OOB management
interface.

Figure 6: J-Web Setup Wizard Management Interface

 16

Before continuing, you click on the Access Protocols tab to confirm that HTTPS, SSH, and Ping
(ICMP echo) are permitted on the management interface.

Figure 7: J-Web Setup Wizard Access Protocols

7. Click Next.

The Zones & Interfaces page opens.

 17

8. In this example you maintain the factory default security policy. Recall, you can always use J-Web
to later modify all aspects of the configuration, to include security, after you complete the initial
setup.

Figure 8: J-Web Setup Wizard Security Zones

9. Click Next.

The DNS Servers & Default Gateways page opens.

 18

10. Configure a public DNS server IP and leave the default gateway fields blank. If desired, you can add
default routes to access other networks that should be reachable over the management interface.

Figure 9: J-Web Setup Wizard DNS and Default Gateways

11. Click Next.

 19

The Setup Wizard opens. This page summarizes your configuration. If desired, you use the Edit
Configuration option to make changes.

Figure 10: J-Web Setup Wizard Summary

 20

12. When satisfied with the configuration, click on Finish. The Setup Wizard displays a status page to
indicate the initial configuration is being pushed to the SRX device.

Figure 11: J-Web Setup Wizard Configuration Push

 21

In a few moments, the Setup Successful page is displayed. Congratulations! Your SRX device is
remotely accessible and is ready for ongoing management using the J-Web interface.

Figure 12: J-Web Setup Wizard Successful

NOTE: Recall that in this SRX-300 based example the management device is directly
connected to the SRX on the ge-0/0/1 port. You performed initial configuration using a
192.168.1.0/24 address that was assigned by the SRX Series device using DHCP.
Using the setup wizard, you configured the ge-0/0/1 interface as a dedicated management
interface and assigned a static IP address of 10.102.70.89/24. As a result, the ge-0/0/1
interface no longer functions as a DHCP server.

Once the new configuration is activated, you must ensure the management device is
configured with a compatible IP address if it remains directly connected to the ge-0/0/1
interface. You log in back into J-Web using https://10.102.70.89.

Congratulations! You have completed initial setup using J-Web. Keep going by visiting the below links:

• Get a quick overview of the J-Web user interface: "Explore J-Web" on page 40

• Access the device dashboard: "Dashboard Overview" on page 54

 22

• Monitor device traffic: "Monitor Traffic Map" on page 97

• Configure your device: "Configure Basic Settings" on page 133

• Use the Getting Started panel: Security J-Web Getting Started

J-Web Setup Wizard Parameters

This section serves as a reference for the mode specific parameters that you can configure using the J-
Web Setup Wizard. Table 3 on page 22 provide details of the parameters that can be configured in the
standalone and passive (Tap) modes. For details on parameters supported in cluster (HA) mode, see
"Configure Cluster (HA) Setup" on page 152.

Table 3: Setup Wizard Configuration

Field Action

Device Credentials

System Identity

Device name Enter a hostname.

You can use alphanumeric characters, special characters such

as the underscore (_), the hyphen (-), or the period (.); the
maximum length is 255 characters.

Root Account

Username Displays the root user.

NOTE: We recommend that you do not use root user account

as a best practice to manage your devices.

Password Enter a password.

You can use alphanumeric characters and special characters;

the minimum length is six characters.

SSH for root user Enable this option to allow the root login (to the device) using
SSH.

Admin Account
 23

Table 3: Setup Wizard Configuration (Continued)

Field Action

Username Enter the admin username to manage the device.

Password Enter the admin password.

Time Configuration

Time

Time zone Select a time zone from the list.

Time source Select either NTP server, computer time, or Manual to

configure the system time:

• NTP Server > NTP servers—Select the NTP server in the

Available column and move to the selected column using
the right arrow. Once the system is connected to the
network, the system time is synced with the NTP server
time.

In addition, to add a new NTP server, click + and enter a

hostname or IP address of the NTP server and click OK.

NOTE: If you want to add more NTP servers, go to Device

Administration > Basic Settings > Date & Time Details
through the J-Web menu.

• Computer Time > Computer time—Device automatically

synchronizes with your computer time only during the
setup.

• Manual > Date and time—Select the date and time (in
MM-DD-YYYY and HH:MM:SS 24-hour format) to
configure the system time manually.

Management Interface Configuration

 24

Table 3: Setup Wizard Configuration (Continued)

Field Action

Management Interface
NOTE: If you change the management IP address and click Next, a warning message appears on the Management
Interface page that you need to use the new management IP address to log in to J-Web because you may lose
the connectivity to J-Web.

Management interface Select an interface from the list.

If fxp0 port is your device’s management port, then the fxp0

port is displayed. You can change it as required or you can
select None and proceed to the next page.

NOTE:

• You can choose the revenue port as management port if

your device does not support the fxp0 port. Revenue
ports are all ports except fxp0 and em0.

• If you are in the Standalone mode, you can choose None

for the management interface and click Next to proceed
to the next screen.

• If you are in the Passive (Tap) mode, it is mandatory to

configure a management port. J-Web needs a
management port for viewing generated report.

IPv4
NOTE: Click email to self to get the newly configured IPv4 or IPv6 address to your inbox. This is useful if you lose
connectivity when you change the management IP address to another network.

Management address Enter a valid IPv4 address for the management interface.

NOTE: If fxp0 port is your device’s management port, then

the fxp0 port’s default IP address is displayed. You can
change it if required.

Management subnet mask Enter a subnet mask for the IPv4 address.

If you have changed the management address, use the new IP

address to access J-Web.
 25

Table 3: Setup Wizard Configuration (Continued)

Field Action

Static route Enter an IPv4 address for the static route to route to the
other network devices.

Static route subnet mask Enter a subnet mask for the static route IPv4 address.

Next hop gateway Enter a valid IPv4 address for the next hop.

IPv6

Management access Enter a valid IPv6 address for the management interface.

Management subnet prefix Enter a subnet prefix length for the IPv6 address.

Static route Enter an IPv6 address for the static route if required to reach
the device through the management interface.

Static route subnet prefix Enter a subnet prefix length for the static route IPv6 address.

Next hop gateway Enter a valid IPv6 address for the next hop.

Access Protocols
NOTE: This option is available for all the ports except fxp0.

HTTPS This option is enabled by default.

SSH This option is enabled by default.

Ping Enable this option for ping service.

DHCP Enable this option for DHCP service.

 26

Table 3: Setup Wizard Configuration (Continued)

Field Action

NETCONF Enable this option for NETCONF service.

Zones & Interfaces

Security Policy
NOTE: This option is available only for the Standalone mode. For the Passive (Tap) mode, this option is available
under Tap Settings.

From Zone Name of the source zone. In the standalone mode, permits all
traffic from the trust zone.

To Zone Name of the destination zone. In standalone mode, permits

all traffic from the trust zone to the untrust zone.

Source Name of the source address (not the IP address) of a policy.

Destination Name of the destination address.

Application Name of a preconfigured or custom application of the policy

match.

Action Action taken when a match occurs as specified in the policy.

Zones
—Displays the available trust and untrust zones configuration.

Trust Zone Interfaces

NOTE: This option is available only for the Standalone mode.

Add Trust Zone Interface Click + to add trust zone interface. For more information on
the fields, see Table 4 on page 33.
 27

Table 3: Setup Wizard Configuration (Continued)

Field Action

Edit Trust Zone Interface Select an interface and click the pencil icon at the right
corner of the table to modify the configuration.

Delete Trust Zone Interface Select an interface and click the delete icon at the top right
corner of the table.

A confirmation window appears. Click Yes to delete the

selected interface or click No to discard.

Search Trust Zone Interface Click the search icon at the right corner of the table to
quickly locate a zone or an interface.

Detailed View Trust Zone Interface Hover over the interface name and click the Detailed View
icon to view the zone and interface details.

Trust Zone Interfaces—Zone Level Settings

Zone name View the trust zone name populated from your device factory
default settings.

NOTE: For standalone mode, trust and untrust zones are

created by default even if these zones are not available in the
factory default settings.

Description Enter the description for trust zone.

System services Enable this option for the types of traffic that can reach the
device on a particular interface.

By default, this option is enabled. You can disable if required.

Protocols Enable this option to configure the device to perform stateful

network traffic filtering on network packets using network
traffic protocols (for example, TCP and UDP).

By default, this option is enabled. You can disable if required.

 28

Table 3: Setup Wizard Configuration (Continued)

Field Action

Application tracking Enable this option to collect byte, packet, and duration
statistics for application flows in the specified zone.

Source identity log Enable this option for the device to log the user identity
information based on the source zone configured in the
security policy.

Untrust Zone Interfaces

Add Untrust Zone Interface Click + to add untrust zone interface. For more information
on the fields, see Table 5 on page 39.

Edit Untrust Zone Interface Select an interface and click the pencil icon at the right
corner of the table to modify the configuration.

Delete Untrust Zone Interface Select an interface and click the delete icon at the top right
corner of the table.

A confirmation window appears. Click Yes to delete the

selected interface or click No to discard.

Search Untrust Zone Interface Click the search icon at the right corner of the table to
quickly locate a zone or an interface.

Detailed View Untrust Zone Interface Hover over the interface name and click the Detailed View
icon to view the zone and interface details.

Untrust Zone Interfaces—Zone Level Settings

Zone name View the untrust zone name populated from your device
factory default settings.

NOTE: For standalone mode, trust and untrust zones are

created by default even if these zones are not available in the
factory default settings.
 29

Table 3: Setup Wizard Configuration (Continued)

Field Action

Description Enter the description for untrust zone.

Application tracking Enable this option to collect byte, packet, and duration
statistics for application flows in the specified zone.

Source identity log Enable this option for the device to log the user identity
information based on the source zone configured in the
security policy.

DNS Servers & Default Gateways

DNS Servers

DNS server 1 Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the primary DNS.

DNS server 2 Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the secondary DNS.

Default Gateway

Default gateway (IPv4) Enter the IPv4 address of the next possible destination for
any network.

Default gateway (IPv6) Enter the IPv6 address of the next possible destination for
any network.

Tap Settings
NOTE: This option is available only for the Passive (Tap) mode.

Tap Settings

Tap interface Select the interface from the list.

 30

Table 3: Setup Wizard Configuration (Continued)

Field Action

IP-IP tunnel inspection Enable this option for the SRX Series device to inspect pass
through traffic over an IP-IP tunnel.

GRE tunnel inspection Enable this option for the SRX Series device to inspect pass
through traffic over a GRE tunnel.

Security Policy & Advanced Services

NOTE: Your device must have internet connectivity to use IPS, Web filtering, Juniper ATP Cloud, and Security
threat intelligence services.

From Zone Name of the source zone. In the Tap mode, permits all traffic
from the tap zone.

To Zone Name of the destination zone. In the Tap mode, permits all
traffic from the TAP zone to the TAP zone.

Source Name of the source address (not the IP address) of a policy.

Destination Name of the destination address.

Application Name of a preconfigured or custom application of the policy

match.

Action Action taken when a match occurs as specified in the policy.

UTM

UTM Enable this option for configuring UTM services.

 31

Table 3: Setup Wizard Configuration (Continued)

Field Action

License Enter UTM license key and click Install License to add a new
license.

NOTE:

• Use a blank line to separate multiple license keys.

• To use UTM services, your device must have internet

connectivity from a revenue interface.

UTM type Select an option to configure UTM features:

• Web Filtering

• Antivirus

• Antispam

Web filtering type Select an option:

• Enhanced—Specifies that the Juniper Enhanced Web

filtering intercepts the HTTP and the HTTPS requests and
sends the HTTP URL or the HTTPS source IP to the
Websense ThreatSeeker Cloud (TSC).

• Local—Specifies the local profile type.

IPS

IPS Enable this option to install the IPS signatures.

License Enter the license key and click Install License to add a new
license.

NOTE: The installation process may take few minutes.

 32

Table 3: Setup Wizard Configuration (Continued)

Field Action

IPS signature Click Browse to navigate to the IPS signature package folder
and select it. Click Install to install the selected IPS signature
package.

NOTE: You can download the IPS signature offline package at

https://support.juniper.net/support/downloads/.

ATP Cloud

ATP Cloud Enable this option to use Juniper ATP Cloud services.

NOTE: After the Juniper ATP Cloud configuration is pushed,

only the SRX300 line of devices and SRX550M devices are
rebooted. Your device must have internet connectivity to
enable Juniper ATP Cloud enrollment process through J-Web.

Security Intelligence

Security intelligence Enable this option to use Security intelligence services.

NOTE: After the Security Intelligence configuration is pushed,

only the SRX300 line of devices and SRX550M devices are
rebooted. Your device must have internet connectivity to
enable Juniper ATP Cloud enrollment process through J-Web.

User Firewall

User Firewall Enable this option to use user firewall services.

Domain name Enter a domain name for Active Directory.

Domain controller Enter domain controller IP address.

Username Enter a username for administrator privilege.

Password Enter a password for administrator privilege.

 33

Table 4: Add Trust Zone

Field Action

General

Type (family) • Select Switching. Fields for switching interface are:

NOTE: This option will be available for only SRX300 line of devices,
SRX550M, and SRX1500 devices. For SRX5000 line of devices,
SRX4100, SRX4200, SRX4600, and vSRX devices, the Type (family)
field is not available.

• IRB interface Unit—Enter the IRB unit.

• Description—Enter the description for the interface.

• Select Routing. Fields for routing interface are:

For SRX5000 line of devices, SRX4100, SRX4200, SRX4600, and

vSRX devices, the Type (family) field is not available.

• Interface—Select an option from list.

• Interface unit—Enter the Inet unit.

NOTE: VLAN tagging is enabled automatically if the interface

unit is higher than zero.

• Description—Enter the description for the interface.

• VLAN ID—Enter the VLAN ID.

NOTE: VLAN ID is mandatory if the interface unit is higher than

zero.

Interfaces Select an interface from the Available column and move it to the
Selected column.

NOTE: This option is available only for the Switching family type.

VLAN
NOTE: This option is available only for the Switching family type.

Name Enter a unique name for the VLAN.

 34

Table 4: Add Trust Zone (Continued)

Field Action

VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID.

IPv4

IPv4 address Enter a valid IPv4 address for the switching or the routing interface.

Subnet mask Enter a subnet mask for the IPv4 address.

IPv6

IPv6 address Enter a valid IPv6 address for the switching or the routing interface.

Subnet prefix Enter a subnet prefix for the IPv6 address.

DHCP Local Server

DHCP local server Enable this option to configure the switch to function as an extended
DHCP local server.

Pool name Enter the DHCP pool name.

Pool start address Enter the starting IPv4 address of the DHCP server pool address range.
This address must be within the IPv4 network.

Pool end address Enter the ending IPv4 address of the DHCP server pool address range.
This address must be within the IPv4 network.

NOTE: This address must be greater than the address specified in Pool
start address.

Propagate settings from Select an option from the list. Propagation of TCP/IP settings (such as,
DNS and gateway address) received on the device interface acting as
DHCP client.
 35

Table 4: Add Trust Zone (Continued)

Field Action

Services & Protocols

 36

Table 4: Add Trust Zone (Continued)

Field Action

System Services Select system services from the list in the Available column and then
click the right arrow to move it to the Selected column.

The available options are:

• all—Specify all system services.

• any-service—Specify services on entire port range.

• appqoe—Specify the APPQOE active probe service.

• bootp—Specify the Bootp and dhcp relay agent service.

• dhcp—Specify the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.

• dhcpv6—Enable Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPV6.

• dns—Specify the DNS service.

• finger—Specify the finger service.

• ftp—Specify the FTP protocol.

• http—Specify the Web management using HTTP.

• https—Specify the Web management using HTTP secured by SSL.

• ident-reset—Specify the send back TCP RST IDENT request for port
113.

• ike—Specify the Internet key exchange.

• lsping—Specify the Label Switched Path ping service.

• netconf—Specify the NETCONF Service.

• ntp—Specify the network time protocol.

• ping—Specify the internet control message protocol.

• r2cp—Enable Radio-Router Control Protocol.

• reverse-ssh—Specify the reverse SSH Service.

 37

Table 4: Add Trust Zone (Continued)

Field Action

• reverse-telnet—Specify the reverse telnet Service.

• rlogin—Specify the Rlogin service

• rpm—Specify the Real-time performance monitoring.

• rsh—Specify the Rsh service.

• snmp—Specify the Simple Network Management Protocol.

• snmp-trap—Specify the Simple Network Management Protocol trap.

• ssh—Specify the SSH service.

• tcp—encap-Specify the TCP encapsulation service.

• telnet—Specify the Telnet service.

• tftp—Specify the TFTP

• traceroute—Specify the traceroute service.

• webapi-clear-text—Specify the Webapi service using http.

• webapi-ssl—Specify the Webapi service using HTTP secured by SSL.

• xnm-clear-text—Specify the JUNOScript API for unencrypted traffic

over TCP.

• xnm-ssl—Specify the JUNOScript API Service over SSL.

 38

Table 4: Add Trust Zone (Continued)

Field Action

Protocols Select protocols from the list in the Available column and then click the
right arrow to move it to the Selected column.

The available options are:

• all—Specifies all protocol.

• bfd—Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.

• bgp—Border Gateway Protocol.

• dvmrp—Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.

• igmp—Internet Group Management Protocol.

• ldp—Label Distribution Protocol.

• msdp—Multicast Source Discovery Protocol.

• nhrp- Next Hop Resolution Protocol.

• ospf—Open shortest path first.

• ospf3—Open shortest path first version 3.

• pgm—Pragmatic General Multicast.

• pim—Protocol Independent Multicast.

• rip—Routing Information Protocol.

• ripng—Routing Information Protocol next generation.

• router-discovery—Router Discovery.

• rsvp—Resource Reservation Protocol.

• sap—Session Announcement Protocol.

• vrrp—Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.

 39

Table 5: Add Untrust Zone

Field Action

General

Interface Select an interface from the list.

Interface unit Enter the interface unit value.

VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID.

NOTE: VLAN ID is mandatory if the interface unit is

higher than zero.

Description Enter the description for the interface.

Address Mode Select an address mode for the interface. The available
options are DHCP Client, PPPoE (PAP), PPPoE (CHAP)
and Static IP.

NOTE: PPPoE (PAP) and PPPoE (CHAP) are not

supported for SRX5000 line of devices and if any of
the devices are in passive mode.

Username Enter a username for PPPoE (PAP) or PPPoE (CHAP)

authentication.

Password Enter a password for PPPoE (PAP) or PPPoE (CHAP)

authentication.

IPv4
NOTE: This option is available only for the Static IP address mode.

IPv4 Address Enter a valid IPv4 address for the interface.

Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask for the IPv4 address.

 40

Table 5: Add Untrust Zone (Continued)

Field Action

IPv6
NOTE: This option is available only for the Static IP address mode.

IPv6 Address Enter a valid IPv6 address for the interface.

Subnet Prefix Enter a subnet prefix for the IPv6 address.

Services & Protocols

System Services Select system services from the list in the Available
column and then click the right arrow to move it to the
Selected column.

Protocols Select protocols from the list in the Available column

and then click the right arrow to move it to the
Selected column.

SEE ALSO

Explore J-Web | 40

Explore J-Web

IN THIS SECTION

J-Web: A First Look | 41

J-Web Launch Pad | 41

J-Web Top Pane | 42

J-Web Side Pane | 44

 41

J-Web Main Pane | 46

J-Web Workflow Wizards | 49

Summary | 49

J-Web: A First Look

Each page of the J-Web interface is divided into the following panes (see Figure 13 on page 41):

• Launch pad—Displays high level details of the system identification, active users, and interface status.
See Figure 14 on page 42.

• Top pane—Displays identifying information and links.

• Side pane—Displays subtasks of the Dashboard, Monitor, Device Administration, Network, Security
Policies and Objects, and Security Services tasks currently displayed in the main pane. Click an item
to access it in the main pane.

• Main pane—Location where you monitor, configure, view or generate reports, and administrate the
Juniper Networks device by entering information in text boxes, making selections, and clicking
buttons.

Figure 13: J-Web First Look

J-Web Launch Pad

After you successfully login to J-Web GUI, J-Web launch pad appears.

The launch pad provides a quick view of:

• Device information such as model number, serial number, hostname, software version, system time,
and system up time.

• Number of active users using the device.

 42

• State of the device physical interfaces: Up or Down.

The launch pad closes automatically once the application is loaded in the background. You do not have
the option to manually close or refresh the launch pad.

NOTE:

• Launch pad is not displayed in the factory default settings.

• Launch pad is displayed for all users.

Figure 14 on page 42 shows the launch pad screen and its elements.

Figure 14: J-Web launch Pad Screen

J-Web Top Pane

For a more personal, helpful, and user experience, Juniper Networks has provided some aids within the
J-Web GUI. Table 6 on page 43 provides the details of the J-Web top pane elements.
 43

Table 6: J-Web Top Pane Elements

Element Description

Banner Location—The gray bar at the top of the

screen.

You can access device details, feedback

button, commit options, a profile
management access menu, and a help
button.

Device details Location—To the upper right of the

banner.

Provides details of the device you have

accessed.

Feedback Button Location—To the right of the device

details.

You can provide feedback (mailto:jweb-

[email protected]) if you are having
an issue with the product.

Commit Configuration Menu Location—To the right of the Feedback

button.

Provides options to commit, compare,

confirm, discard, or commit the changes
in your preferred way.

User Functions Menu Location—To the right of the Commit

Configuration button.

A head-and-shoulders icon and a field

showing the logged in user type.
Clicking your username or the down
arrow button, logs you out of J-Web
interface.
 44

Table 6: J-Web Top Pane Elements (Continued)

Element Description

Help Button Location—To the right of the User

Functions menu.

Access to the online Help center and the

Getting Started Guide are available by
clicking the right-most icon on the
banner, shaped like a question mark. The
help center includes access to a list of
supported web browsers, user interface
assistance, as well as links to technical
support and full J-Web documentation.

Mode Location—To the right of the device

details.

Provides the setup mode details

whether your device is in the standard,
chassis cluster (HA), or passive mode.

Tenant or Logical System Username Location—To the left of the device

details.

Displays the name of the tenant user or

logical system user when root user
enters as a Tenant or a logical systems.
Click on the username and select Exit to
go back to the root user role.

J-Web Side Pane

J-Web presents you a security-focused administrator with a tabbed interface.

The following tabs across the side pane of the J-Web GUI provide workspaces in which an administrator
can perform specific tasks:

• Dashboard—The Dashboard is the main page for J-Web. You can customize the workspace in your
Dashboard by adding widgets from the carousel. The placement of, and settings within, widgets are
saved so that anything from device information to firewall event information or from top blocked
viruses to live threat maps can be unique for each user. Once you decide on the widgets that you
want to see, you can minimize the carousel to regain some screen space.
 45

NOTE: By default, the selected widgets are displayed every time you login to J-Web.

Figure 15 on page 45 shows an example of the J-Web Dashboard tab.

Figure 15: J-Web Dashboard Tab

• Monitor—The Monitor tab provides a workspace in which graphical representations of network

traffic, firewall events, live threats, and network user data are available. There is also detailed data for
alerts and alarms information. In this workspace, you can review the detailed information needed to
understand what is happening to the managed security devices and traffic in your network.

Figure 16 on page 45 shows an example of the J-Web Monitor tab.

Figure 16: J-Web Monitor Tab

 46

• Configure—The highlighted workspace in Figure 17 on page 46 is where all of the SRX Series device
configuration happens. You can configure the following features for managing your network security:

• Device Administration—Such as basic settings, user management, certificate management, license

management, security package management, ATP management, operations, software
management, configuration management, alarm management, RPM, tools, and reset
configuration.

• Network—Such as connectivity, DHCP, firewall filters, NAT, routing, Class of Services (CoS),
Application QoS, IPsec VPN, manual key VPN, and dynamic VPN.

• Security policies and objects—Such as security policies, zones/screens, zone and global addresses,
services, dynamic applications, application tracking, schedules, and proxy profiles.

• Security services—Such as UTM, IPS, ALG, ATP, SSL profiles, firewall authentication, and ICAP
redirect.

Figure 17 on page 46 shows an example of the J-Web configuration menus.

Figure 17: J-Web Configure Menus

J-Web Main Pane

The main workspace of J-Web takes up the remainder of the browser window just below the Banner
and next to the side pane. Table 7 on page 47 shows a sample of navigation, customization, and help
icons in the main pane of the J-Web GUI.
 47

Table 7: J-Web Main Pane Elements

Element Description

Breadcrumbs Location—Upper left part of main screen. Not

visible on the Dashboard.

Trace your location in the GUI. The breadcrumbs

provide a path back to one of the five tabs:
Dashboard, Monitor, Configure, Reports, and
Administration.

Info Tips Location—Various places around the GUI.

Hover your mouse over any available question

mark icon for quick pop-up guidance.

Show/Hide Columns Location—Upper right corner of some tabular

display windows such as the Address Pools tab,
Rules tab, and so on.

In tabular displays, you can choose which

columns are visible by clicking the icon and then
selecting the check boxes on the menu.

Table Search Location—Upper right corner of tabular views.

You can click the magnifying glass icon, within

large tabular views, to search for specific text
within any of the visible fields in the display.

Item Selector Search Location—Within the fields.

You can use a search text box to select items for

inclusion in a rule or policy.
 48

Table 7: J-Web Main Pane Elements (Continued)

Element Description

Advanced Search Location—Above the table grid.

The search includes the logical operators as part

of the filter string. In the search text box, when
you hover over the icon, it displays an example
filter condition. When you start entering the
search string, the icon indicates whether the filter
string is valid or not.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator

or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a
search criteria, only one character is deleted.

Filter Location—Upper right corner of tabular views.

You can click the filter icon to select any value

from a list for category and subcategory columns.
The grid is reloaded with the filtered category
and subcategory.

Success message Location—At the top of the main pane.

A message is displayed with this icon to state

that your task is successful.

Information message Location—At the top of the main pane.

A message is displayed with this icon to state you

have some pending actions, but you can continue
with the task.

Alert message Location—At the top of the main pane.

A message is displayed with this icon to state you

have some pending actions which you must
complete to proceed with the required task.
 49

Table 7: J-Web Main Pane Elements (Continued)

Element Description

Warning message Location—At the top of the main pane.

A message is displayed with this icon to state you

have some pending actions which you must
complete else you cannot proceed with the
required task.

J-Web Workflow Wizards

J-Web contains assisting workflow wizards that guide you through some of its security functions. These
include Setup wizard, Chassis Cluster wizard, PPPoE wizard, and NAT wizard. These wizards help you
with a guided setup and helps you in performing step-by-step configuration of a services gateway that
can securely pass traffic.

NOTE: PPPoE and NAT Wizards are available only in the SRX300 line of devices and SRX550M
devices.

Summary
J-Web is a GUI approach that aims to provide a graphical framework to help you visualize and manage
your SRX Series devices more easily.

SEE ALSO

Add an SRX Series Device to Juniper Security Director Cloud | 51

2 PART

Add SRX Device to Security Director

Cloud

Add an SRX Series Device to Juniper Security Director Cloud | 51

 51

Add an SRX Series Device to Juniper Security

Director Cloud

You can add your SRX Series device to Juniper Security Director Cloud from J-Web. After you add the
SRX Series device to the Juniper Security Director Cloud, you can manage your network security using
these devices.
In order for your device to be managed by Juniper Security Director Cloud, ensure the following:

• Your device must have Internet connectivity and access to the Juniper Security Director Cloud portal.

• Before adding, you must open the following ports of your device so that it communicates with
Juniper Security Director Cloud:

• TCP/443 (HTTPS) for Juniper Security Director Cloud portal and Redirect server

• TCP/7804 (NETCONF) for SRX Series device outbound access to Juniper Security Director Cloud
portal

• TCP/6514 (TLS syslog)

• TCP/53 (DNS) - (IP: 8.8.8.8)

• UDP/53 (DNS) - (IP: 8.8.4.4)

Here’s how you can add your device to Juniper Security Director Cloud from J-Web:

1. Login to J-Web.
2. Click Add Device to Juniper Security Director Cloud located on the top-right corner of the J-Web
GUI to open the Add Device to Juniper Security Director Cloud page.
3. Select your location from the list and then enter your Juniper Security Director Cloud account email
and password. Then, click Next.
4. Select your organization account name (with administrator permissions) and click Proceed.
The status progress bar is shown until your device is successfully added. During this process, your
device gets added to the Juniper Security Director Cloud and commits the received configuration
from the Cloud API.

A success message is displayed and your device is added to Juniper Security Director Cloud. The label
next to the icon changes from Add Device to Juniper Security Director Cloud to Manged by Juniper
Security Director Cloud and the changed label is grayed out.

NOTE:
 52

• When you have logged into the J-Web and remove your device from Juniper Security
Director Cloud, J-Web still displays the status as Manged by Juniper Security Director Cloud.
Log in to J-Web again to see the label changed to Add Device to Juniper Security Director
Cloud.

• If there are any network issues between the SRX Series device and Juniper Security Director
Cloud, J-Web still displays the status as Manged by Juniper Security Director Cloud.

Once added, you can see your device on the Device Management > Devices page when you log into the
Juniper Security Director Cloud portal. You can only delete your device from Juniper Security Director
Cloud and not from the J-Web GUI. To remove the device, select your device on the Devices page and
click the delete icon.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Dashboard Overview | 54
3 PART

Dashboard

J-Web Dashboard | 54
 54

CHAPTER 2

J-Web Dashboard

IN THIS CHAPTER

Dashboard Overview | 54

Dashboard Overview

IN THIS SECTION

What is J-Web Dashboard | 54

Work with Widgets | 55

What is J-Web Dashboard

The J-Web dashboard provides a unified overview of the system and network status retrieved from SRX
Series devices.

To use the dashboard at the top-level menu, select Dashboard. By default, the Dashboard page displays
all the widget thumbnails.
 55

Figure 18 on page 55 shows an example of the Dashboard page of SRX345 Services Gateway.

Figure 18: SRX345 Dashboard

Work with Widgets

Each widget pane acts as a separate frame. You can click + icon to add separate dashboard and name it
as per your ease. You can refresh the display of the Dashboard page by clicking the refresh icon at the
top right-hand corner above the widget pane.

You can choose any one of the categories to view widgets on your device:

• All Widgets—Displays all the supported widgets

• Applications—Displays only the supported application related widgets

• Devices—Displays only the supported device related widgets

• Security—Displays only the supported security related widgets

NOTE:

• Starting in Junos OS Release 21.4R1, on-box reports related widgets are removed to speed up
the J-Web UI loading process.

• The Threat Activity pane is not available on SRX5400, SRX5600, and SRX5800 devices.
 56

• For SRX Series devices configured for logical systems, the Logical System Identification and
Logical System Profile panes are displayed when you log in as a user logical system
administrator. These are the only logical system panes available in Dashboard Preferences.

• If the rescue configuration is not set, the set rescue configuration link directs you to the
Device Administration > Configuration Management > Rescue page to set the rescue
configuration.

To use a widget on the Dashboard:

1. Drag the widgets from the palette or thumbnail container to your dashboard.

When you add more widgets on the J-Web Dashboard, you can observe high CPU usage on the
Routing Engine for a short span of time on every refresh. We recommend that you use four widgets
for lower CPU consumption.

2. Mouse over the top of each widget to minimize, refresh, and close by using the respective icons.

NOTE: The dashlet data is refreshed every minute by default. You cannot manually configure
the refresh interval of the dashlet. If the data is not aged in the cache, data loads from the
cache during the dashlet refresh. If the data is aged, it is retrieved from the device during the
next refresh interval cycle.

Table 8 on page 56 provides the dashboard widgets options based on the selected device.

Table 8: Dashboard Widgets Options

Field Description

System Alarms Provides the received time, severity, description of the alarms and the action to be
taken.

System Identification Provides system details such as serial number of the software, hostname, software
version, BIOS version, system uptime, and system time.

Login Sessions Provides the user credentials, login time, idle time, and host.
 57

Table 8: Dashboard Widgets Options (Continued)

Field Description

File Usage Provides current space requirements for log, temporary, crash, and database files. Click
Maintain to download or delete some or all of these files.

NOTE: File Usage widget supports RE3 line cards for SRX5000 line of devices.

Resource Utilization Provides a graphical representation of the CPU, memory, and storage used for both the
data and the control planes. The CPU control also shows the load average value for 1
minute when you mouse over CPU Control.

NOTE: Resource Utilization widget supports RE3 line cards for SRX5000 line of
devices.

Signal Strength Displays the signal strength of the device.

Interface: Most Displays top 5 interfaces based on the CLI response; top-count will increase to 10.
Dropped Packets

Security Resources Provides the maximum, configured, and activated number of sessions, firewall/VPN
policies, and IPsec VPNs.

Storage Usage Displays used and available storage and usage information about other system
components.

Logical System Provides the logical system name, the security profile assigned to the logical system, the
Identification software version, and the system time.

Logical System Profile Displays the types of resources that are allocated to the user logical system, the
number of resources used and reserved, and the maximum number of resources
allowed.

NAT - Top Source Displays the top 10 source translation hits.

Translation Hits
Click More Details to view source NAT logs at Monitor > Logs > All Events.
 58

Table 8: Dashboard Widgets Options (Continued)

Field Description

NAT - Top Destination Displays the top 10 destination translation hits.

Translation Hits
Click More Details to view destination NAT logs at Monitor > Logs > All Events.

IPsec VPNs (IKE Peers) Displays status count of IPsec VPN topologies, such as ADVPN Hub and Spoke, Remote
Access, and Site-to-Site/Hub & Spoke.

Click More Details to redirect to the Monitor > Network > IPsec VPN page.

VPN Monitoring Displays the total number of IPsec VPNs (Total VPNs for All VPNs and total remote
users for Remote Access). All VPNs option includes Site to Site, Hub & Spoke, ADVPN
Hub, and ADVPN spoke. Remote Access includes Juniper Secure Connect and NCP
Exclusive Entry Client.

Widget pane also displays the VPNs status with a color code:

• Up (Green)—IKE and IPsec SA are up.

• Down (Red)—IKE and IPsec are not operationally up.

• Partially Up (Amber)—Either IKE or IPsec SA is up or one or few traffic selectors are

up.

Click More Details available on the widget pane to redirect to the Monitor > Network >
IPsec VPN page.

On the widget pane, for the All VPNs option, each configured IPsec VPN is represented
as an individual tunnel icon or box.

On the widget pane, for the Remote Access option, each IKE SAs corresponding to the
configured IPsec VPN is represented as an individual tunnel icon or box. If there are no
IKE SAs for the VPN, then a single box is shown as down.

When you hover over the box, widget displays VPN tunnel details such as Remote
gateway, VPN name, IKE status, IPsec status, local IP, and remote IP. Click More Details
to redirect to the Monitor > Network > IPsec VPN page with the VPN name filtered.
4 PART

Monitor

Network | 60

Logs | 67

Maps and Charts | 97

Statistics | 112

Reports | 118
 60

CHAPTER 3

Network

IN THIS CHAPTER

Monitor Interfaces | 60

Monitor DHCP Server Bindings | 61

Monitor IPsec VPN | 63

Monitor Interfaces

You are here: Monitor > Network > Interfaces.

Use this page to view general information about all physical and logical interfaces for a device.

Table 9 on page 60 describes the fields on the Interfaces page.

Table 9: Fields on the Interfaces Page

Field Description

Show Interfaces Select All or any particular slot to show the interface
details.

View Details Displays extensive statistics about the selected

interface, including its general status, traffic
information, IP address, I/O errors, class-of-service
data, and statistics.

Clear Statistics Clears the statistics for the selected interface.

Auto Refresh Frequency Indicates the duration of time after which you want the
data on the page to be refreshed automatically.
 61

Table 9: Fields on the Interfaces Page (Continued)

Field Description

Interface Displays the interface name.

Link Status Displays whether the interface is linked (Up) or not

linked (Down).

Address Displays the IP address of the interface.

Zone Displays whether the zone is an untrust zone or a trust

zone.

Host Inbound Traffic Displays the following:

• Services that are enabled on the device, such as

HTTPS and SSH.

• Protocols that are enabled on the device, such as

BGP and IGMP.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor Session | 67

Monitor DHCP Server Bindings

You are here: Monitor > Network > DHCP Server Bindings.

Use this page to view information about dynamic and static DHCP leases, conflicts, pools, and statistics.

Table 10 on page 62 describes the fields on the DHCP Server Bindings page.
 62

Table 10: Fields on the DHCP Server Bindings Page

Field Description

Routing Instance Select the routing instance name.

DHCP Interface Details Displays the interface on which the DHCP server is configured.

Clear Clears all or selected binding information.

Client IP Address Displays the IP address of the DHCP client.

MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the DHCP server.

State State of the address binding table on the extended DHCP local server:

• BOUND—Client has an active IP address lease.

• FORCE RENEW—Client has received the FORCE RENEW message from the server.

• INIT—Initial state.

• RELEASE—Client is releasing the IP address lease.

• RENEWING—Client is sending a request to renew the IP address lease.

• REQUESTING—Client is requesting a DHCP server.

• SELECTING—Client is receiving offers from DHCP servers.

Lease Time Remaining Displays the time (in hours and minutes) at which the lease expires.

DHCP Interface Displays the interface on which the request was received.

Session ID Displays the Session ID of the subscriber session.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About Reports Page | 118

 63

Monitor IPsec VPN

You are here: Monitor > Network > IPsec VPN.

Use the monitoring functionality to view information of IKE, IPsec configuration, Security Associations
(SA), and Statistics in a tabular format that includes sortable columns. A VPN provides a means by which
remote computers communicate securely across a public WAN such as the Internet. IPsec VPN is a
protocol that consist set of standards used to establish a VPN connection.

Table 11 on page 63 describes the fields on the IPsec VPN page.

Table 11: Fields on the IPsec VPN Page

Field Description

IPsec Statistics list menu Displays summary of the global IPsec VPN or selected
IPsec VPN statistics.

Clear SA list menu Displays the options Clear All SAs or Clear Selected SA
to clear SAs.

If you choose Clear All SAs, then you can select Clear
All IKE SAs, Clear All IPsec SAs, or Clear All IKE & IPsec
SAs.

If you choose Clear Selected SAs, then you can select

Clear Selected IKE SA, Clear Selected IPsec SA, or
Clear Selected IKE & IPsec SA.

Refresh icon Click refresh icon to get latest operational data.

NOTE: The configuration data is fetched from cache.

Any changes to the CLI will be fetched only after you
commit it and click Monitor > Network > IPsec VPN to
refresh the page and get the latest configuration data.

Search You can search and filter either the remote gateway or
the VPN name.

Remote Gateway Displays gateway name of the remote system.

IKE Status Displays if IKE is up or down.

 64

Table 11: Fields on the IPsec VPN Page (Continued)

Field Description

Local IP Displays the external interface, IP address, and port of

the local peer so that its remote peer can communicate
with it.

Remote IP Displays the IP address and port of the remote peer.

NOTE: The remote IP displays only when the IKE is up.

VPN Name Displays IPsec VPN name.

TS/Proxy ID Status Displays information and status (up or down) of the

traffic selector or the proxy ID that are negotiated
between the peers.

IPsec Soft Life Displays the soft lifetime (in seconds) which indicates
that the IPsec key management system that the SA is
about to expire.

IKE Index Displays index number for a particular IKE SA.

IPsec Index Displays index number for a particular IPsec SA.

Topology Displays the topology deployment for an IPsec VPN.

For example: Site to Site/Hub & Spoke or Remote
Access VPN.

IKE Proposal Lists algorithms negotiated with the remote peer.

IPsec Proposal Lists protocols and algorithms negotiated with the

remote peer.

Authentication Type Display if the preshared key or certificate based is used

by the Virtual Private network (VPN).
 65

Table 11: Fields on the IPsec VPN Page (Continued)

Field Description

DPD Displays dead peer detection (DPD) method used by

devices to verify the current existence and availability
of IPsec peers.

Role Displays whether the device is an initiator or a

responder.

IKE Initiator Cookie Random number, called a cookie, which is sent to the
remote node when the IKE negotiation is triggered.

IKE Responder Cookie Random number generated by the remote node and
sent back to the initiator as a verification that the
packets are received.

IKE Life Lifetime (in seconds) of an IKE SA.

Range: 180 through 86,400. Default is 3600.

Mode Negotiation method agreed upon by the two IPsec

endpoints, or peers, used to exchange information.
Each exchange type determines the number of
messages and the payload types that each message
contains. The modes or exchange types are:

• Main—The exchange is done with six messages.

This mode, or exchange type, encrypts the payload,
protecting the identity of the neighbor. Displays
the authentication method used: preshared keys or
certificate.

• Aggressive—The exchange is done with three

messages. This mode, or exchange type, does not
encrypt the payload, leaving the identity of the
neighbor unprotected.

Peer IKE-ID Displays the IKE IDs for the local or remote devices.
 66

Table 11: Fields on the IPsec VPN Page (Continued)

Field Description

Remote Access Displays the remote access URL.

NOTE: This option is applicable only for the remote

access VPN with Juniper Secure Connect (JSC).

Remote User Displays the remote IKE identity to exchange with the
destination peer to establish communication.

DNS Displays the IP addresses for a primary and a

secondary DNS servers.

WINS Displays the IP addresses for a primary and a

secondary WINS servers.

Inbound SPI Displays security parameter index (SPI) value to

authenticate incoming traffic coming from the peer.

Outbound SPI Displays algorithms, keys, or SPI values to decrypt and

to authenticate outbound traffic to the peer.

IPsec Hard Life Displays number of seconds until the SA expires.

IPsec Lifesize Displays the lifesize remaining specifies the usage

limits in kilobytes. If no lifesize is specified, it shows
unlimited.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor Session | 67
 67

CHAPTER 4

Logs

IN THIS CHAPTER

Monitor Session | 67

Monitor Threats | 72

Monitor Web Filtering | 77

Monitor ATP | 81

Monitor VPN | 86

Monitor All Events | 89

Monitor Alarms | 95

Monitor Session

You are here: Monitor > Logs > Session.

Use the monitoring functionality to view the firewall events or sessions that occurred during the time
period specified.

NOTE: Session page is available on all the SRX Series devices except the SRX5000 line of
devices.

Table 12 on page 68 describes the fields on the Session page.

 68

Table 12: Fields on the Session Page

Field Description

Last Select the time from the list to view the activity that you are most interested in. Once
you select the time, all the data presented in your view refreshes automatically.

You can also use Customize to set a custom date and click Apply to view the specified
session logs.

More • View PCAP Counters—View packet capture (PCAP) counter statistics for unknown
application traffic. Click Clear Counters to reset all the packet capture counters value
of the unknown application traffic to zero.

• Delete PCAP Files—Select this option to permanently delete all the available PCAP
files on your device.

Refresh Click the refresh icon to get the latest session information.

Show Hide Columns The three vertical dots represents this icon.

Enables you to show or hide a column in the grid.

Export to CSV You can export the session data to a comma-separated value (.csv) file.

Select the three vertical dots on the right-side of the page and then click Export to CSV.
The CSV file is downloaded to your local machine. You can download only maximum of
100 sessions data.
 69

Table 12: Fields on the Session Page (Continued)

Field Description

Filter Criteria Use the filter text box present above the table grid. The search includes the logical
operators as part of the filter string. In the filter text box, when you hover over the icon,
it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search string, the
icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

The following filters are available:

• Source IP

• Destination IP

• Session ID

• Log type

• User

• Application

• Source Zone

• Destination Zone

• Source Country

• Destination Country

• Source Port

• Destination Port

• Protocol

X Click X to clear your search filter.

 70

Table 12: Fields on the Session Page (Continued)

Field Description

Save Filter Click Save Filter to save filters after you specify the filtering criteria.

To save a filter:

1. Enter the filter criteria you are looking for in the advanced search box.

2. Click Save Filter.

3. Enter a name for the filter and click the tick icon to save it.

Load Filter Displays the saved filters list.

Hover over the saved filter name to view the query expression. You can delete the saved
filter using the delete icon.

View Details When you hover over the PCAP file, a Detailed View icon appears before the PCAP file.
Click the icon to view the log details on the Detailed Log View page.

Click on the download icon in the Detailed Log View page to download the packet
capture file of an unknown application traffic. The session ID available in the file name
identifies the PCAP file.

NOTE: If the files are not available, the download fails and you will receive an error
message.

PCAP Click on the download icon to download the packet capture (PCAP) file of an unknown
application traffic. The download icon appears only if a packet captured for the session
log type close.

The session ID available in the file name identifies the PCAP file.

NOTE: If the files are not available, the download fails and you will receive an error
message.

Time Displays the time when the log was received.

Log Type Displays the log type.

Source Zone Displays the source zone of the session.

 71

Table 12: Fields on the Session Page (Continued)

Field Description

Source IP Displays the source IP address from where the session occurred.

User Displays the username from whom the session log is generated.

Destination Zone Displays the destination zone of the session.

Destination IP Displays the destination IP of the session occurred.

Destination Port Displays the destination port of the session.

Application Displays the application name from which the session logs are generated.

Action Displays the action taken for the event: warning, allow, and block.

Policy Displays the destination country of the log.

Bandwidth Displays the bandwidth utilization for the session.

NAT Source IP Displays the translated (or natted) source IP address. It can contain an IPv4 or an IPv6
addresses.

NAT Source Port Displays the translated source port.

NAT Destination IP Displays the translated (also called natted) destination IP address.

NAT Destination Displays the translated destination port.

Port

Protocol ID Displays the protocol ID in the log.

Session ID Displays the traffic session ID of the log.

 72

Table 12: Fields on the Session Page (Continued)

Field Description

Interface Displays the interface of the session.

Closure Reason Displays the reason for the log generation. For example, a connection tear down may
have an associated reason such as authentication failed.

Packets From Client Displays the number of packets received from the client.

Bytes From Client Displays the number of bytes received from the client.

Packets From Server Displays the number of packets received from the server.

Bytes From Server Displays the number of bytes received from the server.

Elapsed Time Displays the time elapsed since the last time interval began.

Source Port Displays the port number of the source.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor Threats | 72

Monitor Threats

You are here: Monitor > Logs > Threats.

Use the monitoring functionality to view the security threats. Threats are defined as any IPS, screen,
security intelligence, antivirus, content filtering, or antispam.

NOTE: Threat page is available on all the SRX Series devices except the SRX5000 line of devices.
 73

Table 13 on page 73 describes the fields on the Threats page.

Table 13: Fields on the Threats Page

Field Description

Last Select the time from the list to view the activity that you are most interested in. Once the
time is selected, all of the data presented in your view is refreshed automatically.

You can also use Customize to set a custom date and click Apply to view the specified
threats.

Refresh Click the refresh icon to get the latest threat information.

Show Hide Columns This icon is represented by three vertical dots.

Enables you to show or hide a column in the grid.

Export to CSV You can export the threats data to a comma-separated value (.csv) file.

Select the three vertical dots on the right-side of the page and click Export to CSV. The
CSV file is downloaded to your local machine. You can download only maximum of 100
sessions data.
 74

Table 13: Fields on the Threats Page (Continued)

Field Description

Filter Criteria Use the filter text box present above the table grid. The search includes the logical
operators as part of the filter string. In the filter text box, when you hover over the icon,
it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search string, the icon
indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

The following filters are available:

• Source IP

• Destination IP

• Session ID

• Log type

• User

• Application

• Source Zone

• Destination Zone

• Source Country

• Destination Country

• Source Port

• Destination Port

• Protocol

X Click X to clear your search filter.

 75

Table 13: Fields on the Threats Page (Continued)

Field Description

Save Filter Click Save Filter to save filters after you specify the filtering criteria.

To save a filter:

1. Enter the filter criteria you are looking for in the advanced search box.

2. Click Save Filter.

3. Enter a name for the filter and click the tick icon to save it.

Load Filter Displays the saved filters list.

Hover over the saved filter name to view the query expression. You can delete the saved
filter using the delete icon.

Time Displays the time when the threats log was received.

Log Type Displays the threats log type. For example, IPS, Antivirus, Antispam, and so on.

Name Displays the name of the event.

Severity Displays the severity of the threat.

Source Zone Displays the source zone of the threats.

Source IP Displays the source IP address from where the threats log occurred.

Source Port Displays the port number of the source.

User Displays the username from whom the threat log is generated.

Destination Zone Displays the destination zone of the threats.

Destination IP Displays the destination IP of the threats occurred.

 76

Table 13: Fields on the Threats Page (Continued)

Field Description

Destination Port Displays the port number of the destination.

Application Displays the nested application or application name from which the threats are
generated.

Action Displays the action taken from the threats.

Session ID Displays the traffic session ID of the threats.

Closure Reason Displays the reason for the session closure.

Profile Displays the threat profile name.

Category Displays the threat category.

URL Displays the accessed URL name that triggered the event.

Object Displays the object name of the threats.

Destination Interface Displays the interface name of the destination.

Source Interface Displays the interface name of the source.

Policy Displays the policy name that triggered the threats log.

Rule Displays the rule name of the threats log.

Protocol Displays the protocol ID in the threats log.

CVE-ID Displays the Common Vulnerabilities and Exposures (CVE) identifiers information for the
threat.
 77

Table 13: Fields on the Threats Page (Continued)

Field Description

Elapsed Time Displays the time elapsed since the last time interval began.

Packet Log ID Displays the packets ID received before and after the attack for further offline analysis of
attacker behavior.

XFF Displays X-Forwarded-For (XFF) header added to packets by a proxy server that includes
the real IP address of the client making the request.

File Name Displays the filename of the threats log.

Argument Displays the arguments that are passed to an event when it is invoked from the threats
log.

Source Name Displays the name of the source from where threat is originated.

Feed Name Displays the feed name of the threat detected.

Count Displays the number of threats count.

Message Type Displays the message type for the threat detected.

HTTP Host Displays the host URL for the threat.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor Web Filtering | 77

Monitor Web Filtering

You are here: Monitor > Logs > Web Filtering.

 78

Use this page to view information about the Web filtering events based on web filtering policies, filter
options, and grid elements of Web filtering events.

NOTE: Web Filtering page is available on all the SRX Series devices except the SRX5000 line of
devices.

Table 14 on page 78 describes the fields on the Web Filtering page.

Table 14: Fields on the Web Filtering Page

Field Description

Last Select the time from the list to view the activity that you are most interested in. Once the
time is selected, all of the data presented in your view is refreshed automatically.

You can also use Customize to set a custom date and click Apply to view the specified
Web filtering event logs.

Refresh Click the refresh icon to get the latest Web filtering event information.

Show Hide Columns This icon is represented by three vertical dots.

Enables you to show or hide a column in the grid.

Export to CSV You can export the Web filtering event data to a comma-separated value (.csv) file.

Select the three vertical dots on the right-side of the page and click Export to CSV. The
CSV file is downloaded to your local machine. You can download only maximum of 100
sessions data.
 79

Table 14: Fields on the Web Filtering Page (Continued)

Field Description

Filter Criteria Use the filter text box present above the table grid. The search includes the logical
operators as part of the filter string. In the filter text box, when you hover over the icon, it
displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search string, the icon
indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

The following filters are available:

• Source IP

• Destination IP

• Session ID

• Log type

• User

• Application

• Source Zone

• Destination Zone

• Source Country

• Destination Country

• Source Port

• Destination Port

X Click X to clear your search filter.

Save Filter Click Save Filter to save filters after you specify the filtering criteria.

To save a filter:

1. Enter the filter criteria you are looking for in the advanced search box.

2. Click Save Filter.

3. Enter a name for the filter and click the tick icon to save it.
 80

Table 14: Fields on the Web Filtering Page (Continued)

Field Description

Load Filter Displays the saved filters list.

Hover over the saved filter name to view the query expression. You can delete the saved
filter using the delete icon.

Time Displays the time when the Web filtering event log was received.

Log Type Displays the Web filtering event log type.

Source Zone Displays the source zone of the Web filtering event.

Source IP Displays the source IP address from where the Web filtering event occurred.

User Displays the username from whom the Web filtering event log is generated.

Destination Zone Displays the destination zone of the Web filtering event.

Destination IP Displays the destination IP of the Web filtering event occurred.

Destination Port Displays the destination port of the Web filtering event.

Application Displays the application name for which the Web filtering event logs are generated.

Action Displays the action taken for the event: deny, permit, or redirect.

Session ID Displays the traffic session ID of the Web filtering event log.

Closure Reason Displays the reason for the Web filtering event log generation closure.

URL Category Risk Displays the Web filtering URL risk level.
 81

Table 14: Fields on the Web Filtering Page (Continued)

Field Description

Profile Displays the Web filtering profile name.

Category Displays the Web filtering URL category.

URL Displays the accessed URL name that triggered the event.

Obj Displays the object name of the Web filtering event log.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor ATP | 81

Monitor ATP

You are here: Monitor > Logs > ATP.

Use the monitoring functionality to view the ATP page. Analyzing the Juniper ATP logs yields
information such as malware name, action taken, infected host, source of an attack, and destination of
an attack.

NOTE: ATP page is available on all the SRX Series devices except the SRX5000 line of devices.

Table 15 on page 82 describes the fields on the ATP page.

 82

Table 15: Fields on the ATP Page

Field Description

Last Select the time from the list to view the activity that you are most interested in. Once the
time is selected, all of the data presented in your view is refreshed automatically.

You can also use Customize to set a custom date and click Apply to view the specified ATP
logs.

Refresh Click the refresh icon to get the latest ATP log information.

Show Hide Columns This icon is represented by three vertical dots.

Enables you to show or hide a column in the grid.

Export to CSV You can export the ATP log data to a comma-separated value (.csv) file.

Select the three vertical dots on the right-side of the page and click Export to CSV. The
CSV file is downloaded to your local machine. You can download only maximum of 100
ATP log data.
 83

Table 15: Fields on the ATP Page (Continued)

Field Description

Filter Criteria Use the filter text box present above the table grid. The search includes the logical
operators as part of the filter string. In the filter text box, when you hover over the icon, it
displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search string, the icon
indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

The following filters are available:

• Source IP

• Destination IP

• Session ID

• Log type

• User

• Application

• Source Zone

• Destination Zone

• Source Country

• Destination Country

• Source Port

• Destination Port

• Protocol

X Click X to clear your search filters.

 84

Table 15: Fields on the ATP Page (Continued)

Field Description

Save Filter Click Save Filter to save filters after you specify the filtering criteria.

To save a filter:

1. Enter the filter criteria you are looking for in the advanced search box.

2. Click Save Filter.

3. Enter a name for the filter and click the tick icon to save it.

Load Filter Displays the saved filters list.

Hover over the saved filter name to view the query expression. You can delete the saved
filter using the delete icon.

Time Displays the time when the ATP log was received.

Log Type Displays the ATP log type: Action, Malware event, SMTP action, and IMAP action.

Source Zone Displays the source zone of the ATP log.

Source IP Displays the source IP address from where the ATP log occurred.

Source Port Displays the port number of the source.

User Displays the username who downloaded the possible malware.

Destination Zone Displays the destination zone of the ATP log.

Destination IP Displays the destination IP of the ATP log occurred.

Destination Port Displays the destination port of the ATP log.

Application Displays the application name from which the ATP logs are generated.
 85

Table 15: Fields on the ATP Page (Continued)

Field Description

Action Displays the action taken from the event: log, permit, and log and permit.

Session ID Displays the session ID of the ATP log.

Policy Displays the name of policy that enforced this action.

List Hit Displays the number of times the C&C server has attempted to contact hosts on your
network.

URL Displays the accessed URL name that triggered the event.

Sample SHA256 Displays the SHA-256 hash value of the downloaded file.

File Hash Lookup Displays the hash of the file sent for matching against known malware.

File Name Displays the name of the file, including the extension.

Protocol Displays the protocol that the C&C server used to attempt communication.

File Category Displays the type of file. Examples: PDF, executable, document.

Hostname Displays the hostname of device that downloaded the possible malware.

Verdict Number Displays the a score or threat level for a file.

Malware Info Displays the malware name or brief description.

Send To Displays the email address.

Send From Displays the email address.

 86

Table 15: Fields on the ATP Page (Continued)

Field Description

Tenant ID Displays the internal unique identifier.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor VPN | 86

Monitor VPN

You are here: Monitor > Logs > VPN.

Use the monitoring functionality to view comprehensive stream log details of VPN in a tabular format
that includes sortable columns. A VPN provides a means by which remote computers communicate
securely across a public WAN such as the Internet.

NOTE: VPN page is available on all the SRX Series devices except the SRX5000 line of devices.

Table 16 on page 86 describes the fields on the VPN page.

Table 16: Fields on the VPN Page

Field Description

Last Select the time from the list to view the activity that you are most interested in. Once the
time is selected, all of the data presented in your view is refreshed automatically.

You can also use Customize to set a custom date and click Apply to view the specified
VPN events.

Refresh Click the refresh icon at the top right corner to display the fresh content.
 87

Table 16: Fields on the VPN Page (Continued)

Field Description

Show Hide Columns This icon is represented by three vertical dots.

Enables you to show or hide a column in the grid.

Export to CSV You can export the VPN data to a comma-separated value (.csv) file.

Select the three vertical dots on the right-side of the page and click Export to CSV. The
CSV file is downloaded to your local machine. You can download only maximum of 100
VPN data.

Filter Criteria Use the filter text box present above the table grid. The search includes the logical
operators as part of the filter string. In the filter text box, when you hover over the icon, it
displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search string, the icon
indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

The available filter option is Log type.

X Click X to clear your search filter.

Save Filter Click Save Filter to save filters after you specify the filtering criteria.

To save a filter:

1. Enter the filter criteria you are looking for in the advanced search box.

2. Click Save Filter.

3. Enter a name for the filter and click the tick icon to save it.

Load Filter Displays the saved filters list.

Hover over the saved filter name to view the query expression. You can delete the saved
filter using the delete icon.

Time Displays the time when the VPN log was received.
 88

Table 16: Fields on the VPN Page (Continued)

Field Description

Log Type Displays the VPN log type:

• Bad SPI

• Replay

• PV decryption

• PV encryption

• PV sm keygen

• PV replay

• Decrypt bad pad

• AUTH fail

• D3P ERR

Interface Name Displays the external interface name for the VPN.

Tunnel ID Displays the VPN tunnel ID.

Source IP Displays the source IP address from where the VPN connection is established.

Destination IP Displays the destination IP to where the VPN connection is established.

Length Displays the total packet length in Bytes.

Type Displays the VPN type: ESP or AH protocol.

Index Displays the index number of the IKE SA.

Sequence Number Displays the sequence number of the packets sent for the VPN event.
 89

Table 16: Fields on the VPN Page (Continued)

Field Description

Message Displays the error message for the VPN event.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor All Events | 89

Monitor All Events

You are here: Monitor > Logs > All Events.

Use this page to view event details associated with session, content filtering, antispam, antivirus, IPS,
screen, security intelligence, Web filtering, ATP, and VPN.

NOTE: All Events page is available on all the SRX Series devices except the SRX5000 line of
devices.

Table 17 on page 89 describes the fields on the All Events page.

Table 17: Fields on the All Events Page

Field Description

Last Select the time from the list to view the activity that you are most interested in. Once
the time is selected, all of the data presented in your view is refreshed automatically.

You can also use Customize to set a custom date and click Apply to view the specified
event logs.

Refresh Click the refresh icon to get the latest event information.
 90

Table 17: Fields on the All Events Page (Continued)

Field Description

Show Hide Columns This icon is represented by three vertical dots.

Enables you to show or hide a column in the grid.

Export to CSV You can export the event data to a comma-separated value (.csv) file.

Select the three vertical dots on the right-side of the page and click Export to CSV. The
CSV file is downloaded to your local machine. You can download only maximum of 100
event data.

Filter Criteria Use the filter text box present above the table grid. The search includes the logical
operators as part of the filter string. In the filter text box, when you hover over the icon,
it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search string, the
icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

The following filters are available:

• Source IP

• Destination IP

• Session ID

• Log type

• User

• Application

• Source Zone

• Destination Zone

• Source Country

• Destination Country

• Source Port

• Destination Port

• Protocol
 91

Table 17: Fields on the All Events Page (Continued)

Field Description

X Click X to clear your search filter.

Save Filter Click Save Filter to save filters after you specify the filtering criteria.

To save a filter:

1. Enter the filter criteria you are looking for in the advanced search box.

2. Click Save Filter.

3. Enter a name for the filter and click the tick icon to save it.

Load Filter Displays the saved filters list.

Hover over the saved filter name to view the query expression. You can delete the saved
filter using the delete icon.

Time Displays the time when the event log was received.

Log Type Displays the event log type.

Source Zone Displays the source zone of the event.

Source IP Displays the source IP address from where the event occurred.

Destination Zone Displays the destination zone of the event.

Destination IP Displays the destination IP of the event occurred.

Destination Port Displays the destination port of the event.

Application Displays the application name for which the event logs are generated.

Action Displays the action taken for the event: warning, allow, and block.
 92

Table 17: Fields on the All Events Page (Continued)

Field Description

Policy Displays the destination country of the event log.

NAT Source IP Displays the translated (or natted) source IP address. It can contain IPv4 or IPv6
addresses.

NAT Source Port Displays the translated source port.

NAT Destination IP Displays the translated (also called natted) destination IP address.

NAT Destination Port Displays the translated destination port.

Protocol Displays the protocol ID in the event log.

Session ID Displays the traffic session ID of the event log.

User Displays the username from whom the event log is generated.

Source Interface Displays the source interface of the event log.

Destination Interface Displays the destination interface of the event log.

Closure Reason Displays the reason for the log generation. For example, a connection tear down may
have an associated reason such as authentication failed.

Packets From Client Displays the number of packets received from the client.

Bytes From Client Displays the number of bytes received from the client.

Packets From Server Displays the number of packets received from the server.

Bytes From Server Displays the number of bytes received from the server.
 93

Table 17: Fields on the All Events Page (Continued)

Field Description

Elapsed Time Displays the time elapsed since the last time interval began.

Source Port Displays the port number of the source.

Sequence Number Displays the sequence number of the packets sent.

Message Type Displays the message type for the event detected.

Count Displays the number of events count.

Severity Displays the severity of the threat.

CVE-ID Displays the Common Vulnerabilities and Exposures (CVE) identifiers information.

Packet log ID Displays the packets ID received before and after the attack for further offline analysis of
attacker behavior.

XFF Displays the X-Forwarded-For (XFF) header added to packets by a proxy server that
includes the real IP address of the client making the request.

Profile Displays the event profile name.

File Name Displays the filename of the event log.

Argument Displays the arguments that are passed from the event log.

Message Displays the message ID for negotiation.

Bandwidth Displays the bandwidth utilization for the event log.

Malware Info Displays the malware name or brief description.

 94

Table 17: Fields on the All Events Page (Continued)

Field Description

Hostname Displays the hostname of device that downloaded the possible malware.

File Category Displays the type of file. Examples: PDF, executable, document.

Verdict Number Displays the a score or threat level for a file.

List Hit Displays the number of times the C&C server has attempted to contact hosts on your
network.

File Hash Lookup Displays the hash of the file sent for matching against known malware.

Sample SHA256 Displays the SHA-256 hash value of the downloaded file.

File Name Displays the name of the file, including the extension.

URL Displays the accessed URL name that triggered the event.

Send To Displays the email address.

Send From Displays the email address.

Category Displays the threat/event category.

Object Displays the object name of the event log.

URL Category Risk Displays the Web filtering URL category risk level.

Virus Name Displays the detected virus name.

Source Name Displays the name of the source from where event is originated.
 95

Table 17: Fields on the All Events Page (Continued)

Field Description

Feed Name Displays the feed name of the event detected.

Rule Displays the rule name of the threats/events log.

Length Displays the total packet length in Bytes

Type Displays the event type.

Index Displays the index number of the IKE SA.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor Alarms | 95

Monitor Alarms

You are here: Monitor > Logs > Alarms.

Use this page to view the alarms details such as time, severity, type, and descriptions of the alarm.

Table 18 on page 95 describes the fields on the Alarms page.

Table 18: Fields on the Alarms Page

Field Description

Show Hide Enables you to show or hide a column in the grid.

Columns icon
 96

Table 18: Fields on the Alarms Page (Continued)

Field Description

Filter Criteria Enter or select the criteria or parameter on which you want to construct the filter
statement.

• Type—Type of alarm: System, Chassis, or All.

• Severity—Severity class of the alarm: Minor or Major.

• Description—Description of the alarm.

Click X to clear the search entries.

Time Displays the date and time that the alarm was registered.

Type Specifies the type of alarm to monitor:

• System—System alarms include FRU detection alarms (power supplies removed, for
instance).

• Chassis—Chassis alarms indicate environmental alarms such as temperature.

• All—Indicates to display all the types of alarms.

Severity Specifies the alarm severity that you want to monitor

• Major—A major (red) alarm condition requires immediate action.

• Minor—A minor (yellow) condition requires monitoring and maintenance.

• All—Indicates to display all the severities.

Description Displays the brief synopsis of the alarms you want to monitor.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor Traffic Map | 97

 97

CHAPTER 5

Maps and Charts

IN THIS CHAPTER

Monitor Traffic Map | 97

Monitor Threats Map | 100

Monitor Applications | 107

Monitor Users | 110

Monitor Traffic Map

IN THIS SECTION

Field Descriptions | 98

Tasks You Can Perform | 100

You are here: Monitor > Maps and Charts > Traffic Map.

NOTE: Traffic Map page is available on all the SRX Series devices except the SRX5000 line of
devices.

J-Web supports monitoring traffic through a map. Use this page to visualize inbound and outbound
traffic between geographic regions. You can click or hover over the bubble to view more details on the
inbound or outbound traffic. The size of the bubble indicates the session count or the bandwidth
utilization for a traffic. Traffic with unknown geographical IP addresses and private IP addresses are
displayed as question mark icon and lock icon, respectively.
 98

NOTE: To view the data on the Traffic Map page, ensure that security logging is enabled. If not,
go to Device Administration > Basic Settings > Security Logging and enable Stream mode Logging
and On-box reporting.

Application Risk Category

The color code of the bubble indicates the risk associated with the application. Table 19 on page 98
shows the application risk categories and the risk values.

Table 19: Application Risk Category and Risk Value

Application Risk Category Risk Value

Critical >=5

High >=4 and <5

Unsafe >=3 and <4

Moderate >=2 and <3

Low >=0 and <2

You can calculate the average risk value using the following formula:

Average risk value for a country = Application risk total / Session count total

Field Descriptions

Table 20 on page 99 displays the fields of the Traffic Map page.

 99

Table 20: Fields on the Traffic Map Page

Field Description

By Volume Displays the bandwidth utilization. This is the default value.

By Session Displays the total number of traffic sessions.

Inbound Traffic Displays the traffic coming through the device from the source countries.

Outbound Traffic Displays the traffic goes through the device to the destination countries. This is the default
value.

Top Sources Displays the top 10, 20 (default value), or 50 source countries with the following details:

• Country—Displays the country name.

• Risk level—Displays the risk level category. For example, low, critical, unsafe.

• Avg. risk—Displays the average risk count.

• Sessions or Bandwidth—Displays the session count or bandwidth utilization.

Top Destinations Displays the top 10, 20 (default value), or 50 destination countries with the following details:

• Country—Displays the country name.

• Risk level—Displays the risk level category. For example, low, critical, unsafe.

• Avg. risk—Displays the average risk count.

• Sessions or Bandwidth—Displays the session count or bandwidth utilization.

View Data Displays the traffic data for the defined time interval. By default, traffic data for the last five
minutes is displayed. You can select the predefined time interval or click Customize to
customize the time interval by entering date and time.

NOTE: Starting in Junos OS Release 21.4R1, the default duration is changed from Last 1 hour
to Last 5 minutes to speed up the J-Web UI loading process.
 100

Table 20: Fields on the Traffic Map Page (Continued)

Field Description

Search Enter the country name for which you want to view the data and click the search icon. You
can view the country flags before the country names. Click on the country name to view its
data.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Zoom in and out of the page—Click the zoom in (+) and zoom out (–) icons to zoom in and out of the
page.

• Refresh the data on the page—Click the refresh icon available below the zoom out icon.

• Pan the page—Click and drag the mouse to pan the page.

• View country-specific details—Hover over the bubble to view the country specific details.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor Threats Map | 100

Monitor Threats Map

IN THIS SECTION

Field Descriptions | 101

Threat Types | 102

Tasks You Can Perform | 104

You are here: Monitor > Maps and Charts > Threats Map.
 101

NOTE: Threats Map page is available on all the SRX Series devices except the SRX5000 line of
devices.

Use this page to visualize incoming and outgoing threats between geographic regions. You can view
blocked and allowed threat events based on feeds from intrusion prevention systems (IPS), antivirus,
antispam engines, Juniper ATP Cloud, and screen options. You can also click a specific geographical
location to view the event count and the top five inbound and outbound IP addresses.

NOTE: To view the data on the Threats Map (Live) page, ensure that:

• Security logging is enabled. If not, go to Device Administration > Basic Settings > Security
Logging and enable Stream mode Logging.

• Required firewall policy is configured on the device.

• Required licenses are configured for IPS and antivirus.

• Your device is enrolled to the Juniper ATP Cloud server.

The threat data is displayed starting from 12:00 AM (midnight) up to the current time (in your time zone)
on that day and is updated every 30 seconds. The current date and time are displayed at the top right
and a legend is displayed at the bottom left of the page.

If a threat occurs when you are viewing the page, an animation shows the country from which the threat
originated (source) and the country in which the threat occurred (destination).

NOTE: Threats with unknown geographical IP addresses and private IP addresses are displayed
as UNKNOWN_COUNTRY.

Field Descriptions

Table 21 on page 102 displays the fields of the Threats Map (Live) page.
 102

Table 21: Fields on the Threats Map (Live) Page

Field Description

Total Threats Blocked & Displays the total number of threats blocked and allowed. Click the hyperlinked
Allowed number to go to the All Events (Monitor > Logs > All Events) page (filtered view of
the Grid View tab), where you can view more information about the IPS, virus, spam,
Juniper ATP Cloud, and screen events.

Threats Blocked & Displays the total number of threats blocked and allowed by the following categories:
Allowed
• IPS Threats

• Virus

• Spam

• Screen

• Juniper ATP Cloud

Top Destination Displays the top five destination countries and the number of threats per country.
Countries

Top Source Countries Displays the top five source countries and the number of threats per country.

Threat Types

The Threats Map page displays blocked and allowed threat events based on feeds from IPS, antivirus,
antispam engines, Juniper ATP Cloud, and screen options. Table 22 on page 103 describes different
types of threats blocked and allowed.
 103

Table 22: Types of Threats

Attack Description

IPS threat Intrusion detection and prevention (IDP) attacks detected by the IDP module.
events
The information reported about the attack (displayed on the IPS (Monitor > Logs > Threats page)
includes information about:

• Specific events names

• Specific event names with either source or destination country

Virus Virus attacks detected by the antivirus engine.

The information reported about the attack (displayed on the Antivirus (Monitor > Logs > Threats
page) includes information about:

• Specific events names

• Specific event names with either source or destination country

Spam E-mail spam that is detected based on the blacklist spam e-mails.

The information reported about the attack (displayed on the Antispam (Monitor > Logs > Threats
page) includes information about:

• Specific events names

• Specific event names with source country

Juniper ATP Events that are detected based on Juniper ATP Cloud policies.
Cloud
The information reported about the attack (displayed on the Screen (Monitor > Logs > ATP page)
includes information about:

• Specific events names

• Specific event names with either source or destination country

 104

Table 22: Types of Threats (Continued)

Attack Description

Screen Events that are detected based on screen options.

The information reported about the attack (displayed on the Screen (Monitor > Logs > Threats
page) includes information about:

• Specific events names

• Specific event names with either source or destination country

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Toggle between updating the data and allowing live updates—Click the Pause icon to stop the page
from updating the threat map data and to stop animations. Click the Play icon to update the page
data and resume animations.

• Zoom in and out of the page—Click the zoom in (+) and zoom out (–) icons to zoom in and out of the
page.

• Pan the page—Click and drag the mouse to pan the page.

• View country-specific details:

• Click a country on the threat map to view threat information specific to that country. A Country-
Name pop-up appears displaying country-specific information.

• Click View Details in the Country-Name pop-up to view additional details. The Country-Name
(Details) panel appears.

Table 23 on page 104 provides more details on the country-specific threat information.

Table 23: Country-Specific Threat Information

Field Description

Displayed in Country-Name pop-up

 105

Table 23: Country-Specific Threat Information (Continued)

Field Description

Number of threat Displays the total number of threat events (inbound and outbound) since midnight for
events Threat Events that country.
since 12:00 am

Inbound (Number of Displays the total number of inbound threats for the country and the IP address and
threat events) the number of events for that IP address for the top five inbound events.

Click View All to view all the destination IP address with threat events count.

Outbound (Number of Displays the total number of outbound threats for the country and the IP address and
threat events) the number of events for that IP address for the top five outbound events.

Click View All to view all the source IP address with threat events count.

View Details—Displayed in Country-Name (Details) panel

Number of threat Displays the total number of threat events (inbound and outbound) since midnight for
events Threat Events that country.
since 12:00 am
 106

Table 23: Country-Specific Threat Information (Continued)

Field Description

Number of Inbound Displays the total number of inbound threats for the country and the number of
Events inbound threat events for each of the following categories:

• IPS Threats

• Virus

• Spam

• Screen

• Juniper ATP Cloud

Click Top 5 IP Addresses (Inbound) to view the IP address and the number of events
for that IP address for the top five inbound events.

Click View All IP Addresses to view all the destination IP addresses and number of
events for that IP address.

NOTE: You can view or select View All IP Addresses only after you click Top 5 IP
Addresses (Inbound).

Number of Outbound Displays the total number of outbound threats for the country and the number of
Events outbound threat events for each of the following categories:

• IPS Threats

• Virus

• Spam

• Screen

• Juniper ATP Cloud

Click Top 5 IP Addresses (Outbound) to view the IP address and the number of events
for that IP address for the top five outbound events.

Click View All IP Addresses to view all the source IP addresses and number of events
for that IP address.

NOTE: You can view or select View All IP Addresses only after you click Top 5 IP
Addresses (Outbound).
 107

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor Applications | 107

Monitor Applications

You are here: Monitor > Maps and Charts > Applications.

Use this page to view information about bandwidth consumption, session establishment, and risks
associated with your applications. Analyzing your network applications yields useful security
management information, such as abnormal applications that can lead to data loss, bandwidth hogging,
time-consuming applications, and personal applications that can elevate business risks.

NOTE: Applications page is available on all the SRX Series devices except the SRX5000 line of
devices.

NOTE: To view the data on the Applications page, ensure that:

• On-box traffic logging and reporting is enabled. If not, go to Device Administration > Basic
Settings > Security Logging, enable Stream mode Logging and On-box Reporting.

• Logging is enabled for a matching traffic firewall policy. If not, go to Security Policies &
Objects > Security Policies and enable Logging options under Rule Options.

• Application tracking is enabled for a security zone. If not, go to Security Policies & Objects >
Zones/Screens and enable Application Tracking in the Add Zone page.

You can select either the Grid View tab or the Chart View tab to view your data:

• Grid View—View the comprehensive details of applications in a tabular format that includes sortable
columns. You can group the applications using Top users by volume, Top apps by volume, timespan,
username, and so on. The table includes information such as the application name, volume, users and
so on. Table 24 on page 108 describes the fields on the Grid View page.

• Chart View—View a brief summary of all the applications. It shows the top 50 applications
consuming maximum bandwidth in your network. The data is presented graphically as a bubble
graph, heat map, or zoomable bubble graph. Table 25 on page 109 describes the widgets on the
Chart View page.
 108

Table 24: Applications—Fields on the Grid View Page

Field Description

Top Users By Volume Top users of the application; sorted by bandwidth consumption.

Top Apps By Volume Top applications, such as Amazon, Facebook, and so on of the network traffic;
sorted by bandwidth consumption.

Top Category By Volume Top category, such as web, infrastructure, and so on of the application; sorted by
bandwidth consumption.

Top Characteristics By Top behavioral characteristics, such as prone to misuse, bandwidth consumer, and
Volume so on of the application.

Sessions By Risk Number of events/sessions received; grouped by risk.

Time Span Allows you to select a time period. Click Custom to select a preferred date.

View App Logs Enables you to view the application logs.

Search Enables you to search a particular content from the data.

Application Name Name of the application, such as Amazon, Facebook, and so on.

Risk Level Risk associated with the application: critical, high, unsafe, moderate, low, and
unknown.

Users Total number of users accessing the application.

Volume Bandwidth used by the application.

Total Sessions Total number of application sessions.

Category Category of the application, such as web, infrastructure, and so on.

 109

Table 24: Applications—Fields on the Grid View Page (Continued)

Field Description

Sub-Category Subcategory of the application. For example, social networking, news, and
advertisements.

NOTE: There can be many sub-categories for a single category. For example, if
the Category is Multimedia, it can have sub-categories as Video-streaming and
Audio-streaming and so on.

Characteristics Characteristics of the application. For example, prone to misuse, bandwidth

consumer, capable of tunneling.

NOTE: There can be many characteristics displayed by a comma separator. For

example, characteristics can be displayed as Support File Transfer, Loss of
Productivity, Bandwidth.

Table 25: Applications—Widgets on the Chart View Page

Field Description

Top 50 Applications Displays the top 50 application consuming maximum bandwidth in your network.

The data is presented graphically as a bubble graph, heat map, or zoomable bubble graph.

Show By Allows you to reorder the bubble graph by bandwidth or by number of sessions from the
drop down.

If Bandwidth is selected, the size of the bubble depends on the bandwidth used. Whereas,
if Number of Session is selected, the size of the bubble depends upon the number of
sessions.

Time Span Allows you to select a time. Click Custom to select a preferred date.

Group By Allows you to group the bubble graph by bandwidth or by number of sessions from the
drop down based on risk or categories.
 110

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor Users | 110

Monitor Users

You are here: Monitor > Maps and Charts > Users.

Use this page to view information about top users accessing high bandwidth-consuming applications
and establishing higher number of sessions on your network. Based on this information, network
administrators can control the user by rate-limit a device that is accessing applications which consume
large bandwidth or create maximum traffic.

NOTE: Users page is available on all the SRX Series devices except the SRX5000 line of devices.

You can select either the Grid View tab or the Chart View tab to view your data:

• Grid View—View the comprehensive details of users in a tabular format that includes sortable
columns. You can group the users using Top users by volume, Top apps by volume, timespan,
username etc. The table includes information such as the username, volume, top users by volume
and so on. Table 26 on page 110 describes the fields on the Grid View page.

• Chart View—View a brief summary of all the users. It shows the top 50 users consuming maximum
bandwidth in your network. The data is presented graphically as a bubble graph, heat map, or
zoomable bubble graph. Table 27 on page 111 describes the widgets on the Chart View page.

Table 26: Users—Fields on the Grid View Page

Field Description

Top Users By Volume Top users of the application; sorted by bandwidth consumption.

Top Apps By Volume Top applications, such as Amazon, Facebook, and so on of the network traffic; sorted by
bandwidth consumption.

Time Span Allows you to select a time period. Click Custom to select a preferred date.

Username Name of a user.

 111

Table 26: Users—Fields on the Grid View Page (Continued)

Field Description

Volume Bandwidth consumption of the user.

Total Sessions Total number of user sessions.

Applications All the applications used by a user for the time range.

Search Enables you to search a particular content from the data.

Table 27: Users—Widgets on the Chart View Page

Field Description

Top 50 Users Displays the top 50 users consuming maximum bandwidth in your network.

The data is presented graphically as a bubble graph, heat map, or zoomable bubble graph.

Show By Allows you to reorder the bubble graph by bandwidth or by number of sessions from the drop
down.

If Bandwidth is selected, the size of the bubble depends on the bandwidth used. Whereas, if
Number of Session is selected, the size of the bubble depends upon the number of sessions.

Time Span Allows you to select a time. Click Custom to select a preferred date.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor Threat Prevention | 112

 112

CHAPTER 6

Statistics

IN THIS CHAPTER

Monitor Threat Prevention | 112

Monitor VPN Phase I | 113

Monitor VPN Phase II | 115

Monitor Threat Prevention

You are here: Monitor > Statistics > Threat Prevention.

Use this page to verify the statistics of advanced-anti-malware sessions and security Intelligence
sessions.

Table 28 on page 112 describes the fields on the Threat Prevention page.

Table 28: Fields on the Threat Prevention Page

Field Description

Advanced Anti Malware Session Statistics

Sessions The following options are available:

• TOTAL—Specify the TOTAL Session.

• HTTP—Specify the HTTP Session.

• HTTPS—Specify the HTTP Session.

• SMTP—Specify the simple mail transfer protocol session.

• SMTPS—Specify SMTPS session.

 113

Table 28: Fields on the Threat Prevention Page (Continued)

Field Description

Clear Statistics Clear the statistics.

Graph Shows the anti-malware session statistics.

Security Intelligence Session Statistics

Profiles Select a profile from the list.

Sessions The following options are available:

• TOTAL—Displays the identification number of the Services Processing Unit.

• PERMIT—Specify the permitted session.

• BLOCK-DROP—Specify the block drop.

• BLOCK-CLOSE—Specify the block close.

• CLOSE-REDIRECT—Specify the closure of the redirect session.

Clear Statistics Clear the statistics.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor VPN Phase I | 113

Monitor VPN Phase I

You are here: Monitor > Statistics > Phase I.

Use this page to view information related to IKE security associations.

Table 29 on page 114 describes the fields on the Phase I page.

 114

Table 29: Fields on the Phase I Page

Field Description

IKE Security Associations

Refresh Interval Indicates the duration of time after which you want the data on the page to be refreshed.
(sec)

Refresh Click the refresh icon at the top right corner to display the fresh content.

Clear IKE SA Clears all the IKE SA numbers on the display.

SA Index Index number of a SA.

Remote Address IP address of the destination peer with which the local peer communicates.

State State of the IKE security associations:

• DOWN—SA has not been negotiated with the peer.

• UP—SA has been negotiated with the peer.

Initiator Cookie Random number, called a cookie, which is sent to the remote node when the IKE
negotiation is triggered.

Responder Cookie Random number generated by the remote node and sent back to the initiator as a
verification that the packets were received.

NOTE: A cookie is aimed at protecting the computing resources from attack without
spending excessive CPU resources to determine the cookie’s authenticity.
 115

Table 29: Fields on the Phase I Page (Continued)

Field Description

Mode Negotiation method agreed upon by the two IPsec endpoints, or peers, used to exchange
information. Each exchange type determines the number of messages and the payload
types that are contained in each message. The modes, or exchange types, are:

• Main—The exchange is done with six messages. This mode, or exchange type, encrypts
the payload, protecting the identity of the neighbor. The authentication method used is
displayed: preshared keys or certificate.

• Aggressive—The exchange is done with three messages. This mode, or exchange type,
does not encrypt the payload, leaving the identity of the neighbor unprotected.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor VPN Phase II | 115

Monitor VPN Phase II

You are here: Monitor > Statistics > Phase II.

Use this page to view IPsec statistics and information related to IPsec security associations.

Table 30 on page 115 describes the fields on the Phase II page.

Table 30: Fields on the Phase II Page

Field Description

Statistics

Refresh interval (sec) Indicates the duration of time after which you want the data on the page to be refreshed.

Refresh Click the refresh icon at the top right corner to display the fresh content.
 116

Table 30: Fields on the Phase II Page (Continued)

Field Description

Clear Clears all the data on the display page.

IPsec Statistics
—Provides details of the IPsec statistics.

Counter Displays the ESP (encrypted and decrypted bytes), AH (input and output), and errors
statistics.

Value Displays the values for the respective statistics.

IPsec SA

IPsec Security Associations

ID Index number of the SA.

Gateway/Port IP address of the remote gateway/port.

Algorithm Cryptography scheme used to secure exchanges between peers during the IKE Phase II
negotiations:

• An authentication algorithm used to authenticate exchanges between the peers.

Options are hmac-md5-95 or hmac-sha1-96.

SPI Security parameter index (SPI) identifier. A SA is uniquely identified by an SPI. Each entry
includes the name of the VPN, the remote gateway address, the SPIs for each direction,
the encryption and authentication algorithms, and keys. The peer gateways each have
two SAs, one resulting from each of the two phases of negotiation: Phase I and Phase II.

Life The lifetime of the SA, after which it expires, expressed either in seconds or kilobytes.

Monitoring Specifies if VPN-Liveliness Monitoring has been enabled/disabled. Enabled - ' U ',
Disabled- '—'
 117

Table 30: Fields on the Phase II Page (Continued)

Field Description

Vsys Specifies the root system.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor DHCP Server Bindings | 61

 118

CHAPTER 7

Reports

IN THIS CHAPTER

About Reports Page | 118

About Reports Page

IN THIS SECTION

Overview | 119

Threat Assessment Report | 124

Application and User Usage | 124

Top Talkers | 125

IPS Threat Environment | 125

Viruses Blocked | 125

URL Report | 126

Virus: Top Blocked | 126

Top Firewall Events | 126

Top Firewall Deny Destinations | 126

Top Firewall Denies | 126

Top IPS Events | 126

Top Anti-spam Detected | 127

Top Screen Attackers | 127

Top Screen Victims | 127

Top Screen Hits | 127

Top Firewall Rules | 127

Top Firewall Deny Sources | 127

 119

Top IPS Attack Sources | 127

Top IPS Attack Destinations | 127

Top IPS Rules | 127

Top Web Apps | 128

Top Applications Blocked | 128

Top URLs by User | 128

Top Source Zone by Volume | 128

Top Applications by User | 128

Top Botnet Threats By Source Address via IDP Logs | 128

Top Botnet Threats by Destination Address via IDP Logs | 128

Top Botnet Threats by Threat Severity via IDP Logs | 129

Top Malware Threats by Source Address via IDP Logs | 129

Top Malware Threats by Destination Address via IDP Logs | 129

Top Malware Threats by Threat Severity via IDP Logs | 129

Top Blocked Applications via Webfilter Logs | 129

Top Permitted Application Subcategories by Volume via Webfilter Logs | 130

Top Permitted Application Subcategories by Count via Webfilter Logs | 130

Overview

IN THIS SECTION

Generate Reports | 122

You are here: Monitor > Reports.

Use the Reports menu to generate reports on demand. There are several predefined reports listed in this
page, see Table 31 on page 120. The generated report is displayed in HTML format. You can group
multiple reports and generate a consolidated report.
 120

NOTE: Reports page is available on all the SRX Series devices except the SRX5000 line of
devices.

Logical system and tenant support the reports listed in Table 31 on page 120 only for SRX1500,
SRX4100, SRX4200, and SRX4600.

Table 31: Predefined Group Reports and Supported Users

Report Name Root Logical System Users Tenant Users Support

Threat Assessment Report Yes Yes Yes

Application and User Usage Yes Yes Yes

Top Talkers Yes Yes Yes

IPS Threat Environment Yes Yes No

URL Report Yes Yes Yes

Viruses Blocked Yes Yes No

Virus: Top Blocked Yes Yes No

Top Firewall Events Yes Yes Yes

Top Firewall Deny Destinations Yes Yes Yes

Top Firewall Denies Yes Yes Yes

Top IPS Events Yes Yes No

Top Anti-spam Detected Yes Yes No

 121

Table 31: Predefined Group Reports and Supported Users (Continued)

Report Name Root Logical System Users Tenant Users Support

Top Screen Attackers Yes Yes Yes

Top Screen Victims Yes Yes Yes

Top Screen Hits Yes Yes Yes

Top Firewall Rules Yes Yes Yes

Top Firewall Deny Sources Yes Yes Yes

Top IPS Attack Sources Yes Yes Yes

Top IPS Attack Destinations Yes Yes No

Top IPS Rules Yes Yes No

Top Web Apps Yes Yes No

Top Applications Blocked Yes Yes No

Top URLs by User Yes Yes No

Top Source Zone by Volume Yes Yes Yes

Top Applications by User Yes Yes Yes

Top Botnet Threats By Source Address via IDP Logs Yes Yes No

Top Botnet Threats by Destination Address via IDP Logs Yes Yes No
 122

Table 31: Predefined Group Reports and Supported Users (Continued)

Report Name Root Logical System Users Tenant Users Support

Top Botnet Threats by Threat Severity via IDP Logs Yes Yes No

Top Malware Threats by Source Address via IDP Logs Yes Yes No

Top Malware Threats by Destination Address via IDP Yes Yes No

Logs

Top Malware Threats by Threat Severity via IDP Logs Yes Yes No

Top Blocked Applications via Webfilter Logs Yes Yes No

Top Permitted Application Subcategories by Volume via Yes Yes No

Webfilter Logs

Top Permitted Application Subcategories by Count via Yes Yes No

Webfilter Logs

Generate Reports

To generate a report:

1. Click Reports.

2. Select the predefined report name and click Generate Report.

The Report Title window appears.

NOTE: You can select single or multiple report names or all the predefined report names and
generate a consolidated report. But you cannot generate group and individual reports at the
same time.

3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 32 on page 123.

4. Click Save to save the generated report in the desired location.

 123

A reported is generated. The report includes, the time when it was generated, the table of contents,
and the result (a bar graph, a tabular format, and so on). If there is no data available, the report
shows, No data to display.

Table 32: Generate Report Settings

Field Action

Name Enter a name of the report. Maximum 60 characters.

Customer Name Enter a customer name. Default value is Juniper.

Description Enter a description of the report.

Show Top Use the up and down arrow to select the number of records to display in the report.

Show Details Select an option from the list:

• Top Selected—Displays only the top selected details in the report.

• All—Displays all the details in the report.

NOTE: It may take a while to generate reports, depending on the device data size.

Time Span Select a predefined time span from the list for the report.

From Specify a start date and time (in MM/DD/YYYY and HH:MM:SS 12-hour or AM/PM formats)
to start the report generation.

NOTE: This option is available when you choose Custom for Time Span.

To Specify a start date and time (in MM/DD/YYYY and HH:MM:SS 12-hour or AM/PM formats)
to stop the report generation.

NOTE: This option is available when you choose Custom for Time Span.

Sorting Options
 124

Table 32: Generate Report Settings (Continued)

Field Action

Show Details Click the arrow next to Sorting Options and select one of the options from the list:

• Largest To Smallest—Display reports from largest to smallest details.

• Smallest To Largest—Display reports from smallest to largest details.

Threat Assessment Report

Threat Assessment report contains the following content:

• Executive Summary

• Application Risk Assessment

• Threat & Malware Assessment

• User and Web Access Assessment

The Threat Assessment report displays a new Filename column in the Malware downloaded by User
table. This column helps to identify the malware filename.

Application and User Usage

Application and User Usage report contains the following content:

• Top High Risk Applications by Bandwidth

• Top High Risk Applications By Count

• Top Categories By Bandwidth

• Top Applications By Bandwidth

• Top Categories By Count

• Top Applications By Count

• Top Users Of High Risk Applications By Bandwidth

• Top Users By Bandwidth

• High Risk Applications Allowed Per User

• High Risk Applications Blocked Per User

 125

Top Talkers
Top Talkers report contains the following content:

• Top Source IPs by Bandwidth

• Top Destination IPs by Bandwidth

• Top Source IPs by Session

• Top Destination IPs by Session

• Top Users By Bandwidth

• Top Users By Count

IPS Threat Environment

IPS Threat Environment report contains the following content:

• IPS Attacks by Severity Over Time

• Total IPS Attacks by Severity

• Top IPS Categories Blocked

• Top IPS Attacks Blocked

• Top Targeted Hosts by IP

• Top Targeted Hosts by User

NOTE: IPS Threat Environment report is not supported for tenant users.

Viruses Blocked
Viruses Blocked report contains the following content:

• Total Viruses Blocked Over Time

• Top Viruses Blocked

NOTE: Viruses Blocked is not supported for tenant users.

 126

URL Report
URL Report contains the following content:

• Top URLs by Bandwidth

• Top URLs by Count

• Top URL Categories by Bandwidth

• Top URL Categories by Count

• Total URLs Blocked Over Time

• Top Blocked URLs

• Top Blocked URL Categories by Count

• Users With Most Blocked URLs

Virus: Top Blocked

Virus: Top Blocked report contains Virus: Top Blocked content.

NOTE: Virus: Top Blocked is not supported for tenant users.

Top Firewall Events

Top Firewall Events report contains Top Firewall Events.

Top Firewall Deny Destinations

Top Firewall Deny Destinations report contains Top Firewall Deny Destinations.

Top Firewall Denies

Top Firewall Denies report contains Top Firewall Denies.

Top IPS Events

Top IPS Events report contains Top IPS Events.

NOTE: Top IPS Events is not supported for tenant users.

 127

Top Anti-spam Detected

Top Anti-Spam Detected report Top Anti-spam Detected.

NOTE: Top Anti-spam Detected is not supported for tenant users.

Top Screen Attackers

Top Screen Attackers report contains Top Screen Attackers.

Top Screen Victims

Top Screen Victims report contains Top Screen Victims.

Top Screen Hits

Top Screen Hits report contains Top Screen Hits.

Top Firewall Rules

Top Firewall Rules report contains Top Firewall Rules.

Top Firewall Deny Sources

Top Firewall Deny Sources report contains Top Firewall Deny Sources.

Top IPS Attack Sources

Top IPS Attack Sources report contains Top IPS Attack Sources.

Top IPS Attack Destinations

Top IPS Attack Destinations report contains Top IPS Attack Destinations.

NOTE: Top IPS Attack Destinations is not supported for tenant users.

Top IPS Rules

Top IPS Rules report contains Top IPS Rules.

NOTE: Top IPS Rules is not supported for tenant users.

 128

Top Web Apps

Top Web Apps report contains Top Web Apps.

NOTE: Top Web Apps is not supported for tenant users.

Top Applications Blocked

Top Applications Blocked report contains Top Applications Blocked.

NOTE: Top Applications Blocked is not supported for tenant users.

Top URLs by User

Top URLs by User report contains Top URLs by User.

NOTE: Top URLs by User is not supported for tenant users.

Top Source Zone by Volume

Top Source Zone by Volume report contains Top Source Zone by Volume.

Top Applications by User

Top Applications by User report contains Top Applications by User.

Top Botnet Threats By Source Address via IDP Logs

Top Botnet Threats By Source Address via IDP Logs report contains Top Botnet Threats By Source
Address via IDP Logs.

NOTE: Top Botnet Threats By Source Address via IDP Logs is not supported for tenant users.

Top Botnet Threats by Destination Address via IDP Logs

Top Botnet Threats by Destination Address via IDP Logs report contains Top Botnet Threats by
Destination Address via IDP Logs.
 129

NOTE: Top Botnet Threats by Destination Address via IDP Logs is not supported for tenant
users.

Top Botnet Threats by Threat Severity via IDP Logs

Top Botnet Threats by Threat Severity via IDP Logs report contains Top Botnet Threats by Threat
Severity via IDP Logs.

NOTE: Top Botnet Threats by Threat Severity via IDP Logs is not supported for tenant users.

Top Malware Threats by Source Address via IDP Logs

Top Malware Threats by Source Address via IDP Logs report contains Top Malware Threats by Source
Address via IDP Logs.

NOTE: Top Malware Threats by Source Address via IDP Logs is not supported for tenant users.

Top Malware Threats by Destination Address via IDP Logs

Top Malware Threats by Destination Address via IDP Logs report contains Top Malware Threats by
Destination Address via IDP Logs.

NOTE: Top Malware Threats by Destination Address via IDP Logs is not supported for tenant
users.

Top Malware Threats by Threat Severity via IDP Logs

Top Malware Threats by Threat Severity via IDP Logs report contains Top Malware Threats by Threat
Severity via IDP Logs.

NOTE: Top Malware Threats by Threat Severity via IDP Logs is not supported for tenant users.

Top Blocked Applications via Webfilter Logs

Top Blocked Applications via Webfilter Logs report contains Top Blocked Applications via Webfilter Logs.
 130

NOTE: Top Blocked Applications via Webfilter Logs is not supported for tenant users.

Top Permitted Application Subcategories by Volume via Webfilter Logs

Top Permitted Application Subcategories by Volume via Webfilter Logs report contains Top Permitted
Application Subcategories by Volume via Webfilter Logs.

NOTE: Top Permitted Application Subcategories by Volume via Webfilter Logs is not supported
for tenant users.

Top Permitted Application Subcategories by Count via Webfilter Logs

Top Permitted Application Subcategories by Count via Webfilter Logs report contains Top Permitted
Application Subcategories by Count via Webfilter Logs.

NOTE: Top Permitted Application Subcategories by Count via Webfilter Logs is not supported for
tenant users.
5 PART

Device Administration

Basic Settings | 133

Cluster Management | 152

User Management | 178

Multi Tenancy—Resource Profiles | 185

Multi Tenancy—Interconnect Ports | 194

Multi Tenancy—Logical Systems | 205

Multi Tenancy—Tenants | 220

Certificate Management—Device Certificates | 232

Certificate Management—Trusted Certificate Authority | 244

Certificate Management—Certificate Authority Group | 256

License Management | 262

Security Package Management | 267

ATP Management | 280

Operations | 286

Software Management | 294

Configuration Management | 298

Alarm Management | 304

RPM | 315

Tools | 330

Reset Configuration | 362

 133

CHAPTER 8

Basic Settings

IN THIS CHAPTER

Configure Basic Settings | 133

Configure Basic Settings

You are here: Device Administration > Basic Settings.

Use this page to configure your device basic settings.

You can do the following:

• Save—Saves all the basic settings configuration and returns to the main configuration page.

NOTE: For all the configuration options under Basic Settings:

• Tool tip on the right-side represents different icons for notifications, validation errors, and
successful configuration.

• When you make a configuration change and navigate to a different page without saving it,
a pop-up message is displayed to save the configuration.

• Cancel—Cancels all your entries and returns to the main configuration page.

• Commit—Commits all the basic settings configuration and returns to the main configuration page.

• Expand all—Click the arrow pointing outwards icon to expand all the options.

• Collapse all—Click the arrow pointing inwards to collapse or hide all the options.

Table 33 on page 134 describes the fields on the Basic Settings page.
 134

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page

Field Action

System Identity

Hostname Enter a hostname for the device.

Domain name Enter a domain name to specify the network or

subnetwork to which the device belongs.

Root password Enter a password for the root user.

NOTE: After you have defined a root password, that

password is required when you log in to the J-Web or
the CLI.

Confirm root password Re-enter the password to confirm.

 135

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

DNS servers Select an option to specify the DNS server settings:

• To specify a server that the device can use to

resolve hostnames into addresses:

1. Click + at the top right side of the DNS Servers

table.

2. Enter an IPv4 address of the server.

3. Click the tick mark to save the changes. Else,

click the cancel (X) icon to discard the changes.

• To edit an existing DNS server hostname:

1. Select a DNS server hostname that you want to

edit.

2. Click the pencil icon at the top right side of the

DNS Servers table or right-click on the hostname
and edit the IPv4 address.

3. Click the tick mark to save the changes. Else,

click the cancel (X) icon to discard the changes.

• To remove an existing DNS server hostname, select

it and click the delete icon at the top right side of
the DNS Servers table or right-click on the
hostname and delete it.
 136

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Domain search Select an option:

• To add a domain name:

1. Click + at the top right side of the Domain

Search table.

2. Enter a domain name.

The string must contain an alphanumeric

character and can include underscores, hyphen,
slash and dot. No spaces allowed.

3. Click the tick mark to save the changes. Else,

click the cancel (X) icon to discard the changes.

• To edit an existing domain name:

1. Select a domain name that you want to edit.

2. Click the pencil icon at the top right side of the

Domain Search table or right-click on the domain
name and edit the name.

3. Click the tick mark to save the changes. Else,

click the cancel (X) icon to discard the changes.

• To remove an existing domain name, select it and

click the delete icon at the top right side of the
Domain Search table or right-click on the name and
delete it.

Time

Time zone Select the time zone from the list in which the router
resides.

Time source Select an option from the list to set the system time:
 137

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

NTP Servers—Synchronizes the system time with the

NTP server that you select. Click one of the following
options:

• Add—Click + to add an NTP server. Then, enter the

NTP server name, key, and Routing Instance. Select
an option from the list for Version and Prefer.

• Edit—Select an existing NTP server that you want to

edit and click the pencil icon available at the upper
right of the NTP Server table. You can also right-
click on the NTP server and click Edit Row. Then,
edit the key and version and click the tick mark.

• Delete—Select an existing NTP server that you want

to delete and click the delete icon available at the
upper right of the NTP Server table. You can also
right-click on the NTP server and click Delete Row.
Click Yes to delete the selected server.

Computer—Uses the computer that you are currently

logged into to determine the system time for the
device.

NOTE: When you select this option, the PC time that

will be used is displayed in the Current Date & Time
field.

Manual—Enables you to manually select the date and

time for the device.

Set the date and time using the calendar pick tool and
time fields.

NOTE: After you configure the time manually, the

session will expire. Log in to J-Web.

Device date & time Displays the device date and time.

Current date & time Displays the current date and time.
 138

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Management and Loopback Address

Management address Enter IPv4 address for the device.

Subnet Enter subnet of the IPv4 address.

Loopback address Enter IP address and subnet for the loopback address.

NOTE: If the SRX device does not have a dedicated

management port (fxp0), then Loopback Address and
Subnet are the only options available for the
management access configuration.

Subnet Enter the address, for example, 255.255.255.0. You can

also specify the address prefix.

Specifies the range of logical addresses within the

address space that is assigned to an organization.

Default gateway Enter the default gateway address for IPv4.

System Services

Telnet Select this option to enable telnet.

SSH Select this option to enable SSH connections.

FTP Select this option to enable FTP for secure file transfer.

NETCONF Select this option to enable NETCONF connections.

Junoscript over SSL Select this option to enable Junoscript connections

over SSL.
 139

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Junoscript certificate Select the local certificate for SSL from the list.

Interface Select the interface in order of your preference and

click on the left arrow/right arrow to add.

HTTPS Select this option to enable HTTPS connection settings.

Interface Select the interface in order of your preference and

click on the left arrow/right arrow to add.

HTTPS certificate Specifies the certificate that you want to use to secure
the connection from the HTTPS certificates list when
you enable HTTPs.

Select the HTTPS certificate from the list.

PKI certificate Select the PKI certificate for HTTPS from the list.

NOTE: This option is available only if you select pki-

local-certificate in the HTTPS Certificate options.

Local certificate Select the local certificate for HTTPS from the list.

NOTE: This option is available only if you select local-

certificate in the HTTPS Certificate options.

Web API Select to enable Web API configuration.

Client Select to enable client for the Web API.

 140

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Hostname Provides the address of permitted HTTP/HTTPS

request originators.

To add, click + and enter the IPv4 address of the

permitted HTTP/HTTPS request originator and click
tick mark to save the changes.

To delete, select the hostname and click the delete icon.

Then, click Yes to delete it.

HTTP Select to enable unencrypted HTTP connection

settings.

HTTP port Click top or bottom arrows to select the TCP ports for
incoming HTTP connections.

HTTPs Select to enable encrypted HTTPS connection settings.

HTTPS port Click top or bottom arrows to select the TCP ports for
incoming HTTP connections.
 141

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Certificate type Select to specify the certificate that you want to use to
secure the connection from the HTTPS certificates list
when you enable HTTPs for Web API:

• Default—Selects the default system generated

certificate.

• PKI Certificate—Select a PKI certificate from the list

for HTTPS of Web API.

• File Path:

• File Path—Click Browse and select a certificate

from your desired location. Or click Upload and
upload the selected certificate.

• Certificate—Displays the file path of the

uploaded certificate.

• Certificate Key:

• Browse—Click and select the certificate key

from your desired location.

• Upload—Click and upload the selected

certificate key.

• Certificate Key—Displays the file path of the

uploaded certificate key.

User Select this option to enable user credentials.

Name Enter a username.

Password Enter the user password.

REST API Enable this option to allow RPC execution over HTTP(S)
connection.
 142

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Explorer Select this option to enable REST API explorer.

Control Select this option to enable control the REST API

process.

Allowed sources Provides the source IP address.

Click + and enter the IPv4 address of the source. Then,

click tick mark.

To delete, select an existing address and click the delete

icon. Then, click Yes to delete it.

Connection limit Click top or bottom arrows to select the number of

simultaneous connections.

HTTP Select to enable unencrypted HTTP connections for

REST API.

Address Click + and enter the IPv4 address for the incoming
connections for HTTP of REST API. Then, click tick
mark to add it.

To delete, select an existing address and click the delete

icon. Then, click Yes to delete it.

Port Click top or bottom arrows to select the HTTP port to

accept HTTP connections for REST API.

NOTE: The default port for HTTP of REST API is 3000.

HTTPS Select to enable encrypted HTTPS connections for

REST API.
 143

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Address Click + and enter the IPv4 address for the incoming
connections for HTTPS of REST API. Then, click tick
mark to add it.

To delete, select an existing address and click the delete

icon. Then, click Yes to delete it.

Cipher list Select the Cipher suites in order of your preference and
click on the left arrow or right arrow to add.

Port Click top or bottom arrows to select the HTTPS port to

accept the HTTPS connection of REST API.

NOTE: The default port for HTTPS of REST API is

3443.

Server certificate Select server certificate from the list. See "Import a
Device Certificate" on page 234 to import a device
certificate.
 144

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

CA Profile Select the certificate authority profile for HTTPS of

REST API from the list.

To create Certificate Authority inline:

• Click Create Certificate Authority Profile.

• Enter the following details:

• CA Profile *—Enter the CA profile name.

• CA Identifier *—Enter the CA identifier.

• File Path on Device for Certificate:

• Browse—Click and select the certificate from

your desired location.

• Upload—Click and upload the selected

certificate.

• File Path on Device for Certificate—Displays the

file path of the selected certificate.

• Click OK.

Security Logging

Stream mode logging Select this option to enable logging.

NOTE: The Enable Traffic Logs option is available for

user logical system and tenants.

UTC timestamp Select this option to enable UTC Timestamp for

security log timestamps.
 145

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Log on Select one of the log on types for logging.

• Source Address—Select this option to enter the

source IP address.

• Source Interface—Select this option to select a

source interface from the list.

IP address Enter the source IP address.

NOTE: This option is available if you select the log on

type as Source Address.

Format Specifies the format in which the logs are stored.

Select a format in which the logs are stored from the

list.

• binary—Binary encoded text to conserve resources.

• SD-Syslog—Structured system log file.

• Syslog—Traditional system log file.

By default, None logging format is selected.

Transport protocol Select an option from the list to specify the type of
logging transport protocol:

• TCP—Select this option to set the transport protocol

to TCP.

• UDP—Select this option to set the transport

protocol to UDP.

• TLS—Select this option to set the transport protocol

to TLS.

By default, None is selected.

 146

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Connections Select the TCP or TLS connections for logging using up

and down arrows.

NOTE: This option is available if you select the

transport protocol option as TCP or TLS.

TLS profile Select a TLS profile from the list.

NOTE: This option is available if you select the

transport protocol option as TLS.
 147

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Syslog server Enables you to configure syslog servers. You can

configure a maximum of three syslog servers.

Perform one of the following tasks:

1. To create syslog server, click +, enter the following

details and then click OK.

• Name—Enter the name of the new stream

configuration.

• Save At—Select the location from the list to save

the stream.

• Type—Select a format in which the logs are

stored from the list.

The log types are:

• Structure

• Standard

• Web

• Host—Enter the IP address for the stream host

name.

2. To edit an existing syslog server, select it and click

the pencil icon. Then, edit the saving mode,
streaming type, and host in the Edit Syslog page and
click OK.

3. To delete an existing syslog server, select it and click

the delete icon.

On-box reporting Enable this option to generate on-box reports.

NOTE: We recommend you use Stream mode logging

to syslog server.

SNMP
 148

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Contact information Enter any contact information for the administrator of

the system (such as name and phone number).

System description Enter any information that describes the system.

Local engine ID Enter the MAC address of Ethernet management port

0.

Specifies the administratively unique identifier of an

SNMPv3 engine for system identification. The local
engine ID contains a prefix and a suffix. The prefix is
formatted according to specifications defined in RFC
3411. The suffix is defined by the local engine ID.
Generally, the local engine ID suffix is the MAC address
of Ethernet management port 0.

System location Enter any location information for the system (lab name
or rack name, for example).

System name override Specifies the option to override the system hostname.

Enter the name of the system.

Community Specifies the name and authorization for the SNMP

community.

• Click +.

• Enter the name of the community being added.

• Select the desired authorization (either read-only or

read-write) from the list.

Click tick mark.

Trap groups
 149

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Name Click + to add a trap group.

Enter the SNMP trap group being configured.

Categories Select trap categories to add to the trap group being

configured. The options available are:

• Authentication

• Chassis

• Configuration

• Link

• Remote operations

• RMON alarm

• Routing

• Startup

• CRRP events

Targets Specifies one or more IP addresses that specify the

systems to receive SNMP traps that are generated by
the trap group being configured.

Click +, enter the target IP address for SNMP trap

group, and click tick mark.
 150

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Health monitoring Enable the option to check the SNMP health monitor
on the device. The health monitor periodically checks
the following key indicators of device health:

• Percentage of file storage used

• Percentage of Routing Engine CPU used

• Percentage of Routing Engine memory used

• Percentage of memory used for each system

process

• Percentage of CPU used by the forwarding process

• Percentage of memory used for temporary storage

by the forwarding process

Interval Specifies the sampling frequency interval, in seconds,

over which the key health indicators are sampled and
compared with the rising and falling thresholds. For
example, if you configure the interval as 100 seconds,
the values are checked every 100 seconds.

Select a value from 1 through 24855. The default value

is 300 seconds.

Rising threshold Specifies the value at which you want SNMP to

generate an event (trap and system log message) when
the value of a sampled indicator is increasing. For
example, if the rising threshold is 90, SNMP generates
an event when the value of any key indicator reaches or
exceeds 90 seconds.

Select a value from 1 through 100. The default value is

90 seconds.
 151

Table 33: Fields on the Basic Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Falling threshold Specifies a value at which you want SNMP to generate

an event (trap and system log message) when the value
of a sampled indicator is decreasing. For example, if the
falling threshold is 80, SNMP generates an event when
the value of any key indicator falls back to 80 seconds
or less.

Select a value 0 through 100. The default value is 80

seconds.

Redundant PSU
NOTE: SRX380 devices support power supply redundancy for power management.

Power Supply 0 Displays if the power supply is present or not.

Power Supply 1 Displays if the redundant power supply is present or

not.

PSU Redundancy Enable this option to manage power on the SRX380

device.

NOTE: This option is available only when the device is

in the standalone mode.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Reset Configuration and Rerun Setup Wizard | 362

 152

CHAPTER 9

Cluster Management

IN THIS CHAPTER

Configure Cluster (HA) Setup | 152

About the Cluster Configuration Page | 167

Edit Node Settings | 170

Add an HA Cluster Interface | 171

Edit an HA Cluster Interface | 173

Delete HA Cluster Interface | 173

Add a Redundancy Group | 174

Edit a Redundancy Group | 176

Delete Redundancy Group | 177

Configure Cluster (HA) Setup

Before you begin:

• Establish a chassis cluster connection between the two units, ensure that you have physical access to
both the devices.

• You must configure the two devices separately.

• Your other unit must be on the same hardware and software version as the current unit.

• Note that both units are erased and rebooted, after which all existing data is irretrievable. You have
the option to save a backup copy of your configuration before rebooting.

You are here: Device Administration > Cluster Management > Cluster Configuration.

The Junos OS provides high availability on SRX Series device by using chassis clustering. SRX Series
Services Gateways can be configured to operate in cluster mode, where a pair of devices can be
connected together and configured to operate like a single node, providing device, interface, and service
level redundancy.
 153

A chassis cluster can be configured in the following modes:

• Active/passive mode: In active/passive mode, transit traffic passes through the primary node while
the backup node is used only in the event of a failure. When a failure occurs, the backup device
becomes primary and takes over all forwarding tasks.

• Active/active mode: In active/active mode, has transit traffic passing through both nodes of the
cluster all of the time.

NOTE: In the J-Web cluster (HA) setup, you can only configure active/passive mode (RG1).

You can set up chassis cluster using a simplified Cluster (HA) Mode wizard when the standalone SRX
Series devices are in factory default. You can also create HA using the same wizard from Device
Administration > Reset Configuration when the devices are already in the network.

NOTE: In the factory default settings, a warning message is displayed in SRX300, SRX320,
SRX320-POE, SRX340, SRX345, and SRX380 devices to disconnect the ports between the two
nodes. This is to avoid displaying the details of the other nodes.

Device Administration > Cluster Management > Cluster Configuration

To set up cluster (HA):

1. Select Cluster (HA) Setup.

NOTE: For the secondary node to be set up or if the primary and secondary nodes are not
already connected, click Proceed. If you want to set up the primary node, then disconnect
back to back connected ports between the two nodes and click Refresh to reload the
browser.

The Setup Chassis Cluster wizard page appears. This wizard guides you through configuring chassis
cluster on a two-unit cluster.

Select the unit

The welcome page shows the possible chassis cluster connections that you can configure for your
SRX Series device. It shows a graphical representation for primary unit (Node 0) and secondary unit
(Node 1) and guides you to first configure the primary unit (node 0).
2. Select Yes, this is the primary unit (Node 0). to select the unit.
 154

NOTE: If you have already configured the primary node settings, then select No, this is the
secondary unit (Node 1) and follow the instructions from Step 8.

3. Click Next.
4. To configure the primary unit, complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in
Table 34 on page 154.
Table 34: Primary Unit Configuration

Field Description Action

System Identity

Node 0 Cluster ID Specifies the number by which a Enter a number from 1 through
cluster is identified. 255. By default, 1 is assigned.

Node 0 Priority Specifies the device priority for Enter a number from 1 through
being elected to be the primary 255. By default, 200 is assigned.
device in the VRRP group.

Node 1 Priority Specifies the device priority for Enter a number from 1 through
being elected to be the primary 255. By default, 100 is assigned.
device in the VRRP group.

Node 0 Host Name Specifies the device host name of By default, host name is assigned.
the node 0. For example, SRX1500-01.

Node 1 Host Name Specifies the device host name of By default, host name is assigned.
the node 1. For example, SRX1500-02.

Allow root user SSH login Allows users to log in to the Enable this option.
device as root through SSH.

Management Interface

IPv4 Address
NOTE: Make a note of the IPv4 address as you need it to access the settings after you commit the
configuration.
 155

Table 34: Primary Unit Configuration (Continued)

Field Description Action

Node 0 Management IPv4 Specifies the management IPv4 Enter a valid IPv4 address for the
address of node 0. management interface.

Node 0 Subnet Mask Specifies subnet mask for IPv4 Enter a subnet mask for the IPv4
address. address.

Node 1 Management IPv4 Specifies the management IPv4 Enter a valid IPv4 address for the
address of node 1. management interface.

Node 1 Subnet Mask Specifies subnet mask for IPv4 Enter a subnet mask for the IPv4
address. address.

Static Route IP Defines how to route to the Enter an IPv4 address for the
other network devices. static route.

Static Route Subnet Specifies the subnet for the static Enter a subnet mask for the static
route IPv4 address. route IPv4 address.

Next Hop IPv4 Specifies next hop gateway for Enter a valid IPv4 address for the
the IPv4 address. next hop.

IPv6 Address (Optional)

Node 0 Management IPv6 Specifies the management IPv6 Enter a valid IPv6 address for the
address of node 0. management interface.

Node 0 Subnet Prefix Specifies subnet prefix for IPv6 Enter a subnet prefix for the IPv6
address. address.

Node 1 Management IPv6 Specifies the management IPv6 Enter a valid IPv6 address for the
address of node 1. management interface.

Node 1 Subnet Prefix Specifies subnet prefix for IPv6 Enter a subnet prefix for the IPv6
address. address.
 156

Table 34: Primary Unit Configuration (Continued)

Field Description Action

Static Route IPv6 Defines how to route to the Enter an IPv6 address for the
other network devices. static route.

Static Route Subnet Prefix Specifies the subnet prefix for Enter a subnet prefix for the static
the static route IPv6 address. route IPv6 address.

Next Hop IPv6 Specifies next hop gateway for Enter a valid IPv6 address for the
the IPv6 address. next hop.

Device Password

Root Password Specifies root password of the Enter root password if not already
device. configured for the device.

Re-Enter Password - Reenter the root password.

Control Ports
NOTE: This option is available only for SRX5600 and SRX5800 devices.
 157

Table 34: Primary Unit Configuration (Continued)

Field Description Action

Dual Link Provides redundant link for By default, this option is disabled.
failover.
Once you enable this option, the
following fields appear:

• Link 1

• Node 0 FPC—Select an
option from the list.

• Node 0 Port—Select an
option from the list.

• Node 1 FPC.

• Node 1 Port.

• Link 2 (Optional)

• Node 0 FPC—Select an
option from the list.

• Node 0 Port—Select an
option from the list.

• Node 1 FPC.

• Node 1 Port.

Node 0 FPC Specifies FPC slot number on Select an option from the list.
which to configure the control
port.

Node 0 Port Specifies port number on which Select an option from the list.
to configure the control port.

Node 1 FPC Optional. Specifies FPC slot Select an option from the list.
number on which to configure
the control port.
 158

Table 34: Primary Unit Configuration (Continued)

Field Description Action

Node 1 Port Optional. Specifies port number Select an option from the list.
on which to configure the control
port.

Save Backup (Optional)

Save Backup (to client) Saves backup of the current Enable the option to save the
configuration to the client local backup file of your settings.
machine.

NOTE: When restarting the

primary unit, J-Web deletes the
existing configuration to
configure chassis cluster.
Therefore, it is recommended
that you save a backup file of
your current settings before
committing the new
configuration.

5. Click Reboot and Continue to restart the primary unit to configure chassis cluster.
6. After rebooting the primary unit (node 0), connect to the management port of the secondary unit to
switch to the secondary unit.
7. Click Refresh if the management IP address of the secondary unit is same as the existing device
default IP address. If not, open a new browser with the new secondary device IP address.
8. To configure the secondary unit, complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in
Table 35 on page 158.
Table 35: Secondary Unit Configuration

Field Description Action

Secondary Unit Information

 159

Table 35: Secondary Unit Configuration (Continued)

Field Description Action

Cluster ID Specifies the number by which a Enter a number from 1 through

cluster is identified. 255. By default, 1 is assigned.

NOTE: Cluster ID must be same

for both primary and secondary
units.

Device Password

Root Password Specifies root password of the Enter new root password.
device.

Re-Enter Password - Reenter the root password.

Control Ports
NOTE: This option is available only for SRX5600 and SRX5800 devices.
 160

Table 35: Secondary Unit Configuration (Continued)

Field Description Action

Dual Link Provides redundant link for By default, this option is disabled.
failover.
Once you enable dual link option,
the following fields appear:

• Link 1

• Node 0 FPC—Select an
option from the list.

• Node 0 Port—Select an
option from the list.

• Node 1 FPC.

• Node 1 Port.

• Link 2 (Optional)

• Node 0 FPC—Select an
option from the list.

• Node 0 Port—Select an
option from the list.

• Node 1 FPC.

• Node 1 Port.

Node 0 FPC Specifies FPC slot number on Select an option from the list.
which to configure the control
port.

Node 0 Port Specifies port number on which Select an option from the list.
to configure the control port.

Node 1 FPC Optional. Specifies FPC slot Select an option from the list.
number on which to configure
the control port.
 161

Table 35: Secondary Unit Configuration (Continued)

Field Description Action

Node 1 Port Optional. Specifies port number Select an option from the list.
on which to configure the control
port.

Save Backup (Optional)

Save Backup (to client) Saves backup of the current Enable the option to save the
configuration to the client local backup file of your settings.
machine.

NOTE: When restarting the

secondary unit, J-Web deletes
the existing configuration to
configure chassis cluster.
Therefore, it is recommended
that you save a backup file of
your current settings before
committing the new
configuration.

9. Click Reboot and Continue to restart the secondary unit to configure chassis cluster.
10. After rebooting the secondary unit (node 1), launch the J-Web UI using primary unit management
IP address.
11. Navigate to Cluster Management > Cluster (HA) Setup.
The Cluster Wizard page will open and displays the Cluster Status step.

NOTE:

• J-Web uses show chassis cluster status to verify control link status. Number on the link
signifies if it is single (1) or dual links (2).

The control and fabric link status colors are as follows:

• Green—Indicates that the links are up.

• Red—Indicates that the links are down.

 162

• Orange—Indicates that one of the dual links is up.

• Grey—Indicates that the fabric link is not configured.

• If chassis cluster is not connected, then the connection is failed and all possible failure
reasons will be displayed. For information on troubleshooting tips, see Juniper
Knowledge Search.

• You can configure fabric link only after the chassis cluster is formed. For the first time
configuration, the chassis status displays as The fabric ports links is not yet configured.

12. To configure fabric link, complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 36
on page 162.
Table 36: Fabric Link Configuration

Field Description Action

Fabric Link Details

Dual Link Provides redundant link for Enable this option.

failover.

Link 1

Fabric 0 Specifies the fabric port link for Select an interface from the list.
node 0.

Fabric 1 Specifies the fabric port link for -

node 1.

Link 2 (Optional)

Fabric 0 Specifies the secondary fabric Select an interface from the list.
port link for node 0.

Fabric 1 Specifies the secondary fabric -

port link for node 1.

13. Click Configure Link.

14. Click Next.
 163

15. To add redundant Ethernet (reth) interface, click + and complete the configuration according to the
guidelines provided in Table 37 on page 163.

NOTE: You can also use the pencil icon to edit the reth interface and delete icon to delete
the reth interfaces.

Table 37: Add Reth Interface

Field Description Action

RETH Name Specifies the reth interface name. Enter a name for reth
interface.

Node 0 Interfaces Specifies the list of Node 0 interfaces. Select an interface from
the Available column and
move it to the Selected
column.

Node 1 Specifies the Node 1 interfaces based on the node 0 -

interfaces.

Advance Settings

LACP Configuration Optional. Configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol -

(LACP).

LACP Mode Optional. Specifies the LACP mode. Select an option from the
list.
Available options are:

• active—Initiate transmission of LACP packets.

• passive—Respond to LACP packets.

• periodic—Interval for periodic transmission of LACP

packets.
 164

Table 37: Add Reth Interface (Continued)

Field Description Action

Periodicity Optional. Specifies the interval at which the interfaces Select an option from the
on the remote side of the link transmit link aggregation list.
control protocol data units (PDUs).

Available options are:

• fast—Transmit link aggregation control PDUs every

second.

• slow—Transmit link aggregation control PDUs every

30 seconds.

Description Optional. Specifies the description for LACP. Enter a description.

VLAN Tagging Optional. Specifies whether or not to enable VLAN Enable this option.
tagging.

Redundancy Group Specifies the number of the redundancy group that the -
reth interface belongs to.

16. Click Save.

Virtual reth interface is created.
17. To add a logical interface to the new virtual reth interfaces, complete the configuration according to
the guidelines provided in Table 38 on page 164.
Table 38: Add Reth Logical Interface

Field Description Action

General

Reth Interface Name Specifies the name of the reth Enter a name for the reth
interface. interface.

Logical Interface Unit Specifies the logical interface Enter the logical interface unit.
unit.
 165

Table 38: Add Reth Logical Interface (Continued)

Field Description Action

Description Specifies the description of the Enter the description.

reth interface.

VLAN ID Optional. Specifies the VLAN ID. Enter the VLAN ID.

IPv4 Address

IPv4 Address Specifies the IPv4 address. Click + and enter a valid IP
address.

Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask for Enter a valid subnet mask.
IPv4 address.

IPv6 Address (Optional)

IPv6 Address Specifies the IPv6 address. Enter a valid IP address.

Prefix Length Specifies the number of bits set Enter the prefix length.
in the subnet mask.

18. Click OK.

19. To configure zones, complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 39 on
page 166.

NOTE:

• With factory default configuration, trust and untrust zones are displayed by default.

• You can edit the security zone, add new zones, and delete the newly added zones. You
will receive an error message while committing if you try to delete a default zone. This is
because, the default zones are referenced in the security policies.

• You can also edit zone description, application tracking, source identity log, interfaces,
system services, protocols, and traffic control options.
 166

Table 39: Create Zones

Field Description Action

General Information

Name Specifies the name of the zone. Enter a name for the zone.

Description Specifies a description for the zone. Enter a description for the zone.

Application Enables application tracking (AppTrack) to collect Enable this option.

Tracking statistics for the application usage on the device,
and when the session closes

Source Identity Specifies the source-identity-log parameter as Enable this option.

Log part of the configuration for a zone to enable it to
trigger user identity logging when that zone is
used as the source zone (from-zone) in a security
policy.

Interfaces

Interfaces Specifies the list of reth interfaces available. Select an interface from the
Available column and move it to
the Selected column.

System Services

Except Drops the selected services. Enable this option if you want to
drop the selected services.

Services Specify the types of incoming system service Select a service from the
traffic that can reach the device for all interfaces Available column and move it to
in a zone. the Selected column.

Protocols

Except Drops the selected protocols. Enable this option if you want to
drop the selected protocols.
 167

Table 39: Create Zones (Continued)

Field Description Action

Protocols Specify the types of routing protocol traffic that Select a protocol from the
can reach the device on a per-interface basis. Available column and move it to
the Selected column.

Traffic Control Options

TCP Reset Specifies the device to send a TCP segment with Enable this option.
the RST (reset) flag set to 1 (one) in response to a
TCP segment with any flag other than SYN set
and that does not belong to an existing session.

20. Click OK.

21. Click Finish.
A cluster setup success message appears.

If you click the Cluster (HA) Setup menu again, a cluster setup success message appears, and you
can click Cluster Configuration to view and edit the chassis cluster configuration.

NOTE: If the chassis cluster configuration fails after you click Finish, then edit the
configuration as required and commit the changes again.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Cluster Configuration Page | 167

About the Cluster Configuration Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 168

 168

Field Descriptions | 168

You are here: Device Administration > Cluster Configuration.

Use this page to add, edit, or delete chassis cluster configuration.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Edit Node settings. See "Edit Node Settings" on page 170.

• Add an HA cluster interface. See "Add an HA Cluster Interface" on page 171.

• Edit an HA cluster interface. See "Edit an HA Cluster Interface" on page 173.

• Delete HA cluster interface. See "Delete HA Cluster Interface" on page 173.

• Add a redundancy group. See "Add a Redundancy Group" on page 174.

• Edit a redundancy group. See "Edit a Redundancy Group" on page 176.

• Delete redundancy group. See "Delete Redundancy Group" on page 177.

Field Descriptions

Table 40 on page 168 and Table 41 on page 169 describes the fields on the Cluster Configuration page.

Table 40: Fields on the Node Settings Page

Field Description

Node ID Displays the node ID.

Cluster ID Displays the cluster ID configured for the node.

Host Name Displays the name of the node.

 169

Table 40: Fields on the Node Settings Page (Continued)

Field Description

Backup Router Displays the IP address used while booting.

Management Interface Displays the management interface of the node.

IP Address Displays the management IP address of the node.

Status Displays the state of the redundancy group.

• Primary–Redundancy group is active.

• Secondary–Redundancy group is passive.

Table 41: Fields on the HA Cluster Settings Page

Field Action

Interfaces

Global Settings To configure the global settings:

1. Click Global Settings at the upper right side of the Interfaces table.

The Global Settings window appears.

2. Enter the number of redundant Ethernet (reth) interfaces allowed.

Range is 1 through 128.

3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Name Displays the physical interface name.

Member Interfaces/IP Displays the member interface name or IP address configured for an interface.
Address

Redundancy Group Displays the redundancy group.

 170

Table 41: Fields on the HA Cluster Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Redundancy Group

Group Displays the redundancy group identification number.

Preempt Displays the selected Preempt option.

• True–Primary role can be preempted based on priority.

• False–Primary role cannot be preempt based on priority.

Gratuitous ARP Count Displays the number of gratuitous ARP requests that a newly elected primary device
in a chassis cluster sends out to announce its presence to the other network devices.

Node Priority Displays the assigned priority for the redundancy group on that node. The eligible
node with the highest priority is elected as primary for the redundant group.

Edit Node Settings

You are here: Device Administration > Cluster Configuration.

To edit node settings:

1. Select a node setting that you want to edit on the Cluster Configuration page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Node Settings page appears with editable fields.

Table 42: Fields on the Edit Node Settings Page

Field Description

Node Settings

Host Name Enter the name of the host.

 171

Table 42: Fields on the Edit Node Settings Page (Continued)

Field Description

Backup Router Enter the backup router address to be used during failover.

Destination

IP Enter the destination IP address.

Click + to add the destination IP address or select an existing IP address and click X to delete it.

Interface

Interface Select an interface available for the router from the list.

NOTE: You can add and edit two interfaces for each fabric link.

IP Enter the interface IP address.

Add Click + to add the interface.

Delete Select one or more existing interfaces and click X to delete it.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Cluster Configuration Page | 167

Add an HA Cluster Interface

You are here: Device Administration > Cluster Configuration.

To add an HA cluster interface:

1. Click + on the upper right side of the Cluster Configuration page.

The Add HA Cluster Interface page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 43 on page 172.
 172

3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 43: Fields on the Add HA Cluster Interface Page

Field Action

Fabric Link

Fabric Link 0 (fab0)

Interface Enter the interface IP address for fabric link 0 and click + to add it.

Select an existing interface and click X to delete the interface.

Fabric Link 1 (fab1)

Interface Enter the interface IP address for fabric link 1 and click + to add it.

Select an existing interface and click X to delete the interface.

Redundant Ethernet

Interface Enter the logical interface. This specifies a logical interface consisting of two physical
Ethernet interfaces, one on each chassis.

IP Enter redundant Ethernet IP address.

Redundancy Group Select one of the redundancy group from the list. Else, enter a redundancy group.

lacp Select an option from list:

• active—Initiate transmission of LACP packets.

• passive—Respond to LACP packets.

periodic Select an option from list for periodic transmission of LACP packets. The options are fast or
slow.

+ Click + to add the redundant Ethernet configuration.

 173

Table 43: Fields on the Add HA Cluster Interface Page (Continued)

Field Action

X Select one or more existing redundant Ethernet configurations and click X to delete it.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit an HA Cluster Interface | 173

Delete HA Cluster Interface | 173
Add a Redundancy Group | 174

Edit an HA Cluster Interface

You are here: Device Administration > Cluster Configuration.

To edit a HA cluster interface:

1. Select an existing HA cluster interface that you want to edit on the Cluster Configuration page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit HA Cluster Interface page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options,
see "Add an HA Cluster Interface" on page 171.
3. Click Save to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Cluster Configuration Page | 167

Delete HA Cluster Interface | 173

Delete HA Cluster Interface

You are here: Device Administration > Cluster Configuration.

To delete HA cluster interface:

 174

1. Select one or more existing HA cluster interfaces that you want to edit on the Cluster Configuration
page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the HA cluster interface.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add an HA Cluster Interface | 171

Edit an HA Cluster Interface | 173

Add a Redundancy Group

You are here: Device Administration > Cluster Configuration.

To add a redundancy group:

1. Click + on the upper right side of the Cluster Configuration page.

The Add Redundancy Group page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 44 on page 174.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 44: Fields on the Add Redundancy Group Page

Field Action

Redundancy Group Enter the redundancy group name.

Allow preemption of Select the check box to allow a node with a better priority to initiate a failover for a
primaryship redundancy group.

NOTE: By default, this feature is disabled. When disabled, a node with a better priority
does not initiate a redundancy group failover (unless some other factor, such as faulty
network connectivity identified for monitored interfaces, causes a failover).
 175

Table 44: Fields on the Add Redundancy Group Page (Continued)

Field Action

Gratuitous ARP Count Enter a value. The range is 1 through 16. The default is 4.

This specifies the number of gratuitous Address Resolution Protocol requests that a
newly elected primary sends out on the active redundant Ethernet interface child links
to notify network devices of a change in primary role on the redundant Ethernet
interface links.

node0 priority Enter the node priority number as 0 for a redundancy group.

node1 priority Enter the node priority number as 1 for a redundancy group.

Interface Monitor

Interface Select an interface from the list.

Weight Enter a value to specify the weight for the interface to be monitored. The range is
from 1 through 125.

+ Click + to add the interface monitor configuration.

X Select one or more existing interfaces and click X to delete them.

IP Monitoring

Weight Enter a value to specify the weight for IP monitoring. The range is 0 through 225.

Threshold Enter a value to specify the global threshold for IP monitoring. The range is 0 through
225.

Retry Count Enter a value to specify the number of retries needed to declare reachability failure.
The range is 5 through 15.

Retry Interval Enter a value to specify the time interval in seconds between retries. The range is 1
through 30.
 176

Table 44: Fields on the Add Redundancy Group Page (Continued)

Field Action

IPv4 Addresses to be monitored

IP Enter an IPv4 address to be monitored for reachability.

You select an existing IP address and can click X to delete it.

Weight Enter a value to specify the weight for the redundancy group interface to be
monitored.

Interface Enter a value to specify the logical interface to monitor this IP address

Secondary IP Address Enter the secondary IP address for monitoring packets on a secondary link.

+ Click + to add the IPv4 Addresses to be monitored configuration.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Redundancy Group | 176

Delete Redundancy Group | 177
About the Cluster Configuration Page | 167

Edit a Redundancy Group

You are here: Device Administration > Cluster Configuration.

To edit a redundancy group:

1. Select an existing redundancy group that you want to edit on the Cluster Configuration page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Redundancy Group page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options,
see "Add a Redundancy Group" on page 174.
3. Click Save to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.
 177

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Redundancy Group | 177

About the Cluster Configuration Page | 167

Delete Redundancy Group

You are here: Device Administration > Cluster Configuration.

To delete redundancy groups:

1. Select one or more existing redundancy groups that you want to edit on the Cluster Configuration
page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the redundancy group.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Redundancy Group | 174

Edit a Redundancy Group | 176
 178

CHAPTER 10

User Management

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the User Management Page | 178

Add a User | 182

Edit a User | 183

Delete User | 184

About the User Management Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 178

Field Descriptions | 179

You are here: Device Administration > User Management.

Using this page, you can configure user details, authentication methods, and passwords.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a user. See "Add a User" on page 182.

• Edit a user. See "Edit a User" on page 183.

• Delete a user. See "Delete User" on page 184.

 179

Field Descriptions

Table 45 on page 179 describes the fields on the User Management page.

Table 45: Fields on the User Management Page

Field Description

User Details

User Details Provides the users details to the device’s local

database. The options available are:

• Add

• Edit

• Delete

• Search

• Filter

Authentication Methods

Authentication Method And Order Enable authentication methods and drag and drop to
change the authentication order. The options available
are:

• Password

• RADIUS Servers

• TACACS+Servers

RADIUS Servers
 180

Table 45: Fields on the User Management Page (Continued)

Field Description

RADIUS Servers Specifies the details of RADIUS servers.

Click Configure.

To add a new RADIUS server, click +. Then enter the

details specified below and click OK.

• IP Address—Enter the server’s 32–bit IP address.

• Password—Enter the secret password for the

server.

• Confirm Password—Re-enter the secret password

for the server.

• Server Port—Enter an appropriate port.

• Source Address—Enter the source IP address of the

server.

• Time out—Specify the amount of time (in seconds)

the device should wait for a response from the
server.

• Retry Attempts—Specify the number of times that

the server should try to verify the user’s
credentials.

To delete an existing RADIUS server, select it and click

Delete.

TACACS
 181

Table 45: Fields on the User Management Page (Continued)

Field Description

TACACS Servers Specifies the details of TACACS servers.

Click Configure.

To add a new TACACS server, click +. Then enter the

details specified below and click OK.

• IP Address—Enter the server’s 32–bit IP address.

• Password—Enter the secret password for the

server.

• Confirm Password—Re-enter the secret password

for the server.

• Server Port—Enter an appropriate port.

• Source IP Address—Enter the source IP address of

the server.

• Time out—Specify the amount of time (in seconds)

the device should wait for a response from the
server.

To delete an existing TACACS server, select it and click

Delete.

Password Settings
NOTE: J-Web interface does not support configuring the number of characters by which the new password
should be different from the existing password.

Minimum Reuse Click top or bottom arrow to specify the minimum

number of old passwords that you want to use. Range:
1-20.

Maximum Lifetime Click top or bottom arrow to specify the maximum

lifetime of your password in days. Range: 30-365.

Minimum Lifetime Click top or bottom arrow to specify the minimum

lifetime of your password in days. Range: 1-30.
 182

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a User | 182

Edit a User | 183
Delete User | 184

Add a User

You are here: Device Administration > User Management.

To add a user:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the User Details page.
The Create User page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 46 on page 182.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 46: Fields on the Add User Page

Field Description

Username Enter a unique name for the user. Do not include spaces, colons, or commas in the
username.

Login ID Enter a unique ID for the user.

Range: 100 through 64000.

Full Name Enter the user’s full name. If the full name contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks. Do
not include colons or commas.

Password Enter a login password for the user. The login password must meet the following criteria:

• The password must be at least 6 characters long.

• You can include most character classes in a password (alphabetic, numeric, and special
characters), except control characters.

Confirm password Reenter the login password for the user.

 183

Table 46: Fields on the Add User Page (Continued)

Field Description

Role Select the user’s access privilege from the following options:

• super-user

• operator

• read-only

• unauthorized

• lsys

• tenant

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the User Management Page | 178

Edit a User | 183
Delete User | 184

Edit a User

You are here: Device Administration > User Management.

To edit a user:

1. Select an existing user profile that you want to edit on the User Profiles page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit User page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add a
User" on page 182.
3. Click Save to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.
 184

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the User Management Page | 178

Add a User | 182
Edit a User | 183

Delete User

You are here: Device Administration > User Management.

To delete users:

1. Select one or more users that you want to delete from the User Profile page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the User Management Page | 178

Add a User | 182
Edit a User | 183
 185

CHAPTER 11

Multi Tenancy—Resource Profiles

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Resource Profiles Page | 185

Global Settings | 187

Add a Resource Profile | 188

Edit a Resource Profile | 192

Delete Resource Profile | 192

About the Resource Profiles Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 185

Field Descriptions | 187

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Resource Profiles.

NOTE: This menu is supported for only SRX4000 line of devices, SRX5000 line of devices and
SRX1500 devices.

You can view Resource profile for logical systems. Resource profiles are mandatory for creating logical
systems.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

 186

• Global Settings. See "Global Settings" on page 187.

• Create a resource profile. See "Add a Resource Profile" on page 188.

• Edit a resource profile. See "Edit a Resource Profile" on page 192.

• Delete a resource profile. See "Delete Resource Profile" on page 192.

• View the details of a resource profile—To do this, select the resource profile for which you want to
view the details and follow the available options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Right-click on the selected resource profile and select Detailed View.

• Mouse over to the left of the selected resource profile and click Detailed View.

• Filter the resource profiles based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top right-
hand corner of the Resource Profiles table. The columns in the grid change to accept filter options.
Type the filter options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the resource profiles table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns icon in
the top right corner of the Resource Profiles table and select the options you want to view or
deselect the options you want to hide on the page.

• Advance search for resource profiles. To do this, use the search text box present above the table grid.
The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. In the search text box, when you
hover over the icon, it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search string,
the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

NOTE: You can search only the resource profile name.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a search criteria, only one character is
deleted.
 187

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

Field Descriptions

Table 47 on page 187 describes the fields on the Resource Profiles page.

Table 47: Fields on the Resource Profiles Page

Field Description

Profile Name Displays the resource (security) profile names.

Configured Resource Displays the configured resource(s).

Logical Systems/Tenants Displays the logical system or tenants created.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Global Settings | 187

Add a Resource Profile | 188
Edit a Resource Profile | 192
Delete Resource Profile | 192

Global Settings

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Resource Profiles.

To add global settings:

1. Click the Global Settings on the upper right side of the Resource Profiles page.
The Global Settings page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 48 on page 188.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 188

Table 48: Fields on the Global Settings page

Field Action

Enable CPU Enable or disable the CPU limit.

limit

CPU Target Specify the targeted CPU utilization allowed for the whole system (0 through 100 percent).

Set a CPU target. You can enable disable this option to set the value. This will be applicable to
all the logical system resource profiles. If you set 50 % here, then none of the profile(s) can
have a value more than this and all the profiles should share this 50% of the CPU.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Resource Profiles Page | 185

Add a Resource Profile | 188
Edit a Resource Profile | 192
Delete Resource Profile | 192

Add a Resource Profile

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Resource Profiles.

To add a resource profile:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Resource Profile page.
The Add Resource Profile page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 49 on page 188.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 49: Fields on the Add Resource Profile Page

Field Description

General
 189

Table 49: Fields on the Add Resource Profile Page (Continued)

Field Description

Profile Name Enter a name of the security profile.

The string must contain an alphanumeric character and can include underscores; no
spaces allowed; 31 characters maximum.

IPS Policy Select the IPS policy from the list.

Resource Allocation

nat-pat-portnum Specify the maximum quantity and the reserved quantity of ports for the logical system
as part of its security profile.

dslite-softwire- Specify the number of IPv6 dual-stack lite (DS-Lite) softwire initiators that can connect
initiator to the softwire concentrator configured in either a user logical system or the primary
logical system.

cpu Specify the percentage of CPU utilization that is always available to a logical system.

appfw-rule Specify the number of application firewall rule configurations that a primary
administrator can configure for a primary logical system or user logical system when the
security profile is bound to the logical systems.

nat-interface-port-ol Specify the number of application firewall rule set configurations that a primary
administrator can configure for a primary logical system or user logical system when the
security profile is bound to the logical systems.

nat-rule-referenced- Specify the security NAT interface port overloading the quota of a logical system.
prefix

nat-port-ol-ipnumber Specify the number of NAT port overloading IP number configurations that user logical
system administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for their
logical systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.
 190

Table 49: Fields on the Add Resource Profile Page (Continued)

Field Description

nat-cone-binding Specify the number of NAT cone binding configurations that user logical system
administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for their logical
systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

nat-static-rule Specify the number of NAT static rule configurations that user logical system
administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for their logical
systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

nat-destination-rule Specify the number of NAT destination rule configurations that user logical system
administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for their logical
systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

nat-source-rule Specify the NAT source rule configurations that user logical system administrators and
primary logical system administrators can configure for their logical systems if the
security profile is bound to the logical systems.

nat-nopat-address Specify the number of NAT without port address translation configurations that user
logical system administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for
their logical systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

nat-pat-address Specify the number of NAT with port address translation (PAT) configurations that user
logical system administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for
their logical systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

nat-destination-pool Specify the number of NAT destination pool configurations that user logical system
administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for their logical
systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

nat-source-pool Specify the NAT source pool configurations that user logical system administrators and
primary logical system administrators can configure for their logical systems if the
security profile is bound to the logical systems.

flow-gate Specify the number of flow gates, also known as pinholes that user logical system
administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for their logical
systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.
 191

Table 49: Fields on the Add Resource Profile Page (Continued)

Field Description

flow-session Specify the number of flow sessions that user logical system administrators and primary
logical system administrators can configure for their logical systems if the security profile
is bound to the logical systems.

policy Specify the number of security policies with a count that user logical system
administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for their logical
systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

security-log-stream- Specify the security log stream number.

number

scheduler Specify the number of schedulers that user logical system administrators and primary
logical system administrators can configure for their logical systems if the security profile
is bound to the logical systems.

zone Specify the zones that user logical system administrators and primary logical system
administrators can configure for their logical systems if the security profile is bound to
the logical systems.

auth-entry Specify the number of firewall authentication entries that user logical system
administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for their logical
systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

address-book Specify the application firewall profile quota of a logical system.

Reserved A reserved quota that guarantees that the resource amount specified is always available
to the logical system.

Maximum A maximum allowed quota.

Range The minimum and maximum range permitted for each corresponding resource name.
 192

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Resource Profiles Page | 185

Global Settings | 187
Edit a Resource Profile | 192
Delete Resource Profile | 192

Edit a Resource Profile

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Resource Profiles.

To edit a resource profile:

1. Select the existing resource profiles that you want to edit on the Resource Profiles page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Resource Profiles page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options,
see "Add a Resource Profile" on page 188.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Resource Profiles Page | 185

Global Settings | 187
Add a Resource Profile | 188
Delete Resource Profile | 192

Delete Resource Profile

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Resource Profile.

To delete Resource Profiles:

1. Select the resource profiles that you want to delete on the Resource Profiles page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.
 193

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Resource Profiles Page | 185

Global Settings | 187
Add a Resource Profile | 188
Edit a Resource Profile | 192
 194

CHAPTER 12

Multi Tenancy—Interconnect Ports

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Interconnect Ports Page | 194

Add a LT Logical Interface | 196

Edit a LT Logical Interface | 203

Delete Logical Interface | 203

Search for Text in an Interconnect Ports Table | 203

About the Interconnect Ports Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 194

Field Descriptions | 195

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Interconnect Ports.

On SRX Series Services Gateways, the logical tunnel interface is used to interconnect logical systems.
Use this page to interconnect logical system that serves as an internal virtual private LAN service (VPLS)
switch connecting one logical system on the device to another.

NOTE: This menu is available only for SRX4000 line of devices and SRX5000 line of devices.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

 195

• Create a LT Logical Interface. See "Add a LT Logical Interface" on page 196.

• Edit a LT Logical Interface. See "Edit a LT Logical Interface" on page 203.

• Delete an Interconnect Interface. See "Delete Logical Interface" on page 203.

• Search for Text in an Interconnect Ports table. See "Search for Text in an Interconnect Ports Table" on
page 203.

Field Descriptions

Table 50 on page 195 describes the fields on the Interconnect ports page.

Table 50: Fields on the Interconnect Ports Page

Field Description

Interface Displays the interface name. Logical interfaces configured under this interface appear
in a collapsible list under the physical interface.

Link Status Displays the operational status of the link. Status can be either Up or Down.

IP Addresses Displays the configured IP addresses. Multiple IP addresses configured on one logical
interface are displayed in a collapsible list under the logical interface.

Encapsulation Displays the mode of encapsulation. Encapsulation is the process of taking data from
one protocol and translating it into another protocol, so the data can continue across
a network. It can from the following points:

• Ethernet

• Frame Relay

• Ethernet VPLS

Ethernet and Frame Relay are used if logical tunnel interfaces connected between
two logical systems. Ethernet VPLS will be used on logical tunnel interface which is
connecting VPLS switch to logical system.

LSYS/Tenant/VPLS Displays the name of the logical system or the name of VPLS Switch.
Switch
 196

Table 50: Fields on the Interconnect Ports Page (Continued)

Field Description

Peer Interface Displays the peer details.

Peer Encapsulation Displays the peer encapsulation mode.

Peer LSYS/VPLS Switch Displays the name of the peer logical system and VPLS Switch.

Type Displays the type for logical interface—Logical System, Tenant, or VPLS Switch.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a LT Logical Interface | 196

Add a LT Logical Interface

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Interconnect Ports.

To add a LT logical interface:

1. Click the add icon (+) available on the upper right side of the Interconnect Ports page.
The Create LT Logical Interface page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 51 on page 196.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
If you click OK, a new LT logical interface with the provided configuration is created.

Table 51 on page 196 provides guidelines on using the fields on the Create LT Logical Interface page.

Table 51: Fields on the Create LT Logical Interface Page

Field Description

Local Details
 197

Table 51: Fields on the Create LT Logical Interface Page (Continued)

Field Description

Unit Enter the Logical unit number for interface.

Type Select a logical interface type from the list. The options available are Logical System, Tenant, and
VPLS Switch.

Logical System This option is available when you select the logical interface type as Logical System.

Select a logical system from the list. If not present in the list, then we need to create a logical
system.

NOTE: Starting from Junos OS 19.1R1, the user interface will auto complete the logical system
names when you type the partial name.

Tenant This option is available when you select the logical interface type as Tenant.

Select a tenant from the list.

NOTE: Starting from Junos OS 19.1R1, the user interface will auto complete the tenant names
when you type the partial name.

VPLS Switch This option is not available if the logical interface type is VPLS Switch.

Select a VPLS switch from the list.

Description Enter description for the interface.

 198

Table 51: Fields on the Create LT Logical Interface Page (Continued)

Field Description

IPv4 Address NOTE: This option is not available if the logical interface type is VPLS Switch.

Specify the IPv4 address.

To add an IPv4 address:

1. Click + at the upper right of the IPv4 Address table.

2. Enter the following details:

• IPv4 address—Enter an IPv4 address. IP Addresses added here would be used as

interconnect IP.

• Prefix Length—Enter the prefix length. This specifies the number of bits set in the subnet
mask.

3. Click the tick mark to add the IPv4 address or click X to discard the changes.

To edit an IPv4 address:

1. Select an existing IPv4 address and click the pencil icon at the upper right of the IPv4
Address table.

2. Edit the IPv4 address and prefix length.

3. Click the tick mark to add the IPv4 address or click X to discard the changes.

To delete an IPv4 address:

1. Select one or more existing IPv4 addresses and click the delete icon at the upper right of the
IPv4 Address table.

2. Click OK to delete the IPv4 address. If you want to discard the changes, click Cancel.
 199

Table 51: Fields on the Create LT Logical Interface Page (Continued)

Field Description

IPv6 Address NOTE: This option is not available if the logical interface type is VPLS Switch.

Specify the IPv6 address.

To add an IPv6 address:

1. Click + at the upper right of the IPv6 Address table.

2. Enter the following details:

• IPv6 address—Enter an IPv6 address. IP Addresses added here would be used as

interconnect IP.

• Prefix Length—Enter the prefix length. This specifies the number of bits set in the subnet
mask.

3. Click the tick mark to add the IPv6 address or click X to discard the changes.

To edit an IPv6 address:

1. Select an existing IPv6 address and click the pencil icon at the upper right of the IPv6
Address table.

2. Edit the IPv6 address and prefix length.

3. Click the tick mark to add the IPv6 address or click X to discard the changes.

To delete an IPv6 address:

1. Select one or more existing IPv6 addresses and click the delete icon at the upper right of the
IPv6 Address table.

2. Click OK to delete the IPv6 address. If you want to discard the changes, click Cancel.

Peer Details

Type Select any one of the connection types from the list:

• Logical system

• Tenant

• VPLS Switch
 200

Table 51: Fields on the Create LT Logical Interface Page (Continued)

Field Description

Logical System This option is available when you select the connection type as Logical System.

Select a logical system from the list. If not present in the list, then we need to create a logical
system.

Tenant This option is available when you select the connection type as Tenant.

Select a tenant from the list.

VPLS Switch This option is available when you select the connection type as VPLS Switch.

Select a VPLS switch from the list.

Unit Enter the peering logical system unit number.

Description Specify the interface description.

Enter description for the interface.

 201

Table 51: Fields on the Create LT Logical Interface Page (Continued)

Field Description

IPv4 Address NOTE: This option is not available if the logical interface type is VPLS Switch.

Specify the IPv4 address.

To add an IPv4 address:

1. Click + at the upper right of the IPv4 Address table.

2. Enter the following details:

• IPv4 address—Enter an IPv4 address. IP Addresses added here would be used as

interconnect IP.

• Prefix Length—Enter the prefix length. This specifies the number of bits set in the subnet
mask.

3. Click the tick mark to add the IPv4 address or click X to discard the changes.

To edit an IPv4 address:

1. Select an existing IPv4 address and click the pencil icon at the upper right of the IPv4
Address table.

2. Edit the IPv4 address and prefix length.

3. Click the tick mark to add the IPv4 address or click X to discard the changes.

To delete an IPv4 address:

1. Select one or more existing IPv4 addresses and click the delete icon at the upper right of the
IPv4 Address table.

2. Click OK to delete the IPv4 address. If you want to discard the changes, click Cancel.
 202

Table 51: Fields on the Create LT Logical Interface Page (Continued)

Field Description

IPv6 Address NOTE: This option is not available if the logical interface type is VPLS Switch.

Specify the IPv6 address.

To add an IPv6 address:

1. Click + at the upper right of the IPv6 Address table.

2. Enter the following details:

• IPv6 address—Enter an IPv6 address. IP Addresses added here would be used as

interconnect IP.

• Prefix Length—Enter the prefix length. This specifies the number of bits set in the subnet
mask.

3. Click the tick mark to add the IPv6 address or click X to discard the changes.

To edit an IPv6 address:

1. Select an existing IPv6 address and click the pencil icon at the upper right of the IPv6
Address table.

2. Edit the IPv6 address and prefix length.

3. Click the tick mark to add the IPv6 address or click X to discard the changes.

To delete an IPv6 address:

1. Select one or more existing IPv6 addresses and click the delete icon at the upper right of the
IPv6 Address table.

2. Click OK to delete the IPv6 address. If you want to discard the changes, click Cancel.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a LT Logical Interface | 203

 203

Edit a LT Logical Interface

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Interconnect Ports.

To edit a LT logical interface:

1. Select an existing logical interface that you want to edit on the Interconnect Ports page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit LT Logical Interface page appears with editable fields. For more information on the fields,
see "Add a LT Logical Interface" on page 196.
3. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Logical Interface | 203

Delete Logical Interface

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Interconnect Ports.

To delete a logical interface:

1. Select one or more the logical interfaces that you want to delete on the Interconnect Ports page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the logical interface.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Search for Text in an Interconnect Ports Table | 203

Search for Text in an Interconnect Ports Table

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Interconnect Ports.

You can use the search icon in the top right corner of the Interconnect Ports page to search for text
containing letters and special characters on that page.
 204

To search for text:

1. Click the search icon and enter partial text or full text of the keyword in the search bar.
The search results are displayed.
2. Click X next to a search keyword or click Clear All to clear the search results.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Interconnect Ports Page | 194

 205

CHAPTER 13

Multi Tenancy—Logical Systems

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Logical Systems Page | 205

Add a Logical System | 207

Edit a Logical System | 218

Delete Logical System | 218

Search Text in Logical Systems Table | 219

About the Logical Systems Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 205

Field Descriptions | 206

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Logical Systems.

NOTE: This menu is supported for only SRX4000 line of devices, SRX5000 line of devices and
SRX1500 devices.

Use this page to view, add, and delete Logical System.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

 206

• Create a logical system. See "Add a Logical System" on page 207.

• Edit a logical system. See "Edit a Logical System" on page 218.

• Delete a logical system. See "Delete Logical System" on page 218.

• Search for Text in a logical system table. See "Search Text in Logical Systems Table" on page 219.

• View the details of the logical systems—To do this, select the logical systems for which you want to
view the details and follow the available options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Right-click on the selected tenant and select Detailed View.

• Mouse over to the left of the selected tenant and click Detailed View.

• Filter the logical systems based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top right-
hand corner of the logical systems table. The columns in the grid change to accept filter options. Type
the filter options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the logical systems table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns icon in
the top right corner of the logical systems table and select the options you want to view or deselect
the options you want to hide on the page.

• Root users can switch to Logical system context. To do this, click Enter LSYS on the upper right of the
table. See Table 53 on page 207.

Field Descriptions

Table 52 on page 206 describes the fields on the Logical Systems page.

Table 52: Fields on the Logical Systems Page

Field Description

Name Displays the name of the logical system.

Resource Profile Displays the name of the resource profile.

Users Displays the logical system admin and users.

Assigned Interfaces Displays the assigned logical interfaces.

 207

Table 52: Fields on the Logical Systems Page (Continued)

Field Description

Zone Displays the zone of the resource profile.

Table 53 on page 207 describes the options on the LSYS page.

Table 53: Enter LSYS Page Options

Field Description

Select Widget Specifies the following widgets:

• Logical System Profile.

• Logical System CPU Profile.

• Logical System FW No Hits.

Drag and drop a widget to add it to your dashboard. Once widgets are added to the dashboard,
they can be edited, refreshed, or removed by hovering over the widget header and selecting the
option. The manual refresh option must be used to refresh the widget data.

Add Tabs Click + to add a dashboard.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Logical System | 207

Edit a Logical System | 218
Delete Logical System | 218
Search Text in Logical Systems Table | 219

Add a Logical System

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Logical Systems.

To add a logical system:

 208

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Logical Systems page.
The Create Logical Systems page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 54 on page 208.
3. Click Finish to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 54: Fields on the Add Logical Systems Page

Field Description

General Details

Name Enter a logical system name of a selected Resource Profile. Only one Resource Profile
can be selected, per logical system.

The string must contain alphanumeric characters, colons, periods, dashes, and
underscores. No spaces are allowed; maximum length is 63 characters.

Logical System Resource Profile

Click one:

• Add icon (+)—Adds Resource Profiles.

• Edit icon (/)—Edits the selected Resource Profiles.

• Delete icon (X)—Deletes the selected Resource Profiles.

• Search icon—Enables you to search a Resource Profile in the grid.

• Filter icon —Enables you to filter the selected option in the grid.

• Show Hide Column Filter icon—Enables you to show or hide a column in the grid.

Profile Name Enter a name of the security profile.

The string must contain an alphanumeric character and can include underscores; no
spaces allowed; 31 characters maximum.

IPS Policy Select an IPS policy from the list.

Resource Allocation
 209

Table 54: Fields on the Add Logical Systems Page (Continued)

Field Description

Resource Name Displays the resource name.

• nat-pat-portnum—Specify the maximum quantity and the reserved quantity of

ports for the logical system as part of its security profile.

• dslite-softwire-initiator—Specify the number of IPv6 dual-stack lite (DS-Lite)

softwire initiators that can connect to the softwire concentrator configured in
either a user logical system or the primary logical system.

• cpu—Specify the percentage of CPU utilization that is always available to a logical

system.

• appfw-rule—Specify the number of application firewall rule configurations that a

primary administrator can configure for a primary logical system or user logical
system when the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

• nat-interface-port-ol—Specify the number of application firewall rule set

configurations that a primary administrator can configure for a primary logical
system or user logical system when the security profile is bound to the logical
systems.

• nat-rule-referenced-prefix—Specify the security NAT interface port overloading

the quota of a logical system.

• nat-port-ol-ipnumber—Specify the number of NAT port overloading IP number

configurations that user logical system administrators and primary logical system
administrators can configure for their logical systems if the security profile is
bound to the logical systems.

• nat-cone-binding—Specify the number of NAT cone binding configurations that

user logical system administrators and primary logical system administrators can
configure for their logical systems if the security profile is bound to the logical
systems.

• nat-static-rule—Specify the number of NAT static rule configurations that user

logical system administrators and primary logical system administrators can
configure for their logical systems if the security profile is bound to the logical
systems.

• nat-destination-rule—Specify the number of NAT destination rule configurations

that user logical system administrators and primary logical system administrators
 210

Table 54: Fields on the Add Logical Systems Page (Continued)

Field Description

can configure for their logical systems if the security profile is bound to the logical
systems.

• nat-source-rule—Specify the NAT source rule configurations that user logical

system administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for
their logical systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

• nat-nopat-address—Specify the number of NAT without port address translation

configurations that user logical system administrators and primary logical system
administrators can configure for their logical systems if the security profile is
bound to the logical systems.

• nat-pat-address—Specify the number of NAT with port address translation (PAT)

configurations that user logical system administrators and primary logical system
administrators can configure for their logical systems if the security profile is
bound to the logical systems.

• nat-destination-pool—Specify the number of NAT destination pool configurations

that user logical system administrators and primary logical system administrators
can configure for their logical systems if the security profile is bound to the logical
systems.

• nat-source-pool—Specify the NAT source pool configurations that user logical

system administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for
their logical systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

• flow-gate—Specify the number of flow gates, also known as pinholes that user
logical system administrators and primary logical system administrators can
configure for their logical systems if the security profile is bound to the logical
systems.

• flow-session—Specify the number of flow sessions that user logical system

administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for their
logical systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

• policy—Specify the number of security policies with a count that user logical
system administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for
their logical systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

• security-log-stream-number—Specify the Security log stream number quota of a

logical system.
 211

Table 54: Fields on the Add Logical Systems Page (Continued)

Field Description

• scheduler—Specify the number of schedulers that user logical system

administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for their
logical systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

• zone—Specify the zones that user logical system administrators and primary logical
system administrators can configure for their logical systems if the security profile
is bound to the logical systems.

• auth-entry—Specify the number of firewall authentication entries that user logical

system administrators and primary logical system administrators can configure for
their logical systems if the security profile is bound to the logical systems.

• address-book—Specify the entries in the address book. Address book entries can
include any combination of IPv4 addresses, IPv6 addresses, DNS names, wildcard
addresses, and address range.

Range Display range for each resource.

Edit Select a resource and click on the pencil icon to edit Reserved and Maximum fields.

Reserved Specify reserved quota that guarantees that the resource amount specified is always
available to the logical system.

Maximum Specify the maximum allowed quota.

IPS Max Sessions Enter maximum number of sessions. Use up and down arrow keys to increase or
decrease the number.

Users
Click one:

• Add icon (+)—Create users.

• Edit icon (/)—Edit the selected users.

• Delete icon (X)—Delete the selected users.

 212

Table 54: Fields on the Add Logical Systems Page (Continued)

Field Description

Create-Edit users

Username Enter a username.

Maximum length is 64 characters.

Role • Logical System Administrator

• Read only Access User

NOTE: LSYS Read Only user can only view the options but cannot modify them.

Password Enter a password for the user which is more than 6 characters but less than 128
characters.

Confirm Password Re-enter the new password to confirm.

Interfaces
Click One:

• Enable/Disable —Enable or disable the physical interface.

• Add icon (+)—Add logical interfaces.

• Edit icon (/)—Edit the selected users.

• Delete icon (X)—Delete the selected users.

Create-Edit logical interfaces

General

Physical Interface Name Displays the name of the Physical Interface.

Logical Interface Unit Enter the logical Interface Unit

 213

Table 54: Fields on the Add Logical Systems Page (Continued)

Field Description

Description Enter the description.

VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID. VLAN ID is mandatory.

IPV4 Address

IPV4 Address Click + and enter a valid IP address.

Subnet Mask Enter a valid subnet mask.

Delete Select the IPv4 address and click the delete icon to delete the address.

IPV6 Address

IPV6 Address Enter a valid IP address.

Subnet Mask Enter a valid subnet mask.

Delete Select the IPv6 address and click the delete icon to delete the address.

Zones
Click One:

• Add icon (+)—Create security zones.

• Edit icon (/)—Edit the selected security zones.

• Delete icon (X)—Delete the selected security zone.

• Search icon—Search for a security zone.

Create-Edit Security Zones

General
 214

Table 54: Fields on the Add Logical Systems Page (Continued)

Field Description

Name Enter a valid name of the zone.

Description Enter a description of the zone.

Application Tracking Enables the application tracking support.

Source Identity Log Enable source identity log for this zone.

Interfaces Select an interface from the Available column and move it to Selected column.

Selected interfaces Displays the selected interfaces.

 215

Table 54: Fields on the Add Logical Systems Page (Continued)

Field Description

System Services Select system services from the following options:

NOTE: Select the Except check box to allow services other than the selected services.

• all—Specify all system services.

• any-service—Specify services on entire port range.

• appqoe—Specify the APPQOE active probe service.

• bootp—Specify the Bootp and dhcp relay agent service.

• dhcp—Specify the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.

• dhcpv6—Enable Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPV6.

• dns—Specify the DNS service.

• finger—Specify the finger service.

• ftp—Specify the FTP protocol.

• http—Specify the web management using HTTP.

• https—Specify the web management using HTTP secured by SSL.

• ident-reset—Specify the send back TCP RST IDENT request for port 113.

• ike—Specify the Internet key exchange.

• lsping—Specify the Label Switched Path ping service.

• netconf—Specify the NETCONF Service.

• ntp—Specify the network time protocol service.

• ping—Specify the internet control message protocol.

• r2cp—Enable Radio-Router Control Protocol service.

• reverse-ssh—Specify the reverse SSH Service.

• reverse-telnet—Specify the reverse telnet Service.

 216

Table 54: Fields on the Add Logical Systems Page (Continued)

Field Description

• rlogin—Specify the Rlogin service

• rpm—Specify the Real-time performance monitoring.

• rsh—Specify the Rsh service.

• snmp—Specify the Simple Network Management Protocol Service.

• snmp-trap—Specify the Simple Network Management Protocol trap.

• ssh—Specify the SSH service.

• tcp-encap—Specify the TCP encapsulation service.

• telnet—Specify the Telnet service.

• tftp—Specify the TFTP

• traceroute—Specify the traceroute service.

• webapi-clear-text—Specify the Webapi service using http.

• webapi-ssl—Specify the Webapi service using HTTP secured by SSL.

• xnm-clear-text—Specify the JUNOScript API for unencrypted traffic over TCP.

• xnm-ssl—Specify the JUNOScript API Service over SSL.

 217

Table 54: Fields on the Add Logical Systems Page (Continued)

Field Description

Protocols Select a protocol from the following options:

NOTE: Select the Except check box to allow protocols other than the selected
protocols.

• bfd—Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.

• bgp—Broder Gateway protocol.

• dvmrp—Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.

• igmp—Internet group management protocol.

• ldp— label Distribution Protocol.

• msdp—Multicast source discovery protocol.

• nhrp—Next Hop Resolution Protocol.

• ospf—Open shortest path first.

• ospf3—Open shortest path first version 3.

• pgm—Pragmatic General Multicast.

• pim—Protocol independent multicast.

• rip—Routing information protocol.

• ripng—Routing information protocol next generation.

• router-discovery—Router Discovery.

• rsvp—Resource reservation protocol.

• sap—Session Announcement Protocol.

• vrrp—Virtual Router redundancy protocol.

Traffic Control Options Enable this option to send RST for NON-SYN packet not matching TCP session.
 218

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Logical Systems Page | 205

Add a Logical System | 207
Edit a Logical System | 218
Delete Logical System | 218
Search Text in Logical Systems Table | 219

Edit a Logical System

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Logical Systems.

To edit a logical system profile:

1. Select the existing logical system profile that you want to edit on the Logical System Profile page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit a Logical System Profile page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
options, see "Add a Logical System" on page 207.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Logical Systems Page | 205

Add a Logical System | 207
Delete Logical System | 218
Search Text in Logical Systems Table | 219

Delete Logical System

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Logical Systems.

To delete logical system:

1. Select the logical system that you want to delete on the Logical System page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.
 219

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Logical Systems Page | 205

Add a Logical System | 207
Edit a Logical System | 218
Search Text in Logical Systems Table | 219

Search Text in Logical Systems Table

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Logical Systems.

You can use the search icon in the top right corner of a page to search for text containing letters and
special characters on that page.

To search for text:

1. Click the search icon and enter a partial text or full text of the keyword in the search bar and execute.
The search results are displayed.
2. Click X next to a search keyword or click Clear All to clear the search results.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Logical Systems Page | 205

Add a Logical System | 207
Edit a Logical System | 218
Delete Logical System | 218
 220

CHAPTER 14

Multi Tenancy—Tenants

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Tenants Page | 220

Add a Tenant | 222

Edit a Tenant | 230

Delete Tenant | 230

Search Text in Tenants Table | 231

About the Tenants Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 220

Field Descriptions | 221

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Tenants.

You can use this page to add, view, and delete Tenants.

NOTE: This menu is supported for only SRX4000 line of devices, SRX5000 line of devices and
SRX1500 devices.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Create a tenant. See "Add a Tenant" on page 222.

 221

• Edit a tenant. See "Edit a Tenant" on page 230.

• Delete a tenant. See "Delete Tenant" on page 230.

• Search for Text in a tenants table. See "Search Text in Tenants Table" on page 231.

• View the details of the tenants—To do this, select the tenant for which you want to view the details
and follow the available options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Right-click on the selected tenant and select Detailed View.

• Mouse over to the left of the selected tenant and click Detailed View.

• Filter the tenant based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top right-hand corner
of the tenant table. The columns in the grid change to accept filter options. Type the filter options;
the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the tenant table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns icon in the top
right corner of the tenant table and select the options you want to view or deselect the options you
want to hide on the page.

Field Descriptions

Table 55 on page 221 describes the fields on the Tenants page.

Table 55: Fields on the Tenants Page

Field Description

Name Displays the name of the tenant system.

Resource Profile Displays the name of the resource profile.

Users Displays the tenant system admin and users, and its associated permissions.

Assigned Interfaces Displays the assigned logical interfaces.

Zones Displays the zones for the tenant.

Routing Instance Displays the routing instance that is explicitly assigned to the tenant system.
 222

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Tenant | 222

Edit a Tenant | 230
Delete Tenant | 230
Search Text in Tenants Table | 231

Add a Tenant

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Tenants.

To add a tenant:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Tenants page.
The Create Tenant page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 56 on page 222.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 56: Fields on the Create Tenant Page

Field Description

General Details

Name Enter a name for the tenant.

Enter a unique string of alphanumeric characters, colons, periods, dashes, and

underscores. No spaces are allowed; maximum length is 63 characters.

Routing Instance By default, the tenant name is taken as the routing instance name.

Tenant Resource Profile

Profile Name Displays the name of the resource profile.

Configured Resources Displays the resources and its reserved or maximum quantity assigned for this
resource profile.
 223

Table 56: Fields on the Create Tenant Page (Continued)

Field Description

Logical Systems/Tenants Displays other logical systems and/or tenants using this resource profile.

Click one:

• Add icon (+)—Adds resource profiles.

• Edit icon (/)—Edits the selected resource profiles.

• Search icon—Enables you to search a resource profile in the grid.

• Filter icon—Enables you to filter the selected option in the grid.

• Show Hide Column Filter icon—Enables you to show or hide a column in the grid.

Create-Edit Tenant Resource Profile

See "Add a Resource Profile" on page 188 for details on creating and editing resource profile.

User Details
You can define tenant administrators and users.

Click one:

• Add icon (+)—Create users.

• Edit icon (/)—Edit the selected users.

• Delete icon—Delete the selected users.

Create-Edit users

Username Enter a username.

Maximum length is 64 characters.

 224

Table 56: Fields on the Create Tenant Page (Continued)

Field Description

Role Select an option from the list to specify the role of the user:

• Tenant Administrator

• Read only Access User

NOTE: Logical system or tenant Read Only user can only view the options but
cannot modify them.

Password Specify the password for the user.

Confirm Password Confirm the password.

Assign Interfaces
Only one logical interface can be part of one tenant, whereas a tenant can have multiple logical interfaces.

Click One:

• Enable/Disable —Enable or disable the physical interface.

• Add icon (+)—Add logical interfaces.

• Edit icon (/)—Edit the selected users.

• Delete icon—Delete the selected users.

Create-Edit logical interfaces

General

Physical Interface Name Displays the name of the Physical Interface.

Logical Interface Unit Enter the logical interface unit.

Description Enter the description.

VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID. VLAN ID is mandatory.

 225

Table 56: Fields on the Create Tenant Page (Continued)

Field Description

IPV4 Address

IPV4 Address Click + and enter a valid IP address.

Subnet Mask Enter a valid subnet mask.

Delete Select the IPv4 address and click the delete icon to delete the address.

IPV6 Address

IPV6 Address Enter a valid IP address.

Subnet Mask Enter a valid subnet mask.

Delete Select the IPv6 address and click the delete icon to delete the address.

Zone Configuration
Click One:

• Add icon (+) — Create security zones.

• Edit icon (/) —Edit the selected security zones.

• Delete icon (X)—Delete the selected security zone.

• Search - Search for a security zone.

Create-Edit Security Zones

General

Name Enter a valid name of the zone.

Description Enter a description of the zone.

 226

Table 56: Fields on the Create Tenant Page (Continued)

Field Description

Application Tracking Enables the application tracking support.

Source Identity Log Enable source identity log for this zone.

Interfaces Select an interface from the Available column and move it to Selected column.

Selected interfaces Displays the selected interfaces.

 227

Table 56: Fields on the Create Tenant Page (Continued)

Field Description

System Services Options Select system services from the following options:

NOTE: Select the Except check box to allow services other than the selected services.

• all—Specify all system services.

• any-service—Specify services on entire port range.

• appqoe—Specify the APPQOE active probe service.

• bootp—Specify the Bootp and dhcp relay agent service.

• dhcp—Specify the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.

• dhcpv6—Enable Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPV6.

• dns—Specify the DNS service.

• finger—Specify the finger service.

• ftp—Specify the FTP protocol.

• http—Specify the web management using HTTP.

• https—Specify the web management using HTTP secured by SSL.

• ident-reset—Specify the send back TCP RST IDENT request for port 113.

• ike—Specify the Internet key exchange.

• lsping—Specify the Label Switched Path ping service.

• netconf—Specify the NETCONF Service.

• ntp—Specify the network time protocol service.

• ping—Specify the internet control message protocol.

• r2cp—Enable Radio-Router Control Protocol service.

• reverse-ssh—Specify the reverse SSH Service.

• reverse-telnet—Specify the reverse telnet Service.

 228

Table 56: Fields on the Create Tenant Page (Continued)

Field Description

• rlogin—Specify the Rlogin service

• rpm—Specify the Real-time performance monitoring.

• rsh—Specify the Rsh service.

• snmp—Specify the Simple Network Management Protocol Service.

• snmp-trap—Specify the Simple Network Management Protocol trap.

• ssh—Specify the SSH service.

• tcp-encap—Specify the TCP encapsulation service.

• telnet—Specify the Telnet service.

• tftp—Specify the TFTP

• traceroute—Specify the traceroute service.

• webapi-clear-text—Specify the Webapi service using http.

• webapi-ssl—Specify the Webapi service using HTTP secured by SSL.

• xnm-clear-text—Specify the JUNOScript API for unencrypted traffic over TCP.

• xnm-ssl—Specify the JUNOScript API Service over SSL.

 229

Table 56: Fields on the Create Tenant Page (Continued)

Field Description

Protocols Select a protocol from the following options:

NOTE: Select the Except check box to allow protocols other than the selected
protocols.

• bfd—Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.

• bgp—Broder Gateway protocol.

• dvmrp—Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.

• igmp—Internet group management protocol.

• ldp—label Distribution Protocol.

• msdp—Multicast source discovery protocol.

• nhrp—Next Hop Resolution Protocol.

• ospf—Open shortest path first.

• ospf3—Open shortest path first version 3.

• pgm—Pragmatic General Multicast.

• pim—Protocol independent multicast.

• rip—Routing information protocol.

• ripng—Routing information protocol next generation.

• router-discovery—Router Discovery.

• rsvp—Resource reservation protocol.

• sap—Session Announcement Protocol.

• vrrp—Virtual Router redundancy protocol.

Traffic Control Options Enable this option to send RST for NON-SYN packet not matching TCP session.
 230

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Tenants Page | 220

Edit a Tenant | 230
Delete Tenant | 230
Search Text in Tenants Table | 231

Edit a Tenant

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Tenants.

To edit a tenant:

1. Select the existing tenant that you want to edit on the Tenants page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit a Tenant page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add a
Tenant" on page 222.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Tenants Page | 220

Add a Tenant | 222
Delete Tenant | 230
Search Text in Tenants Table | 231

Delete Tenant

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Tenants.

To delete tenants:

1. Select the tenants that you want to delete on the Tenants page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.
 231

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Tenants Page | 220

Add a Tenant | 222
Edit a Tenant | 230
Search Text in Tenants Table | 231

Search Text in Tenants Table

You are here: Device Administration > Multi Tenancy > Tenants.

You can use the search icon in the top right corner of a page to search for text containing letters and
special characters on that page.

To search for text:

1. Click the search icon and enter a partial text or full text of the keyword in the search bar and execute.
The search results are displayed.
2. Click X next to a search keyword or click Clear All to clear the search results.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Tenants Page | 220

Add a Tenant | 222
Edit a Tenant | 230
Delete Tenant | 230
 232

CHAPTER 15

Certificate Management—Device Certificates

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Device Certificates Page | 232

Import a Device Certificate | 234

Export a Device Certificate | 235

Add a Device Certificate | 236

Delete Device Certificate | 239

View Details of a Device Certificate | 239

Search Text in the Device Certificates Table | 243

About the Device Certificates Page

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Device Certificates.

Manage the device certificates to authenticate Secure Socket Layer (SSL). SSL uses public-private key
technology that requires a paired private key and an authentication certificate for providing the SSL
service. SSL encrypts communication between your device and the Web browser with a session key
negotiated by the SSL server certificate.

You can perform the following tasks:

• Import a certificate to manually load externally generated certificates or CSR. See "Import a Device
Certificate" on page 234.

NOTE: You must obtain the private key, passphrase, and the signed certificate from certificate
authority (CA) server.

• Export a local certificate or CSR from the default location to a specific location within the device. See
"Export a Device Certificate" on page 235.

• View the details of a certificate. See "View Details of a Device Certificate" on page 239.
 233

• Generate a certificate. See "Add a Device Certificate" on page 236.

• Delete a certificate. See "Delete Device Certificate" on page 239.

• Search for text in a device certificate table. See "Search Text in the Device Certificates Table" on page
243.

• Filter the device certificates information based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at
the top right-hand corner of the table. The columns in the grid change to accept filter options. Type
the filter options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the Device Certificates table. To do this, use the Show Hide Columns icon in
the top right corner of the page and select the options you want to show or deselect to hide options
on the page

Table 57 on page 233 provides the details of the fields of the Device Certificates page.

Table 57: Fields on Device Certificates Page

Field Description

Certificate ID Displays the certificate ID.

Certificate ID is a unique value across the device. This will be used to create a key pair along
with the algorithm to associate with the key.

Issuer Org Displays the details of the authority that issued the certificate.

Status Displays whether the status of the certificate is valid, expired, and so on.

Expiration Date Displays certificate expiration date.

Encryption Type Displays whether the algorithm of the certificate is RSA, DSA, or ECDSA encryption.

Signature Status Displays whether the status of the certificate is signed or in certificate signing request (CSR)
stage.
 234

Import a Device Certificate

To import a device certificate:

1. Select Device Administration > Certificate Management > Device Certificates.

2. Click Import.
The Import Certificate page appears.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 58 on page 234.
4. Click OK to import the certificate.
You are taken to the Device Certificates page. If the certificate content that you imported is validated
successfully, a confirmation message is displayed; if not, an error message is displayed.

After importing a certificate, you can use it when you create an SSL proxy profile and for IPsec VPN
peers authentication.
5. Click Cancel to cancel your entries and returns to the Device Certificates page.

Table 58: Fields on the Import Certificate Page

Field Action

Type Select an option to specify whether the certificate that you are importing is an
Externally Generated Certificate or a CSR.

Certificate ID Enter a unique value for the certificate ID for an externally generated certificate.

Select an option from the list to specify the certificate ID for a CSR.

File path for Certificate Click Browse to navigate to the path from where you want to import the certificate.

File path for Private Key Click Browse to navigate to the path from where you want to import the private key.

Passphrase Enter the passphrase used to protect the private key or key pair of the certificate file.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Device Certificates Page | 232

Export a Device Certificate | 235
 235

Add a Device Certificate | 236

Delete Device Certificate | 239
View Details of a Device Certificate | 239
Search Text in the Device Certificates Table | 243

Export a Device Certificate

To export a device certificate:

1. Select Device Administration > Certificate Management > Device Certificates.

2. Click Export.
The Export Certificate page appears.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 59 on page 235.
4. Click OK to export the certificate.
Once you save or download the exported file(s), a confirmation message is displayed; if not, an error
message is displayed.

Table 59: Fields on the Export Certificate Page

Field Action

Type Select an option from the list to specify whether the certificate that you are exporting is a
Local Certificate or a CSR.

Certification Name Select an option from the list for the local certificate name.

Certificate ID This option is available only for CSR.

Select an option from the list for the CSR certificate ID.

Format Select an option from the list to specify whether the exporting certificate format is Privacy-
Enhanced Mail (PEM) or Distinguished Encoding Rules (DER).

Key Pair Enable or disable exporting key pair of a certificate.

Passphrase Enter the passphrase to protect the private key or key pair of the certificate file.
 236

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Device Certificates Page | 232

Import a Device Certificate | 234
Add a Device Certificate | 236
Delete Device Certificate | 239
View Details of a Device Certificate | 239
Search Text in the Device Certificates Table | 243

Add a Device Certificate

To add a device certificate:

1. Select Device Administration > Certificate Management > Device Certificates.

2. Click the add icon (+).
The Generate Certificate page appears.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 60 on page 236.
4. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel instead.
If you click OK, a new certificate with the provided configuration is created.

Table 60: Fields on the Generate Certificate Page

Field Action

Certificate Details

Certificate Type Select one of the certificate types from the list that you want to generate:

• Local Self-Signed—Allows for use of SSL-based (Secure Sockets Layer) services

without requiring that the user or administrator to undertake the considerable
task of obtaining an identity certificate signed by a CA. Self-signed certificates
are usually used for internal purpose.

• Local Certificate—Validates the identity of the security device. A local certificate

imports or references an SSL certificate.
 237

Table 60: Fields on the Generate Certificate Page (Continued)

Field Action

CA Profile Name This option is available for a local certificate.

Select one of the CA profile name from the list or click Create to add a CA Profile.
For details on adding a CA profile, see the table in the Adding a Certificate Authority
Profile section.

Certificate ID Enter a unique value for the certificate ID.

Encryption Type Select one of the types of encryption from the list:

• RSA Encryption

• DSA Encryption

NOTE: The certificate cannot be used in SSL Proxy profile if it is generated using
type DSA.

• ECDSA Encryption

Key Size Select one of the key sizes from the list:

• RSA encryption supports 1024 bits, 2048 bits, or 4096 bits.

• DSA encryption supports 1024 bits, 2048 bits, or 4096 bits.

• ECDSA encryption supports 256 bits, 384 bits, or 521 bits.

Subject (Minimum of one field required)

Domain Component Enter the domain component that you want to be associated with the certificate.

Common Name Enter a common name with the certificate.

Organizational Unit Name Enter the organizational unit that you want to be associated with the certificate.

Organizational Name Enter the organizational name that you want to be associated with this certificate.
 238

Table 60: Fields on the Generate Certificate Page (Continued)

Field Action

Serial Number Enter a serial number of the device.

Locality Enter the locality name.

State Enter the state name.

Country Enter the country name.

Subject Alt Name

NOTE: For a local certificate, any one field is mandatory

Domain Name Enter a Domain Name that you want to associate with the certificate.

Email Enter a user email address.

IPv4 Address Enter the IPv4 address of the device.

IPv6 Address This option is available for a local certificate.

Enter the IPv6 address of the device.

Advanced

Digest Select the digest from the list:

• For local Self-signed certificate (RSA/DSA/ECDSA) options are: None, SHA-1

digests, or SHA-256 digests.

• For local certificate options are:

• RSA/DSA: None, SHA-1 digests, or SHA-256 digests

• ECDSA: None, SHA-256 digests, or SHA-384 digests.

Signing Certificate Enable or disable specifies that the certificate is used to sign other certificates.
 239

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Device Certificates Page | 232

Import a Device Certificate | 234
Export a Device Certificate | 235
Delete Device Certificate | 239
View Details of a Device Certificate | 239
Search Text in the Device Certificates Table | 243

Delete Device Certificate

To delete a device certificate:

1. Select Device Administration > Certificate Management > Device Certificates.

2. Select the certificate you want to delete.
3. On the upper right side of the Device Certificates page, click the delete icon to delete.
A confirmation window appears.
4. Click Yes to delete.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Device Certificates Page | 232

Import a Device Certificate | 234
Export a Device Certificate | 235
Add a Device Certificate | 236
View Details of a Device Certificate | 239
Search Text in the Device Certificates Table | 243

View Details of a Device Certificate

To view the details of a device certificate:

1. Select Device Administration > Certificate Management > Device Certificates.

2. Select an existing certificate.
3. Select More > Detailed View.
 240

The View Certificate page appears with the details of the certificate.

NOTE: When you hover over the certificate ID, a Detailed View icon appears before the
certificate ID. You can also use this icon to view the certificate details.

4. Click OK after viewing the certificate details.

Table 61 on page 240 provides the field details of the certificate on the View Certificate page.

Table 61: Fields on the View Certificate Page

Field Action

Certificate Details

Certificate ID Displays the certificate ID.

Certificate Version Displays the certificate revision number.

Certificate Type Displays the certificate type. For example, Signed.

Encryption Type Displays the encryption type. For example, RSA.

Key Size Displays the key size of the encryption type.

Serial Number Displays the unique serial number of the certificate.

Subject

Domain Component Displays the domain component associated with the certificate.

Common Name Displays the common name associated with the certificate.

Organizational Unit Name Displays the organizational unit associated with the certificate.

Organizational Name Displays the organizational name associated with this certificate.
 241

Table 61: Fields on the View Certificate Page (Continued)

Field Action

Serial Number Displays the serial number of the device.

Locality Displays the locality name.

State Displays the state name.

Country Displays the country name.

Subject Alt Name

Domain Name Displays the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN).

Email Displays the email ID of the certificate holder.

IPv4 Address Displays the IPv4 address.

IPv6 Address Displays the IPv6 address.

Issuer Information

Common Name Displays the issuer common name associated with the certificate.

Domain Component Displays the issuer domain component associated with the certificate.

Organization Name Displays the issuer organizational name.

Organization Unit Name Displays the issuer organizational unit.

Locality Name Displays the issuer locality name.

State or Province Name Displays the issuer state or region name.

 242

Table 61: Fields on the View Certificate Page (Continued)

Field Action

Validity

Not Before Displays the start time when the certificate becomes valid.

Not After Displays the end time when the certificate becomes invalid.

Auto Re Enrollment

Status Displays whether the auto re enrollment is enabled or disabled.

Next Trigger Time Displays the how long auto-reenrollment should be initiated before expiration.

Fingerprint

MD5 Displays the MD5 fingerprints to identify the certificate.

SHA1 Displays the SHA-1 fingerprints to identify the certificate.

Signature Algorithm

Algorithm Displays whether the signature algorithm is SHA-1, SHA-256, or SHA-384 digest.

Distribution CRL

URL Displays the URL of the certificate revocation list (CRL) server.

LDAP Displays the name of the location from which the CRL is retrieved through
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).

Authority Information Access OCSP

URL Displays the URL of the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) server.
 243

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Device Certificates Page | 232

Import a Device Certificate | 234
Export a Device Certificate | 235
Add a Device Certificate | 236
Delete Device Certificate | 239
Search Text in the Device Certificates Table | 243

Search Text in the Device Certificates Table

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Device Certificates.

You can use the search icon in the top right corner of a page to search for text containing letters and
special characters on that page.

To search for text:

1. Enter partial text or full text of the keyword in the search bar and click the search icon.
The search results are displayed.
2. Click X next to a search keyword or click Clear All to clear the search results.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Device Certificates Page | 232

Import a Device Certificate | 234
Export a Device Certificate | 235
Add a Device Certificate | 236
Delete Device Certificate | 239
View Details of a Device Certificate | 239
 244

CHAPTER 16

Certificate Management—Trusted Certificate

Authority

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Trusted Certificate Authority Page | 244

Generate Default Trusted Certificate Authorities | 246

Enroll a CA Certificate | 247

Import a CA Certificate | 248

Add a Certificate Authority Profile | 249

Edit a Certificate Authority Profile | 253

Delete Certificate Authority Profile | 254

Search Text in the Trusted Certificate Authority Table | 255

About the Trusted Certificate Authority Page

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Trusted Certificate Authority.

SSL forward proxy ensures secure transmission of data between a client and a server. Before
establishing a secure connection, SSL forward proxy checks certificate authority (CA) certificates to
verify signatures on server certificates. For this reason, a reasonable list of trusted CA certificates is
required to effectively authenticate servers.

You can perform the following tasks:

• Generate a default trusted CAs. See "Generate Default Trusted Certificate Authorities" on page 246.

• Enroll a CA certificate using the Simple Certificate Enrollment Process (SCEP) or Certificate
Management Protocol (CMPv2). With SCEP or CMPv2, you can configure Juniper Network device to
obtain a local certificate online and start the online enrollment for the specified certificate ID. See
"Enroll a CA Certificate" on page 247.
 245

• Import a CA certificate to manually load CA certificates and CRL. See "Import a CA Certificate" on
page 248.

• Add a CA profile. See "Add a Certificate Authority Profile" on page 249.

• Edit a CA profile. See "Edit a Certificate Authority Profile" on page 253.

• Delete a CA profile. See "Delete Certificate Authority Profile" on page 254.

• Search for text in a Trusted Certificate Authority table. See "Search Text in the Trusted Certificate
Authority Table" on page 255.

• Filter the trusted CA information based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top
right-hand corner of the table. The columns in the grid change to accept filter options. Type the filter
options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the trusted CA table. To do this, use the Show Hide Columns icon in the top
right corner of the page and select the options you want to show or deselect to hide options on the
page.

Table 62 on page 245 provides the details of the fields of the Trusted Certificate Authority Page.

Table 62: Fields on Trusted Certificate Authority Page

Field Description

CA Profile Displays the name of the CA profile.

Certificate ID Displays the CA certificate ID.

Issuer Org Displays the issuer organizational name.

 246

Table 62: Fields on Trusted Certificate Authority Page (Continued)

Field Description

Status Displays the status of the CA certificate.

For example:

• Valid.

• Expires in number of day(s).

• Expired.

• Download Required. This status is for a CA profile

with manual enrollment.

• Enrollment Required. This status is for a CA profile

with automatic enrollment.

Expiration Date Displays CA certificate expiration date.

Encryption Type Displays whether the algorithm of the certificate is

RSA, DSA, or ECDSA encryption.

Generate Default Trusted Certificate Authorities

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Trusted Certificate Authority.

For SSL forward proxy, you need to load trusted CA certificates on your system. By default, Junos OS
provides a list of trusted CA certificates that include default certificates used by common browsers. To
generate default Trusted CA profiles with default name as Local, click Generate Default Trusted CAs and
then click Continue. This process may take several minutes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Trusted Certificate Authority Page | 244

Enroll a CA Certificate | 247
Import a CA Certificate | 248
 247

Add a Certificate Authority Profile | 249

Edit a Certificate Authority Profile | 253
Delete Certificate Authority Profile | 254
Search Text in the Trusted Certificate Authority Table | 255

Enroll a CA Certificate

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Trusted Certificate Authority.

To enroll a trusted CA certificate:

1. Click Enroll.
The Enroll CA Certificate page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 63 on page 247.
3. Click OK to enroll the CA certificate.

Table 63: Fields on the Enroll CA Certificate Page

Field Action

CA Profile Name Select a CA profile name from the list that you want to enroll.

Protocol Select a protocol from the list for the CA certificate that you want to enroll.

• SCEP—Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP)

• CMPV2—Certificate Management Protocol version 2 (CMPv2)

NOTE: The following fields are available only if you select CMPv2 protocol. All the fields are mandatory.

CA Secret Enter the out-of-band secret value received from the CA server.

CA Reference Enter the out-of-band reference value received from the CA server.

CA Dn Enter the distinguished name (DN) of the CA enrolling the EE certificate.

NOTE: This optional parameter is mandatory if the CA certificate is not already enrolled. If
the CA certificate is already enrolled, the subject DN is extracted from the CA certificate.
 248

Table 63: Fields on the Enroll CA Certificate Page (Continued)

Field Action

Certificate Details Click Add to generate a new certificate inline.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Trusted Certificate Authority Page | 244

Generate Default Trusted Certificate Authorities | 246
Enroll a CA Certificate | 247
Add a Certificate Authority Profile | 249
Edit a Certificate Authority Profile | 253
Delete Certificate Authority Profile | 254
Search Text in the Trusted Certificate Authority Table | 255

Import a CA Certificate

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Trusted Certificate Authority.

To import a CA certificate:

1. Click Import.
The Import CA Certificate page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 64 on page 248.
3. Click OK to import the CA certificate.
You are taken to the Trusted Certificate Authority page. If the CA certificate content that you
imported is validated successfully, a confirmation message is displayed; if not, an error message is
displayed.

Table 64: Fields on the Import CA Certificate Page

Field Action

CA Profile Name Select a CA profile name from the list that you want to import.
 249

Table 64: Fields on the Import CA Certificate Page (Continued)

Field Action

File path for CA Certificate Click Browse to navigate to the path from where you want to import the CA
certificate.

File path for CRL Click Browse to navigate to the path from where you want to import the Certificate
Revocation List (CRL).

Add a Certificate Authority Profile

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Trusted Certificate Authority.

To add a Certificate Authority (CA) profile:

1. Click the add icon (+).

The Add CA Profile page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 65 on page 249.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel instead.
If you click OK, a new CA profile with the provided configuration is created.

Table 65: Fields on the Add CA Profile Page

Field Action

Profile Details

CA Profile Name Enter a unique CA profile name.

CA Identity Enter a CA identity name.

 250

Table 65: Fields on the Add CA Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Revocation Check Select an option from the list:

• Disable—Disables verification of status of digital certificates.

• OCSP—Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) checks the revocation status of a

certificate.

• CRL—A CRL is a time-stamped list identifying revoked certificates, which is signed

by a CA and made available to the participating IPsec peers on a regular periodic
basis.

URL For OCSP, enter HTTP addresses for OCSP responders.

For CRL, enter the name of the location from which to retrieve the CRL through HTTP
or Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).

On Connection Failure Enable this option to skip the revocation check if the OCSP responder is not reachable.

NOTE: This option is applicable only for OCSP.

Disable Responder Enable this option to disable revocation check for the CA certificate received in an
Revocation Check OCSP response.

NOTE: This option is applicable only for OCSP.

Accept Unknown When set to enable, accepts the certificate with unknown status.
Status
NOTE: This option is applicable only for OCSP.

Nonce Payload Disable the option—Explicitly disable the sending of a nonce payload.

Enable the option—Enable the sending of a nonce payload. This is the default.

NOTE: This option is applicable only for OCSP.

CRL Refresh Interval Enter the time interval (in hours) between CRL updates.

Range: 0 through 8784 hours.

NOTE: This option is applicable only for CRL.

 251

Table 65: Fields on the Add CA Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Password Enter the password for authentication with the server.

Disable on Download Enable this option to override the default behavior and permit certificate verification
Failure even if the CRL fails to download.

NOTE: This option is applicable only for CRL.

Enrollment

CA Certificate Select an option whether you want to enroll the CA certificate manually or
automatically.

File path for Certificate Click Browse to navigate to the path from where you want to enroll the CA certificate.

URL Enter the URL from where you want to enroll the CA certificate automatically.

Retry Number of enrollment retry attempts before terminating. Range: 0 - 1080.

Retry-interval Interval in seconds between the enrollment retries. Range: 0 - 3600.

Advanced

Administrator Enter an administrator e-mail address to which the certificate request is sent.

Source Address Enter a source IPv4 or IPv6 address to be used instead of the IP address of the egress
interface for communications with external servers.

Auto Re Enrollment Enable this option to request that the issuing CA replace a certificate before its
specified expiration date.

Re Generate Key Pair Enable this option to automatically generate a new key pair when auto-reenrolling a
device certificate.
 252

Table 65: Fields on the Add CA Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Protocol Select an option from the list: Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) or
Certificate Management Protocol version 2 (CMPv2).

Challenge Password Enter the challenge password used by the certificate authority (CA) for certificate
enrollment and revocation. This challenge password must be the same used when the
certificate was originally configured.

Trigger Time Enter the percentage for the reenroll trigger time before expiration.

Range: 1 through 99 percent

Digest Select an option from the list: None, SHA-1 digest (default), or MD5-digest.

NOTE: This option is applicable only when you select SCEP protocol.

Encryption Select an option from the list: None, DES, DES 3.

NOTE: This option is applicable only when you select SCEP protocol.

Routing Instance Select an option from the list of configured routing instances.
 253

Table 65: Fields on the Add CA Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Proxy Profile Select an option from the list. Or

To create a new proxy profile inline:

1. Click Create.

Create Proxy Profile page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Profile Name—Enter a unique proxy profile name.

• Connection Type:

• Server IP—Enter the IP address of the server.

• Host Name—Enter the host name.

• Port Number—Select the port number by using top/down arrows.

Range: 0 through 65535

3. Click OK.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Trusted Certificate Authority Page | 244

Generate Default Trusted Certificate Authorities | 246
Enroll a CA Certificate | 247
Import a CA Certificate | 248
Edit a Certificate Authority Profile | 253
Delete Certificate Authority Profile | 254
Search Text in the Trusted Certificate Authority Table | 255

Edit a Certificate Authority Profile

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Trusted Certificate Authority.
 254

To edit a Certificate Authority (CA) profile:

1. Select a CA profile.
2. On the upper right side of the Trusted Certificate Authority page, click the pencil icon.
See "Add a Certificate Authority Profile" on page 249 for the options available for editing on the Edit
CA Profile page.

NOTE: When you select a CA profile to edit, you cannot edit the following fields:

• CA Profile Name

• Revocation Check

• Enrollment > CA Certificate

• Advanced > Auto Re Enrollment

• Advanced > Protocol

3. Click OK

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Trusted Certificate Authority Page | 244

Generate Default Trusted Certificate Authorities | 246
Enroll a CA Certificate | 247
Import a CA Certificate | 248
Add a Certificate Authority Profile | 249
Delete Certificate Authority Profile | 254
Search Text in the Trusted Certificate Authority Table | 255

Delete Certificate Authority Profile

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Trusted Certificate Authority.

To delete a Certificate Authority (CA) profile:

1. Select a CA profile.
2. On the upper right side of the Trusted Certificate Authority page, click the delete icon to delete.
 255

A confirmation window appears.

3. Click Yes to delete.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Trusted Certificate Authority Page | 244

Generate Default Trusted Certificate Authorities | 246
Enroll a CA Certificate | 247
Import a CA Certificate | 248
Add a Certificate Authority Profile | 249
Edit a Certificate Authority Profile | 253
Search Text in the Trusted Certificate Authority Table | 255

Search Text in the Trusted Certificate Authority Table

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Trusted Certificate Authority.

You can use the search icon in the top right corner of a page to search for text containing letters and
special characters on that page.

To search for text:

1. Enter partial text or full text of the keyword in the search bar and click the search icon.
The search results are displayed.
2. Click X next to a search keyword or click Clear All to clear the search results.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Trusted Certificate Authority Page | 244

Generate Default Trusted Certificate Authorities | 246
Enroll a CA Certificate | 247
Import a CA Certificate | 248
Add a Certificate Authority Profile | 249
Edit a Certificate Authority Profile | 253
Delete Certificate Authority Profile | 254
 256

CHAPTER 17

Certificate Management—Certificate Authority

Group

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Certificate Authority Group Page | 256

Import a Trusted CA Group | 257

Add a CA Group | 258

Edit a CA Group | 259

Delete CA Group | 260

Search Text in the Certificate Authority Group Table | 260

About the Certificate Authority Group Page

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Trusted Certificate Authority.

Multiple CA profiles can be grouped in one trusted CA group for a given topology. The CA group can be
used either in SSL or IPsec.

SSL forward proxy ensures secure transmission of data between a client and a server. Before
establishing a secure connection, SSL forward proxy checks certificate authority (CA) certificates to
verify signatures on server certificates. For this reason, a reasonable list of trusted CA certificates is
required to effectively authenticate servers.

You can perform the following tasks:

• Import a CA group to manually load the CA group. See "Import a Trusted CA Group" on page 257.

• Add a CA group. See "Add a CA Group" on page 258.

NOTE: You can group up to maximum of 20 CA profiles in a single trusted CA group. A

minimum of one CA profile is a must to create a trusted CA group.
 257

• Edit a CA group. See "Edit a CA Group" on page 259.

• Delete a CA group. See "Delete CA Group" on page 260.

• Search for text in a CA group table. See "Search Text in the Certificate Authority Group Table" on
page 260.

• Filter the CA group information based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top
right-hand corner of the table. The columns in the grid change to accept filter options. Type the filter
options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the CA group table. To do this, use the Show Hide Columns icon in the top
right corner of the page and select the options you want to show or deselect to hide options on the
page.

Table 66 on page 257 provides the details of the fields of the Certificate Authority Group Page.

Table 66: Fields on Certificate Authority Group Page

Field Description

Group Name Displays a Name for the CA profile group.

CA Profiles Displays the name of CA profiles.

Used For Displays whether the CA profile group is used for IPsec VPN or for SSL proxy.

Import a Trusted CA Group

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Trusted Certificate Authority.

To import a trusted CA group:

1. Click Import.
The Import Trusted CA Group page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 67 on page 258.
3. Click OK to import the CA group.
You are taken to the Certificate Authority Group page. If the CA group content that you imported is
validated successfully, a confirmation message is displayed; if not, an error message is displayed.
 258

After importing a CA profile group, you can use it when you create an SSL proxy.

Table 67: Fields on the Import Trusted CA Group Page

Field Action

CA Group Name Enter the name of a CA group.

File path for CA Group Click Browse to navigate to the path from where you want to import the CA group.

NOTE: Only .pem format is supported.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Certificate Authority Group Page | 256

Add a CA Group | 258
Edit a CA Group | 259
Delete CA Group | 260
Search Text in the Certificate Authority Group Table | 260

Add a CA Group

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Trusted Certificate Authority.

To add a CA group:

1. Click the add icon (+).

The Add CA Group page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 68 on page 259.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel instead.
If you click OK, a new CA group with the provided configuration is created.

After added a CA group, you can use it for IPsec VPN.

 259

Table 68: Fields on the Add CA Group Page

Field Action

CA Group Name Enter a unique CA group name.

CA Profiles Select a CA profile name from the list in the Available column and then click the right arrow to
move it to the Selected column.

NOTE: You can add up to maximum of 20 CA profiles per trusted CA group.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Certificate Authority Group Page | 256

Import a Trusted CA Group | 257
Edit a CA Group | 259
Delete CA Group | 260
Search Text in the Certificate Authority Group Table | 260

Edit a CA Group

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Trusted Certificate Authority.

To edit a CA group:

1. Select a CA group.
2. On the upper right side of the Certificate Authority Group page, click the pencil icon.
See "Add a CA Group" on page 258 for the options available for editing on the Edit CA Group page.
3. Click OK

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Certificate Authority Group Page | 256

Import a Trusted CA Group | 257
Add a CA Group | 258
 260

Delete CA Group | 260

Search Text in the Certificate Authority Group Table | 260

Delete CA Group

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Trusted Certificate Authority.

To delete a CA group:

1. Select a CA group.
2. On the upper right side of the Certificate Authority Group page, click the delete icon to delete.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Certificate Authority Group Page | 256

Import a Trusted CA Group | 257
Add a CA Group | 258
Edit a CA Group | 259
Search Text in the Certificate Authority Group Table | 260

Search Text in the Certificate Authority Group Table

You are here: Device Administration > Certificate Management > Trusted Certificate Authority.

You can use the search icon in the top right corner of a page to search for text containing letters and
special characters on that page.

To search for text:

1. Enter partial text or full text of the keyword in the search bar and click the search icon.
The search results are displayed.
2. Click X next to a search keyword or click Clear All to clear the search results.
 261

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Certificate Authority Group Page | 256

Import a Trusted CA Group | 257
Add a CA Group | 258
Edit a CA Group | 259
Delete CA Group | 260
 262

CHAPTER 18

License Management

IN THIS CHAPTER

Manage Your Licenses | 262

Manage Your Licenses

IN THIS SECTION

About License Management Page | 262

Add License | 263

Delete Installed Licenses | 264

Update Installed Licenses | 264

Update Trial Licenses | 264

Display License Keys | 264

Download License Keys | 265

Software Feature Licenses | 265

About License Management Page

You are here: Device Administration > License Management.

You can add a new license key, delete one or more license keys, update, or download license keys.

Table 69 on page 263 describes the fields on the License Management page.
 263

Table 69: Fields on the License Maintenance Page

Field Function

Feature Displays the name of the licensed feature.

Licenses Used Displays the number of licenses currently being used

on the device. Usage is determined by the
configuration on the device. If a feature license exists
and that feature is configured, the license is considered
used.

Licensed Installed Displays the number of licenses installed on the device

for the particular feature.

Licenses Needed Displays the number of licenses required for legal use
of the feature. Usage is determined by the
configuration on the device. If a feature is configured
and the license for that feature is not installed, a single
license is needed.

License Expires on Displays the expiry details on the license feature.

Add License
To add a new license key with the J-Web license manager:

1. Perform one of the following:

• License File URL—Enter the full URL to the destination file containing the license key.

NOTE: Use this option to send a subscription-based license key entitlement (such as UTM)
to the Juniper Networks licensing server for authorization. If authorized, the server
downloads the license to the device and activates it.

• License Key—Paste the license key text, in plain-text format, for the license.

Use a blank line to separate multiple license keys.

 264

NOTE: Use this option to activate a perpetual license directly on the device. (Most feature
licenses are perpetual.)

2. Click OK to add the license key or click Cancel to return to the License Management page.

Delete Installed Licenses

To delete one or more license keys with the J-Web license manager:

1. Select the check box of the license or licenses you want to delete.
2. Click Delete.

NOTE: If you have deleted the SRX100 Memory Upgrade license, the device reboots
immediately and comes back up as a low-memory device.

3. Click OK to delete the selected license or licenses or click Cancel to return to the License
Management page.

Update Installed Licenses

To send license update to the License Management Server (LMS):

1. Click Update.
The Update Licenses page appears.
2. Click OK to send license update to LMS.

Update Trial Licenses

To send license update to the LMS and to update the trail licenses:

1. Click Update Trial.

The Update Trial Licenses page appears.
2. Click OK to update the trail licenses.

Display License Keys

To display the license keys installed on the device with the J-Web license manager:

1. Click Display Keys to view all of the license keys installed on the device.
2. Click Back to return to the License Management page.
 265

Download License Keys

Downloads the license keys installed on the device with the J-Web license manager.

1. Click Download Keys to download all of the license keys installed on the device to a single file.

2. Select Save it to disk and specify the file to which the license keys are to be written.

Software Feature Licenses

Each feature license is tied to exactly one software feature, and that license is valid for exactly one
device. Table 70 on page 265 describes the Junos OS features that require licenses.

Table 70: Junos OS Services Feature Licenses

Junos OS License Device

Requirements

Feature J SRX10 SRX21 SRX22 SRX24 SRX65 SRX10 SRX30 SRX50

Series 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00
Line Line Line

X X
Access Manager

X X X X
BGP Route Reflectors

X X X X X
Dynamic VPN

X X* X* X* X* X X X X
IDP Signature Update

Application Signature
Update (Application
X X X
Identification)

Juniper-Kaspersky Anti-
X X X X X X
Virus

Juniper-Sophos Anti-
X X X X X X
Spam

Juniper-Websense
X X X X X X
Integrated Web Filtering
 266

Table 70: Junos OS Services Feature Licenses (Continued)

Junos OS License Device

Requirements

Feature J SRX10 SRX21 SRX22 SRX24 SRX65 SRX10 SRX30 SRX50

Series 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00
Line Line Line

X
SRX100 Memory Upgrade

X X* X* X
UTM

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Enroll Your Device with Juniper ATP Cloud | 280

 267

CHAPTER 19

Security Package Management

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Security Package Management Page | 267

Install or Upload IPS Signatures Package | 271

IPS Signatures Settings | 273

Install Application Signatures Package | 275

Application Signatures Settings | 275

Install URL Category Package | 277

URL Categories Settings | 277

About the Security Package Management Page

IN THIS SECTION

Field Descriptions | 268

You are here: Device Administration > Security Package Management

Use this page to configure the SRX Series device to install, upload, and automatically download the
updated security packages from the specified URL.

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• IPS signatures:

• Install and upload IPS signatures package. See "Install or Upload IPS Signatures Package" on page
271.

• Configure IPS signatures settings. See "IPS Signatures Settings" on page 273.
 268

• Application signatures:

• Install an application signature package. See "Install Application Signatures Package" on page 275.

• Configure application signature package install settings. See "Application Signatures Settings" on
page 275.

• URL categories:

• Install an URL category package. See "Install URL Category Package" on page 277.

• Configure URL category package install settings. See "URL Categories Settings" on page 277.

Field Descriptions

Table 71 on page 268 to Table 73 on page 270 describes the fields on the Security Package
Management page.

Table 71: Fields on the IPS Signatures Page

Field Description

Installed IPS Signature Package

Version Displays the security package version that is currently installed on the device.

Status Displays the following statuses of the security package installation:

• <Version number> installation in progress

• Installed successfully

• Failed

Published Date Displays the security package released date and time.

Detector Displays the detector version number that is currently installed on the device.

Rollback Action Displays the previously installed security package version on the system.

Click the version number to rollback to the previous version.

 269

Table 71: Fields on the IPS Signatures Page (Continued)

Field Description

Latest IPS Signature Package

Version Displays the ten latest security package versions.

View Details Click View Details to learn more about the security package version.

Install You can choose either of the options:

• Install package—Installs the selected security package version on the device.

• Upload package—Uploads a selected package version to install it on the device.

Settings You can configure a proxy server to download and install security package. You can also
schedule an automatic installation of security packages for a later date and time.

Table 72: Fields on the Application Signatures Page

Field Description

Installed Application Signature Package

Version Displays the security package version that is currently installed on the device.

Status Displays the following statuses of the security package installation:

• <Version number> installation in progress

• Installed successfully

• Failed

Published Date Displays the security package released date and time.
 270

Table 72: Fields on the Application Signatures Page (Continued)

Field Description

Rollback Action Displays the previously installed security package version on the system.

Click the version number to roll back to the previous version.

Latest Application Signature Package

Version Displays the ten latest security package versions.

View Details Click View Details to learn more about the security package version.

Install You can choose to install the selected security package version on the device.

Install Settings You can configure a proxy server to download and install security package. You can also
schedule an automatic installation of security packages for a later date and time.

Table 73: Fields on the URL Categories Page

Field Description

URL Category Package

Version Displays the Enhanced Web Filtering (EWF) categories package version that is currently
installed on the device.

Status Displays the following statuses of the security package installation:

• <Version number> installation in progress

• Installed successfully

• Failed

Base Filter Click the base filter name to view the available URL categories.
 271

Table 73: Fields on the URL Categories Page (Continued)

Field Description

Install Installs the latest EWF category package on the device.

Install Settings You can configure a proxy server to download and install EWF categories package. You can also
schedule an automatic installation of EWF categories package for a later date and time.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Install or Upload IPS Signatures Package | 271

Install Application Signatures Package | 275
Install URL Category Package | 277
IPS Signatures Settings | 273
Application Signatures Settings | 275
URL Categories Settings | 277

Install or Upload IPS Signatures Package

You are here: Device Administration > Security Package Management.

You can choose to install the selected security package version or upload a selected package version to
install it on the device.

NOTE: When using either of the installation methods, you can continue to configure the other
features while the installation is in progress. Once the installation is complete, you will see a
notification on the UI.

To install the security packages:

1. Select a security package version you want to install and then click Install available at the top-right of
the Latest IPS Signature Package table.
2. Click Install package to install the selected security package version.
The installation status is shown in the Status column of the Installed IPS Signature Package table.
 272

To upload the security packages (offline security packages installation):

1. Click Install available at the top-right of the Latest IPS Signature Package table. Then, select Upload
package.

2. Click Browse to upload a downloaded security package version and then click OK.

The installation starts automatically and the status is shown in the Status column of the Installed IPS
Signature Package table.

To download the security package on the host machine:

a. Go to https://support.juniper.net/support/downloads/.

b. Select All Products from the list and enter the SRX Series model. For example, SRX300.

c. Press Enter or click Find a Product.

d. Scroll down and go to Related Software section.

e. Click + and click on the Offline Signature Files.

You are directed to the Download Results page.

f. Click + to choose any one of the following:

• Offline APPID Sigpack Files—This includes only the App ID files.

• Offline Sigpack Files—This includes both IPS and App ID files.

g. Click the gz link of the package you want to download from the Downloads column.

You are directed to the Web download site.

h. Log in with your username and password.

i. Select I agree for the EULA information and click Proceed.

j. On the Download Software page that appears, the following options are available:

• If you want to download the package on your host machine, click the CLICK HERE link and
save the file to your machine.

• If you want to download the package on your device, copy the URL and install it on the device
using the CLI commands.
 273

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Security Package Management Page | 267

Install Application Signatures Package | 275
Install URL Category Package | 277

IPS Signatures Settings

You are here: Device Administration > Security Package Management

You can configure a proxy server to download and install security package. You can also schedule an
automatic installation of security packages for a later date and time.

To configure the security package installation settings:

1. Click the Settings icon available at the top-right of the Latest IPS Signature Package table.
The Settings page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 74 on page 273.
3. Click OK.
The security package will automatically install in the scheduled interval. The installation status is
shown in the Status column of the Installed IPS Signature Package table.

Table 74: Fields on the Settings Page

Field Action

Security Package URL Displays the URL from where the security package is
downloaded. Default URL is https://
signatures.juniper.net/cgi-bin/index.cgi.

Routing Instance Select a routing instance from the list to reach the
proxy server.

To create a new routing instance, click Create New. For

more information on the fields, see "Add a Routing
Instance" on page 540.
 274

Table 74: Fields on the Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Proxy profile This is optional. Select a proxy profile from the list. The
proxy profile acts as a proxy server to download the
security package.

To create a new proxy profile, click Create New. For

more information on the fields, see "Add a Proxy
Profile" on page 776.

Schedule Install

Schedule Enable the option to schedule automatic download and

installation of security package at a specific date, time,
and interval.

NOTE: The package also includes application

signatures. If you've set up a separate schedule for
installing application signatures, then this schedule will
take precedence.

Start Time Select a time to start automatic download and to install

the updated security package from the specified URL.

Format: YYYY-MM-DD.hh:mm (24 hours).

Interval Amount of time (in hours) that the device waits before
updating the security package.

Range: 1 through 336

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Security Package Management Page | 267

Install Application Signatures Package | 275
Install Application Signatures Package | 275
Install URL Category Package | 277
 275

Install Application Signatures Package

You are here: Device Administration > Security Package Management.

You can choose to install the selected security package version on the device.

To install the security packages:

1. Select a security package version you want to install and then click Install available at the top-right of
the Latest Application Signature Package table.
2. Click Install package to install the selected security package version.
The installation status is shown in the Status column of the Installed Application Signature Package
table.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Security Package Management Page | 267

Install or Upload IPS Signatures Package | 271
Install URL Category Package | 277

Application Signatures Settings

You are here: Device Administration > Security Package Management

You can configure a proxy server to download and install security package. You can also schedule an
automatic installation of security packages for a later date and time.

To configure the security package installation settings:

1. Click the Settings icon available at the top-right of the Latest Application Signature Package table.
The Install Settings page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 75 on page 276.
3. Click OK.
The security package will automatically install in the scheduled interval. The installation status is
shown in the Status column of the Installed Application Signature Package table.
 276

Table 75: Fields on the Install Settings Page

Field Action

Security Package URL Displays the URL from where the security package is
downloaded. Default URL is https://
signatures.juniper.net/cgi-bin/index.cgi.

Proxy profile This is optional. Select a proxy profile from the list. The
proxy profile acts as a proxy server to download the
security package.

To create a new proxy profile, click Create New. For

more information on the fields, see "Add a Proxy
Profile" on page 776.

Schedule Install

Schedule Enable the option to schedule automatic download and

installation of security package at a specific date, time,
and interval.

NOTE: If IPS signatures package installation is already

scheduled, then it also includes application signatures
package. If you want to set up a separate schedule for
installing application signatures, then disable the
Schedule option for IPS signatures.

Start Time Select a time to start automatic download and to install

the updated security package from the specified URL.

Format: YYYY-MM-DD.hh:mm (24 hours).

Interval Amount of time (in hours) that the device waits before
updating the security package.

Range: 1 through 336

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Security Package Management Page | 267

 277

Install or Upload IPS Signatures Package | 271

Install Application Signatures Package | 275
Install URL Category Package | 277

Install URL Category Package

You are here: Device Administration > Security Package Management.

You can choose to install the latest URL category package version to install it on the device.

To install the latest URL category package:

1. Click Install available at the top-right of the URL Category Package table.
2. Click Install package to install the latest URL category package version.
The installation status is shown in the Status column of the URL Category Package table.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Security Package Management Page | 267

Install or Upload IPS Signatures Package | 271
Install Application Signatures Package | 275
URL Categories Settings | 277

URL Categories Settings

You are here: Device Administration > Security Package Management

You can configure a proxy server to download and install EWF categories package. You can also
schedule an automatic installation of EWF categories package for a later date and time.

To configure the EWF categories package installation settings:

1. Click the Settings icon available at the top-right of the URL Category Package table.
The Install Settings page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 76 on page 278.
3. Click OK.
The EWF categories package will automatically install in the scheduled interval. The installation
status is shown in the Status column of the URL Category Package table.
 278

Table 76: Fields on the Install Settings Page

Field Action

Security Package URL Displays the URL from where the EWF categories
package is downloaded. Default URL is https://
update.juniper-updates.net/.

Routing Instance Select a routing instance from the list to reach the
proxy server.

To create a new routing instance, click Create New. For

more information on the fields, see "Add a Routing
Instance" on page 540.

Proxy profile This is optional. Select a proxy profile from the list. The
proxy profile acts as a proxy server to download the
EWF categories package.

To create a new proxy profile, click Create New. For

more information on the fields, see "Add a Proxy
Profile" on page 776.

Schedule Install

Schedule Enable the option to schedule automatic download and

installation of EWF categories package at a specific
date, time, and interval.

Start Time Select a time to start automatic download and to install

the updated EWF categories package from the
specified URL.

Format: YYYY-MM-DD.hh:mm (24 hours).

Interval Amount of time (in hours) that the device waits before
updating the EWF categories package.

Range: 1 through 336

 279

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Security Package Management Page | 267

Install or Upload IPS Signatures Package | 271
Install Application Signatures Package | 275
 280

CHAPTER 20

ATP Management

IN THIS CHAPTER

Enroll Your Device with Juniper ATP Cloud | 280

About the Diagnostics Page | 283

Enroll Your Device with Juniper ATP Cloud

Before enrolling a device:

• Ensure that you have a Juniper ATP Cloud account with an associated license (free, basic, or
premium) to configure a Juniper ATP Cloud realm. The license controls the features of the Juniper
ATP Cloud. For more information on the Juniper ATP Cloud account, see Registering a Juniper
Advanced Threat Prevention Cloud Account.

• Decide which region the realm you create will cover because you must select a region when you
configure a realm.

• Ensure the device is registered in the ATP cloud portal.

• In the CLI mode, configure set security forwarding-process enhanced-services-mode on your SRX300,
SRX320, SRX340, SRX345, and SRX550M devices to open ports and get the device ready to
communicate with ATP cloud.

• ATP cloud requires that both your Routing Engine (control plane) and Packet Forwarding Engine (data
plane) can connect to the Internet.

• ATP cloud requires the following ports to be open on the SRX Series device: 80, 8080, and 443.

You are here: Device Administration > ATP Management > Enrollment.

Use this page to enroll your SRX device with Juniper Advanced Threat Prevention Cloud (Juniper ATP
Cloud).

Juniper ATP Cloud is a cloud-based threat identification and prevention solution. It protects your device
from malware and sophisticated cyber threats by inspecting e-mail and web traffic for advanced threats.
 281

Juniper ATP Cloud integrates with the SRX Series devices to simplify its deployment and enhance the
anti-threat capabilities of the SRX device.

ATP uses a Junos OS operation (op) script to help you configure your SRX Series device to connect to
the ATP cloud service.

The Junos OS operation (op) script performs the following tasks:

• Downloads and installs certificate authority (CAs) licenses onto your SRX Series device.

• Creates local certificates and enrolls them with the cloud server.

• Performs basic ATP cloud configuration on the SRX Series device.

• Establishes a secure connection to the cloud server.

To enroll your device with Juniper ATP Cloud from J-Web:

1. Proxy Profile Configuration (Optional)

a. Select an option in the Proxy Profile list and proceed with Step 2.

NOTE:

• The list displays the existing proxy profiles that you have created using the Proxy
Profile page (Security Policies & Objects > Proxy Profiles).

• The SRX device and Juniper ATP Cloud communicates through the proxy server if a
proxy profile is configured. Otherwise, they directly communicate with each other.

b. Or click Create Proxy to create a proxy profile.

The Create Proxy Profile page appears.

c. Complete the configuration by using the guidelines in Table 77 on page 282.

d. Click OK.

A new proxy profile is created.

e. Click Apply Proxy.

Applying proxy enables the SRX device and Juniper ATP Cloud to communicate through the proxy
server.
 282

Table 77: Fields on the Create Proxy Profile Page

Field Action

Profile Name Enter a name for the proxy profile.

Connection Type Select the connection type server from the list that proxy profile uses:

• Server IP—Enter the IP address of the proxy server.

• Host Name—Enter the name of the proxy server.

Port Number Select a port number for the proxy profile. Range is 0 to 65535.

2. Enroll SRX Device with ATP Cloud

a. Click Enroll.

The ATP Cloud Enrollment page appears.

NOTE: If there are any existing configuration changes, a message appears for you to
commit the changes and then to proceed with the enrollment process.

b. Complete the configuration by using the guidelines in Table 78 on page 283.

c. Click OK.

The SRX device enrollment progress, successful message, or any errors will be shown at the end
of the ATP Cloud Enrollment page.

NOTE:

• A new realm is created if you have enabled Create New Realm and then the SRX device
is enrolled to Juniper ATP Cloud. If there is any existing enrollment for the same SRX
device, CLI sends the data to Juniper ATP Cloud portal to do the duplicate validation
during the enrollment process. You cannot check for the duplicate validation through J-
Web.

• Click Diagnostics to troubleshoot any enrollment errors.

 283

• Click UnEnroll if you wish to disenroll your device from ATP

Table 78: Fields on the ATP Cloud Enrollment Page

Field Description

Create New Realm By default, this option will be disabled if you have an ATP Cloud account
with an associated license.

Enable this option to add a new realm if you do not have an ATP Cloud
account with an associated license.

Location Select a region of the world from the list.

Email Enter your E-mail address.

Password Enter a unique string at least eight characters long. It must include both
uppercase letters, lowercase letters, and at least one number. It can also
include special characters. No spaces are allowed and you cannot use the
same sequence of characters that are in your e-mail address.

Confirm Password Reenter the password.

Company Name Enter a company name to enroll into the realm. A company name can
only contain alphanumeric characters, special characters (underscore and
dash).

Realm Enter a name for the security realm. This should be a name that is
meaningful to your organization. A realm name can only contain
alphanumeric characters and the dash symbol. Once created, this name
cannot be changed.

About the Diagnostics Page

You are here: Device Administration > ATP Management > Diagnostics.

Use this page to diagnose and verify threat prevention.

 284

Table 79 on page 284 describes the fields on the Diagnostics page.

Table 79: Fields on the Diagnostics Page

Field Description

Diagnostics

ATP Diagnostics Select an option from the list to diagnose.

Diagnostics Logs Displays the diagnostic logs for the selected option.

Run Diagnostics Enables you to see the diagnostics of a certain region.

Check Connectivity

Check Click Check to verify the connectivity.

Server Details

Server hostname Specify the host name of the server.

Server realm Specifies the name of a server realm.

Server port Specify the server port number.

Connection Plane

Connection time Specify the connection time of the server.

Connection Status Specify the connection status.

Service Plane

Card Info Specify the card number.

Connection Active Number Specify the connection active numbers.

 285

Table 79: Fields on the Diagnostics Page (Continued)

Field Description

Connection Relay statistics Specify the connection relay statistics.

Other Details

Configured Proxy Server Specify the configured proxy server.

Port Number Specify the port number of the proxy server.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor Threat Prevention | 112

 286

CHAPTER 21

Operations

IN THIS CHAPTER

Maintain Files | 286

Maintain Reboot Schedule | 290

Maintain System Snapshots | 291

Maintain Files

IN THIS SECTION

About Files Page | 286

Clean Up Files | 286

Download and Delete Files | 287

Delete Backup JUNOS Package | 289

About Files Page

You are here: Device Administration > Operations > Files.

You can clean up files, download, or delete files and delete the JUNOS Package backup.

Clean Up Files
To maintain files:

1. Click Clean Up Files.

The device will perform the following tasks:
 287

• Rotates log files—Indicates all information in the current log files is archived and fresh log files are
created.

• Deletes log files in /var/log—Indicates any files that are not currently being written to are deleted.

• Deletes temporary files in /var/tmp—Indicates any files that have not been accessed within two
days are deleted.

• Deletes all crash files in /var/crash—Indicates any core files that the device has written during an
error are deleted.

• Deletes all software images (*.tgz files) in /var/sw/pkg—Indicates any software image copied to
this directory during software upgrades are deleted.

The J-Web interface displays the files that you can delete and the amount of space that will be freed
on the file system.
2. Click one:

• OK—Deletes the files and returns to the Files page.

• Cancel—Cancels your entries and returns to the Files page.

Download and Delete Files

Table 80 on page 287 provides the maintenance options to download and delete files.

Table 80: Download and Delete Files Maintenance Options

File Type Function

Log Files Lists the log files located in the /var/log directory on
the device.

Select an option:

• Delete—Deletes files.

• Download—Downloads files.
 288

Table 80: Download and Delete Files Maintenance Options (Continued)

File Type Function

Temporary Files Lists the temporary files located in the /var/tmp

directory on the device.

Select an option:

• Delete—Deletes files.

• Download—Downloads files.

Jailed Temporary Files Lists the jailed temporary files located in the /var/
jail/tmp directory on the device.

Select an option:

• Delete—Deletes files.

• Download—Downloads files.

Old JUNOS Software Lists the software images located in the /var/sw/pkg
(*.tgz files) directory on the device.

Select an option:

• Delete—Deletes files.

• Download—Downloads files.

Crash (Core) File Lists the core files located in the /var/crash directory
on the device.

Select an option:

• Delete—Deletes files.

• Download—Downloads files.
 289

Table 80: Download and Delete Files Maintenance Options (Continued)

File Type Function

Database Files Lists the database files located in the /var/db directory
on the device.

Select an option:

• Delete—Deletes files.

• Download—Downloads files.

Delete Backup JUNOS Package

Table 81 on page 289 provides the maintenance options to delete the JUNOS Package backup.

Table 81: Delete Backup JUNOS Package Files Maintenance Options

Field Function

Delete backup Junos package Reviews the backup image information listed.

Click Delete backup JUNOS package and then select an

option.

NOTE: The Delete backup option is hidden if the router

is in dual-root partitioning scheme

The available options are:

• OK—Deletes the backup image and returns to the

Files page.

• Cancel—Cancels the deletion of the backup image

and returns to the Files page.

SEE ALSO

Maintain Reboot Schedule | 290

Maintain System Snapshots | 291
 290

Maintain Reboot Schedule

You are here: Device Administration > Operations > Reboot.

You can schedule reboot or halt the system using options such as reboot Immediately, reboot in, reboot
with the system time, or halt immediately.

NOTE: A halted system can only be accessed from the system console port.

To reboot or halt the system:

1. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 82 on page 290.
Table 82: Reboot Schedule Maintenance Options

Field Action

Reboot Immediately Select this option to reboot the device immediately.

Reboot in number of minutes Select this option to reboot the device after the
specified number of minutes from the current time.

Reboot when the system time is hour:minute Select this option to reboot the device at the
absolute time that you specify, on the current day.
Select a two-digit hour in 24-hour format and a two-
digit minute.

Halt Immediately Select this option to stop the device immediately.

After the software has stopped, you can access the
NOTE: This option is not available in SRX4600 device through the console port only.
device.

Reboot From Media Choose the boot device from the Reboot From Media
list:
NOTE: This option is not available in SRX4600
device. • internal—Reboots from the internal media
(default).

• usb—Reboots from the USB storage device.

 291

Table 82: Reboot Schedule Maintenance Options (Continued)

Field Action

Message Type a message to be displayed to the user on the

device before the reboot occurs.

2. Click Schedule.
Schedules a reboot based on the scheduled configuration.
3. The J-Web interface requests confirmation to perform the reboot or to halt.
Click OK to confirm to reboot or alt the system or click Cancel to return to the Reboot page.

NOTE:

• If the reboot is scheduled to occur immediately, the device reboots. You cannot access J-
Web until the device has restarted and the boot sequence is complete. After the reboot is
complete, refresh the browser window to display the J-Web login page.

• If the reboot is scheduled to occur in the future, the Reboot page displays the time until
reboot. You have the option to cancel the request by clicking Cancel Reboot on the J-Web
interface Reboot page.

• If the device is halted, all software processes stop and you can access the device through
the console port only. Reboot the device by pressing any key on the keyboard.

• If you cannot connect to the device through the console port, shut down the device by
pressing and holding the power button on the front panel until the POWER LED turns off.
After the device has shut down, you can power on the device by pressing the power
button again. The POWER LED lights during startup and remains steadily green when the
device is operating normally.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Maintain System Snapshots | 291

Maintain System Snapshots

You are here: Device Administration > Operations > Snapshot.

 292

You can configure boot devices to replace primary boot device or to act as a backup boot device.

The snapshot process copies the current system software, along with the current and rescue
configurations, to alternate media. Optionally, you can copy only the factory and rescue configurations.

To maintain the system snapshots, you create a snapshot of the running system software and save the
snapshot to an alternate media.

1. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 83 on page 292.
2. Click Snapshot.
Creates a boot device on an alternate media.
3. Click OK to perform the system snapshot to a media or click Cancel to return to the Snapshot page.
Table 83: Snapshot Maintenance Options

Field Function

Target Media Specifies the boot device to copy the snapshot to.

NOTE: You cannot copy software to the active boot

device.

Select an option for a boot device that is not the

active boot device:

• internal—Copies software to the internal media.

• usb—Copies software to the device connected to

the USB port.

Partition Partitions the media. This process is usually

necessary for boot devices that do not already have
software installed on them.

Select the check box.

Factory Copies only the default files that were loaded on the
internal media when it was shipped from the factory,
plus the rescue configuration if one has been set.

Select the check box.

NOTE: After a boot device is created with the

default factory configuration, it can operate only in
an internal media slot.
 293

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Upload Software Packages | 294

Install Software Packages | 295
Rollback Software Package Version | 296
 294

CHAPTER 22

Software Management

IN THIS CHAPTER

Upload Software Packages | 294

Install Software Packages | 295

Rollback Software Package Version | 296

Upload Software Packages

You are here: Device Administration > Software Management > Upload Package.

You can upload a software package file to the device for installation.

To upload software packages:

1. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 84 on page 294.
Table 84: Upload Package Maintenance Options

Field Action

File to Upload Enter the location of the software package on the

local system or click Choose File to navigate to the
location.

Reboot If Required Select the check box to automatically reboot when

the upgrade is complete.

Do not save backup Select the check box so that backup copy of the
current Junos OS package is not saved.
 295

Table 84: Upload Package Maintenance Options (Continued)

Field Action

Format and re-partition the media before installation Select the check box to format the internal media
with dual-root partitioning.
NOTE: This option is not available for SRX4600
devices.

2. Click Upload and Install Package.

The software is activated after the device has rebooted.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Install Software Packages | 295

Rollback Software Package Version | 296

Install Software Packages

You are here: Device Administration > Software Management > Install Package.

You can install a software package from a remote server.

To install software packages:

1. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 85 on page 295.
Table 85: Install Package Maintenance Options

Field Action

Package Location Enter the full address of the software package

location on the FTP or HTTP server. For example, use
one of the following formats:

ftp://hostname/pathname/package-name

http://hostname/pathname/package-name
 296

Table 85: Install Package Maintenance Options (Continued)

Field Action

User Enter the username to use on a remote server.

Password Enter the password to use on a remote server.

Reboot If Required Select the check box to automatically reboot when

the upgrade is complete.

Do not save backup Select the check box so that backup copy of the
current Junos OS package is not saved.

Format and re-partition the media before installation Select the check box to format the internal media
with dual-root partitioning.

2. Click Fetch and Install Package.

The software is activated after the device reboots.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Rollback Software Package Version | 296

Rollback Software Package Version

You are here: Device Administration > Software Management > Rollback.

You can rollback to the previously installed version of the device software.

To rollback software package version:

1. Click Rollback to rollback to the previous version of the software.

NOTE: You cannot stop the process once the rollback operation is requested.
 297

2. Reboot the device when the rollback process is complete and for the new software to take effect. To
reboot, perform the steps in "Maintain Reboot Schedule" on page 290.

NOTE: To rollback to an earlier version, follow the procedure for upgrading, using the
software image labeled with the appropriate release.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Upload Software Packages | 294

Install Software Packages | 295
 298

CHAPTER 23

Configuration Management

IN THIS CHAPTER

Manage Upload Configuration Files | 298

Manage Configuration History | 299

Manage Rescue Configuration | 303

Manage Upload Configuration Files

You are here: Device Administration > Configuration Management > Upload.

You can compare two configuration files, download a configuration file to your local system, or roll back
the configuration to any of the previous versions stored on the device.

To manage upload configuration files:

1. Enter the absolute path and filename in the File to Upload box.

NOTE: You can also click Browse to navigate to the file location and select it.

2. Click Upload and Commit to upload and commit the configuration.

The device checks the configuration for the correct syntax before committing it.

NOTE: The file configuration replaces the existing configuration and continues the upload and
commit process. If any errors occur when the file is loading or committing, J-Web displays the
error and restores the previous configuration.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Manage Configuration History | 299

 299

Manage Rescue Configuration | 303

Manage Configuration History

You are here: Device Administration > Configuration Management > History.

You can view configuration history and database information about users editing the configuration
database.

To manage configuration history:

1. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 86 on page 299.
Table 86: History Maintenance Options

Field Function

Number Indicates the version of the configuration file.

To view a configuration, click the version number.

Date/Time Indicates the date and time the configuration was

committed.

User Indicates the name of the user who committed the

configuration.
 300

Table 86: History Maintenance Options (Continued)

Field Function

Client Indicates the method by which the configuration was

committed.

The available options are:

• cli—A user entered a Junos OS CLI command.

• junoscript—A Junos XML management protocol

client performed the operation. Commit
operations performed by users through the J-
Web interface are identified in this way.

• snmp—An SNMP set request started the

operation.

• button—The CONFIG button on the router was

pressed to commit the rescue configuration (if
set) or to clear all configurations except the
factory configuration.

• autoinstall—Autoinstallation is performed.

• other—Another method was used to commit the

configuration.

Comment Indicates comments.

 301

Table 86: History Maintenance Options (Continued)

Field Function

Log Message Indicates the method used to edit the configuration.

• Imported via paste—Configuration was edited and

loaded with the Device Administration > Tools >
CLI Editor option.

• Imported upload [filename]—Configuration was

uploaded with the Device Administration >
Configuration Management > Upload option.

• Modified via quick-configuration—Configuration

was modified with the specified version of the J-
Web user interface.

• Rolled back via user-interface—Configuration was

rolled back to a previous version through the user
interface specified by user-interface, which can
be Web Interface or CLI.
 302

Table 86: History Maintenance Options (Continued)

Field Function

Action Indicates action to perform with the configuration

file.

Select any one of the following available options:

• Download—Downloads a configuration file to

your local system.

Select the options on your Web browser to save

the configuration file to a target directory on your
local system.

The file is saved as an ASCII file.

• Rollback—Rolls back the configuration to any of

the previous versions stored on the device. The
History page displays the results of the rollback
operation.

NOTE: Click Rollback to load the device and

download the selected configuration. This
behavior is different from entering the rollback
configuration mode command from the CLI,
where the configuration is loaded, but not
committed.

2. To compare configurations files:

a. Select any two configuration files you want to compare.

b. Click Compare.

The History page displays the differences between the two configuration files at each hierarchy
level as follows:

• Lines that have changed are highlighted side by side in green.

• Lines that exist only in the most recent configuration file are displayed in red on the left.

• Lines that exist only in the least recent configuration file are displayed in blue on the right.
 303

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Manage Rescue Configuration | 303

Manage Upload Configuration Files | 298

Manage Rescue Configuration

You are here: Device Administration > Configuration Management > Rescue.

If you inadvertently commit a configuration that denies management access, the only recourse may be
to connect the console. Alternatively, you can rescue configuration that allows the management access
to the device.

To load and commit the rescue configuration, press and immediately release the Config button on the
chassis.

You can set or delete the rescue configuration.

To set or delete rescue configuration:

Click one:

• View rescue configuration—Displays the current rescue configuration (if it exists).

• Set rescue configuration—Sets the current running configuration as the rescue configuration. Click
OK to confirm or Cancel to return to the Rescue page.

• Delete rescue configuration—Deletes the current rescue configuration. Click OK to confirm or Cancel
to return to the Rescue page.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Manage Your Licenses | 262

Manage Device Certificates
 304

CHAPTER 24

Alarm Management

IN THIS CHAPTER

Monitor Chassis Alarm | 304

Monitor System Alarm | 310

Monitor Chassis Alarm

IN THIS SECTION

About Chassis Alarm Page | 304

Create Chassis Alarm Definition | 304

Edit Chassis Alarm Definition | 309

About Chassis Alarm Page

You are here: Device Administration > Alarm Management > Chassis Alarm.

You can create a chassis alarm definition by selecting various options such as DS1, Ethernet, and
integrated service, and so on.

Create Chassis Alarm Definition

To create Chassis Alarm Definition:

1. Enter the information specified in Table 87 on page 305 to create Chassis Alarm Definition.
 305

Table 87: Chassis Alarm Definition Options

Chassis Component Alarm Configuration Option

DS1 Alarm indicator signal (ais)

Yellow alarm (ylw)

Select an alarm condition from the list for DS1:

• Ignore

• Red

• Yellow

• None

Ethernet Link is down (link-down)

Select an alarm condition from the list for Ethernet:

• Ignore

• Red

• Yellow

• None

Integrated Services Hardware or software failure (failure)

Select an alarm condition from the list for Integrated

Services:

• Ignore

• Red

• Yellow

• None
 306

Table 87: Chassis Alarm Definition Options (Continued)

Chassis Component Alarm Configuration Option

Management Ethernet Link is down (link-down)

Select an alarm condition from the list for Management

Ethernet:

• Ignore

• Red

• Yellow

• None

Optical Transport Network Optical channel Data Backward defect indication (odu-bdi)
Unit (OTN ODU)
Payload type mismatch (odu-ptim)

Trail trace identifier mismatch (odu-ttim)

Select an alarm condition from the list for OTN ODU:

• Ignore

• Red

• Yellow

• None
 307

Table 87: Chassis Alarm Definition Options (Continued)

Chassis Component Alarm Configuration Option

Optical Transport Network Optical channel Loss of frame (oc-lof)

Transport Unit (OTN OTU)
Loss of multiframe (oc-lom)

Loss of signal (oc-los)

Backward defect indication (oc-bdi)

Forward error correction excessive FEC errors (out-fec-

excessive-errs)

Incoming alignment error (out-iae)

Trail trace identifier mismatch (out-ttim)

Wavelength-Lock (Wavelength Lock)

Select a alarm condition from the list for OTN OTU:

• Ignore

• Red

• Yellow

• None

Serial Clear-to-send (CTS) signal absent (cts-absent)

Data carrier detect (DCD) signal absent (dcd-absent)

Data set ready (DSR) signal absent (dsr absent)

Loss of receive clock (loss-of-rx-clock)

Loss of transmit clock (loss-of-tx-clock)

Select an alarm condition from the list for Serial:

• Ignore

• Red

• Yellow

• None
 308

Table 87: Chassis Alarm Definition Options (Continued)

Chassis Component Alarm Configuration Option

Services Services module hardware down (hw-down)

Services link down (linkdown)

Services module held in reset (pic-hold-reset)

Services module reset (pic-reset)

Receive errors (rx-errors)

Services module software down (sw-down)

Transmit errors (tx-errors)

Select an alarm condition from the list for Services:

• Ignore

• Red

• Yellow

• None
 309

Table 87: Chassis Alarm Definition Options (Continued)

Chassis Component Alarm Configuration Option

DS3 Alarm indication signal (ais)

Excessive number of zeros (exz)

Far-end receive failure (ferf)

Idle alarm (idle)

Line code violation (lcv)

Loss of frame (lof)

Loss of signal (los)

Phase-locked loop out of lock (pll)

Yellow alarm (ylw)

Select an alarm condition from the list for DS3:

• Ignore

• Red

• Yellow

• None

2. Click OK to create Chassis Alarm Definition.

The Chassis Alarm Definition page appears.
3. Click Cancel to cancel your entries and returns to the Chassis Alarm Definition page.

Edit Chassis Alarm Definition

To edit Chassis Alarm Definition:

1. Click the pencil icon on the upper right side of the Chassis Alarm Definition page.
See Table 87 on page 305 for the options available for editing the Chassis Alarm Definition page.
2. Click OK.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Monitor System Alarm | 310

 310

Monitor System Alarm

IN THIS SECTION

About System Alarm Page | 310

Create System Alarm Configuration | 310

Edit System Alarm Configuration | 314

About System Alarm Page

You are here: Device Administration > Alarm Management > System Alarm.

You can enable system login alarm login classes. The configured Login Classes will display system alarms
while logging in.

Create System Alarm Configuration

To create System Alarm Configuration:

1. Enter the information specified in Table 88 on page 310 to create System Alarm Configuration.
Table 88: RPM Information Troubleshooting Options

Field Function

Currently Running Tests

Graph Click the Graph link to display the graph (if it is not
already displayed) or to update the graph for a particular
test.

Owner Configured owner name of the RPM test.

Test Name Configured name of the RPM test.

 311

Table 88: RPM Information Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Function

Probe Type Type of RPM probe configured for the specified test.
Following are valid probe types:

• http-get

• http-get-metadata

• icmp-ping

• icmp-ping-timestamp

• tcp-ping

• udp-ping

Target Address IP address or URL of the remote server that is being

probed by the RPM test.

Source Address Explicitly configured source address that is included in

the probe packet headers.

If no source address is configured, the RPM probe

packets use the outgoing interface as the source
address, and the Source Address field is empty.

Minimum RTT Shortest round-trip time from the J Series device to the
remote server, as measured over the course of the test.

Maximum RTT Longest round-trip time from the J Series device to the
remote server, as measured over the course of the test.

Average RTT Average round-trip time from the J Series device to the
remote server, as measured over the course of the test.

Standard Deviation RTT Standard deviation of round-trip times from the J Series
device to the remote server, as measured over the
course of the test.
 312

Table 88: RPM Information Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Function

Probes Sent Total number of probes sent over the course of the test.

Loss Percentage Percentage of probes sent for which a response was not
received.

Round-Trip Time for a Probe

Samples Total number of probes used for the data set.

The J Series device maintains records of the most recent

50 probes for each configured test. These 50 probes are
used to generate RPM statistics for a particular test.

Earliest Sample System time when the first probe in the sample was
received.

Latest Sample System time when the last probe in the sample was
received.

Mean Value Average round-trip time for the 50-probe sample.

Standard Deviation Standard deviation of the round-trip times for the 50-
probe sample.

Lowest Value Shortest round-trip time from the device to the remote
server, as measured over the 50-probe sample.

Time of Lowest Sample System time when the lowest value in the 50-probe
sample was received.

Highest Value Longest round-trip time from the J Series device to the
remote server, as measured over the 50-probe sample.
 313

Table 88: RPM Information Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Function

Time of Highest Sample System time when the highest value in the 50-probe
sample was received.

Cumulative Jitter for a Probe

Samples Total number of probes used for the data set.

The J Series device maintains records of the most recent

50 probes for each configured test. These 50 probes are
used to generate RPM statistics for a particular test.

Earliest Sample System time when the first probe in the sample was
received.

Latest Sample System time when the last probe in the sample was
received.

Mean Value Average jitter for the 50-probe sample.

Standard Deviation Standard deviation of the jitter values for the 50-probe
sample.

Lowest Value Smallest jitter value, as measured over the 50-probe

sample.

Time of Lowest Sample System time when the lowest value in the 50-probe
sample was received.

Highest Value Highest jitter value, as measured over the 50-probe

sample.

Time of Highest Sample System time when the highest jitter value in the 50-
probe sample was received.

2. Click OK to create System Alarm Configuration.

System Alarm Configuration page appears.
 314

3. Click Cancel to cancel your entries and returns to the System Alarm Configuration page.

Edit System Alarm Configuration

To edit System Alarm Configuration:

1. Click the pencil icon on the upper right side of the System Alarm Configuration page.
See Table 88 on page 310 for the options available for editing the System Alarm Configuration page.
2. Click OK.

SEE ALSO

Monitor Chassis Alarm | 304

 315

CHAPTER 25

RPM

IN THIS CHAPTER

Setup RPM | 315

View RPM | 324

Setup RPM

IN THIS SECTION

Problem | 315

Solution | 315

Problem

Description

You are here: Device Administration > RPM > Setup RPM.

You can configure RPM parameters to monitor real-time performance through the J-Web interface. You
can specify an RPM owner, request information related to probe, hardware timestamp, generates Traps,
and specify a probe server.

Solution

To configure RPM parameters:

1. Enter the information specified in Table 89 on page 316 to troubleshoot the issue.

2. From the main RPM configuration page, click one:

 316

• Apply—Applies the configuration and stays on the RPM configuration page.

• OK—Applies the configuration and returns to the RPM configuration page.

• Cancel—Cancels your entries and returns to the RPM configuration page.

Table 89: RPM Setup Troubleshooting Options

Field Function

Probe Owners

Identification

Owner Name Specifies an RPM owner for which one or more RPM tests
are configured. In most implementations, the owner name
identifies a network on which a set of tests is being run (a
particular customer, for example).

Type the name of the RPM owner.

Performance Probe Tests

Identification

Test name Specifies a unique name to identify the RPM test.

Type the name of the RPM test.

Target (Address or URL) Specifies an IP address or a URL of a probe target.

Type the IP address, in dotted decimal notation, or the

URL of the probe target. If the target is a URL, type a fully
formed URL that includes http://.

Source Address Specifies an IP address to be used as the probe source

address.

Type the source address to be used for the probe. If the

source IP address is not one of the device's assigned
addresses, the packet uses the outgoing interface's
address as its source.
 317

Table 89: RPM Setup Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Function

Routing Instance Specifies a routing instance over which the probe is sent.

Type the routing instance name. The routing instance

applies only to probes of type icmp and icmp-timestamp.
The default routing instance is inet.0.

History Size Specifies the number of probe results saved in the probe
history.

Type a number between 0 and 255. The default history

size is 50 probes.

Request Information

Probe Type Specifies the type of probe to send as part of the test.

Select the desired probe type from the list:

• http-get

• http-get-metadata

• icmp-ping

• icmp-ping-timestamp

• tcp-ping

• udp-ping

Interval Specifies the wait time (in seconds) between each probe
transmission.

Type a number between 1 and 255 (seconds).

Test Interval Specifies the wait time (in seconds) between tests.

Type a number between 0 and 86400 (seconds).

 318

Table 89: RPM Setup Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Function

Probe Count Specifies the total number of probes to be sent for each
test.

Type a number between 1 and 15.

Moving Average Size Specifies the number of samples used for a moving
average.

Type a number between 0 and 225.

Destination Port Specifies the TCP or UDP port to which probes are sent.

To use TCP or UDP probes, you must configure the remote

server as a probe receiver. Both the probe server and the
remote server must be Juniper Networks devices
configured to receive and transmit RPM probes on the
same TCP or UDP port.

Type the number 7—a standard TCP or UDP port number

—or a port number from 49152 through 65535.

DSCP Bits Specifies the Differentiated Services code point (DSCP)

bits. This value must be a valid 6-bit pattern. The default is
000000.

Type a valid 6-bit pattern.

Data Size Specifies the size of the data portion of the ICMP probes.

Type a size (in bytes) between 0 and 65507.

Data Fill Specifies the contents of the data portion of the ICMP
probes.

Type a hexadecimal value between 1 and 800h to use as

the contents of the ICMP probe data.

Hardware Timestamp
 319

Table 89: RPM Setup Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Function

One Way Hardware Timestamp Specifies the hardware timestamps for one-way
measurements.

To enable one-way timestamping, select the check box.

Hardware Timestamp Specifies timestamping of RPM probe messages. You can

timestamp the following RPM probes to improve the
measurement of latency or jitter:

• ICMP ping

• ICMP ping timestamp

• UDP ping—destination port UDP-ECHO (port 7) only

• UDP ping timestamp—destination port UDP-ECHO

(port 7) only

To enable timestamping, select the check box.

Destination Interface Specifies the name of an output interface for probes.

Select the interface from the list.

Maximum Probe Thresholds

Successive Lost Probes Specifies the total number of probes that must be lost
successively to trigger a probe failure and generate a
system log message.

Type a number between 0 and 15.

Lost Probes Specifies the total number of probes that must be lost to
trigger a probe failure and generate a system log message.

Type a number between 0 and 15.

 320

Table 89: RPM Setup Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Function

Round Trip Time Specifies the total round-trip time (in microseconds), from
the device to the remote server, that triggers a probe
failure and generates a system log message.

Type a number between 0 and 60,000,000 (microseconds).

Jitter Specifies the total jitter (in microseconds) for a test that
triggers a probe failure and generates a system log
message.

Type a number between 0 and 60,000,000 (microseconds).

Standard Deviation Specifies the maximum allowable standard deviation (in

microseconds) for a test, which, if exceeded, triggers a
probe failure and generates a system log message.

Type a number between 0 and 60,000,000 (microseconds).

Egress Time Specifies the total one-way time (in microseconds), from
the device to the remote server, that triggers a probe
failure and generates a system log message.

Type a number between 0 and 60,000,000 (microseconds).

Ingress Time Specifies the total one-way time (in microseconds), from
the remote server to the device, that triggers a probe
failure and generates a system log message.

Type a number between 0 and 60,000,000 (microseconds)

Jitter Egress Time Specifies the total outbound-time jitter (in microseconds)
for a test that triggers a probe failure and generates a
system log message.

Type a number between 0 and 60,000,000 (microseconds)

 321

Table 89: RPM Setup Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Function

Jitter Ingress Time Specifies the total inbound-time jitter (in microseconds) for
a test that triggers a probe failure and generates a system
log message.

Type a number between 0 and 60,000,000 (microseconds).

Egress Standard Deviation Specifies the maximum allowable standard deviation of

outbound times (in microseconds) for a test, which, if
exceeded, triggers a probe failure and generates a system
log message.

Type a number between 0 and 60,000,000 (microseconds).

Ingress Standard Deviation Specifies the maximum allowable standard deviation of

inbound times (in microseconds) for a test, which, if
exceeded, triggers a probe failure and generates a system
log message.

Type a number between 0 and 60,000,000 (microseconds).

Traps

Egress Jitter Exceeded Generates SNMP traps when the threshold for jitter in
outbound time is exceeded.

• To enable SNMP traps for this condition, select the

check box.

• To disable SNMP traps, clear the check box.

Egress Standard Deviation Exceeded Generates SNMP traps when the threshold for standard
deviation in outbound times is exceeded.

• To enable SNMP traps for this condition, select the

check box.

• To disable SNMP traps, clear the check box.

 322

Table 89: RPM Setup Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Function

Egress Time Exceeded Generates SNMP traps when the threshold for maximum
outbound time is exceeded.

• To enable SNMP traps for this condition, select the

check box.

• To disable SNMP traps, clear the check box.

Ingress Jitter Exceeded Generates SNMP traps when the threshold for jitter in
inbound time is exceeded.

• To enable SNMP traps for this condition, select the

check box.

• To disable SNMP traps, clear the check box.

Ingress Standard Deviation Exceeded Generates SNMP traps when the threshold for standard
deviation in inbound times is exceeded.

• To enable SNMP traps for this condition, select the

check box.

• To disable SNMP traps, clear the check box.

Ingress Time Exceeded Generates traps when the threshold for maximum inbound
time is exceeded.

• To enable SNMP traps for this condition, select the

check box.

• To disable SNMP traps, clear the check box.

Jitter Exceeded Generates traps when the threshold for jitter in round-trip
time is exceeded.

• To enable SNMP traps for this condition, select the

check box.

• To disable SNMP traps, clear the check box.

 323

Table 89: RPM Setup Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Function

Probe Failure Generates traps when the threshold for the number of
successive lost probes is reached.

• To enable SNMP traps for this condition, select the

check box.

• To disable SNMP traps, clear the check box.

RTT Exceeded Generates traps when the threshold for maximum round-
trip time is exceeded.

• To enable SNMP traps for this condition, select the

check box.

• To disable SNMP traps, clear the check box.

Standard Deviation Exceeded Generates traps when the threshold for standard deviation
in round-trip times is exceeded.

• To enable SNMP traps for this condition, select the

check box.

• To disable SNMP traps, clear the check box.

Test Completion Generates traps when a test is completed.

• To enable SNMP traps for this condition, select the

check box.

• To disable SNMP traps, clear the check box.

Test Failure Generates traps when the threshold for the total number
of lost probes is reached.

• To enable SNMP traps for this condition, select the

check box.

• To disable SNMP traps, clear the check box.

Maximum Number of Concurrent Probes

 324

Table 89: RPM Setup Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Function

Maximum Number of Concurrent Probes Specifies the maximum number of concurrent probes
allowed.

Type a number between 1 and 500.

Probe Server

TCP Probe Server Specifies the port on which the device is to receive and
transmit TCP probes.

Type number 7, or a port number from 49160 through

65535.

UDP Probe Server Specifies the port on which the device is to receive and
transmit UDP probes.

Type number 7, or a port number from 49160 through

65535.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

View RPM | 324

View RPM

IN THIS SECTION

Problem | 325

Solution | 325
 325

Problem

Description

You are here: Device Administration > RPM > View RPM.

You can configure the RPM probes, to view the RPM statistics and to ensure that the device is
configured to receive and transmit TCP and UDP RPM probes on correct ports.

You can view the RPM configuration to verify the following information:

• The RPM configuration is within the expected values.

• The RPM probes are functioning and the RPM statistics are within expected values.

• The device is configured to receive and transmit TCP and UDP RPM probes on the correct ports.

In addition to the RPM statistics for each RPM test, the J-Web interface displays the round-trip times
and cumulative jitter graphically. In the graphs, the round-trip time and jitter values are plotted as a
function of the system time. Large spikes in round-trip time or jitter indicate a slower outbound (egress)
or inbound (ingress) time for the probe sent at that particular time.

Solution

To view RPM information:

1. Enter the information specified in Table 90 on page 325.

Table 90: RPM Information Troubleshooting Options

Field Function

Currently Running Tests

Graph Click the Graph link to display the graph (if it is not already
displayed) or to update the graph for a particular test.

Owner Configured owner name of the RPM test.

Test Name Configured name of the RPM test.

 326

Table 90: RPM Information Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Function

Probe Type Type of RPM probe configured for the specified test.
Following are valid probe types:

• http-get

• http-get-metadata

• icmp-ping

• icmp-ping-timestamp

• tcp-ping

• udp-ping

Target Address IP address or URL of the remote server that is being

probed by the RPM test.

Source Address Explicitly configured source address that is included in the

probe packet headers.

If no source address is configured, the RPM probe packets

use the outgoing interface as the source address, and the
Source Address field is empty.

Minimum RTT Shortest round-trip time from the J Series device to the
remote server, as measured over the course of the test.

Maximum RTT Longest round-trip time from the J Series device to the
remote server, as measured over the course of the test.

Average RTT Average round-trip time from the J Series device to the
remote server, as measured over the course of the test.

Standard Deviation RTT Standard deviation of round-trip times from the J Series
device to the remote server, as measured over the course
of the test.
 327

Table 90: RPM Information Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Function

Probes Sent Total number of probes sent over the course of the test.

Loss Percentage Percentage of probes sent for which a response was not
received.

Round-Trip Time for a Probe

Samples Total number of probes used for the data set.

The J Series device maintains records of the most recent

50 probes for each configured test. These 50 probes are
used to generate RPM statistics for a particular test.

Earliest Sample System time when the first probe in the sample was
received.

Latest Sample System time when the last probe in the sample was
received.

Mean Value Average round-trip time for the 50-probe sample.

Standard Deviation Standard deviation of the round-trip times for the 50-
probe sample.

Lowest Value Shortest round-trip time from the device to the remote
server, as measured over the 50-probe sample.

Time of Lowest Sample System time when the lowest value in the 50-probe
sample was received.

Highest Value Longest round-trip time from the J Series device to the
remote server, as measured over the 50-probe sample.
 328

Table 90: RPM Information Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Function

Time of Highest Sample System time when the highest value in the 50-probe
sample was received.

Cumulative Jitter for a Probe

Samples Total number of probes used for the data set.

The J Series device maintains records of the most recent

50 probes for each configured test. These 50 probes are
used to generate RPM statistics for a particular test.

Earliest Sample System time when the first probe in the sample was
received.

Latest Sample System time when the last probe in the sample was
received.

Mean Value Average jitter for the 50-probe sample.

Standard Deviation Standard deviation of the jitter values for the 50-probe
sample.

Lowest Value Smallest jitter value, as measured over the 50-probe

sample.

Time of Lowest Sample System time when the lowest value in the 50-probe
sample was received.

Highest Value Highest jitter value, as measured over the 50-probe

sample.

Time of Highest Sample System time when the highest jitter value in the 50-probe
sample was received.
 329

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Setup RPM | 315

 330

CHAPTER 26

Tools

IN THIS CHAPTER

Troubleshoot Ping Host | 330

Troubleshoot Ping MPLS | 334

Troubleshoot Traceroute | 340

Troubleshoot Packet Capture | 343

Access CLI | 350

View CLI Configuration | 353

Edit CLI Configuration | 354

Point and Click CLI | 355

Troubleshoot Ping Host

IN THIS SECTION

About Ping Host Page | 330

About Ping Host Page

You are here: Device Administration > Tools > Ping Host.

The ping diagnostic tool sends a series of ICMP "echo request" packets to the specified remote host.

The receipt of such packets will usually result in the remote host replying with an ICMP "echo response."
Note that some hosts are configured not to respond to ICMP "echo requests," so a lack of responses
does not necessarily represent a connectivity problem. Also, some firewalls block the ICMP packet types
that ping uses, so you may find that you are not able to ping outside your local network.

You can ping a host to verify that the host can be reached over the network or not.
 331

To use the ping host tool:

1. Enter the information specified in Table 91 on page 331 to troubleshoot the issue.

The Remote Host field is the only required field.

2. Click the expand icon next to Advanced options.

3. Click Start.

The results of the ping operation are displayed in Table 92 on page 333. If no options are specified,
each ping response is in the following format:

bytes bytes from ip-address: icmp_seq=number ttl=number time=time

4. Click OK to stop the ping operation before it is complete.

Table 91: Ping Host Troubleshooting Options

Field Action

Remote Host Type the hostname or IP address of the host to ping.

Advanced Options

Don't Resolve • To suppress the display of the hop hostnames along t the path, select the check box.
Addresses
• To display the hop hostnames along the path, clear the check box.

Interface From the list, select the interface on which ping requests are sent. If you select any, the
ping requests are sent on all interfaces.

Count From the list, select the number of ping requests to send.

Don't Fragment • To set the don't fragment (DF) bit in the IP header of the ping request packet, select
the check box.

• To clear the DF bit in the IP header of the ping request packet, clear the check box.
 332

Table 91: Ping Host Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Action

Record Route • To record and display the path of the packet, select the check box.

• To suppress the recording and display of the path of the packet, clear the check box.

Type-of-Service From the list, select the decimal value of the ToS in the IP header of the ping request
packet.

Routing Instance From the list, select the routing instance name for the ping attempt.

Interval From the list, select the interval in seconds, between the transmission of each ping
request.

Packet Size Type the size, in bytes, of the packet. The size can be from 0 through 65468. The device
adds 8 bytes to the size of the ICMP header.

Source Address Type the source IP address of the ping request packet.

Time-to-Live From the list, select the TTL hop count for the ping request packet.

Bypass Routing • To bypass the routing table and send the ping requests to hosts on the specified
interface only, select the check box.

• To route the ping requests using the routing table, clear the check box.

If the routing table is not used, ping requests are sent only to hosts on the interface
specified in the Interface box. If the host is not on that interface, ping responses are
not sent.
 333

Table 92: Ping Host Results and Output Summary

Field Function

bytes bytes from ip-address • bytes—Size of ping response packet, which is equal to the value you entered
in the Packet Size box, plus 8.

• ip-address—IP address of destination host that sent the ping response

packet.

icmp_seq=0 time—Sequence Number field of the ping response packet. You can use this
value to match the ping response to the corresponding ping request.
icmp_seq=number

ttl=number number—TTL hop-count value of the ping response packet.

time=time time—Total time between the sending of the ping request packet and the
receiving of the ping response packet, in milliseconds. This value is also called
round-trip time.

number packets transmitted number—Number of ping requests (probes) sent to host.

number packets received number—Number of ping responses received from host.

percentage packet loss percentage—Number of ping responses divided by the number of ping requests,
specified as a percentage.

round-trip min/avg/max/ • min-time—Minimum round-trip time (see time=time field in this table).
stddev = min-time/avg-time/
max-time/std-dev ms • avg-time—Average round-trip time.

• max-time—Maximum round-trip time.

• std-dev—Standard deviation of the round-trip times.

 334

Table 92: Ping Host Results and Output Summary (Continued)

Field Function

Output = Packet loss of 100 If the device does not receive ping responses from the destination host (the
percent output shows a packet loss of 100 percent), one of the following explanations
might apply:

• The host is not operational.

• There are network connectivity problems between the device and the host.

• The host might be configured to ignore ICMP echo requests.

• The host might be configured with a firewall filter that blocks ICMP echo
requests or ICMP echo responses.

• The size of the ICMP echo request packet exceeds the MTU of a host along
the path.

• The value you selected in the TTL box was less than the number of hops in
the path to the host, in which case the host might reply with an ICMP error
message.

For more information about ICMP, see RFC 792, Internet Control Message
Protocol.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Troubleshoot Ping MPLS | 334

Troubleshoot Traceroute | 340
Troubleshoot Packet Capture | 343

Troubleshoot Ping MPLS

IN THIS SECTION

About Ping MPLS Page | 335

 335

About Ping MPLS Page

You are here: Device Administration > Tools > Ping MPLS.

You can send variations of ICMP "echo request" packets to the specified MPLS endpoint.

To use the ping MPLS tool:

1. Click the expand icon next to the ping MPLS option you want to use.

2. Enter information specified in Table 93 on page 335 to troubleshoot the issue.

3. Click Start.

The results of the ping operation are displayed in Table 94 on page 338.

4. Click OK to stop the ping operation before it is complete.

Table 93: Ping MPLS Troubleshooting Options

Field Action

Ping RSVP-signaled LSP

LSP Name Type the name of the LSP to ping.

Source Address Type the source IP address of the ping request packet—a valid address configured on a J
Series device interface.

Count From the list, select the number of ping requests to send. The default is 5 requests.

Detailed Output Select the check box to display detailed output rather than brief ping output.

Ping LDP-signaled LSP

FEC Prefix Type the forwarding equivalence class (FEC) prefix and length of the LSP to ping.

Source Address Type the source IP address of the ping request packet—a valid address configured on a J
Series device interface.

Count From the list, select the number of ping requests to send. The default is 5 requests.
 336

Table 93: Ping MPLS Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Action

Detailed Output Select the check box to display detailed output rather than brief ping output.

Ping LSP to Layer 3 VPN prefix

Layer 3 VPN Name Type the name of the VPN to ping.

Count From the list, select the number of ping requests to send. The default is 5 requests.

Detailed Output Select the check box to display detailed output rather than brief ping output.

VPN Prefix Type the IP address prefix and length of the VPN to ping.

Source Address Type the source IP address of the ping request packet—a valid address configured on a J
Series device interface.

Ping LSP for a Layer 2 VPN connection by interface

Interface From the list, select the J Series device interface on which ping requests are sent. If you
select any, the ping requests are sent on all interfaces.

(See the interface naming conventions in the Junos OS Interfaces Configuration Guide
for Security Devices.)

Source Address Type the source IP address of the ping request packet—a valid address configured on a J
series device interface.

Count From the list, select the number of ping requests to send. The default is 5 requests.

Detailed Output Select the check box to display detailed output rather than brief ping output.

Ping LSP for a Layer 2 VPN connection by instance

Layer 2VPN Name Type the name of the Layer 2 VPN to ping.
 337

Table 93: Ping MPLS Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Action

Remote Site Identifier Type the remote site identifier of the Layer 2 VPN to ping.

Source Address Type the source IP address of the ping request packet—a valid address configured on a J
Series device interface.

Local Site Identifier Type the local site identifier of the Layer 2 VPN to ping.

Count From the list, select the number of ping requests to send. The default is 5 requests.

Detailed Output Select the check box to display detailed output rather than brief ping output.

Ping LSP to a Layer 2 circuit remote site by interface

Interface From the list, select the J Series device interface on which ping requests are sent. If you
select any, the ping requests are sent on all interfaces.

Source Address Type the source IP address of the ping request packet—a valid address configured on a J
Series device interface.

Count From the list, select the number of ping requests to send. The default is 5 requests.

Detailed Output Select the check box to display detailed output rather than brief ping output.

Ping LSP to a Layer 2 circuit remote site by VCI

Remote Neighbor Type the IP address of the remote neighbor (PE router) within the virtual circuit to ping.

Circuit Identifier Type the virtual circuit identifier for the Layer 2 circuit.

Source Address Type the source IP address of the ping request packet—a valid address configured on a J
Series device interface.
 338

Table 93: Ping MPLS Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Action

Count From the list, select the number of ping requests to send.

Detailed Output Select the check box to display detailed output rather than brief ping output.

Ping endpoint of LSP

VPN Prefix Type either the LDP FEC prefix and length or the RSVP LSP endpoint address for the LSP
to ping.

Source Address Type the source IP address of the ping request packet—a valid address configured on a J
Series device interface.

Count From the list, select the number of ping requests to send.

Detailed Output Select the check box to display detailed output rather than brief ping output.

Table 94: Ping MPLS Results and Output Summary

Field Function

Exclamation point (!) Echo reply was received.

Period (.) Echo reply was not received within the timeout period.

x Echo reply was received with an error code. Errored packets are not counted in the
received packets count and are accounted for separately.

number packets number—Number of ping requests (probes) sent to a host.

transmitted

number packets number—Number of ping responses received from a host.

received
 339

Table 94: Ping MPLS Results and Output Summary (Continued)

Field Function

percentage packet loss percentage—Number of ping responses divided by the number of ping requests,
specified as a percentage.

time For Layer 2 circuits only, the number of milliseconds required for the ping packet to
reach the destination. This value is approximate, because the packet has to reach the
Routing Engine.

Output = Packet loss of If the device does not receive ping responses from the destination host (the output
100 percent shows a packet loss of 100 percent), one of the following explanations might apply:

• The host is not operational.

• There are network connectivity problems between the device and the host.

• The host might be configured to ignore echo requests.

• The host might be configured with a firewall filter that blocks echo requests or
echo responses.

• The size of the echo request packet exceeds the MTU of a host along the path.

• The outbound node at the remote endpoint is not configured to handle MPLS
packets.

• The remote endpoint's loopback address is not configured to 127.0.0.1.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Troubleshoot Traceroute | 340

Troubleshoot Packet Capture | 343
 340

Troubleshoot Traceroute

IN THIS SECTION

About Traceroute Page | 340

About Traceroute Page

You are here: Device Administration > Tools > Traceroute.

The traceroute diagnostic tool uses a series of packets crafted to elicit an ICMP "time exceeded"
messages from intermediate points in the network between your device and the specified host.

The time-to-live for a packet is decremented each time the packet is routed, so traceroute generally
receives at least one "time exceeded" response from each waypoint. Traceroute starts with a packet with
a time-to-live value of one, and increments the time to live for subsequent packets, thereby constructing
a rudimentary map of the path between hosts.

Use this page to display a list of routers between the device and a specified destination host.

To use the traceroute tool:

1. Click the expand icon next to Advanced options.

2. Enter information in the Traceroute page as described in Table 95 on page 341.

The Remote Host field is the only required field.

3. Click Start.

The results of the traceroute operation are displayed in Table 96 on page 342. If no options are
specified, each line of the traceroute display is in the following format:

hop-number host (ip-address) [as-number]time1 time2 time3

The device sends a total of three traceroute packets to each router along the path and displays the
round-trip time for each traceroute operation. If the device times out before receiving a Time
Exceeded message, an asterisk (*) is displayed for that round-trip time.

4. Click OK to stop the traceroute operation before it is complete.

 341

Table 95: Ping Traceroute Troubleshooting Options

Field Action

Remote Host Type the hostname or IP address of the destination host of the traceroute.

Advanced Options

Don't Resolve • To suppress the display of the hop hostnames along the path, select the check box.
Addresses
• To display the hop hostnames along the path, clear the check box.

Interface From the list, select the interface on which traceroute packets are sent. If you select any,
the traceroute requests are sent on all interfaces.

Time-to-Live From the list, select the time-to-live (TTL) hop count for the traceroute request packet.

Type-of-Service From the list, select the decimal value of the type-of-service (ToS) value to include in the IP
header of the traceroute request packet.

Resolve AS • To display the autonomous system (AS) number of each intermediate hop between the
Numbers device and the destination host, select the check box.

• To suppress the display of the AS number of each intermediate hop between the
device and the destination host, clear the check box.

Routing Instance From the list, select the routing instance name for the ping attempt.

Gateway Type the gateway IP address to route through.

Source Address Type the source IP address of the outgoing traceroute packets.
 342

Table 95: Ping Traceroute Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Action

Bypass Routing • To bypass the routing table and send the traceroute packets to hosts on the specified
interface only, select the check box.

• To route the traceroute packets by means of the routing table, clear the check box.

If the routing table is not used, traceroute packets are sent only to hosts on the
interface specified in the Interface box. If the host is not on that interface, traceroute
responses are not sent.

Table 96: Ping Traceroute Results and Output Summary

Field Function

Ping Traceroute Results and Output Summary

hop-number Number of the hop (router) along the path.

host Hostname, if available, or IP address of the router.

To suppress the display of the hostname, select the Don't Resolve Addresses check box.

ip-address IP address of the router.

as-number AS number of the router.

time1 Round-trip time between the sending of the first traceroute packet and the receiving of
the corresponding Time Exceeded packet from that particular router.

time2 Round-trip time between the sending of the second traceroute packet and the receiving
of the corresponding Time Exceeded packet from that particular router.

time3 Round-trip time between the sending of the third traceroute packet and the receiving of
the corresponding Time Exceeded packet from that particular router.
 343

Table 96: Ping Traceroute Results and Output Summary (Continued)

Field Function

Output = Complete If the device does not display the complete path to the destination host, one of the
path to the following explanations might apply:
destination host not
displayed • The host is not operational.

• There are network connectivity problems between the device and the host.

• The host, or a router along the path, might be configured to ignore ICMP traceroute
messages.

• The host, or a router along the path, might be configured with a firewall filter that
blocks ICMP traceroute requests or ICMP time exceeded responses.

• The value you selected in the Time Exceeded box was less than the number of hops
in the path to the host. In this case, the host might reply with an ICMP error
message.

For more information about ICMP, see RFC 792, Internet Control Message Protocol.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Troubleshoot Packet Capture | 343

Troubleshoot Packet Capture

IN THIS SECTION

About Packet Capture Page | 343

About Packet Capture Page

You are here: Device Administration > Tools > Packet Capture.

You can quickly capture and analyze router control traffic on a device.
 344

The packet capture diagnostic tool allows inspection of control traffic (not transient traffic). The
summary of each decoded packet is displayed as it is captured. Captured packets are written to a PCAP
file which can be downloaded.

NOTE: Starting in Junos OS Release 19.3R1, J-Web supports RE3 line cards for SRX5000 line of
devices.

To use J-Web packet capture:

1. Enter the information specified in Table 97 on page 344 to troubleshoot the issue.

2. Save the captured packets to a file or specify other advanced options by clicking the expand icon
next to Advanced options.

3. Click Start.

The captured packet headers are decoded and displayed in the Packet Capture display as specified in
Table 98 on page 349.

4. Click one:

• Stop Capturing—Stops capturing the packets and stays on the same page while the decoded
packet headers are being displayed.

• OK—Stops capturing packets and returns to the Packet Capture page.

Table 97: Packet Capture Troubleshooting Options

Field Description

Interface Specifies the interface on which the packets are captured.

From the list, select an interface—for example, ge-0/0/0.

If you select default, packets on the Ethernet management

port 0 are captured.
 345

Table 97: Packet Capture Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Description

Detail level Specifies the extent of details to be displayed for the

packet headers.

• Brief—Displays the minimum packet header

information. This is the default.

• Detail—Displays packet header information in

moderate detail.

• Extensive—Displays the maximum packet header

information.

From the list, select Detail.

Packets Specifies the number of packets to be captured. Values

range from 1 to 1000. Default is 10. Packet capture stops
capturing packets after this number is reached.

From the list, select the number of packets to be captured

—for example, 10.

Addresses Specifies the addresses to be matched for capturing the

packets using a combination of the following parameters:

• Direction—Matches the packet headers for IP address,

hostname, or network address of the source,
destination, or both.

• Type—Specifies if packet headers are matched for host

address or network address.

You can add multiple entries to refine the match criteria

for addresses.

Select address-matching criteria. For example:

1. From the Direction list, select source.

2. From the Type list, select host.

3. In the Address box, type 10.1.40.48.

4. Click Add.
 346

Table 97: Packet Capture Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Description

Protocols Matches the protocol for which packets are captured. You
can choose to capture TCP, UDP, or ICMP packets or a
combination of TCP, UDP, and ICMP packets.

From the list, select a protocol—for example:

1. Select a protocol from the list.

2. Click Add.

Ports Matches the packet headers containing the specified

source or destination TCP or UDP port number or port
name.

Select a direction and a port. For example:

1. From the Direction list, select src.

2. In the Port box, type 23.

3. Click Add.

Advanced Options

Absolute TCP Sequence Displays the absolute TCP sequence numbers for the
packet headers.

• To display absolute TCP sequence numbers in the

packet headers, select this check box.

• To stop displaying absolute TCP sequence numbers in

the packet headers, clear this check box.

Layer 2 Headers Displays the link-layer packet headers.

• To include link-layer packet headers while capturing

packets, select this check box.

• To exclude link-layer packet headers while capturing

packets, clear this check box.
 347

Table 97: Packet Capture Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Description

Non-Promiscuous Does not place the interface in promiscuous mode so that

the interface reads only packets addressed to it.

In promiscuous mode, the interface reads every packet

that reaches it.

• To read all packets that reach the interface, select this

check box.

• To read only packets addressed to the interface, clear

this check box.

Display Hex Displays packet headers, except link-layer headers, in

hexadecimal format.

• To display the packet headers in hexadecimal format,

select this check box.

• To stop displaying the packet headers in hexadecimal

format, clear this check box.

Display ASCII and Hex Displays packet headers in hexadecimal and ASCII
formats.

• To display the packet headers in ASCII and

hexadecimal formats, select this check box.

• To stop displaying the packet headers in ASCII and

hexadecimal formats, clear this check box.
 348

Table 97: Packet Capture Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Description

Header Expression Specifies the match condition for the packets to be

captured.

The match conditions you specify for Addresses,

Protocols, and Ports are displayed in expression format in
this field.

Enter match conditions directly in this field in expression

format or modify the expression composed from the
match conditions you specified for Addresses, Protocols,
and Ports. If you change the match conditions specified for
Addresses, Protocols, and Ports again, packet capture
overwrites your changes with the new match conditions.

Packet Size Specifies the number of bytes to be displayed for each

packet. If a packet header exceeds this size, the display is
truncated for the packet header. The default value is 96
bytes.

Type the number of bytes you want to capture for each

packet header—for example, 256.

Don't Resolve Addresses Specifies that IP addresses are not to be resolved into
hostnames in the packet headers displayed.

• To prevent packet capture from resolving IP addresses

to hostnames, select this check box.

• To resolve IP addresses into hostnames, clear this

check box.

No Timestamp Suppresses the display of packet header timestamps.

• To stop displaying timestamps in the captured packet

headers, select this check box.

• To display the timestamp in the captured packet

headers, clear this check box.
 349

Table 97: Packet Capture Troubleshooting Options (Continued)

Field Description

Write Packet Capture File Writes the captured packets to a file in PCAP format
in /var/tmp. The files are named with the prefix jweb-pcap
and the extension .pcap.

If you select this option, the decoded packet headers are

not displayed on the packet capture page.

• To save the captured packet headers to a file, select

this check box.

• To decode and display the packet headers on the J-

Web page, clear this check box.

Table 98: Packet Capture Results and Output Summary

Field Function

timestamp Displays the time when the packet was captured. The
timestamp 00:45:40.823971 means 00 hours (12.00 a.m.),
45 minutes, and 40.823971 seconds.

NOTE: The time displayed is local time.

direction Displays the direction of the packet. Specifies whether the

packet originated from the Routing Engine (Out) or was
destined for the Routing Engine (In)

protocol Displays the protocol for the packet.

In the sample output, IP indicates the Layer 3 protocol.

source address Displays the hostname, if available, or IP address and the

port number of the packet's origin. If the Don't Resolve
Addresses check box is selected, only the IP address of the
source is displayed.

NOTE: When a string is defined for the port, the packet

capture output displays the string instead of the port
number.
 350

Table 98: Packet Capture Results and Output Summary (Continued)

Field Function

destination address Displays the hostname, if available, or IP address of the

packet's destination with the port number. If the Don't
Resolve Addresses check box is selected, only the IP
address of the destination and the port are displayed.

NOTE: When a string is defined for the port, the packet

capture output displays the string instead of the port
number.

protocol Displays the protocol for the packet.

In the sample output, TCP indicates the Layer 4 protocol.

data size Displays the size of the packet (in bytes).

Release History Table

Release Description

19.3R1 Starting in Junos OS Release 19.3R1, J-Web supports RE3 line cards for SRX5000 line of devices.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Troubleshoot Traceroute | 340

Access CLI

IN THIS SECTION

About CLI Terminal Page | 351

 351

About CLI Terminal Page

IN THIS SECTION

CLI Terminal Requirements | 351

CLI Overview | 351

You are here: Device Administration > Tools > CLI Terminal.

The Junos CLI provides a set of commands for monitoring and configuring a routing platform. Use this
page to access Junos OS CLI through J-Web interface.

This topic includes the following sections:

CLI Terminal Requirements

To access the CLI through the J-Web interface, your management device requires the following features:

• SSH access—Secure shell (SSH) provides a secured method of logging in to the routing platform to
encrypt traffic so that it is not intercepted. If SSH is not enabled on your system, the CLI terminal
page displays an error and provides a link to the Set Up Quick Configuration page where you can
enable SSH.

• Java applet support—Your Web browser must support Java applets.

• JRE installed on the client—Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.4 or later must be installed on
your system to run Java applications. Download the latest JRE version from the Java Software
website http://www.java.com/. Installing JRE installs Java plug-ins, which once installed, load
automatically and transparently to render Java applets.

NOTE: The CLI terminal is supported on JRE version 1.4 or later only.

CLI Overview

The Junos OS CLI uses industry-standard tools and utilities to provide a set of commands for monitoring
and configuring a routing platform. You type commands on a line and press Enter to execute them. The
CLI provides online command Help, command completion, and Emacs-style keyboard sequences for
moving around on the command line and scrolling through a buffer of recently executed commands.
 352

The commands in the CLI are organized hierarchically, with commands that perform a similar function
grouped together under the same level. For example, all commands that display information about the
device system and system software are grouped under the show command, and all commands that
display information about the routing table are grouped under the show route command. The
hierarchical organization results in commands that have a regular syntax and provides the following
features that simplify CLI use:

• Consistent command names—Commands that provide the same type of function have the same
name, regardless of the portion of the software they are operating on. For example, all show
commands display software information and statistics, and all clear commands erase various types of
system information.

• Lists and short descriptions of available commands—Information about available commands is

provided at each level of the CLI command hierarchy. If you type a question mark (?) at any level, you
see a list of the available commands along with a short description of each command.

• Command completion—Command completion for command names (keywords) and command options
is also available at each level of the hierarchy. In the CLI terminal, you can perform one of the
following actions to complete a command:

• Enter a partial command name followed immediately by a question mark (with no intervening
space) to see a list of commands that match the partial name you typed.

• Press the Spacebar to complete a command or option that you have partially typed. If the partially
typed letters begin a string that uniquely identifies a command, the complete command name
appears. Otherwise, a prompt indicates that you have entered an ambiguous command, and the
possible completions are displayed.

The Tab key option is currently not available on the CLI terminal.

The CLI has two modes:

• Operational mode—Complete set of commands to control the CLI environment, monitor and
troubleshoot network connectivity, manage the device, and enter configuration mode.

• Configuration mode—Complete set of commands to configure the device.

For more information about the Junos OS CLI, see the Junos OS CLI User Guide.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

View CLI Configuration | 353

 353

View CLI Configuration

IN THIS SECTION

About CLI Viewer Page | 353

About CLI Viewer Page

You are here: Device Administration > Tools > CLI Viewer.

You can view current configuration running on the device.

NOTE:

• The configuration statements appear in a fixed order irrespective of the order in which you
configured the routing platform. The top of the configuration displays a timestamp indicating
when the configuration was last changed and the current version.

• Each level in the hierarchy is indented to indicate each statement's relative position in the
hierarchy. Each level is generally set off with braces, using an open brace ({) at the beginning
of each hierarchy level and a closing brace (}) at the end. If the statement at a hierarchy level is
empty, the braces are not displayed. Each leaf statement ends with a semicolon (;), as does
the last statement in the hierarchy.

• The indented representation is used when the configuration is displayed or saved as an ASCII
file. However, when you load an ASCII configuration file, the format of the file is not so strict.
The braces and semicolons are required, but the indention and use of new lines are not
required in ASCII configuration files.

• Uncommitted configuration changes will also be listed.

To save, commit, or cancel the current configuration:

1. Click one:

• OK—Saves the configuration and returns to the CLI Viewer page.

• Commit Options > Commit—Commits the configuration and returns to the CLI Viewer page.

• Cancel—Cancels your entries and returns to the CLI Viewer page.

 354

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit CLI Configuration | 354

Edit CLI Configuration

IN THIS SECTION

About CLI Editor Page | 354

About CLI Editor Page

You are here: Device Administration > Tools > CLI Editor.

You can configure all routing platform services that you can configure from the Junos CLI prompt.

To edit the CLI configuration:

1. Navigate to the hierarchy level you want to edit. Edit the candidate configuration using standard text
editor operations—insert lines (with the Enter key), delete lines, modify, copy, and paste text.

2. Click Commit to load and commit the configuration. This saves the edited configuration, which
replaces the existing configuration. The device checks the configuration for the correct syntax before
committing it. If any errors occur when the configuration is loading or committed, they are displayed
and the previous configuration is restored.

3. Click one:

• OK—Saves the configuration and returns to the CLI Editor page.

• Commit Options>Commit—Commits the configuration and returns to the CLI Editor page.

• Cancel—Cancels your entries and returns to the CLI Editor page.

NOTE: When you edit the ASCII configuration file, you can add comments of one or more
lines. Comments must precede the statement they are associated with. If you place the
comments in other places in the file, such as on the same line after a statement or on a
separate line following a statement, they are removed when you click Commit. Comments
 355

must begin and end with special characters. For more information, see the Junos OS CLI User
Guide.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Point and Click CLI | 355

Point and Click CLI

IN THIS SECTION

About Point and Click CLI Page | 355

About Point and Click CLI Page

You are here: Device Administration > Tools > Point and Click CLI.

You can edit configuration on a series of pages of clickable options.

1. To edit the configuration on a series of pages of clickable options that step you through the
hierarchy, enter the information specified in Table 99 on page 356. Table 100 on page 356 lists key J-
Web configuration editor tasks and their functions.

NOTE: Options changes for each device. For a device, if a feature is not yet configured, you
have the option to first configure the feature. If the feature is already configured, you have
the option to edit or delete the feature on that particular device.

2. Click one:

• Refresh—Refreshes and updates the display with any changes to the configuration made by other
users.

• Commit—Verifies edits and applies them to the current configuration file running on the device.

• Discard—Removes edits applied to, or deletes existing statements or identifiers from, the
candidate configuration.
 356

3. Click one:

• OK—Saves the configuration and returns to the main configuration page.

• Commit Options>Commit—Commits the configuration and returns to the main configuration

page.

• Cancel—Cancels your entries and returns to the main configuration page.

Table 99: Point and Click Configuration Details

Field Description

Configuration Specifies that you can edit the selected configuration on a

series of pages of clickable options that step you through
the hierarchy.

Click an option:

• Expand all—Expands the hierarchy of all statements.

• Hide all—Hides the hierarchy of all statements.

• (+)—Expands an individual statement in the hierarchy.

• (–)—Hides an individual statement in the hierarchy.

Table 100: J-Web Configuration Editor Page Details

Field Function

Access Specifies that you can edit or delete access and user
authentication methods to the device. The options
available are:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

• Edit—Edits the feature.

• Delete—Deletes the feature.

 357

Table 100: J-Web Configuration Editor Page Details (Continued)

Field Function

Accounting options Specifies that you can configure accounting options such as
log data about basic system operations and services on the
device. The option available is:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

Applications Specifies that you can edit or delete applications functions

of the Junos OS and their properties on the device. The
options available are:

• Edit—Edits the feature

• Delete—Deletes the feature.

Chassis Specifies that you can configure alarms and other chassis
properties on the device. The option available is:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

• Edit—Edits the feature.

• Delete—Deletes the feature.

Class of service Specifies that you can edit or delete the Class-of-Service
feature. The options available are:

• Edit—Edits the feature

• Delete—Deletes the feature.

Ethernet switching options Specifies that you can configure Ethernet switching options
on the device. The option available is:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

 358

Table 100: J-Web Configuration Editor Page Details (Continued)

Field Function

Event options Specifies that you can configure diagnostic event policies
and actions associated with each policy. The option
available is:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

Firewall Specifies that you can configure stateless firewall filters—

also known as ACLs—on the device. The option available is:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

Forwarding options Specifies that you can configure forwarding option

protocols, including flow monitoring, accounting properties,
and packet capture. The option available is:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

Interfaces Specifies that you can edit or delete interfaces on the

device. The options available are:

• Edit—Edits the feature.

• Delete—Deletes the feature.

Multicast snooping options Specifies that you can configure multicast snooping
options. The option available is:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

Poe Specifies that you can edit or delete Power over Ethernet
options on the device. The options available are:

• Edit—Edits the feature.

• Delete—Deletes the feature.

 359

Table 100: J-Web Configuration Editor Page Details (Continued)

Field Function

Policy options Specifies that you can configure routing policies that
control information from routing protocols that the device
imports into its routing table and exports to its neighbors.
The option available is:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

Protocols Specifies that you can edit or delete routing protocols,

including Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-
IS), OSPF, RIP, Routing Information Protocol Next
Generation (RIPng), and BGP. The options available are:

• Edit—Edits the feature.

• Delete—Deletes the feature.

Routing instances Specifies that you can configure a hierarchy to configure

routing instances. The options available re:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

Routing options Specifies that you can edit or delete protocol-independent

routing properties. The options available are:

• Edit—Edits the feature.

• Delete—Deletes the feature.

Schedulers Specifies that you can determine the day and time when
security policies are in effect. The option available is:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

 360

Table 100: J-Web Configuration Editor Page Details (Continued)

Field Function

Security Specifies that you can edit or delete the rules for the transit
traffic and the actions that need to take place on the traffic
as it passes through the firewall; and to monitor the traffic
attempting to cross from one security zone to another. The
options available are:

• Edit—Edits the feature.

• Delete—Deletes the feature.

Services Specifies that you can configure real-time performance

monitoring (RPM) on the device. The option available is:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

• Edit—Edits the feature.

• Delete—Deletes the feature.

Smtp Specifies that you can configure Simple Mail Transfer

Protocol. The option available is:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

Snmp Specifies that you can configure Simple Network

Management Protocol for monitoring router operation and
performance. The option available is:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

 361

Table 100: J-Web Configuration Editor Page Details (Continued)

Field Function

System Specifies that you can edit or delete system management

functions, including the device’s hostname, address, and
domain name; the addresses of the DNS servers; user login
accounts, including user authentication and the root-level
user account; time zones and NTP properties; and
properties of the device’s auxiliary and console ports. The
options available are:

• Edit—Edits the feature.

• Delete—Deletes the feature.

Vlans Specifies that you can edit or delete a virtual LAN. The
options available are:

• Edit—Edits the feature.

• Delete—Deletes the feature.

Wlan Specifies that you can configure a wireless local area

network. The option available is:

• Configure—Configures the feature.

Access profile

Access profile name Enter the access profile name.

Advanced

Add new entry Click Add new entry to add a new identifier.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit CLI Configuration | 354

 362

CHAPTER 27

Reset Configuration

IN THIS CHAPTER

Reset Configuration and Rerun Setup Wizard | 362

Reset Configuration and Rerun Setup Wizard

You are here: Device Administration > Reset Configuration

NOTE: This menu is only available if you have selected Standalone mode when configuring
device factory default settings using the J-Web Setup Wizard.

This page allows you to reset the device configuration and rerun the J-Web Setup Wizard. For details on
using the setup wizard to perform initial configuration on a device with a factory default configuration,
see "Access the J-Web User Interface" on page 3.

On the Reset Configuration dialog page:

1. Click Reset to proceed.

The Reconfigure Setup Wizard warning dialogue appears.
2. Click Proceed to Launch to reset the configuration and rerun the Setup Wizard.
For details on using the Setup Wizard, see "The J-Web Setup Wizard" on page 8.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Access the J-Web User Interface | 3

6 PART

Network

Connectivity—Interfaces | 365

Connectivity—VLAN | 377

Connectivity—Link Aggregation | 384

Connectivity—PPPoE | 393

Connectivity—Wireless LAN | 395

DHCP Client | 405

DHCP Server | 409

Firewall Filters—IPv4 | 419

Firewall Filters—IPv6 | 437

Firewall Filters—Assign to Interfaces | 453

NAT Policies | 455

NAT Pools | 464

Destination NAT | 475

Static NAT | 481

NAT Proxy ARP/ND | 489

Static Routing | 496

RIP Routing | 500

OSPF Routing | 509

BGP Routing | 522

Routing Instances | 538

Routing—Policies | 543

Routing—Forwarding Mode | 560

CoS—Value Aliases | 562

CoS—Forwarding Classes | 566

CoS Classifiers | 570

CoS—Rewrite Rules | 575

CoS—Schedulers | 580

CoS—Scheduler Maps | 585

CoS—Drop Profile | 589

CoS—Virtual Channel Groups | 593

CoS—Assign To Interface | 597

Application QoS | 603

IPsec VPN | 613

Manual Key VPN | 670

Dynamic VPN | 676

 365

CHAPTER 28

Connectivity—Interfaces

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Interfaces Page | 365

Add a Logical Interface | 369

Edit a Logical Interface | 376

Delete Logical Interface | 376

About the Interfaces Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 365

Field Descriptions | 366

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Interfaces.

Use this page to view or configure the logical interfaces to switch to L2 or L3 mode. You can view the
interfaces in the ways of interface type, interface state, or zone association.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a logical interface. See "Add a Logical Interface" on page 369.

• Edit a logical interface. See "Edit a Logical Interface" on page 376.

• Delete a logical interface. See "Delete Logical Interface" on page 376.

 366

Field Descriptions

Table 101 on page 366 describes the fields to view interface configuration on the Interfaces page.

NOTE:

• J-Web supports IOC4 line cards for SRX5000 line of devices. You can also view the sub-ports
details configured on any or all ports of the SRX5K-IOC4-MRATE line card.

• J-Web supports Wi–Fi Mini-PIM for SRX320, SRX340, SRX345, and SRX550M devices. The
physical interface for the Wi-Fi Mini-PIM uses the name wl-x/0/0, where x identifies the slot
on the services gateway where the Mini-PIM is installed.

You can also configure the wl-x/0/0 interface when adding a zone at Security Policies &
Objects > Zones/Screens.

Table 101: View Interface Configuration Details on the Interfaces Page

Field Action

Filter Select an option from the list to view the interfaces configuration details. The available options
are:

• Interface Type—Select an option to display the list of interfaces available on the device.

• Interface State—Select an option to display the interfaces state of the device. The options
are:

• Admin Up

• Link Up

• Admin Up & Link Down

• Admin Down

• Zone Association—Select an option to display the list of available security zones.

Go Displays the list of interfaces based on the interface type, interface state, or zone association
that you have used to filter the interface information.

Clear Clears the filter options that you have selected and displays all the interfaces.
 367

Table 101: View Interface Configuration Details on the Interfaces Page (Continued)

Field Action

Expand All Expands the tree under the list of interfaces.

Global To configure global setting for the interface ports:

Settings
1. Click Global Settings.

The Global Settings window appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• MAC Table size—Enter the size of MAC address forwarding table.

• MAC Limit—Enter the maximum number of MAC addresses learned per interface.

The range is 1 through 65,535.

• Packet Action—Select an option from the list for the action taken when MAC limit is
reached. The options available are:

• drop

• drop-and-log

• log

• none

• shutdown

Disable Disables the selected interface.

Enable Enables the selected disabled interface.

Table 102 on page 368 describes the fields on the Interfaces page.
 368

Table 102: Fields on the Interfaces Page

Field Description

Interface Displays the interface name.

Logical interfaces configured under this interface appear in a collapsible list under the
physical interface.

Admin status Displays the administrative status of the interface. Status can be either Up or Down.

Link Status Displays the operational status of the link. Status can be either Up or Down.

IP Address Displays the configured IP addresses.

Multiple IP addresses configured on one logical interface are displayed in a collapsible

list under the logical interface.

Zone Displays the security zone with which this interface is associated.

Logical System/Tenant Display the statistics information for the specified logical system or tenant.

MTU Displays the maximum transmission unit value for this physical interface.

Speed Displays the Interface speed (10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 1 Gbps, or Auto).

Link Mode Displays the link mode status for this interface. Status can be Active, Passive, or None.

Auto Negotiation Displays the auto negotiation status of the interface. Status can be either Enabled or
Disabled.

Media Type Displays the media type of the operating modes (copper or fiber) for the 2-Port 10
Gigabit Ethernet XPIM.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Logical Interface | 369

 369

Add a Logical Interface

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Interfaces.

To add a logical interface:

1. Select an interface and click the add icon (+) available on the upper right side of the Interfaces page.
The Add Interface page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 103 on page 369.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel instead.
If you click OK, a new logical interface with the provided configuration is created.

Table 103 on page 369 provides guidelines on using the fields on the Add Interface page.

Table 103: Fields on the Add Interface Page

Field Description

General

Unit Enter the logical unit number.

Description Enter the description for the interface.

Vlan Id Enter the VLAN ID

Multi Tenancy Type Select an option from the list:

• None

• Logical System

• Tenant

Logical System Select a logical system from the list.

NOTE: This option is available when you select the multitenancy type as logical
system.
 370

Table 103: Fields on the Add Interface Page (Continued)

Field Description

Tenant Select a tenant from the list.

NOTE: This option is available when you select the multitenancy type as tenant.

Zone Select a zone form the list.

Protocol (family)

IPv4 Address

IPv4 Address/DHCP Select the check box to enable this option.

configuration

Enable DHCP Select this option to enable Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).

Enable address Select this option to add IPv4 address.

configuration
To add IPv4 address:

1. Click +.

2. Enter the following details:

• IPv4 Address—Enter an IPv4 address.

• Web Auth—Click Configure and enable the options, Enable Http, Enable
Https, and Redirect to Https. Then, click OK to save changes.

• ARP—Click Edit.

In the ARP Address page, click + and enter the IPv4 Address, MAC Address,
and select Publish.

Click OK to save the changes.

IPv6 Address
 371

Table 103: Fields on the Add Interface Page (Continued)

Field Description

IPv6 Address/DHCP Select the check box to enable this option.

configuration
NOTE: Not available for IRB interface

Enable DHCP Select this option to enable DHCP.

Enable address Select this option to add IPv6 address.

configuration
To add IPv6 address:

1. Click +.

2. Enter an IPv6 address.

Ethernet Switching

Ethernet Switching Select the check box to enable this option.

configuration
NOTE: Not available for IRB interface

Interface Mode Select an option from the list:

• access—Configures a logical interface to accept untagged packets.

• trunk—Configures a single logical interface to accept packets tagged with any

VLAN ID.

Recovery Timeout Enter a period of time in seconds that the interface remains in a disabled state due
to a port error prior to automatic recovery.

VLAN Member Select a VLAN member from the list.

VoIP VLAN Select a VLAN name from the list to be sent from the authenticating server to the
IP phone.

Configure Vlan(s) Select a VLAN from the Available column and move it to Selected column using the
right arrow.
 372

Table 103: Fields on the Add Interface Page (Continued)

Field Description

All Vlans Select this option to select any available VLANs.

General- ge

Description Enter a description for the interface.

MTU (Bytes) Enter the MTU in bytes.

Speed Select the speed from the list: 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 1 Gbps, or None.

Link Mode Select the link mode from the list: Half Duplex, Full Duplex, and None.

Loopback Select this option if you want the interface to loop back.

Flow Control Select this option to enable flow control, which regulates the flow of packets from
the router to the remote side of the connection.

Enable Auto Negotiation Select this option to enable autonegotiation.

Enable Per Unit Scheduler Select this option to enable the association of scheduler maps with logical
interfaces.

Enable Vlan Tagging Select this option to enable the reception and transmission of 802.1Q VLAN-
tagged frames on the interface.

Source MAC Filter

Add Click + and enter the MAC address to assign it to the interface.

Delete Select a MAC address and click X.

 373

Table 103: Fields on the Add Interface Page (Continued)

Field Description

MAC Limit Enter a value for MAC addresses to be associated with a VLAN.

Range: 1 through 131071.

Packet Action Select an option from the list:

• drop—Drop packets with new source MAC addresses, and do not learn the new
source MAC addresses.

• drop-and-log—Drop packets with new source MAC addresses, and generate an

alarm, an SNMP trap, or a system log entry

• log—Hold packets with new source MAC addresses, and generate an alarm, an
SNMP trap, or a system log entry.

• none—Forward packets with new source MAC addresses and learn the new
source MAC address.

• shutdown—Disable the specified interface, and generate an alarm, an SNMP

trap, or a system log entry.

General- lt

Unit Enter a logical unit number.

Encapsulation Select an option from the list:

• Ethernet

• Ethernet-VPLS

Peer Unit Enter a peer unit number.

 374

Table 103: Fields on the Add Interface Page (Continued)

Field Description

Multi Tenancy Type Select an option from the list:

• None

• Logical System

• Tenant

Logical System Select a logical system from the list.

NOTE: This option is available when you select the multitenancy type as logical
system.

Tenant Select a tenant from the list.

NOTE: This option is available when you select the multitenancy type as tenant.

IP Address Click Add and enter an IP address.

Select an IP address and click Delete to delete the selected IP address.

st0

Tunnel Interface st0 Enter the logical unit number.

Zone Select a zone from the list.

Description Enter the description for the interface.

Unnumbered Select this option to fetch interface from which an unnumbered interface borrows
an IPv4 address.

Numbered Select this option to fetch interface from which a numbered interface borrows an
IPv4 or IPv6 address.

IPv4 Address Enter an IPv4 address.

 375

Table 103: Fields on the Add Interface Page (Continued)

Field Description

IPv4 Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask for the IPv4 address.

IPv6 Address Enter an IPv4 address.

IPv6 Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask for the IPv6 address.

Multipoint

St Interface Configuration Select the check box to enable this option.

Automatic Select this option to automatically fetch next hop tunnel address.

Manual Click + to add next hop tunnel address and VPN name.

Select an existing next hop address and click X to delete it.

Routing Protocols

Enable Routing Protocols Select an option:

• all—Select this option to enable all protocols routing on the routing device.

• OSPF—Select this option to enable OSPF routing on the routing device.

• BGP—Select this option to enable BGP routing on the routing device.

• RIP—Select this option to enable RIP routing on the routing device.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Logical Interface | 376

Delete Logical Interface | 376
 376

Edit a Logical Interface

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Interfaces.

To edit a logical interface:

1. Select an existing logical interface that you want to edit on the Interfaces page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The interface options appear with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add a
Logical Interface" on page 369.
3. Click OK.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Logical Interface | 376

Delete Logical Interface

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Interfaces.

To delete a logical interface:

1. Select a logical interface that you want to delete from the Interfaces page.
2. Click the delete icon (X) available on the upper right side of the page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Logical Interface | 369

Edit a Logical Interface | 376
 377

CHAPTER 29

Connectivity—VLAN

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the VLAN Page | 377

Add a VLAN | 379

Edit a VLAN | 381

Delete VLAN | 381

Assign an Interface to VLAN | 382

About the VLAN Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 377

Field Descriptions | 378

You are here: Network > Connectivity > VLAN.

Use this page to view, add, and remove VLAN configuration details.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a VLAN. See "Add a VLAN" on page 379.

• Edit a VLAN. See "Edit a VLAN" on page 381.

• Delete a VLAN. See "Delete VLAN" on page 381.

 378

• Assign Interface. See "Assign an Interface to VLAN" on page 382.

• Show or hide columns in the VLAN table. To do this, use the Show Hide Columns icon in the top right
corner of the page and select the options you want to show or deselect to hide options on the page.

• Advanced search for a VLAN. To do this, use the search text box present above the table grid. The
search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. In the search text box, when you
hover over the icon, it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search string,
the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a search criteria, only one character is
deleted.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

Field Descriptions

Table 104 on page 378 describes the fields on the VLAN page.

Table 104: VLAN Configuration Page

Field Function

VLAN Name Displays the name for the VLAN.

VLAN ID/List Displays the identifier or list for the VLAN.

Interface Assigned Displays the interfaces assigned for the VLAN.

Description Displays a brief description for the VLAN.

 379

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a VLAN | 379

Add a VLAN

You are here: Network > Connectivity > VLAN.

To add a VLAN:

1. Click the add icon (+) available on the upper right side of the VLAN page.
The Add VLAN page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 105 on page 379.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 105 on page 379 provides guidelines on using the fields on the Add VLAN page.

Table 105: Fields on the Add VLAN Page

Field Description

VLAN Details

VLAN Name Enter a unique name for the VLAN.

NOTE: The VLAN text field is disabled when vlan-tagging is not enabled.

VLAN ID Type Select a type of VLAN ID.

The available options are:

• Single

• Range

VLAN ID Enter a unique identification number for the VLAN from 1 through 4094. If no value is specified,
the default is 1.

Description Enter a brief description for the VLAN.

Advanced Settings (optional)

 380

Table 105: Fields on the Add VLAN Page (Continued)

Field Description

L2 Interfaces Enter the interfaces to be associated with the VLAN.

The available options are as follows:

• Add—Click + to add the MAC address and L2 interface details.

• Edit—Click the pencil icon to edit the selected interface.

• Remove—Select the interface or interfaces that you do not want associated with the VLAN.

Filter

Input Filter To apply an input firewall filter to an interface, select the firewall filter from the list.

Output Filter To apply an output firewall filter to an interface, select the firewall filter from the list.

IPv4 Address
NOTE: This option is available only when you select VLAN ID type as Single.

IPv4 Address Enter the IPv4 address of the VLAN.

Subnet Enter the range of logical addresses within the address space that is assigned to an organization.
For example, 255.255.255.0.

You can also specify the address prefix.

IP Address Enter the IP address of the VLAN.

The available options are as follows:

• Add—Click + to add the IP address, MAC address, and L2 interface details.

• Edit—Click the pencil icon to edit the selected IPv4 address.

• Delete—Select the IPv4 address or addresses that you do not want associated with the
VLAN.
 381

Table 105: Fields on the Add VLAN Page (Continued)

Field Description

IPv6 Address
NOTE: This option is available only when you select VLAN ID type as Single.

IPv6 Address Enter the IPv6 address of the VLAN.

Prefix Select the destination prefix of the VLAN.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a VLAN | 381

Edit a VLAN

You are here: Network > Connectivity > VLAN.

To edit a VLAN:

1. Select an existing VLAN that you want to edit on the VLAN page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit VLAN page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add a
VLAN" on page 379.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete VLAN | 381

Delete VLAN

You are here: Network > Connectivity > VLAN.

 382

To delete a VLAN:

1. Select one or more VLANs that you want to delete on the VLAN page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Assign an Interface to VLAN | 382

Assign an Interface to VLAN

You are here: Network > Connectivity > VLAN.

To assign an interface to VLAN:

1. Select a VLAN.
2. Click Assign Interface on the right side of the VLAN page.
The Assign Interfaces page appears.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 106 on page 382.
4. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 106: Fields on the Assign Interfaces Page

Field Description

VLAN Name Displays the name of the VLAN for which you want to assign the interface.

VLAN ID Displays the ID of the selected VLAN.

Description Displays the description of the selected VLAN.

Interfaces Select the interfaces in the Available column and use the right arrow to move them to the
Selected column.

VoIP Interfaces Select the VoIP interfaces in the Available column and use the right arrow to move them to the
Selected column.
 383

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a VLAN | 379

 384

CHAPTER 30

Connectivity—Link Aggregation

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Link Aggregation Page | 384

Link Aggregation Global Settings | 386

Add a Logical Interface to Link Aggregation | 387

Add a Link Aggregation | 388

Edit an Aggregated Interface | 390

Delete Link Aggregation | 391

Search for Text in the Link Aggregation Table | 391

About the Link Aggregation Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 384

Field Descriptions | 385

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Link Aggregation.

Use this page to view, add, and remove link aggregation configuration details.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Global Settings. See "Link Aggregation Global Settings" on page 386.

• Add Logical Interface. See "Add a Logical Interface to Link Aggregation" on page 387.
 385

• Enable/Disable LACP link-protection. To do this, select a link aggregation and click Enable/Disable
available at the upper right side of the Link Aggregation table.

• Add Link Aggregation. See "Add a Link Aggregation" on page 388.

• Edit Link Aggregation. See "Edit an Aggregated Interface" on page 390.

• Delete Link Aggregation. See "Delete Link Aggregation" on page 391.

• Search for text in a link aggregation table. See "Search for Text in the Link Aggregation Table" on page
391.

• Show or hide columns in the Link Aggregation table. To do this, use the Show Hide Columns icon in
the top right corner of the page and select the options you want to show or deselect to hide options
on the page.

Field Descriptions

Table 107 on page 385 describes the fields on the Link Aggregation page.

Table 107: Fields on the Link Aggregation Page

Field Description

Name Displays the name of the select LAG.

Link Status Displays whether the interface is linked (Up) or not linked (Down).

Admin Status Displays whether the interface is up or down.

Interfaces Displays the name of the aggregated interface.

VLAN ID Displays the Virtual LAN identifier value for IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tags (0.4094).

IP Address Displays the IP address associated with the interface.

VLAN Tagging Type Displays whether the interface is enabled with VLAN-tagging, Flexible VLAN Tagging, or
Flexible VLAN Tagging along with native VLAN ID.
 386

Table 107: Fields on the Link Aggregation Page (Continued)

Field Description

Enabled/Disabled Displays whether the LACP link-protection is enabled or disabled.

Description Provides a description of the LAG.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Link Aggregation Global Settings | 386

Link Aggregation Global Settings

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Link Aggregation.

To add link aggregation global settings:

Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 108 on page 386.

Table 108: Fields on the Link Aggregation Global Settings page

Field Action

General

Device count Enter the device count. By default, J-Web displays the device count as the same number
of created aggregated Ethernet interfaces.

Range: 1 through 128.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

NOTE: This option is not available for SRX5000 line of devices.

System priority Click the arrow button to select the priority level that you want to associate with the
LAG.
 387

Table 108: Fields on the Link Aggregation Global Settings page (Continued)

Field Action

Link protection mode Select one of the following options:

• Revertive—Enable to switch to a better priority link (if one is available).

• Non-revertive—Disable the ability to switch to a better priority link (if one is available)
once a link is established as active and collection distribution is enabled.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Logical Interface to Link Aggregation | 387

Add a Logical Interface to Link Aggregation

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Link Aggregation.

To add an interface to link aggregation:

1. Select an aggregated interface.

2. Click Add Logical Interface on the right side of the Link Aggregation page.
The Add Logical Interface page appears.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 109 on page 387.
4. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 109: Fields on the Add Logical Interface Page

Field Action

General

AE interface name Displays aggregated interface name.

Logical interface unit Enter the logical interface unit.

 388

Table 109: Fields on the Add Logical Interface Page (Continued)

Field Action

Description Enter the description.

VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID. VLAN ID is mandatory.

IPv4 Address

IPv4 Address Click + and enter a valid IPv4 address.

Subnet Mask Enter a valid subnet mask for IPv4 address.

IPv6 Address

IPv6 Address Click + and enter a valid IPv6 address.

Subnet Mask Enter a valid subnet mask for IPv6 address.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Link Aggregation | 388

Add a Link Aggregation

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Link Aggregation.

To add a link aggregation:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Link Aggregation page.
The Create Link Aggregation page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 110 on page 389.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 389

Table 110: Fields on the Create Link Aggregation Page

Field Action

General

Name Enter the aggregated interface name. The name should be in aeX format. Where X is a
number.

NOTE: If an aggregated interface already exists, then the field is displayed as read-only.

Description Enter a description for the LAG.

Interfaces Select the interface available for aggregation and move to Selected column using right
arrow.

NOTE: Only interfaces that are configured with the same speed can be selected together
for a LAG.

VLAN tagging Select one of the following VLAN tagging type:

type
• None

• VLAN Tagging—Receive and forward single-tag frames, dual-tag frames, or a mixture of

single-tag and dual-tag frames.

• Flexible VLAN Tagging—Simultaneously supports transmission of 802.1Q VLAN single-

tag and dual-tag frames on logical interfaces on the same Ethernet port.

NOTE: When you edit from None to VLAN tagging or Flexible VLAN tagging or vice versa,
all the logical interfaces of the selected interface are deleted.

Native VLAN ID VLAN identifier to associate with untagged packets received on the physical interface.

Range: 0 through 4094.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

 390

Table 110: Fields on the Create Link Aggregation Page (Continued)

Field Action

LACP mode Select a mode in which Link Aggregation Control Protocol packets are exchanged between
the interfaces. The modes are:

• Active—Indicates that the interface initiates transmission of LACP packets

• Passive—Indicates that the interface only responds to LACP packets.

Periodic Select a periodic transmissions of link aggregation control PDUs occur at different
transmission rate. The options available are:

• Fast—Transmit link aggregation control PDUs every second.

• Slow—Transmit link aggregation control PDUs every 30 seconds.

System priority Click the arrow button to select the priority level that you want to associate with the LAG.

Link protection Enable or disable the option to protect the link.

NOTE: You can configure only two member links for an aggregated Ethernet interface, that
is, one active and one standby.

Link protection Select one of the following options:

mode
• Revertive—Enable to switch to a better priority link (if one is available).

• Non-revertive—Disable the ability to switch to a better priority link (if one is available)
once a link is established as active and collection distribution is enabled.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit an Aggregated Interface | 390

Edit an Aggregated Interface

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Link Aggregation.

 391

To edit an aggregated interface:

1. Select an existing aggregated interface that you want to edit on the Aggregated Interface page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The edit Aggregated Interface page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
options, see "Add a Link Aggregation" on page 388.
3. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Link Aggregation | 391

Delete Link Aggregation

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Link Aggregation.

To delete link aggregation:

1. Select one or more aggregated interfaces that you want to delete on the Link Aggregation page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Link Aggregation Page | 384

Search for Text in the Link Aggregation Table

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Link Aggregation.

You can use the search icon in the top right corner of the Link Aggregation page to search for text
containing letters and special characters on that page.

To search for text:

1. Click the search icon and enter partial text or full text of the keyword in the search bar.
The search results are displayed.
 392

2. Click X next to a search keyword or click Clear All to clear the search results.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Link Aggregation Page | 384

 393

CHAPTER 31

Connectivity—PPPoE

IN THIS CHAPTER

Configure PPPoE | 393

Configure PPPoE

NOTE: This menu is available only for SRX300 lines of devices and SRX550M device.

You are here: Network > Connectivity > PPPoE.

PPPoE connects multiple hosts on an Ethernet LAN to a remote site through a single customer premises
equipment (CPE) device (Juniper Networks device).

Use the configure PPPoE tasks to configure the PPPoE connection. The PPPoE wizard guides you to set
up a PPPoE client over the Ethernet connection.

NOTE: On all branch SRX Series devices, the PPPoE wizard has the following limitations:

• While you use the load and save functionality, the port details are not saved in the client file.

• The Non Wizard connection option cannot be edited or deleted through the wizard. Use the
CLI to edit or delete the connections.

• The PPPoE wizard cannot be launched if the backend file is corrupted.

• The PPPoE wizard cannot be loaded from the client file if non-wizard connections share the
same units.

• The PPPoE wizard cannot load the saved file from one platform to another platform.
 394

• There is no backward compatibility between PPPoE wizard Phase 2 to PPPoE wizard Phase 1.
As a result, the PPPoE connection from Phase 2 will not be shown in Phase 1 when you
downgrade to an earlier release.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Configure VPN
 395

CHAPTER 32

Connectivity—Wireless LAN

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Settings Page | 395

Create an Access Point | 397

Edit an Access Point | 398

Delete Access Point | 399

Create an Access Point Radio Setting | 399

Edit an Access Point Radio Setting | 403

Delete Access Point Radio Settings | 403

About the Settings Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 396

Field Descriptions | 396

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Wireless LAN > Settings.

Use this page to configure wireless LAN settings.

NOTE: Starting in Junos OS Release 20.1R1, J-Web supports SRX380 devices. You can configure
the SRX380 device supported wireless LAN settings.
 396

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Create an access point. See "Create an Access Point" on page 397.

• Edit an access point. See "Edit an Access Point" on page 398.

• Delete an access point. See "Delete Access Point" on page 399.

• Create access point radio settings. See "Create an Access Point Radio Setting" on page 399.

• Edit access point radio settings. See "Edit an Access Point Radio Setting" on page 403.

• Delete access point radio settings. See "Delete Access Point Radio Settings" on page 403.

Field Descriptions

Table 111 on page 396 describes the fields on the Settings page.

Table 111: Fields on the Settings Page

Field Description

Access Point Name Displays the access point name.

Description Displays the description for the access point.

WL Interface Displays the wireless LAN interface name.

Location Displays the location of the access point.

MAC Address Displays the MAC address.

Country Displays the country of the access point.

 397

Release History Table

Release Description

20.1R1 Starting in Junos OS Release 20.1R1, J-Web supports SRX380 devices. You can configure the SRX380
device supported wireless LAN settings.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Create an Access Point | 397

Create an Access Point

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Wireless LAN > Settings.

To create an access point:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Settings page.
The Create Access Point Configuration page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 112 on page 397.
3. Click OK to save the changes.
An access point is created.

If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 112: : Fields on the Create Access Point Configuration Page

Field Action

Basic Settings

Name Enter a unique name for the access point.

Description Enter the description for the access point.

Interface Select a wireless LAN interface from the list.

 398

Table 112: : Fields on the Create Access Point Configuration Page (Continued)

Field Action

Location Enter the location of the access point.

MAC Address Enter the MAC address.

Access Point Options

Country Select a country of the access point from the list.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Settings Page | 395

Edit an Access Point | 398
Delete Access Point | 399
Create an Access Point Radio Setting | 399

Edit an Access Point

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Wireless LAN > Settings.

To edit an access point:

1. Select an existing access point that you want to edit on the Settings page.
2. Click the pencil icon on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Access Point Configuration page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
options, see "Create an Access Point" on page 397.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Settings Page | 395

Delete Access Point | 399
 399

Delete Access Point

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Wireless LAN > Settings.

To delete an access point:

1. Select an existing access point that you want to delete on the Settings page.
2. Click the delete icon on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete the access point or click No to retain the access point.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Settings Page | 395

Create an Access Point | 397
Edit an Access Point | 398

Create an Access Point Radio Setting

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Wireless LAN > Settings.

To create an access point radio setting:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Radio Settings table.
The Create Access Point Radio Settings page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 113 on page 399.
3. Click OK to save the changes.
The access point radio settings are created.

If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 113: Fields on the Create Access Point Radio Settings Page

Field Action

Radio

Radio Type Select a radio type from the list.

 400

Table 113: Fields on the Create Access Point Radio Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Radio State Select the radio state to enable.

 401

Table 113: Fields on the Create Access Point Radio Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Virtual Access Points To add a virtual access point:

1. Click Add.

The Create VAP Configuration page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

Basic Settings:

• VAP ID—Enter a value using up or down arrows.

• Description—Enter a description for the virtual access points.

• SSID—Enter a unique name to broadcast from access points.

• VLAN ID—Enter a VLAN identifier (VID) using up or down arrows.

• Download Limit (Kbps)—Enter a value using up or down arrows.

• Upload Limit (Kbps)—Enter a value using up or down arrows.

• Broadcast SSID—Select No to disable.

• Maximum Stations—Enter a value using up or down arrows.

• Station Isolation—Select the check box to enable.

Security:

• Security—Select an option from the list.

• If you have selected WPA Personal, enter the following details:

• WPA Version—Select an option from the list.

• Cipher Suites—Select an option from the list.

• WPA Shared Key—Enter a value for the key.

• Key Type—Select an option from the list.

• If you have selected WPA Enterprise, enter the following details:

 402

Table 113: Fields on the Create Access Point Radio Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

• WPA Version—Select an option from the list.

• Cipher Suites—Select an option from the list.

• Radius Server IP—Enter IP address for the radio server.

• Radius Port—Enter a value using up or down arrows.

• Radius Key—Enter a value for the key.

Station MAC Filter:

• Allowed List
MAC Address—Enter a MAC address that you want to allow and click Add to add
the address in the MAC addresses list.

Select the MAC address click Delete to remove it.

• Deny List
MAC Address—Enter a MAC address that you want to block and click Add to add
the address in the MAC addresses list.

Select the MAC address click Delete to remove it.

3. Click OK to save VAP configuration.

Select the virtual access point and click Edit or Delete icons to edit or remove it.

Radio Settings—Radio Options

Mode Select a radio mode option from the list.

Channel Number Select a channel number for radio from the list.

Channel Bandwidth Select a channel bandwidth for radio from the list.

Transmit Power Enter a value for radio transmit power using up or down arrows.
 403

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Settings Page | 395

Edit an Access Point Radio Setting | 403
Delete Access Point Radio Settings | 403

Edit an Access Point Radio Setting

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Wireless LAN > Settings.

To edit an access point radio settings:

1. Select an existing access point radio setting that you want to edit on the Settings page.
2. Click the edit icon on the upper right side of the Radio Settings table.
The Edit Access Point Radio Settings page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
options, see "Create an Access Point Radio Setting" on page 399.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Settings Page | 395

Delete Access Point Radio Settings | 403

Delete Access Point Radio Settings

You are here: Network > Connectivity > Wireless LAN > Settings.

To delete an access point radio setting:

1. Select an existing access point radio setting that you want to delete on the Settings page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Radio Settings table.
3. Click Yes to delete the access point radio settings or click No to retain the access point radio settings.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Settings Page | 395

 404

Create an Access Point Radio Setting | 399

Edit an Access Point Radio Setting | 403
 405

CHAPTER 33

DHCP Client

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the DHCP Client Page | 405

Add DHCP Client Information | 406

Delete DHCP Client Information | 408

About the DHCP Client Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 405

Field Descriptions | 405

You are here: Network > DHCP > DHCP Client.

Use this page to view, add, and remove link aggregation configuration details.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Create DHCP client information. See "Add DHCP Client Information" on page 406.

• Delete DHCP client information. See "Delete DHCP Client Information" on page 408.

Field Descriptions

Table 114 on page 406 describes the fields on the DHCP Client page.
 406

Table 114: Fields on the DHCP Client Page

Field Description

Interface Name Displays the interface name.

DHCP Client Identifier Displays the name of the client used by the DHCP server to index its database of
address bindings.

Server Displays the DHCP server address.

Lease Time Displays the time in seconds, to negotiate and exchange DHCP messages.

Add Adds a new DHCP client configuration.

Delete Deletes the selected DHCP client configuration.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add DHCP Client Information | 406

Add DHCP Client Information

You are here: Network > DHCP > DHCP Client.

To add DHCP Client information:

1. Click Add on the DHCP Client page.

The DHCP Client Information page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 115 on page 407.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 407

Table 115: Fields on the DHCP Client Information Page

Field Action

DHCP Client Information

Interface Enter the name of the interface on which to configure the DHCP client.

Client Identifier Specifies the name of the client used by the DHCP server to index its database of
address bindings.

Select an option from the list:

• ASCII— ASCII client.

• Hexadecimal—Hexadecimal client.

Lease Time Enter a value from 60 through 2,147,483,647.

Specifies the time in seconds, to negotiate and exchange DHCP messages.

Retransmission Attempt Enter a value from 0 through 6. The default value is 4.

Specifies the number of attempts the router is allowed to retransmit a DHCP packet
fallback.

DHCP Server Address Enter the IPv4 address of the DHCP server.

Specifies the preferred DHCP server that the DHCP clients contact with DHCP
queries.

Vendor Class ID Enter the vendor class ID numbers.

Specifies the vendor class identity number for the DHCP client.

Update Server Select the check box to enable the propagation of TCP/IP settings on the specified
interface (if it is acting as a DHCP client) to the DHCP server that is configured on the
router.
 408

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete DHCP Client Information | 408

Delete DHCP Client Information

You are here: Network > DHCP > DHCP Client.

To delete a DHCP Client Information:

1. Select a DHCP Client that you want to delete on the DHCP Client page.
2. Click Delete available on the DHCP Client page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the DHCP Client Page | 405

Add DHCP Client Information | 406
 409

CHAPTER 34

DHCP Server

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the DHCP Server Page | 409

Add a DHCP Pool | 411

Edit a DHCP Pool | 415

Delete DHCP Pool | 416

DHCP Groups Global Settings | 416

Add a DHCP Group | 417

Edit a DHCP Group | 417

Delete DHCP Group | 418

About the DHCP Server Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 409

Field Descriptions | 410

You are here: Network > DHCP > DHCP Server.

Use this page to view, add, and remove DHCP server configuration details.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a DHCP Pool. See "Add a DHCP Pool" on page 411.

 410

• Edit a DHCP Pool. See "Edit a DHCP Pool" on page 415.

• Delete a DHCP Pool. See "Delete DHCP Pool" on page 416.

• Configure DHCP group global settings. See "DHCP Groups Global Settings" on page 416.

• Add a DHCP group. See "Add a DHCP Group" on page 417.

• Edit a DHCP group. See "Edit a DHCP Group" on page 417.

• Delete a DHCP group. See "Delete DHCP Group" on page 418.

Field Descriptions

Table 116 on page 410 describes the fields on the DHCP Server page.

Table 116: Fields on the DHCP Server Page

Field Description

Routing Instance Displays the name of the routing instance selected for DHCP server.

DHCP Pools

Pool Name Displays the name of the source pool.

Network Addresses Displays the IP address in the pool.

Routing Instance Displays the name of the routing instance selected.

DHCP Groups

Global Settings Specifies the global settings of DHCP server.

Group name Specifies the source name of the group.

Interfaces Displays name of the interfaces selected.

Routing Instance Displays the name of the routing instance selected.

 411

Table 116: Fields on the DHCP Server Page (Continued)

Field Description

DHCP Address range for pool

Address Range Name Specify the name of the address assignment pool.

Address Range (Low) Specifies the lowest address in the IP address pool range.

Address Range (High) Specifies the highest address in the IP address pool range.

DHCP Static Bindings for pool

Host Name Specifies the name of the client for the static binding.

MAC Address Specifies the client MAC address.

Fixed IP Address Specifies the IP address to reserve for the client.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a DHCP Pool | 411

Add a DHCP Pool

You are here: Network > DHCP > DHCP Server.

To add a DHCP Pool:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the DHCP Pools table.
The Add DHCP Pool page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 117 on page 412.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 117 on page 412 describes the Add DHCP Pool Page.
 412

Table 117: Fields on the Add DHCP Pool Page.

Field Action

General

Pool Name Enter a name for DHCP pool.

Routing Instance Select a routing instance from the list.

Network Addresses Enter the following details:

• IP Address—Enter an IP address.

• Subnet Mask—Enter a subnet mask for the IP address.

DHCP Pool Attributes

Click DHCP Attributes to add DHCP pool attributes. After configuring the attributes, click OK to save the
changes.

Pool Name Displays the DHCP pool name.

Domain Name Enter the domain name to be assigned to the address pool.

Server Identifier Enter the name of the server identifier to assign to the DHCP client in the address
pool.

Netbios Node Type Select a NetBIOS node type from the list. This is equivalent to DHCP option 46.

Next Server Enter the IP address of the next DHCP server that the clients need to contact.

Propagate Settings Select an interface from the list.

Specifies the name of the interface on the router through which the resolved
DHCP queries are propagated to the DHCP pool.

TFTP Server Enter the IP address of the TFTP server.

 413

Table 117: Fields on the Add DHCP Pool Page. (Continued)

Field Action

Maximum Lease Time Enter a from value 60 through 1,209,600.

(Secs)
Specifies the maximum length of time in seconds, a client can hold a lease.
(Dynamic BOOTP lease lengths can exceed this maximum time.)

Boot File Enter the path and filename of the initial boot file to be used by the client.

Boot Server Enter the IP address or hostname of the TFTP server that provides the initial boot
file to the client.

Grace Period (Secs) Enter a number of seconds the lease is retained.

range is 0 through 4,294,967,295. By default, 0 is no grace period.

DNS Name Servers Specifies the DNS name to assign to the DHCP client in the address pool.

Click any one of the following:

• +—Adds the DNS name in the address pool.

• Click the pencil icon to edit a selected DNS name in the address pool.

• X—Deletes the DNS name in the address pool.

WINS Servers Specifies the WINS servers to assign to the DHCP client in the address pool.

Click any one of the following:

• +—Adds WINS servers to the address pool.

• Click the pencil icon to edit a selected WINS server in the address pool.

• X—Deletes the WINS servers in the address pool.

 414

Table 117: Fields on the Add DHCP Pool Page. (Continued)

Field Action

Gateway Routers Specifies the gateway router to assign client in the address pool.

Click any one of the following:

• +—Adds the gateway router to the address pool.

• Click the pencil icon to edit a selected gateway router in the address pool.

• X—Deletes the gateway router in the address pool.

Options Click + to add DHCP option.

Enter the following details:

• Code—Type a number.

• Type—Select a type from the list that corresponds to the code.

• Value—Type a valid option value based on the type.

You can select the DHCP option and click the pencil icon to edit or click X to delete
the DHCP options.

Option-82 Device inserts DHCP option 82 (also known as the DHCP relay agent information
option) information.

Enter the following details:

• Circuit Identifier—Enter circuit ID to identify the circuit (interface or VLAN) on

the switching device on which the request was received.

• Ranges—Enter a value for the circuit ID.

• Remote Identifier—Enter remote ID to identify the remote host.

• Ranges—Enter a value for the remote ID.

Address Range
Click + to add address range. After configuring the attributes, click OK to save the changes.

Selected an address range and click the pencil icon to edit it or click X to delete it.
 415

Table 117: Fields on the Add DHCP Pool Page. (Continued)

Field Action

Name Enter the address range name.

Low Enter an IP address that is part of the subnet specified in Address Pool subnet.

High Enter an IP address that is part of the subnet specified in Address Pool Subnet. This
address must be greater than the address specified in Address Range Low.

Static Bindings
Click + to add DHCP static bindings. After configuring the attributes, click OK to save the changes.

Selected a DHCP static binding and click the pencil icon to edit it or click X to delete it.

Host Name Enter the hostname to assign the DHCP client to the MAC address.

Mac Address Enter the MAC address of the DHCP client.

Fixed IP Address Enter the fixed address to assign the DHCP client to the MAC address.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a DHCP Pool | 415

Edit a DHCP Pool

You are here: Network > DHCP > DHCP Server.

To edit a DHCP Pool:

1. Select an existing DHCP Pool that you want to edit on the DHCP Server page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the DHCP Pools table.
The Edit DHCP Pool page appears. You can edit the network addresses. For more information on the
options, see "Add a DHCP Pool" on page 411.
 416

3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete DHCP Pool | 416

Delete DHCP Pool

You are here: Network > DHCP > DHCP Server.

To delete a DHCP Pool:

1. Select a DHCP Pool that you want to delete on the DHCP Server page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the DHCP Pools table.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

DHCP Groups Global Settings | 416

DHCP Groups Global Settings

You are here: Network > DHCP > DHCP Server.

To configure DHCP groups global settings:

1. Click Global Settings available on the upper right side of the DHCP Groups table.
The DHCP Global Configuration page appears.
2. Select the options available in the Available column and move them to Selected column using the
arrow to configure the order of the DHCP pool match.
3. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a DHCP Group | 417

Edit a DHCP Group | 417
 417

Delete DHCP Group | 418

Add a DHCP Group

You are here: Network > DHCP > DHCP Server.

To add a DHCP Group:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the DHCP Groups table.
The Add DHCP Group page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 118 on page 417.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 118 on page 417 describes the fields on the Add DHCP Group.

Table 118: Fields on the Add DHCP Group Page

Field Action

Group Name Enter a name for the DHCP group.

Routing Instance Select a routing instance from the list.

Interfaces Select the interfaces available in the Available column and move them to Selected column
using the right arrow.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a DHCP Group | 417

Delete DHCP Group | 418
DHCP Groups Global Settings | 416

Edit a DHCP Group

You are here: Network > DHCP > DHCP Server.

 418

To edit a DHCP group:

1. Select an existing DHCP group that you want to edit on the DHCP Server page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the DHCP Groups table.
The Edit DHCP Group page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see
"Add a DHCP Group" on page 417.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

DHCP Groups Global Settings | 416

Add a DHCP Group | 417
Delete DHCP Group | 418

Delete DHCP Group

You are here: Network > DHCP > DHCP Server.

To delete a DHCP group:

1. Select a DHCP group that you want to delete on the DHCP Server page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the DHCP Groups table.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

DHCP Groups Global Settings | 416

Add a DHCP Group | 417
Edit a DHCP Group | 417
 419

CHAPTER 35

Firewall Filters—IPv4

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the IPv4 Page | 419

Add IPv4 Firewall Filters | 420

About the IPv4 Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 419

Field Descriptions | 419

You are here: Network > Firewall Filters > IPV4.

Use this page to configure IPv4 firewall filters.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following task from this page:

• Add an IPv4 firewall filter. See "Add IPv4 Firewall Filters" on page 420.

Field Descriptions

Table 119 on page 420 describes the fields on the IPv4 page.
 420

Table 119: Fields on the IPv4 Page

Field Description

IPv4 Filter Summary

Filter Name Displays the name of the filter and when expanded, lists the terms attached to the filter.

Add New IPv4 Filter

Filter Name Searches for existing filters by filter name.

Term Name Searches for existing terms by term name.

Location Specifies the position of the new filter.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add IPv4 Firewall Filters | 420

Add IPv4 Firewall Filters

You are here: Network > Firewall Filters > IPV4.

To add an IPV4 firewall filter:

1. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 120 on page 421 and Table
121 on page 423.
2. Click Add available in the Add New IPv4 Filter section.
A new IPv4 Firewall Filter is created.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 421

Table 120: Fields on the Add IPv4 Firewall Filter Page

Field Action

IPv4 Filter Summary

Action column Select an option.

The options available are:

• To move an item upward—Locate the item and click the up arrow from the same row.

• To move an item downward—Locate the item and click the down arrow from the same row.

• To delete an item—Locate the item and click the X from the same row.

Filter Name Displays the name of the filter and when expanded, lists the terms attached to the filter.

Displays the match conditions and actions that are set for each term.

Allows you to add more terms to a filter or modify filter terms.

The options available are:

• To display the terms added to a filter—Click the plus sign next to the filter name. This also
displays the match conditions and actions set for the term.

• To edit a filter—Click the filter name. To edit a term, click the name of the term.

Search

IPv4 Filter Enter the existing filter name.

Name
The options available are:

• To find a specific filter—Enter the name of the filter in the Filter Name box.

• To list all filters with a common prefix or suffix—Use the wildcard character (*) when you
enter the name of the filter. For example, te* lists all filters with a name starting with the
characters te.
 422

Table 120: Fields on the Add IPv4 Firewall Filter Page (Continued)

Field Action

IPv4 Term Enter the existing terms by term name.

Name
The options available are:

• To find a specific term—Enter the name of the term in the Term Name box.

• To list all terms with a common prefix or suffix—Use the wildcard character (*) when typing
the name of the term. For example, ra* lists all terms with a name starting with the
characters ra .

Number of Enter the number of filters or terms to display on one page. Select the number of items to be
Items to displayed on one page.
Display

Add New IPv4 Filter

Filter Name Enter the existing filter name.

The options available are:

• To find a specific filter—Enter the name of the filter in the Filter Name box.

• To list all filters with a common prefix or suffix—Use the wildcard character (*) when you
enter the name of the filter. For example, te* lists all filters with a name starting with the
characters te.

Term Name Enter the existing terms by term name.

The options available are:

• To find a specific term—Enter the name of the term in the Term Name box.

• To list all terms with a common prefix or suffix—Use the wildcard character (*) when typing
the name of the term. For example, ra* lists all terms with a name starting with the
characters ra .
 423

Table 120: Fields on the Add IPv4 Firewall Filter Page (Continued)

Field Action

Location Positions the new filter in one of the following locations:

• After Final IPv4 Filter—At the end of all filters.

• After IPv4 Filter—After a specified filter.

Before IPv4 Filter—Before a specified filter.

Add Adds a new filter name. Opens the term summary page for this filter allowing you to add new
terms to this filter.

Add New IPv4 Term

Location Positions the new term in one of the following locations:

• After Final IPv4 Filter—At the end of all term.

• After IPv4 Filter—After a specified term.

Before IPv4 Filter—Before a specified term.

Add Opens the Filter Term page allowing you to define the match conditions and the action for this
term.

Table 121: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv4 Firewall Filter

Field Action

Match Source
 424

Table 121: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv4 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Source Address Enter IP source addresses to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition. Allows you
to remove source IP addresses from the match condition.

If you have more than 25 addresses, this field displays a link that allows you to easily scroll
through pages, change the order of addresses, and also search for them.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the address in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the address from the match condition and then select Add -To include
the address in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an IP source address from the match condition.

Enter an IP source address and prefix length and select an option.

Source Prefix Enter source prefix lists, which you have already defined, to be included in the match
List condition. Allows you to remove a prefix list from the match condition.

Select an option:

• Add—To include a predefined source prefix list in the match condition, type the prefix list
name.

• Except—To exclude the prefix list from the match condition and then select Add—To include
the prefix list in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a prefix list from the match condition.

 425

Table 121: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv4 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Source Port Enter the source port type to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition. Allows
you to remove a source port type from the match condition.

NOTE: This match condition does not check the protocol type being used on the port. Make
sure to specify the protocol type (TCP or UDP) match condition in the same term.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the port in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the port from the match condition and then select Add—To include the
port in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a port from the match condition.

Select the port from the port name list; enter the port name, number, or range and then select
an option.

Match Destination

Destination Enter destination addresses to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition. Allows
Address you to remove a destination IP address from the match condition.

If you have more than 25 addresses, this field displays a link that allows you to easily scroll
through pages, change the order of addresses, and also search for them.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the address in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the address from the match condition and then select Add—To include
the address in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an IP address from the match condition.

Enter an IP destination address and prefix length and select an option.

 426

Table 121: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv4 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Destination Enter destination prefix lists, which you have already defined, to be included in the match
Prefix List condition. Allows you to remove a prefix list from the match condition.

Select an option:

• Add—To include a predefined destination prefix list, enter the prefix list name.

• Except—To exclude the prefix list from the match condition and then select Add—To include
the prefix list in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a prefix list from the match condition.

Destination Enter destination port types to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition. Allows
Port you to remove a destination port type from the match condition.

NOTE: This match condition does not check the protocol type being used on the port. Make
sure to specify the protocol type (TCP or UDP) match condition in the same term.
The options available are:

• Add—To include the port in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the port from the match condition and then select Add—To include the
port in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a port type from the match condition.

Select the port from the port name list; enter the port name, number, or range; and then select
an option.

Match Source or Destination

 427

Table 121: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv4 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Address Enter IP addresses to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition for a source or
destination. Allows you to remove an IP address from the match condition.

If you have more than 25 addresses, this field displays a link that allows you to easily scroll
through pages, change the order of addresses and also search for them.

NOTE: This address match condition cannot be specified in conjunction with the source
address or destination address match conditions in the same term.
The options available are:

• Add—To include the address in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the address from the match condition and then select Add—To include
the address in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an IP address from the match condition.

Enter an IP destination address and prefix length and select an option.

Prefix List Enter prefix lists, which you have already defined, to be included in the match condition for a
source or destination. Allows you to remove a prefix list from the match condition.

NOTE: This prefix list match condition cannot be specified in conjunction with the source
prefix list or destination prefix list match conditions in the same term.

Select an option:

• Add—To include a predefined destination prefix list, type the prefix list name.

• Delete—To remove a prefix list from the match condition.

 428

Table 121: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv4 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Port Enter a port type to be included in, or excluded from, a match condition for a source or
destination. Allows you to remove a destination port type from the match condition.

NOTE: This match condition does not check the protocol type being used on the port. Make
sure to specify the protocol type (TCP or UDP) match condition in the same term.

Also, this port match condition cannot be specified in conjunction with the source port or
destination port match conditions in the same term.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the port in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the port from the match condition and then select Add—To include the
port in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a port type from the match condition.

Select the port from the port name list; enter the port name, number, or range; and then select
an option.

Match Interface

Interface Enter interfaces to be included in a match condition. Allows you to remove an interface from
the match condition.

The options available are:

• Add—To include an interface in a match condition.

• Delete—To remove an interface from the match condition.

Select a name from the interface name list or Enter the interface name and select an option.
 429

Table 121: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv4 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Interface Set Enter interface sets, which you have already defined, to be included in a match condition.
Allows you to remove an interface set from the match condition.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the group in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an interface group from the match condition.

Enter the interface set name and select an option.

Interface Group Enter interface groups, which you have already defined, to be included in, or excluded from, a
match condition. Allows you to remove an interface group from the match condition.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the port in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the port from the match condition and then select Add—To include the
port in the match condition.

• Delete— To remove a port type from the match condition.

Enter the name of the group and select an option.

Match Packet and Network

First Fragment Select the check box.

Matches the first fragment of a fragmented packet.

Is Fragment Select the check box.

Matches trailing fragments (all but the first fragment) of a fragmented packet.

Fragment Flags Enter fragmentation flags to be included in the match condition.

Enter a text or numeric string defining the flag.

 430

Table 121: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv4 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

TCP Select the check box.

Established
Matches all Transmission Control Protocol packets other than the first packet of a connection.

NOTE: This match condition does not verify that the TCP is used on the port. Make sure to
specify the TCP as a match condition in the same term.

TCP Initial Select the check box.

Matches the first Transmission Control Protocol packet of a connection.

NOTE: This match condition does not verify that the TCP is used on the port. Make sure to
specify the TCP as a match condition in the same term.

TCP Flags Enter Transmission Control Protocol flags to be included in the match condition.

NOTE: This match condition does not verify that the TCP is used on the port. Make sure to
specify the TCP as a match condition in the same term.

Protocol Enter IPv4 protocol types to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition. Allows you
to remove an IPv4 protocol type from the match condition.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the protocol in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the protocol from the match condition and then select Add—To include
the protocol in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an IPv4 protocol type from the match condition.

Select a protocol name from the list or enter a protocol name or number and then select an
option.
 431

Table 121: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv4 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

ICMP Type Select a packet type from the list or enter a packet type name or number and then select an
option.

NOTE: This protocol does not verify that ICMP is used on the port. Make sure to specify an
ICMP type match condition in the same term.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the packet type in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the packet type from the match condition and then select.

Add—To include the packet type in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an ICMP packet type from the match condition.

ICMP Code Select a packet code from the list or enter the packet code as text or a number and select an
option.

NOTE: The ICMP code is dependent on the ICMP type. Make sure to specify an ICMP type
match condition in the same term.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the packet type in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the packet type from the match condition and then select

Add—To include the packet type in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an ICMP packet type from the match condition.

Fragment Enter a fragment offset number or range and then select an option.
Offset
The options available are:

• Add—To include the offset in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the offset from the match condition and then select Add—To include
the offset in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a fragment offset value from the match condition.

 432

Table 121: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv4 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Precedence Enter IP precedence to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition. Allows you to
remove an IP precedence entry from the match condition.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the precedence in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the precedence from the match condition and then select

Add—To include the precedence in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an IP precedence from the match condition.

DSCP Select DSCP from the list; or enter the DSCP value as a keyword, a decimal integer from 0
through 7, or a binary string; and then select an option.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the DSCP in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the DSCP from the match condition and then select Add—To include
the DSCP in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a DSCP from the match condition.

TTL Enter an IPv4 TTL value by entering a number from 1 through 255 and select an option.

NOTE: This option is not available in SRX5600 device.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the TTL in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the TTL from the match condition and then select Add—To include the
TTL in the match condition .

• Delete—To remove an IPv4 TTL type from the match condition.

 433

Table 121: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv4 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Packet Length Specify a packet length, enter a value or range.

Select an option.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the packet length in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the packet length from the match condition and then select

Add—To include the packet length in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a packet length value from the match condition.

Forwarding Specify a forwarding class by selecting a forwarding class from the list or entering a forwarding
Class class, and then select an option.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the forwarding class in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the forwarding class from the match condition and then select

Add—To include the forwarding class in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a forwarding class from the match condition.

IP Options Enter option by selecting an IP option from the list or entering a text or numeric string
identifying the option, and then select an option.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the IP option in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the IP option from the match condition and then select Add—To include
the IP option in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an IP option from the match condition.

 434

Table 121: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv4 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

IPsec ESP SPI Enter an ESP SPI value by entering a binary, hexadecimal, or decimal SPI value or range, and
then select an option.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the value in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the value from the match condition and then select Add—To include the
value in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an ESP SPI value from the match condition.

Action

Nothing Select Nothing.

Specifies that no action is performed. By default, a packet is accepted if it meets the match
conditions of the term, and packets that do not match any conditions in the firewall filter are
dropped.

Accept Select Accept.

Accepts a packet that meets the match conditions of the term.

Discard Select Discard.

Discards a packet that meets the match conditions of the term. Names a discard collector for
packets.

Reject Select Reject and then select a message type from the reason list.

Rejects a packet that meets the match conditions of the term and returns a rejection message.
Allows you to specify a message type that denotes the reason the packet was rejected.

NOTE: To log and sample rejected packets, specify log and sample action modifiers in
conjunction with this action.
 435

Table 121: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv4 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Next Term Select Next Term.

Evaluates a packet with the next term in the filter if the packet meets the match conditions in
this term. This action makes sure that the next term is used for evaluation even when the
packet matches the conditions of a term. When this action is not specified, the filter stops
evaluating the packet after it matches the conditions of a term and takes the associated action.

Routing Accepts a packet that meets the match conditions, and forwards it to the specified routing
Instance instance.

Select Routing Instance and enter the routing instance name in the box next to Routing
Instance.

Action Modifiers

Forwarding Classifies the packet as a specific forwarding class.

Class
Select Forwarding Class from the list.

Count Counts the packets passing this term. Allows you to name a counter that is specific to this
filter. This means that every time a packet transits any interface that uses this filter, it
increments the specified counter.

Select Count and enter a 24-character string containing letters, numbers, or hyphens to specify
a counter name.

Virtual Channel Enter a string identifying the virtual channel.

NOTE: This option is not available in SRX345 of devices.

Prefix Action Enter the prefix action.

NOTE: This option is not available in SRX4100 and SRX345 devices.

Log Select Log.

Logs the packet header information in the routing engine.

 436

Table 121: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv4 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Syslog Select Syslog.

Records packet information in the system log.

Port Mirror Select Port Mirror.

Port mirrors the packet.

NOTE: This option is not available in SRX5600 and SRX345 devices.

Loss Priority Sets the loss priority of the packet. This is the priority of dropping a packet before it is sent,
and it affects the scheduling priority of the packet.

Select the range of priority from the list.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPv4 Page | 419

 437

CHAPTER 36

Firewall Filters—IPv6

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the IPv6 Page | 437

Add IPv6 Firewall Filters | 438

About the IPv6 Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 437

Field Descriptions | 437

You are here: Network > Firewall Filters > IPV6.

Use this page to configure IPv6 firewall filter.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following task from this page:

• Add an IPv6 Firewall Filters. See "Add IPv6 Firewall Filters" on page 438.

Field Descriptions

Table 122 on page 438 describes the fields on IPv6 page.

 438

Table 122: Fields on the IPv6 Page

Field Description

IPv6 Filter Summary

Filter Name Displays the name of the filter and when expanded, lists the terms attached to the filter.

Add New IPv6 Filter

Filter Name Searches for existing filters by filter name.

Term Name Searches for existing terms by term name.

Location Specifies the position of the new filter.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add IPv6 Firewall Filters | 438

Add IPv6 Firewall Filters

You are here: Network > Firewall Filters > IPV6.

To add an IPV6 firewall filter:

1. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 123 on page 439 and Table
124 on page 442.
2. Click Add available in the Add New IPv6 Filter section.
A new IPv6 Firewall Filter is created.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 123 on page 439 describes the fields on the Add IPv6 page.
 439

Table 123: Fields on the Add IPv6 Firewall Filter Page

Field Action

IPv6 Filter Summary

Action column Select an option:

• To move an item upward—Locate the item and click

the up arrow from the same row.

• To move an item downward—Locate the item and

click the down arrow from the same row.

• To delete an item—Locate the item and click X from

the same row.

Filter Name Enter the name of the filter and, when expanded, lists
the terms attached to the filter.

Displays the match conditions and actions that are set

for each term.

Allows you to add more terms to a filter or to modify

filter terms.

The options available are:

• To display the terms added to a filter—Click the plus

sign next to the filter name. This also displays the
match conditions and actions set for the term.

• To edit a filter—Click the filter name. To edit a term,

click the name of the term.

Search
 440

Table 123: Fields on the Add IPv6 Firewall Filter Page (Continued)

Field Action

Filter Name Searches for existing filters by filter name.

The options available are:

• To find a specific filter—Enter the name of the filter

in the Filter Name box.

• To list all filters with a common prefix or suffix—Use

the wildcard character (*) when you enter the name
of the filter. For example, te* lists all filters with a
name starting with the characters te.

Term Name Searches for existing terms by name.

The options available are:

• To find a specific term—Enter the name of the term

in the Term Name box.

• To list all terms with a common prefix or suffix—Use

the wildcard character (*) when typing the name of
the term. For example, ra* lists all terms with a
name starting with the characters ra.

Number of Items to Display Specifies the number of filters or terms to display on

one page. Selects the number of items to be displayed
on one page.

Add New IPv6 Filter

 441

Table 123: Fields on the Add IPv6 Firewall Filter Page (Continued)

Field Action

Filter Name Enter the name of the filter and when expanded, lists
the terms attached to the filter.

Displays the match conditions and actions that are set

for each term.

Allows you to add more terms to a filter or modify filter

terms.

Select an option:

• To display the terms added to a filter—Click the plus

sign next to the filter name. This also displays the
match conditions and actions set for the term.

• To edit a filter—Click the filter name. To edit a term,

click the name of the term.

Term Name Searches for existing terms by term name.

Select an option:

• To find a specific term—Enter the name of the term

in the Term Name box.

• To list all terms with a common prefix or suffix—Use

the wildcard character (*) when typing the name of
the term. For example, ra* lists all terms with a
name starting with the characters ra.

Location Positions the new filter in one of the following

locations:

• After Final IPv4 Filter—At the end of all filters.

• After IPv6 Filter—After a specified filter.

Before IPv6 Filter—Before a specified filter.

 442

Table 123: Fields on the Add IPv6 Firewall Filter Page (Continued)

Field Action

Add Click Add.

Opens the Filter Term page allowing you to define the

match conditions and the action for this term.

Add New IPv6 Term

Location Positions the new filter in one of the following

locations:

• After Final IPv4 Filter—At the end of all filters.

• After IPv6 Filter—After a specified filter.

Before IPv6 Filter—Before a specified filter.

Add Click Add.

Opens the Filter Term page allowing you to define the

match conditions and the action for this term.

Table 124: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv6 Firewall Filter

Field Action

Match Source
 443

Table 124: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv6 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Source Address Specifies IP source addresses to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition. Allows
you to remove source IP addresses from the match condition.

If you have more than 25 addresses, this field displays a link that allows you to easily scroll
through pages, change the order of addresses, and also search for them.

Enter an IP source address and prefix length, and select an option:

• Add—To include the address in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the address from the match condition and then select Add -To include
the address in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an IP source address from the match condition.

Source Prefix Specifies source prefix lists, which you have already defined, to be included in the match
List condition. Allows you to remove a prefix list from the match condition.

Select an option:

• Add—To include a predefined source prefix list in the match condition, type the prefix list
name.

• Delete—To remove a prefix list from the match condition.

Source Port Specifies the source port type to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition. Allows
you to remove a source port type from the match condition.

NOTE: This match condition does not check the protocol type being used on the port. Make
sure to specify the protocol type (TCP or UDP) match condition in the same term.

Select the port from the port name list; enter the port name, number, or range and then select
an option:

• Add—To include the port in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the port from the match condition and then select Add—To include the
port in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a port from the match condition.

Match Destination
 444

Table 124: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv6 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Destination Specifies destination addresses to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition.
Address Allows you to remove a destination IP address from the match condition.

If you have more than 25 addresses, this field displays a link that allows you to easily scroll
through pages, change the order of addresses, and also search for them.

Enter an IP destination address and prefix length and select an option:

• Add—To include the address in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the address from the match condition and then select Add—To include
the address in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an IP address from the match condition.

Destination Specifies destination prefix lists, which you have already defined, to be included in the match
Prefix List condition. Allows you to remove a prefix list from the match condition.

Select an option:

• Add—To include a predefined destination prefix list, enter the prefix list name.

• Delete—To remove a prefix list from the match condition.

Destination Specifies destination port types to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition.
Port Allows you to remove a destination port type from the match condition.

NOTE: This match condition does not check the protocol type being used on the port. Make
sure to specify the protocol type (TCP or UDP) match condition in the same term.
Select the port from the port name list; enter the port name, number, or range; and then select
an option:

• Add—To include the port in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the port from the match condition and then select Add—To include the
port in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a port type from the match condition.

Match Source or Destination

 445

Table 124: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv6 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Address Specifies IP addresses to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition for a source or
destination. Allows you to remove an IP address from the match condition.

If you have more than 25 addresses, this field displays a link that allows you to easily scroll
through pages, change the order of addresses and also search for them.

NOTE: This address match condition cannot be specified in conjunction with the source
address or destination address match conditions in the same term.
Enter an IP destination address and prefix length and select an option:

• Add—To include the address in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the address from the match condition and then select Add—To include
the address in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an IP address from the match condition.

Prefix List Specifies prefix lists, which you have already defined, to be included in the match condition for
a source or destination. Allows you to remove a prefix list from the match condition.

NOTE: This prefix list match condition cannot be specified in conjunction with the source
prefix list or destination prefix list match conditions in the same term.

Select an option:

• Add—To include a predefined destination prefix list, type the prefix list name.

• Delete—To remove a prefix list from the match condition.

 446

Table 124: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv6 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Port Specifies a port type to be included in, or excluded from, a match condition for a source or
destination. Allows you to remove a destination port type from the match condition.

NOTE: This match condition does not check the protocol type being used on the port. Make
sure to specify the protocol type (TCP or UDP) match condition in the same term.
Also, this port match condition cannot be specified in conjunction with the source port or
destination port match conditions in the same term.

Select the port from the port name list; enter the port name, number, or range; and then select
an option:

• Add—To include the port in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the port from the match condition and then select Add—To include the
port in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a port type from the match condition.

Match Interface

Interface Specifies interfaces to be included in a match condition. Allows you to remove an interface
from the match condition.

Select a name from the interface name list or Enter the interface name and select an option:

• Add—To include an interface in a match condition.

• Delete—To remove an interface from the match condition.

Interface Set Specifies interface sets, which you have already defined, to be included in a match condition.
Allows you to remove an interface set from the match condition.

Enter the interface set name and select an option:

• Add—To include the group in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an interface group from the match condition.

 447

Table 124: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv6 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Interface Specifies interface groups, which you have already defined, to be included in, or excluded from,
Group a match condition. Allows you to remove an interface group from the match condition.

Enter the name of the group and select an option:

• Add—To include the port in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the port from the match condition and then select Add—To include the
port in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a port type from the match condition.

Match Packet and Network

TCP Matches all Transmission Control Protocol packets other than the first packet of a connection.
Established
NOTE: This match condition does not verify that the TCP is used on the port. Make sure to
specify the TCP as a match condition in the same term.

Select the check box.

TCP Initial Matches the first Transmission Control Protocol packet of a connection.

NOTE: This match condition does not verify that the TCP is used on the port. Make sure to
specify the TCP as a match condition in the same term.

Select the check box.

TCP Flags Specifies Transmission Control Protocol flags to be included in the match condition.

NOTE: This match condition does not verify that the TCP is used on the port. Make sure to
specify the TCP as a match condition in the same term.

Enter a text or numeric string defining the flag.

 448

Table 124: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv6 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Next Header Specifies IPv6 protocol types to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition. Allows
you to remove an IPv6 protocol type from the match condition.

Select a protocol name from the list or enter a protocol name or number and then select an
option:

• Add—To include the protocol in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the protocol from the match condition and then select Add—To include
the protocol in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an IPv6 protocol type from the match condition.

ICMP Type Specifies ICMP packet types to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition. Allows
you to remove an ICMP packet type from the match condition.

NOTE: This protocol does not verify that ICMP is used on the port. Make sure to specify an
ICMP type match condition in the same term.

Select a packet type from the list or enter a packet type name or number and then select an
option:

• Add—To include the packet type in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the packet type from the match condition and then select.

Add—To include the packet type in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an ICMP packet type from the match condition.

 449

Table 124: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv6 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

ICMP Code Specifies the ICMP code to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition. Allows you
to remove an ICMP code from the match condition.

NOTE: The ICMP code is dependent on the ICMP type. Make sure to specify an ICMP type
match condition in the same term.

Select a packet code from the list or enter the packet code as text or a number and select an
option:

• Add—To include the packet type in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the packet type from the match condition and then select

Add—To include the packet type in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove an ICMP packet type from the match condition.

Traffic Class Specifies the traffic class to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition. Allows you
to remove a traffic class value from the match condition.

The options available are:

• Add—To include the traffic class in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the traffic class from the match condition and then select

Add—To include the traffic class in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a traffic class value from the match condition.

Packet Length Specifies the length of received packets, in bytes, to be included in, or excluded from, the
match condition. Allows you to remove a packet length value from the match condition.

Specify a packet length, enter a value or range.

Select an option:

• Add—To include the packet length in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the packet length from the match condition and then select

Add—To include the packet length in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a packet length value from the match condition.

 450

Table 124: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv6 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Forwarding Specifies forwarding classes to be included in, or excluded from, the match condition. Allows
Class you to a remove forwarding class entry from the match condition.

Specify a forwarding class by selecting a forwarding class from the list or entering a forwarding
class, and then select an option:

• Add—To include the forwarding class in the match condition.

• Except—To exclude the forwarding class from the match condition and then select

Add—To include the forwarding class in the match condition.

• Delete—To remove a forwarding class from the match condition.

Action

Nothing Select Nothing.

Specifies that no action is performed. By default, a packet is accepted if it meets the match
conditions of the term, and packets that do not match any conditions in the firewall filter are
dropped.

Accept Select Accept.

Accepts a packet that meets the match conditions of the term.

Discard Select Discard.

Discards a packet that meets the match conditions of the term. Names a discard collector for
packets.

Reject Select Reject and then select a message type from the reason list.

Rejects a packet that meets the match conditions of the term and returns a rejection message.
Allows you to specify a message type that denotes the reason the packet was rejected.

NOTE: To log and sample rejected packets, specify log and sample action modifiers in
conjunction with this action.
 451

Table 124: Fields on the Match Criteria for IPv6 Firewall Filter (Continued)

Field Action

Next Term Select Next Term.

Evaluates a packet with the next term in the filter if the packet meets the match conditions in
this term. This action makes sure that the next term is used for evaluation even when the
packet matches the conditions of a term. When this action is not specified, the filter stops
evaluating the packet after it matches the conditions of a term and takes the associated action.

Routing Accepts a packet that meets the match conditions, and forwards it to the specified routing
Instance instance.

Select Routing Instance and enter the routing instance name in the box next to Routing
Instance.

Action Modifiers

Forwarding Classifies the packet as a specific forwarding class.

Class
Select Forwarding Class from the list.

Count Counts the packets passing this term. Allows you to name a counter that is specific to this
filter. This means that every time a packet transits any interface that uses this filter, it
increments the specified counter.

Select Count and enter a 24-character string containing letters, numbers, or hyphens to specify
a counter name.

Log Select Log.

Logs the packet header information in the routing engine.

Syslog Select Syslog.

Records packet information in the system log.

Loss Priority Sets the loss priority of the packet. This is the priority of dropping a packet before it is sent,
and it affects the scheduling priority of the packet.

Select the range of priority from the list.

 452

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPv6 Page | 437

 453

CHAPTER 37

Firewall Filters—Assign to Interfaces

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Assign to Interfaces Page | 453

About the Assign to Interfaces Page

IN THIS SECTION

Field Descriptions | 453

You are here: You are here: Network > Firewall Filters > Assign To Interfaces.

Use this page to configure interface for firewall filters.

Field Descriptions

Table 125 on page 454 describes the fields on the Assign Interfaces page.
 454

Table 125: Fields on the Assign Interfaces Page

Field Description

Logical Interface Displays the logical interfaces on a router. Allows you to apply IPv4 and IPv6 firewall filters to
Name packets received on the interface and packets transmitted from the interface.

The options available are:

• Input firewall filter:

• IPv4 Input Filter—Enter the name of IPv4 filter applied to received packets.

• IPv6 Input Filter—Enter the name of IPv6 filter applied to received packets.

• Output firewall filter:

• IPv4 Output Filter—Enter the name of IPv4 filter applied to transmitted packets.

• IPv6 Output Filter—Enter the name of IPv6 filter applied to transmitted packets.

Click OK to save the changes.

Link State Displays the status of the logical interface.

Input Firewall Displays the input firewall filter applied on an interface. This filter evaluates all packets
Filters received on the interface.

Output Firewall Displays the output firewall filter applied on an interface. This filter evaluates all packets
Filters transmitted from the interface.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add IPv4 Firewall Filters | 420

Add IPv6 Firewall Filters | 438
 455

CHAPTER 38

NAT Policies

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the NAT Policies Page | 455

Create a Source NAT | 457

Edit a Source NAT | 463

Delete Source NAT | 463

About the NAT Policies Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 456

Field Descriptions | 456

You are here: Network > NAT > Policies.

Network Address Translation (NAT) is a form of network masquerading where you can hide devices
between the zones or interfaces. A trust zone is a segment of the network where security measures are
applied. It is usually assigned to the internal LAN. An untrust zone is the Internet. NAT modifies the IP
addresses of the packets moving between the trust and untrust zones.

Whenever a packet arrives at the NAT device, the device performs a translation on the packet’s IP
address by rewriting it with an IP address that was specified for external use. After translation, the
packet appears to have originated from the gateway rather than from the original device within the
network. This helps you hide internal IP addresses from the other networks and keep your network
secure.

Use this page to configure source, destination, and static NAT.

 456

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Create a source NAT. See "Create a Source NAT" on page 457.

• Edit a source NAT. See "Edit a Source NAT" on page 463.

• Delete a source NAT. See "Delete Source NAT" on page 463.

• View destination NAT rules. For more information on destination NAT, see "About the Destination
Page" on page 475.

• View static NAT rules. For more information on static NAT, see "About the Static Page" on page 481.

Field Descriptions

Table 126 on page 456 describes the fields on the NAT Policies Page.

Table 126: Fields on the NAT Policies Page.

Field Description

Seq Displays the sequence number of rules in a context. Drag and drop the policies within the
same context to reorder your NAT policy among the existing policies.

Hits Displays the number of hits the rule has encountered.

Rule Name Displays the rule name.

NAT Type Displays whether the NAT is source, destination, or static.

Source Ingress Displays the source ingress type. For example: zone, interface, or routing instance.

Source Address Displays the match source address of the NAT policy.

Source Port Displays the match source port of the NAT policy.

Destination Egress Displays the match destination egress type. For example: zone, interface, or routing
instance.
 457

Table 126: Fields on the NAT Policies Page. (Continued)

Field Description

Destination Address Displays the match destination address of the NAT policy.

Destination Port Displays the match destination port of the NAT policy.

Applications Displays the match application for the NAT policy.

Protocol Displays the match IP protocol for the NAT policy.

Actions Displays the action of the NAT policy.

Description Displays the description for the NAT policy.

Create a Source NAT

You are here: Network > NAT > Policies.

To create a source NAT:

1. Click Create > Source NAT on the upper right-side of the Policies page.
The inline creation fields will appear.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 127 on page 457.
3. Click the tick icon on the right-side of the row once done with the configuration.

Table 127: Fields on the Policies Page—Create Source NAT

Field Description

Rule Name > Enter a unique source NAT rule name.

Name

Source Ingress
 458

Table 127: Fields on the Policies Page—Create Source NAT (Continued)

Field Description

Select Sources

Source ingress Select an option from the list for ingress traffic that originates from inside the network:
type
• Zone

• Interface

• Routing Instance

Zone Select the source zones in the Available column and use the right arrow to move them to
the Selected column.

NOTE: This option is available only if you select source ingress type as Zone.

Interface Select the source interfaces in the Available column and use the right arrow to move them
to the Selected column.

NOTE: This option is available only if you select source ingress type as Interface.

Routing instance Select the source routing instances in the Available column and use the right arrow to
move them to the Selected column.

NOTE: This option is available only if you select source ingress type as Routing Instance.

Addresses Select the source addresses in the Available column and use the right arrow to move them
to the Selected column.

To create a new address:

1. Click +.

The Create Address page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Name—Optional. Enter a unique name for source address.

• Description—Enter the description for source address.

• Host IP—Enter IPv4 or IPv6 host address.

 459

Table 127: Fields on the Policies Page—Create Source NAT (Continued)

Field Description

Ports/Port range Click + to enter port number or port range (for example, 1-5) with minimum and maximum
values for source.

Range: 0 through 65535.

To edit a port number or port range, select it and click the pencil icon.

To delete a port number or port range, select it and click the delete icon.

Destination Egress

Select Destination

Destination egress Select an option from the list for outgoing traffic that originates from inside of the device
type network:

• Zone

• Interface

• Routing Instance

Zone Select the destination zones in the Available column and use the right arrow to move them
to the Selected column.

NOTE: This option is available only if you select destination egress type as Zone.

Interface Select the destination interfaces in the Available column and use the right arrow to move
them to the Selected column.

NOTE: This option is available only if you select destination egress type as Interface.

Routing instance Select the destination routing instances in the Available column and use the right arrow to
move them to the Selected column.

NOTE: This option is available only if you select destination egress type as Routing
Instance.
 460

Table 127: Fields on the Policies Page—Create Source NAT (Continued)

Field Description

Addresses Select the destination addresses in the Available column and use the right arrow to move
them to the Selected column.

To create a new address:

1. Click +.

The Create Address page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Name—Optional. Enter a unique name for destination address.

• Description—Enter the description for destination address.

• Host IP—Enter IPv4 or IPv6 host address.

Ports/Port range Click + to enter port number or port range (for example, 1-5) with minimum and maximum
values for destination.

Range: 0 through 65535.

To edit a port number or port range, select it and click the pencil icon.

To delete a port number or port range, select it and click the delete icon.

Applications

Select Applications

Applications Select an application option:

• Any—Any applications you want to associate with the NAT policy.

• Specific—Select the applications in the Available column and use the right arrow to
move them to the Selected column.

• None—No applications selected to associate with the NAT policy.

Protocols

Select Protocols
 461

Table 127: Fields on the Policies Page—Create Source NAT (Continued)

Field Description

Protocols Select the protocols in the Available column and use the right arrow to move them to the
Selected column.

Add Protocol Click + and enter a protocol number to associate with the NAT policy.

Range is 0 through 255.

Actions

Actions

Translation type Select an option:

• None—No translation is performed for the incoming traffic.

• Interface—Performs interface-based translations on the source traffic.

• Pool—Performs pool-based translations on the source traffic.

Source pool Select a source pool from the list.

Click Add New to create a new source NAT pool. For more information on field options,
see "Create a Source NAT Pool" on page 467.

Persistent Enable this option for mapping all requests from the same internal transport address to the
same reflexive transport address.
 462

Table 127: Fields on the Policies Page—Create Source NAT (Continued)

Field Description

Persistent NAT Select an option from the list:

type
• any-remote-host—All requests from a specific internal IP address and port are mapped
to the same reflexive transport address. Any external host can send a packet to the
internal host by sending the packet to the reflexive transport address.

• target-host—All requests from a specific internal IP address and port are mapped to the
same reflexive transport address. An external host can send a packet to an internal host
by sending the packet to the reflexive transport address. The internal host must have
previously sent a packet to the external hosts IP address.

• target-host-port—All requests from a specific internal IP address and port are mapped
to the same reflexive transport address. An external host can send a packet to an
internal host by sending the packet to the reflexive transport address. The internal host
must have previously sent a packet to the external hosts IP address and port.

Inactivity timeout Enter the amount of time that the persistent NAT binding remains in the sites memory
when all the sessions of the binding entry have ended.

Range is 60 through 7200 seconds.

Maximum session Enter the maximum number of sessions with which a persistent NAT binding can be
number associated.

Range is 8 through 65536

Description Enter the description for the source NAT.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Source NAT | 463

Delete Source NAT | 463
 463

Edit a Source NAT

You are here: Network > NAT > Policies.

To edit a source NAT:

1. Double-click an existing source NAT that you want to edit on the Policies page.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in "Create a Source NAT" on page
457.
3. Click the tick icon on the right-side of the row once done with the configuration.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Source NAT | 463

Delete Source NAT

You are here: Network > NAT > Policies.

To delete a source NAT:

1. Select one or more source NATs that you want to delete on the Policies page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right-side of the page.
A confirmation message window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the source NAT.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Create a Source NAT | 457

Edit a Source NAT | 463
 464

CHAPTER 39

NAT Pools

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the NAT Pools Page | 464

Global Options | 466

Create a Source NAT Pool | 467

Edit a Source NAT Pool | 471

Delete Source NAT Pool | 472

Add a Destination NAT Pool | 472

Edit a Destination NAT Pool | 474

Delete Destination NAT Pool | 474

About the NAT Pools Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 465

Field Descriptions | 465

You are here: Network > NAT > Pools.

A NAT pool is a set of IP addresses that you can define and use for translation. NAT policies perform
address translation by translating internal IP addresses to the addresses in these pools. Unlike static
NAT, where there is a one-to-one mapping that includes destination IP address translation in one
direction and source IP address translation in the reverse direction, with source NAT, you translate the
original source IP address to an IP address in the address pool. With destination NAT, you translate the
original destination address to an IP address in the address pool.

Use this page to configure source and destination NAT pools.

 465

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a global option. See "Global Options" on page 466.

• Create a source NAT pool. See "Create a Source NAT Pool" on page 467.

• Edit a source NAT pool. See "Edit a Source NAT Pool" on page 471.

• Delete a source NAT pool. See "Delete Source NAT Pool" on page 472.

• Add a destination NAT pool. See "Add a Destination NAT Pool" on page 472.

• Edit a destination NAT pool. See "Edit a Destination NAT Pool" on page 474.

• Delete a destination NAT pool. See "Delete Destination NAT Pool" on page 474.

Field Descriptions

Table 128 on page 465 describes the fields on the NAT Pools Page.

Table 128: Fields on the NAT Pools Page.

Field Description

Pool Name Displays the NAT pool name.

Pool Type Displays whether the NAT pool is either source or destination.

Pool Address Displays the NAT pool address.

Proxy ARP/ND Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) proxy or Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)
proxy for the NAT pool.

Description Displays the description for the NAT pool.

 466

Global Options

You are here: Network > NAT > Pools.

To add global options for a NAT pool:

1. Click the Global Options available on the upper right side of the page.
The Global Options page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 129 on page 466.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

Table 129: Fields on the Global Options Page

Field Action

Persistent address Enable this option to ensure that the same IP address is assigned from the source NAT
pool to a specific host for multiple concurrent sessions.

Port randomization Enable port randomization. The device performs NAT translation choosing the IP address
by round robin, then chooses the port used for that IP address by randomization.

Interface port Enable this option to set the port range for NAT interface overload mapping. It also
overloading allows you to block a specific port from being used in interface overload mapping.

Overloading factor Enter a value for the port overloading capacity for the source NAT interface.

For example, if overloading factor is set to 2, and it is multiplied by a maximum port

capacity of 63,486, the port overloading threshold is 126,972. If the configured setting
exceeds the maximum port capacity of the interface, an error message is generated
during the configuration commit.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the NAT Pools Page | 464

Create a Source NAT Pool | 467
Add a Destination NAT Pool | 472
 467

Create a Source NAT Pool

You are here: Network > NAT > Pools.

To add a source NAT pool:

1. Click Create > Source NAT Pool on the upper right side of the Pools page.
The Create Source NAT Pool page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 130 on page 467.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 130 on page 467 describes the fields on the Create Source NAT Pool page.

Table 130: Fields on the Create Source NAT Pool Page

Field Description

Name Enter a unique string of alphanumeric characters, hyphens and underscores; maximum
length 63-character.

Description Enter a description for the source NAT pool.

Basic

Routing instance Select a routing instance from the list.

 468

Table 130: Fields on the Create Source NAT Pool Page (Continued)

Field Description

Pool addresses Select the source NAT pool addresses in the Available column and the use the right arrow
to move them to the Selected column.

To add a new pool address:

1. Click +.

The Add Pool Address page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter a name for the pool address.

• Description—Enter a description for the pool address.

• Pool address type—Select either IP address or address range for the pool.

• IP address—Enter IPv4 or IPv6 address of the host.

NOTE: This option is available only when you select IP address as pool address type.

• Start Address—Enter the starting range of IPv4 or IPv6 address for the source NAT
pool.

NOTE: This option is available only when you select Address Range as pool address
type.

• End Address—Enter the ending range of IPv4 or IPv6 address for the source NAT
pool.

NOTE: This option is available only when you select Address Range as pool address
type.

Advanced

Port Translation
 469

Table 130: Fields on the Create Source NAT Pool Page (Continued)

Field Description

Port translation Select a port translation option from the list:

• No Translation

• Translation with port range—Port range from low to high. Range is 1024 through
65535.

• Translation with port overloading factor—Port overloading capacity for the source NAT
interface.

Shared Address Enable this option to map many-to-one external IP addresses. This increases NAT
resources and improves traffic.

NOTE: This option is available only when you select No Translation.

Host address base Enter IPv4 or IPv6 address used as the host address base.

For example, if the host address base is 198.51.100.30 and the NAT pool uses the range
203.0.113.10 to 203.0.113.20, then 198.51.100.30 translates to 203.0.113.10,
198.51.100.31 translates to 203.0.113.11, and so on.

Port range from Enter the lower limit of the port range.

Range: 1024 through 65535.

NOTE: This option is available only when you select Translation with port range.

Port range to Enter the upper limit of the port range.

Range: 1024 through 65535.

NOTE: This option is available only when you select Translation with port range.

Overloading factor Enter the port overloading factor value.

Range: 2 through 32.

NOTE: This option is available only when you select Translation with port overloading
factor.
 470

Table 130: Fields on the Create Source NAT Pool Page (Continued)

Field Description

Address pooling Specifies that multiple internal IP addresses can be mapped to the same external IP
address. Use this option only when the source NAT pool is configured with no port
translation.

Paired Select this option to use in source NAT pools with port translation for applications that
require all sessions associated with one internal IP address to be translated to the same
external IP address for multiple sessions.

NOTE: This option is available only when you enable Address Pooling.

Non-paired Select this option to use in source NAT pools without port translation for assigning IP
addresses using a round-robin fashion.

NOTE: This option is available only when you enable Address Pooling.

Overflow pool type Specify a source pool to use when the current address pool is exhausted:

• None—No support for overflow.

• Interface—Allow the interface to support overflow.

• Pool—Name of the source address pool.

NOTE: This option is available only when you select No Translation.

Overflow pool Select a source address pool from the list.

Utilization Alarm

Upper threshold Enter an upper threshold percentage for pool address utilization at which an SNMP trap is
triggered.

Range: 50 through 100.

 471

Table 130: Fields on the Create Source NAT Pool Page (Continued)

Field Description

Lower threshold Enter a lower threshold percentage for pool address utilization at which an SNMP trap is
triggered.

Range: 40 through 100.

NOTE: This option can be set only if you configure the upper threshold value.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the NAT Pools Page | 464

Edit a Source NAT Pool | 471
Delete Source NAT Pool | 472

Edit a Source NAT Pool

You are here: Network > NAT > Pools.

To edit a source NAT pool:

1. Select an existing source NAT pool that you want to edit on the Pools page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Source NAT Pool page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options,
see "Create a Source NAT Pool" on page 467.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Source NAT Pool | 472

 472

Delete Source NAT Pool

You are here: Network > NAT > Pools.

To delete a source NAT pool:

1. Select one or more source NAT pools that you want to delete on the Pools page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
A confirmation message window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the NAT Pools Page | 464

Create a Source NAT Pool | 467
Edit a Source NAT Pool | 471

Add a Destination NAT Pool

You are here: Network > NAT > Pools.

To add a destination NAT pool:

1. Click Create > Destination NAT Pool on the upper right side of the Pools page.
The Create Destination NAT Pool page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 131 on page 472.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 131 on page 472 describes the fields on the Create Destination NAT Pool page.

Table 131: Fields on the Create Destination NAT Pool Page

Field Action

Name Enter the destination pool name.

Description Enter a description for the destination pool.

 473

Table 131: Fields on the Create Destination NAT Pool Page (Continued)

Field Action

Routing instance Select a routing instance from the list.

Pool address type Select one of the following pool address type:

• Address & Port—Translate destination IP address or addresses and port number(s) to a

specific IP address and one port number.

• Address Range—Translate a range of destination IP addresses to another range of IP

addresses. This mapping is one-to-one.

Pool address Enter IPv4 or IPv6 address for destination pool.

NOTE: This option is available only when you select Address & Port as pool address type.

Pool port Enter a destination port value.

Range: 0 through 65535.

NOTE: This option is available only when you select Address & Port as pool address type.

Start address Enter starting address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the destination address range.

NOTE: This option is available only when you select Address Range as pool address type.

End address Enter ending address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the destination address range.

NOTE: This option is available only when you select Address Range as pool address type.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Destination NAT Pool | 474

Delete Destination NAT Pool | 474
About the NAT Pools Page | 464
Create a Source NAT Pool | 467
 474

Edit a Destination NAT Pool

You are here: Network > NAT > Pools.

To edit a destination NAT pool:

1. Select an existing destination NAT pool that you want to edit on the Pools page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Destination NAT Pool page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
options, see "Add a Destination NAT Pool" on page 472.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Destination NAT Pool | 474

About the NAT Pools Page | 464

Delete Destination NAT Pool

You are here: Network > NAT > Pools.

To delete a destination NAT pool:

1. Select one or more destination NAT pools that you want to delete on the Pools page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Destination NAT Pool | 472

Edit a Destination NAT Pool | 474
 475

CHAPTER 40

Destination NAT

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Destination Page | 475

Add a Destination Rule Set | 477

Edit a Destination Rule Set | 480

Delete Destination Rule Set | 480

About the Destination Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 475

Field Descriptions | 476

You are here: Network > NAT > Destination.

Use this page to add, edit, or delete destination NAT configurations.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a Destination Rule Set. See "Add a Destination Rule Set" on page 477.

• Edit a Destination Rule Set. See "Edit a Destination Rule Set" on page 480.

• Delete a Destination Rule Set. See "Delete Destination Rule Set" on page 480.
 476

Field Descriptions

Table 132 on page 476 describes the fields on the Destination Page.

Table 132: Fields on the Destination Page.

Field Description

Destination NAT Rule Set

From Displays the destination NAT sort options from which the packets flow.

The options available are:

• Routing Instance

• Zone

• Interface

Filter Displays the filter option.

Name Displays the name of the destination NAT rule set.

From Displays the name of the routing instance/zone/interface from which the packets flow.

Rule Displays the name of the rule in the selected destination NAT rule set.

Description Displays a description of the destination NAT rule set.

Rules in Selected Rule-Set

Rule Name Displays the name of the rule in the selected destination NAT rule set.

Match Source Displays the match source address.

Match Destination Displays the match destination address.

Match IP Protocol Displays the match IP protocol.

 477

Table 132: Fields on the Destination Page. (Continued)

Field Description

Match Destination Port Displays the match destination port.

Action Displays the action of the rule in the selected rule set.

Upper Threshold Displays upper threshold at which an SNMP trap is triggered.

Lower Threshold Displays lower threshold at which an SNMP trap is triggered.

Description Displays a description of the rule in the selected destination NAT rule set.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Destination Rule Set | 477

Add a Destination Rule Set

You are here: Network > NAT > Destination.

To add a destination Rule Set:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Destination page.
The Add Rule Set page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 133 on page 477.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 133 on page 477 describes the fields on the Add Rule Set page.

Table 133: Fields on the Add Rule Set page.

Field Action

Add Rule Set

 478

Table 133: Fields on the Add Rule Set page. (Continued)

Field Action

Rule Set Name Enter the rule set name.

Rule Set Description Enter a description for the rule set.

From Specifies the filter options. Select an option:

• Routing Instance

• Zone

• Interface

Select the routing instances/zones/interfaces in the Available column and the use the
right arrow to move them to the Selected column.

Add Rule

Rule Name Enter the rule name.

Rule Description Enter a description for the rule.

Match

Source Address Search and select the source addresses in the Available column and the use the right
arrow to move them to the Selected column.

You can also enter a source address in the New text box in the Selected column and click
Add to add the source address to the lower pane of the Selected column.

Destination Address Enter the destination IP address.

Port Enter the destination port number.

IP Protocol Enter the protocol name in the text box and click + to add the protocol to the IP Protocol
column.
 479

Table 133: Fields on the Add Rule Set page. (Continued)

Field Action

Actions Specifies the actions for the destination NAT pool. Select an option:

• No Destination NAT.

• Do Destination NAT With Pool.

Do Destination NAT With Pool

Add New Pool Select a pool from the list or click +.

Add Destination Pool

Pool Name Enter the destination pool name.

Pool Description Enter a description for the destination pool.

Routing Instance Specifies the routing instance available.

Select an option.

Pool Addresses and Port

Address/Port Enter the destination pool address.

Port Enter the destination pool port number.

Address Range Enter the destination pool address range.

Upper Threshold Enter upper threshold at which an SNMP trap is triggered. Session count hit alarm range:
1 through 4294967295

Lower Threshold Enter lower threshold at which an SNMP trap is triggered. Rule session count alarm range:
1 through 4294967295
 480

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Destination Rule Set | 480

Edit a Destination Rule Set

You are here: Network > NAT > Destination.

To edit a destination rule set:

1. Select an existing destination rule set that you want to edit on the Destination page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Rule Set page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add a
Destination Rule Set" on page 477.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Destination Rule Set | 480

Delete Destination Rule Set

You are here: Network > NAT > Destination.

To delete destination rule set:

1. Select one or more destination rule sets that you want to delete on Destination page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Destination NAT Pool | 472

 481

CHAPTER 41

Static NAT

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Static Page | 481

Add a Static Rule Set | 483

Edit a Static Rule Set | 487

Delete Static Rule Set | 487

About the Static Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 481

Field Descriptions | 482

You are here: Network > NAT > Static.

Use tis page to configure static NAT.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a static rule set and rules to it. See "Add a Static Rule Set" on page 483.

• Edit a static rule set and its rules. See "Edit a Static Rule Set" on page 487.

• Delete a static rule set and its rules. See "Delete Static Rule Set" on page 487.

• Move the rules in the rules table. To do this, select a rule which you want to move and select the
following options according to your choice:
 482

• Move Up—Enables you to move the rule up in the list.

• Move Down—Enables you to move the rule down in the list.

• Move to Top—Enables you to move the rule to top of the list

• Move to Bottom—Enables you to move the rule to the bottom of the list

Field Descriptions

Table 134 on page 482 describes the fields on the Static page.

Table 134: Fields on the Static Page

Field Description

Static NAT Rule Set

From Displays the destination NAT sort options from which the packets flow.

The options available are:

• Routing Instance

• Zone

• Interface

Filter Displays the filter options.

Name Displays the name of the static NAT rule set.

From Displays the name of the routing instance, zone, or interface from which the packets
flow.

Rule Displays the name of the rule in the selected static NAT rule set.

Description Displays a description of the static NAT rule set.

Rules in Selected Rule-Set

 483

Table 134: Fields on the Static Page (Continued)

Field Description

Rule Name Displays the name of the routing instance, zone, or interface to which the packet flows.

Source Addresses Displays the source address to match the rule.

Source Ports Displays the source port number.

Destination Addresses Displays the destination address to match the rule.

Destination Ports Displays the destination port number.

Prefix Displays the static IP address prefix.

Mapped Port Displays the destination port or port range to allow static NAT to map ports.

Upper Threshold Displays the upper threshold value of the at which an SNMP trap is triggered.

Lower Threshold Displays the lower threshold value of the at which an SNMP trap is triggered.

Description Displays the description of the rule in the selected static NAT rule set.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Static Rule Set | 483

Edit a Static Rule Set | 487
Delete Static Rule Set | 487

Add a Static Rule Set

You are here: Network > NAT > Static.

 484

To add a static rule set:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Static page.
The Add Rule Set page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 135 on page 484.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 135: Fields on the Add Static Rule Set Page

Field Action

Rule Set Name Enter a rule set name.

Rule Set Enter a description for the rule set.

Description

From Select a filter option from the list:

• Routing Instance

• Zone

• Interface

Select the routing instances, zones, or interfaces in the Available column and use the right
arrow to move them to the Selected column.

Rules

Rules Specifies the rules added to the selected static rule set.
 485

Table 135: Fields on the Add Static Rule Set Page (Continued)

Field Action

Add To add a rule to the selected static rule set:

1. Click + available at the upper right of the Rules table.

The Add Rule page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Rule Name—Enter a rule name.

• Rule Description—Enter a description for the rule.

• Match—Displays the match destination address.

• Source Address—Select an IPv4 or IPv6 address from the list or enter the address
and click + to add it.

Select an existing IPv4 or IPv6 address and click X to delete it.

• Source Port—Enter a port number or port range from low to high and click + to
add it.

Port Range: 0 through 65535.

Select an existing port and click X to delete it.

• Destination Address—Select IPv4 or IPv6 and then select an address from the list.

• Destination Port—Select one of the following options:

• Any—Selects available port.

• Port—Enter a port number.

• Port Range—Enter a port range from low to high.

• Then—Enter the following details:

• Host Address—Enter the static prefix address.

NOTE: You can select Translate to ipv4 address if you have selected IPv6 in the
destination address.
 486

Table 135: Fields on the Add Static Rule Set Page (Continued)

Field Action

• Mapped Port—Select one of the following options:

• Any—Selects available port.

• Port—Enter a port number.

• Port Range—Enter a port range from low to high.

• Routing Instance—Select a routing instance from the list.

• Upper Threshold—Enter an upper threshold value at which an SNMP trap is

triggered.

Range: 1 through 4294967295.

• Lower Threshold—Enter a lower threshold value at which an SNMP trap is

triggered.

Range: 1 through 4294967295.

NOTE: This option can be set only if you configure the upper threshold value.

3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Edit Select an existing rule and click the edit icon at the top right corner of the Rules table.

The Edit Interface page appears with editable fields.

Delete Select an interface and click the delete icon at the top right corner of the Rules table.

A confirmation window appears. Click Yes to delete the selected interface or click No to
discard.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Static Page | 481

Edit a Static Rule Set | 487
Delete Static Rule Set | 487
 487

Edit a Static Rule Set

You are here: Network > NAT > Static.

To edit a static rule set and its rules:

1. Select an existing static rule set that you want to edit on the Static page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Static page.
The Edit Static Rule Set page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see
"Add a Static Rule Set" on page 483.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can select the rule directly and click the pencil icon available on the
upper right side of the Rules table to edit a rule for the selected rule set.

3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Static Page | 481

Add a Static Rule Set | 483
Delete Static Rule Set | 487

Delete Static Rule Set

You are here: Network > NAT > Static.

To delete a static rule set and its rules:

1. Select one or more static rules sets that you want to delete on the Static page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
A confirmation window appears.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can select the rule directly and click the delete (X) icon available on
the upper right side of the Rules table to delete a rule for the selected rule set.

3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

 488

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Static Page | 481

Add a Static Rule Set | 483
Edit a Static Rule Set | 487
 489

CHAPTER 42

NAT Proxy ARP/ND

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Proxy ARP/ND Page | 489

Add a Proxy ARP | 490

Edit a Proxy ARP | 492

Delete a Proxy ARP | 492

Add a Proxy ND | 493

Edit a Proxy ND | 494

Delete Proxy ND | 494

About the Proxy ARP/ND Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 489

Field Descriptions | 490

You are here: Network > NAT > Proxy ARP/ND.

You can add, edit, and delete proxy ARP or proxy ND configurations.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a proxy ARP. See "Add a Proxy ARP" on page 490.

• Edit a proxy ARP. See "Edit a Proxy ARP" on page 492.

 490

• Delete a proxy ARP. See "Delete a Proxy ARP" on page 492.

• Create a proxy ND. See "Add a Proxy ND" on page 493.

• Edit a proxy ND. See "Edit a Proxy ND" on page 494.

• Delete a proxy ND. See "Delete Proxy ND" on page 494.

• Launch NAT wizard. To do this, click Launch Wizard option at the right side of the page. The NAT
wizard leads you through the basic required steps to configure NAT for the SRX Series security
device.

Field Descriptions

Table 136 on page 490 describes the fields on the Proxy ARP/ND Configuration page.

Table 136: Fields on the Proxy ARP/ND Configuration Page

Field Description

Interface Displays the interface type.

Address Displays the IPv4 or IPv6 address.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Proxy ARP | 490

Edit a Proxy ARP | 492
Delete a Proxy ARP | 492
Add a Proxy ND | 493
Edit a Proxy ND | 494
Delete Proxy ND | 494

Add a Proxy ARP

You are here: Network > NAT > Proxy ARP/ND.

To add a proxy ARP:

 491

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the proxy ARP/ND page.
Select the Proxy ARP page. The Add Proxy ARP page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 137 on page 491.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 137: Fields on the Add Proxy ARP Page

Field Action

Interface Enter the interface type. Select an option:

• ge-0/0/0.0

• ge-0/0/2.0

• lo0.0

• vlan0.0

Addresses Dislays the proxy ARP IP address.

Click Delete to deleted the proxy ARP address.

IPv4 Address/Range Enter the source IP address range and the end IP address that the device can be assigned
to.

Click + to add to the addresses.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Proxy ARP/ND Page | 489

Edit a Proxy ARP | 492
Delete a Proxy ARP | 492
Add a Proxy ND | 493
Edit a Proxy ND | 494
Delete Proxy ND | 494
 492

Edit a Proxy ARP

You are here: Network > NAT > Proxy ARP/ND.

To edit a proxy ARP:

1. Select an existing proxy ARP that you want to edit on the Proxy ARP/ND page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Proxy ARP page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add
a Proxy ARP" on page 490.
3. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Proxy ARP/ND Page | 489

Add a Proxy ARP | 490
Delete a Proxy ARP | 492
Add a Proxy ND | 493
Edit a Proxy ND | 494
Delete Proxy ND | 494

Delete a Proxy ARP

You are here: Network > NAT > Proxy ARP/ND.

To delete proxy ARP:

1. Select one or more proxy ARPs that you want to delete on the Proxy ARP page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Proxy ARP/ND Page | 489

Add a Proxy ARP | 490
Edit a Proxy ARP | 492
 493

Add a Proxy ND | 493

Edit a Proxy ND | 494
Delete Proxy ND | 494

Add a Proxy ND

You are here: Network > NAT > Proxy ARP/ND.

To add a proxy ND:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the proxy ARP/ND page.
The Add Proxy ND page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 138 on page 493.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 138: Fields on the Add Proxy ND Page

Field Action

Interface Enter the interface type. Select an option:

• ge-0/0/0.0

• ge-0/0/1.0

• ge-0/0/3.0

• lo0.0

Addresses Displays the proxy ND IP address.

Click Delete to deleted the proxy ND address.

IPv6 Address/Range Enter the source IPv6 address range and the end IPv6 address that the device can be
assigned to.

Click + to add to the addresses.

 494

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Proxy ARP/ND Page | 489

Add a Proxy ARP | 490
Edit a Proxy ARP | 492
Delete a Proxy ARP | 492
Edit a Proxy ND | 494
Delete Proxy ND | 494

Edit a Proxy ND

You are here: Network > NAT > Proxy ARP/ND.

To edit a proxy ND:

1. Select an existing proxy ND that you want to edit on the Proxy ARP/ND page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Proxy ND page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add
a Proxy ND" on page 493.
3. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Proxy ARP/ND Page | 489

Add a Proxy ARP | 490
Edit a Proxy ARP | 492
Delete a Proxy ARP | 492
Add a Proxy ND | 493
Delete Proxy ND | 494

Delete Proxy ND

You are here: Network > NAT > Proxy ARP/ND.

To delete a proxy ND:

 495

1. Select one or more proxy NDs that you want to delete on the Proxy ND page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Proxy ARP/ND Page | 489

Add a Proxy ARP | 490
Edit a Proxy ARP | 492
Delete a Proxy ARP | 492
Add a Proxy ND | 493
Edit a Proxy ND | 494
 496

CHAPTER 43

Static Routing

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Static Routing Page | 496

Add a Static Route | 497

Edit a Static Route | 499

Delete Static Route | 499

About the Static Routing Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 496

Field Descriptions | 497

You are here: Network > Routing > Static Routing.

Use this page to view, add, and remove link aggregation configuration details.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a static route. See "Add a Static Route" on page 497.

• Edit a static route. See "Edit a Static Route" on page 499.

• Delete a static route. See "Delete Static Route" on page 499.

 497

Field Descriptions

Table 139 on page 497 describes the fields on the Static Routing page.

Table 139: Fields on the Static Routing Page

Field Description

Route Displays the static route selected.

Next-hop Displays the selected next-hop address.

Routing Instance Displays the routing instance selected for this route.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Static Route | 497

Add a Static Route

You are here: Network > Routing > Static Routing.

To add a static route:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Static Routing page.
The Add Static Route page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 140 on page 498.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel instead.
If you click OK, a new static route is added with the provided configuration.
 498

Table 140: Fields on the Add Static Route Page

Field Description

Routing Instance Select the routing instance from the list.

The selected destination routing instance that points to the routing table containing the
tunnel destination address.

NOTE: If you log in as a tenant user, routing instance is not displayed as tenant context
supports only one routing instance.

IPv4 Click the IPv4 button.

IP address Enter the static route IPv4 address.

Subnet mask Enter the subnet mask. For example, 24 bits represents the 255.255.255.0 address.

IPv6 Click the IPv6 button.

IPv6 address Enter the static route IPv6 address.

Prefix Enter the prefix for IPv6 address.

Next-hop Displays the next-hop address created.

Click any one of the following

• +—To add the next-hop, enter the following details and click OK:

• IP Address/IPv6 Address—Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address based on the selected static
route address type.

• Interface Name—Select an interface from the list.

• Delete—Select one or more next-hop addresses and click X. Then, click Yes to delete it.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Static Route | 499

 499

Edit a Static Route

You are here: Network > Routing > Static Routing.

To edit a static route:

1. Select the existing static route that you want to edit on the Static Routing page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Static Routing page.
The Edit Static Route page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see
"Add a Static Route" on page 497.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Static Route | 499

Delete Static Route

You are here: Network > Routing > Static Routing.

To delete a static route:

1. Select the existing static route that you want to delete on the Static Routing page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Static Routing page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Static Routing Page | 496

 500

CHAPTER 44

RIP Routing

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the RIP Page | 500

Add a RIP Instance | 502

Edit a RIP Instance | 504

Delete RIP Instance | 504

Edit RIP Global Settings | 504

Delete RIP Global Settings | 508

About the RIP Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 500

Field Descriptions | 501

You are here: Network > Routing > RIP.

Use this page to configure RIP.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a RIP instance. See "Add a RIP Instance" on page 502.

• Edit a RIP instance. See "Edit a RIP Instance" on page 504.

• Delete a RIP instance. See "Delete RIP Instance" on page 504.

 501

• Edit RIP global settings. See "Edit RIP Global Settings" on page 504.

• Delete RIP global settings. See "Delete RIP Global Settings" on page 508.

Field Descriptions

Table 141 on page 501 describes the fields on the RIP page.

Table 141: Fields on the RIP Page

Field Description

Routing Instance Select a routing instance from the list.

RIP Instances

RIP Instances Displays the RIP instance selected.

Neighbors Displays the neighbors selected.

Routing Instance Displays the routing instance.

Export Policies Displays the export policies selected.

Import Policies Displays the import policies selected.

Preference Displays the preference selected.

Update Interval Displays the update interval selected.

Metric-out Displays the metric-out value selected.

RIP Global Settings

Name Displays the name of the RIP.

Value Displays the values for RIP.

 502

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a RIP Instance | 502

Add a RIP Instance

You are here: Network > Routing > RIP.

To add a RIP instance:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the RIP page.
The Add page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 142 on page 502.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel instead.
If you click OK, a new RIP instance is added with the provided configuration.

Table 142: Fields on the Add Page

Field Action

General

Routing Instance Select a routing instance from the list to display only the default routing instance or all
routing instances.

RIP Instance Name Enter the RIP instance name.

Preference Enter the preference of the external routes learned by RIP as compared to those learned
from other routing protocols.

Metric out Enter the metric value to add to routes transmitted to the neighbor.

Update Interval Enter the update time interval to periodically send out routes learned by RIP to neighbors.

Route Timeout Enter the route timeout interval for RIP.

Policy
 503

Table 142: Fields on the Add Page (Continued)

Field Action

Import Policy Specifies one or more policies to control which routes learned from an area are used to
generate summary link-state advertisements (LSAs) into other areas.

Click one of the following options:

• +—Adds an import policy.

• Move up arrow—Moves the selected policy up the list of policies.

• Move down arrow—Moves the selected policy down the list of policies.

• X—Removes an import policy.

Export Policy Specifies one or more policies to control which summary LSAs are flooded into an area.

Click one of the following options:

• +—Adds an export policy.

• Move up arrow—Moves the selected policy up the list of policies.

• Move down arrow—Moves the selected policy down the list of policies.

• X—Removes an export policy.

Neighbor
Displays the RIP-enabled interfaces, its port, metric-in, and update interval.

Associate Select interface(s) to associate with the RIP.

Select the box next to the interface name to enable RIP on an interface.

Click the edit icon to modify one or more selected interfaces settings.

NOTE: Only logical interfaces for RIP are displayed.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a RIP Instance | 504

 504

Edit a RIP Instance

You are here: Network > Routing > RIP.

To edit a RIP instance:

1. Select the existing logical system profile that you want to edit on the RIP page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the RIP page.
The Edit page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add a RIP
Instance" on page 502.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete RIP Instance | 504

Delete RIP Instance

You are here: Network > Routing > RIP.

To delete a RIP instance:

1. Select the existing logical system profile that you want to delete on the RIP page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the RIP page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit RIP Global Settings | 504

Edit RIP Global Settings

You are here: Network > Routing > RIP.

To edit RIP global settings:

 505

1. Click the pencil icon on the upper right side of the RIP Global Settings table.
The Edit RIP Global Settings page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 143 on page 505.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 143: Fields on the Edit RIP Global Settings Page

Field Action

General

Send Select a RIP send options from the list:

• Broadcast

• Multicast

• None

• Version-1

Receive Select a RIP receive options from the list:

• Both

• None

• Version-1

• Version-2

Route timeout (sec) Enter the route timeout interval value for RIP.

Update interval (sec) Enter the update time interval value to periodically send out routes learned by RIP to
neighbors.

Hold timeout (sec) Enter the hold timeout interval period for which the expired route is retained in the
routing table before being removed.

Metric in Enter the metric-in value to add to incoming routes when advertising into RIP routes that
were learned from other protocols.
 506

Table 143: Fields on the Edit RIP Global Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

RIB Group Select a routing table group to install RIP routes into multiple routing tables.

Message size Enter the number of route entries to be included in every RIP update message.

Check Zero Specifies whether the reserved fields in a RIP packet are set to zero.

Select an option:

• True—Discards version 1 packets that have nonzero values in the reserved fields and
version 2 packets that have nonzero values in the fields that must be zero. This default
behavior implements check-zero the RIP version 1 and version 2 specifications.

• False—Receives RIP version 1 packets with nonzero values in the reserved fields or RIP
version 2 packets with nonzero values in the fields that must be zero. This behavior
violates the specifications in RFC 1058 and RFC 2453.

Graceful switchover Specifies graceful switch over for RIP.

Enter the following:

• Disable—Select the check box to disable graceful switchover.

• Restart time (sec)—Enter the time in seconds for the restart to complete.

Authentication Enter the following:

• Authentication Type—Select the type of authentication for RIP route queries received
on an interface. The options available are:

• None

• MD5

• Simple

• Authentication key—Enter the authentication key for MD5.

Policy
 507

Table 143: Fields on the Edit RIP Global Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Import Policy Specifies one or more policies to routes being imported into the local routing device from
the neighbors.

Click one of the following options:

• +—Adds an import policy.

• Move up arrow—Moves the selected policy up the list of policies.

• Move down arrow—Moves the selected policy down the list of policies.

• X—Removes an import policy.

Trace Options

File Name Enter the filename to receive the output of the trace operation.

Number of Files Enter the maximum number of trace files.

File Size Enter the maximum size for each trace file.

World-readable Specifies whether or not the trace file can be read by any user or not.

Select an option:

• True—Allows any user to read the file.

• False—Restricts all users being able to read the file.

Flags Select one or more flags from the Available Flags column and move it to the Configured
Flags column using the arrow.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete RIP Global Settings | 508

 508

Delete RIP Global Settings

You are here: Network > Routing > RIP.

To delete RIP global settings:

1. Select an information that you want to delete on the RIP Global settings table.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the RIP Global settings table.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the RIP Page | 500

 509

CHAPTER 45

OSPF Routing

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the OSPF Page | 509

Add an OSPF | 511

Edit an OSPF | 520

Delete OSPF | 520

About the OSPF Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 509

Field Descriptions | 510

You are here: Network > Routing > OSPF.

Use this page to configure OSPF routing.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add an OSPF. See "Add an OSPF" on page 511.

• Edit an OSPF. See "Edit an OSPF" on page 520.

• Delete OSPF. See "Delete OSPF" on page 520.

• Advanced search for an OSPF. To do this, use the search text box present above the table grid. The
search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. In the search text box, when you
 510

hover over the icon, it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search string,
the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a search criteria, only one character is
deleted.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

• Show or hide columns in the OSPF table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns icon in the top
right corner of the OSPF table and select the options you want to view or deselect the options you
want to hide on the page.

Field Descriptions

Table 144 on page 510 describes the fields on the OSPF page.

Table 144: Fields on the OSPF Page

Field Description

Filter Select an instance for OSPF from the list.

Area ID Displays the area ID selected.

Area Type Displays the area type selected.

Member Interfaces Displays the member interface selected.

Version Displays the version of the interface selected (OSPF for IPv4 and OSPFv3 for IPv6).
 511

Table 144: Fields on the OSPF Page (Continued)

Field Description

Routing Instance Displays the routing instance of the interface selected.

NOTE: This option is not available for tenant users.

Import Policy Displays the import policy selected.

NOTE: This option is not available for tenant users.

Export Policy Displays the export policy selected.

NOTE: This option is not available for tenant users.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add an OSPF | 511

Add an OSPF

You are here: Network > Routing > OSPF.

To add an OSPF routing:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the OSPF page.
The Create OSPF page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 145 on page 511.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel instead.
If you click OK, a new OSPF routing is added with the provided configuration.

Table 145: Fields on the Add an OSPF Page

Field Action

Basic Settings
 512

Table 145: Fields on the Add an OSPF Page (Continued)

Field Action

Routing Instance Select the routing instance from the list or create a new routing instance inline.

NOTE: This option is not available for tenant users.

To add a new routing instance inline:

1. Click Add.

The Create Routing Instance page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• General Settings

• Name—Enter a unique name for the routing instance that contains a

corresponding IP unicast table; no special characters are allowed and the
keyword default cannot be used.

• Description—Enter a description for the routing instance. We recommend

that you enter a maximum of 255 characters.

• Instance Type—Select a type of routing instance from the list:

• Virtual Router—Used for non-VPN related applications.

• VPLS—This instance is applicable only for root or super admin. This

option will not be applicable for LSYS admin. Interfaces with
Encapsulation Ethernet-VPLS will be listed when VPLS instance type is
selected.

• Interfaces—Select one or more interfaces to associate with the routing

instance from the Available column and move it to the Selected column using
arrow.

To search for specific interface, click the search icon and enter partial text or
full text of the keyword in the search bar.

3. Click OK to save changes.

Routing Options

Router ID Enter the ID of the routing device.

 513

Table 145: Fields on the Add an OSPF Page (Continued)

Field Action

Traffic Engineering Enable this option if you want the traffic to be managed or engineered.

NOTE: This option is not

available for OSPFv3.

Area Details

Area Id Specifies the uniquely identified area within its AS.

Type a 32-bit numeric identifier for the area.

Type an integer or select and edit the value.

If you enter an integer, the value is converted to a 32-bit equivalent. For example, if
you enter 3, the value assigned to the area is 0.0.0.3.
 514

Table 145: Fields on the Add an OSPF Page (Continued)

Field Action

Area Range Displays a range of IP addresses for the summary link state advertisements (LSAs) to
be sent within an area.

Select an option:

1. To add an area range form:

a. Click +.

The Create Area Range Form page appears.

b. Enter the following details:

• Area Range—Enter the area range address.

NOTE: For OSPF, enter an IPv4 address and for OSPFv3 enter an IPv6
address.

• Subnet mask—Enter the subnet mask area address.

NOTE: This option is available only for IPv4 address.

• Override metric—Select a value to override the metric for the IP address

range.

Range: 1025 through 65534.

c. Select Restrict Advertisements of this area range to specify that the routes
contained within a summary must not be displayed.

d. Select Enforce exact match for advertisements of this area range to specify
that the summary of a route must be advertised only when an exact match is
made within the configured summary range.

e. Click OK.

2. To edit the selected are range:

a. Select the existing area range.

b. Click the pencil icon to edit the selected area range.

The Edit Area Range Form page appears with editable fields.
 515

Table 145: Fields on the Add an OSPF Page (Continued)

Field Action

c. Click OK to save the changes.

3. To delete an area range:

a. Select the area range that you want to delete.

b. Click the delete icon.

A confirmation message appears.

c. Click Yes to delete the selected area range.

Version Select the version of the OSPF:

• ospf—Enables OSPF routing on the routing device.

• ospf3—Enables OSPFv3 routing on the routing device.

Area Type Specifies the type of OSPF area.

NOTE: This option is not Select an option from the list:

applicable for area zero.
• None—A regular OSPF area, including the backbone area.

• stub—A stub area.

• nssa—A not-so-stubby area (NSSA).

No Summaries (Totally Enable or disable the summaries.

Stubby area)
NOTE: This option can be configured when area-type is nssa or stub.
NOTE: This option is
applicable for non-zero
area and it is not
applicable for area zero.

Virtual Link Select whether you want the virtual link to be established. If you select virtual link to
be created, then enter the Neighbor ID and Transit area. Transit area is the area that
NOTE: This option is has virtual link connecting two or more ABRs attached to this area.
applicable for area zero
and it is not applicable
for non-zero area.
 516

Table 145: Fields on the Add an OSPF Page (Continued)

Field Action

Interface Details

Select Interface Select one or more interfaces to associate with the routing instance from the
Available column and move it to the Selected column using arrow.

Interface type Specifies the interfaces to be associated with the OSPF configuration.

Select an option from the list:

• None—No interface.

• nbma—Non broadcast multiaccess (NBMA) interface.

NOTE: This option is not available for OSPFv3.

• p2mp—Point-to-multipoint interface.

• p2p—Point-to-point interface.

• p2mp-over-lan—Point-to-multipoint over LAN mode.

NOTE: This option is not available for OSPF.

Interface Metric Type the metric that you want for measuring the interface.

Passive mode Enable this option for the passive mode.

NOTE: You can enable this option only if Secondary option is disabled and vice-versa.

Advanced
 517

Table 145: Fields on the Add an OSPF Page (Continued)

Field Action

Bidirectional Forward Enable this option for the bidirectional forward detection (BFD) protocol version that
Detection you want to detect.

If you enable, enter the following details:

• BFD Version—Select the bidirectional forward detection version form the list:

• None—No BFD version is used.

• automatic—Autodetects the BFD protocol version.

• BFD Version 0—Uses BFD protocol version 0.

• BFD Version 1—Uses BFD protocol version 1.

• Minimum Interval—Enter the minimum interval value for BFD in milliseconds.

Range: 1 through 255,000.

• Minimum Receive Interval—Enter the minimum receive interval value. Range: 1

through 255,000.

IPsec security Select a number of one of the security associations from the list.
association
By default, no security keys are configured.

NOTE: You can configure this option only if Secondary option is disabled and vice-
versa.

Link protection Enable this option. Creates a backup loop-free alternate path to the primary next hop
for all destination routes that traverse the protected interface.

NOTE: You can either enable Link protection or Node Link protection at a time. For
example, if you enable Link protection, then Node Link protection is automatically
disabled.

Node Link protection Enable this option. Creates an alternate loop-free path to the primary next hop for all
destination routes that traverse a protected interface.

NOTE: You can either enable Link protection or Node Link protection at a time. For
example, if you enable Link protection, then Node Link protection is automatically
disabled.
 518

Table 145: Fields on the Add an OSPF Page (Continued)

Field Action

Secondary Enable this option. Specifies an interface to belong to another OSPF area.

NOTE: You can enable this option only if Passive Mode is disabled and IPsec security
association is not configured and vice-versa.

Authentication Select an authentication key (password) from the list:

NOTE: This option is not • None

available for OSPFv3.
• md5

• simplepassword

MD5 Authentication Specifies an MD5 authentication key (password).

Key
Click + and enter the following details:
NOTE: This option is not
available for OSPFv3. • MD5 ID—MD5 key identifier. Range: 0 through 255.

• Key—One or more MD5 key strings.

The MD5 key values can be from 1 through 16 characters long. Characters can
include ASCII strings. If you include spaces, enclose all characters in quotation
marks (“ ”).

• Start Time—MD5 start time.

Then, click tick mark to save the changes.

Simple Password Enter a simple authentication key (password).

NOTE: This option is not

available for OSPFv3.

Advanced Settings

Policy
NOTE: This option is not available for tenant users.
 519

Table 145: Fields on the Add an OSPF Page (Continued)

Field Action

Import Policy Specifies one or more policies to control which routes learned from an area are used
to generate summary link-state advertisements (LSAs) into other areas.

Click one of the following options:

• +—Adds an import policy.

• Move up—Moves the selected policy up the list of policies.

• Move down—Moves the selected policy up the list of policies down.

• X—Removes the import policy.

Export Policy Specifies one or more policies to control which summary LSAs are flooded into an
area.

Click one of the following options:

• +—Adds an import policy.

• Move up—Moves the selected policy up the list of policies.

• Move down—Moves the selected policy up the list of policies down.

• X—Removes the import policy.

Trace Options

File Name Enter the name of the file to receive the output of the trace operation.

Number of files Enter the maximum number of trace files.

File Size Enter the maximum size for each trace file.

World Readable Enable this option to allow any user to read the file.

Disable this option to prevent all users from reading the file.
 520

Table 145: Fields on the Add an OSPF Page (Continued)

Field Action

Flags Specifies the trace operation to be performed.

Select one or more flags in the Available column and move them to the Selected
column using the right arrow.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit an OSPF | 520

Edit an OSPF

You are here: Network > Routing > OSPF.

To edit an OSPF routing:

1. Select an existing OSPF routing that you want to edit on the OSPF page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the OSPF page.
The Create OSPF page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add
an OSPF" on page 511.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete OSPF | 520

Delete OSPF

You are here: Network > Routing > OSPF.

To delete an OSPF routing:

1. Select an existing OSPF routing that you want to delete on the OSPF page.
 521

2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the OSPF page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the OSPF Page | 509

 522

CHAPTER 46

BGP Routing

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the BGP Page | 522

Add a BGP Group | 526

Edit a BGP Group | 531

Delete a BGP Group | 532

Edit Global Information | 532

About the BGP Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 522

Field Descriptions | 523

You are here: Network > Routing > BGP.

Use this page to configure BGP routing.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Create a routing instance. See "Add a BGP Group" on page 526.

• Edit a routing instance. See "Edit a BGP Group" on page 531.

• Delete a routing instance. See "Delete a BGP Group" on page 532.

 523

• Disable group information. To do this, select an existing group information and click Disable.

• Edit global information. See "Edit Global Information" on page 532.

• Disable global information. To do this, select an existing global information and click Disable.

Field Descriptions

Table 146 on page 523 describes the fields on the BGP page.

Table 146: Fields on the BGP Page

Field Description

Routing Instance Select routing instances from the list. Example: default or all routing instances.

NOTE: If you log in as a tenant

user, the Routing Instance is
not displayed as tenant
context supports only one
routing instance.

Group Name Displays the name of the group.

Status Displays the status of the group.

Peer ASN Displays the peer ASN.

Type Displays the group type.

Dynamic Peers Displays the dynamic peers selected.

Static Peers Displays the static peers selected.

Routing Instance Displays the routing instance selected.

Import Policy Displays the import policy selected.

NOTE: If you log in as a tenant user, Routing Instance, Import Policy, and
Export Policy are not displayed.
 524

Table 146: Fields on the BGP Page (Continued)

Field Description

Export Policy Displays the export policy selected.

NOTE: If you log in as a tenant user, Routing Instance, Import Policy, and
Export Policy are not displayed.

Global Information
The global information values corresponding to the routing instance that you selected will be displayed in the
Global Information section. Based on the routing instance that you select, the values in the Global information.

Edit Edits the Global settings which lists the following fields. See "Edit Global
Information" on page 532.
 525

Table 146: Fields on the BGP Page (Continued)

Field Description

Name Displays the following names:

• Router Identifier—Specifies the routing device’s IP address.

• BGP Status—Enables or disables BGP.

• Router ASN—Specifies the routing device’s AS number.

• Preference—Specifies the route preference.

• Confederation—Specifies the routing device’s confederation AS number.

NOTE: If you log in as a tenant user, Confederation is not displayed.

• Confederation Members—Specifies the AS numbers for the confederation

members.

NOTE: If you log in as a tenant user, Confederation Members is not

displayed.

• Description—Specifies the text description of the global, group, or neighbor

configuration.

• Import Policy—Specifies one or more routing policies for routes being

imported into the routing table from BGP.

NOTE: If you log in as a tenant user, Import Policy is not displayed.

• Export Policy—Specifies one or more policies to routes being exported from

the routing table into BGP.

NOTE: If you log in as a tenant user, Export Policy is not displayed.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a BGP Group | 526

 526

Add a BGP Group

You are here: Network > Routing > BGP.

To add a BGP Group:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the BGP Group page.
The Add a Group page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 147 on page 526.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 147: Fields on the Add a Group Page

Field Action

General

Routing Instance Select a routing instance from the list.

NOTE: If you log in

as a tenant user, the
Routing Instance is
not displayed as
tenant context
supports only one
routing instance.

Group Name Enter a new group name.

ASN Specifies the unique numeric identifier of the AS in which the routing device is
configured.

Enter the routing device’s 32-bit AS number, in dotted decimal notation.

If you enter an integer, the value is converted to a 32-bit equivalent. For example, if you
enter 3, the value assigned to the AS is 0.0.0.3.

Preference Enter the degree of preference value for an external route.

The route with the highest local preference value is preferred.

 527

Table 147: Fields on the Add a Group Page (Continued)

Field Action

Cluster Id Enter the IPv6 or IPv4 address to be used as the cluster identifier.

The cluster identifier is used by the route reflector cluster in an internal BGP group.

Description Enter the text description for the global, group, or neighbor configuration.

Damping Select the check box to enable route flap damping.

Advertise Inactive Select the check box to enable advertising of inactive routes.
Routes

Advertise Peer AS Select the check box to advertising of peer AS routes.

Routes

Neighbors
 528

Table 147: Fields on the Add a Group Page (Continued)

Field Action

Dynamic Neighbors Configures a dynamic neighbor (peer).

Select one of the following options:

1. To add a dynamic neighbor:

a. Click +.

The Add Dynamic Neighbor window appears.

b. Select one of the following options in the Addresses field:

• All

• IPv4

• IPv6

c. Enter the following details if you select IPv4 in the Addresses field:

• IP Address—Enter the IPv4 address for dynamic neighbor.

• Subnet Mask—Enter the subnet mask for the IPv4 address.

d. Enter the following details if you select IPv6 in the Addresses field:

• IPv6 Address—Enter the IPv6 address for dynamic neighbor.

• Prefix—Enter the prefix length using up and down arrows for the IPv6 address.

e. Click OK to save changes.

2. To edit a dynamic neighbor:

a. Select the existing dynamic neighbor address.

b. Click the pencil icon to edit the selected dynamic neighbor address.

The Edit Dynamic Neighbor window appears with editable fields.

c. Click OK to save changes.

3. To delete a dynamic neighbor:

a. Select the existing dynamic neighbor address.

b. Click the delete icon (X) to delete the selected dynamic neighbor address.
 529

Table 147: Fields on the Add a Group Page (Continued)

Field Action

Static Neighbors Configures a static neighbor (peer).

Select one of the following options:

1. To add a static neighbor:

a. Click +.

The Add Static Neighbor window appears.

b. Enter the following details:

• Addresses—Select IPv4 or IPv6.

• IP Address—Enter the IPv4 address for static neighbor.

• Local Address—Enter the IP address for static neighbor.

• Preference—Enter the preference value for an external route. The route with
the highest local preference value is preferred.

• Description—Enter a description.

• Hold Time—Enter the hold timeout interval period.

• Out Delay—Enter the output delay time.

Range: 0 through 65,535 seconds.

• Passive—Select the check box to enable the device to be passive. The routing
device will wait for the peer to issue an open request before a message is sent.

• As Override—Select the check box to replace all occurrences of the peer AS

number in the AS path with its own AS number before advertising the route to
the peer.

• Import Policy—Select one of the following options:

• +—Adds an import policy.

 530

Table 147: Fields on the Add a Group Page (Continued)

Field Action

• Move up—Moves the selected policy up the list of policies.

• Move down—Moves the selected policy down.

• X—Removes an import policy.

• Export Policy—Select one of the following options:

• +—Adds an import policy.

• Move up—Moves the selected policy up the list of policies.

• Move down—Moves the selected policy down.

• X—Removes an import policy.

c. Click OK to save changes.

2. To edit a static neighbor:

a. Select the existing static neighbor address.

b. Click the pencil icon to edit the selected static neighbor address.

The Edit Static Neighbor window appears with editable fields.

c. Click OK to save changes.

3. To delete a static neighbor:

a. Select the existing static neighbor address.

b. Click the delete icon (X) to delete the selected static neighbor address.

Policies Tab
 531

Table 147: Fields on the Add a Group Page (Continued)

Field Action

Import Policy Specifies one or more routing policies for routes being imported into the routing table
from BGP.

Select one of the following options:

• +—Adds an import policy.

• Move up—Moves the selected policy up the list of policies.

• Move down—Moves the selected policy down.

• X—Removes an import policy.

Export Policy Specifies one or more policies to routes being exported from the routing table into BGP.

Select one of the following options:

• +—Adds an import policy.

• Move up—Moves the selected policy up the list of policies.

• Move down—Moves the selected policy down.

• X—Removes an import policy.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a BGP Group | 531

Edit a BGP Group

You are here: Network > Routing > BGP.

To edit a BGP group :

1. Select an existing BGP group that you want to edit on the BGP page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the BGP page.
 532

The Edit a Group page appears with editable fields. For more information on the fields, see "Add a
BGP Group" on page 526.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete a BGP Group | 532

Delete a BGP Group

You are here: Network > Routing > BGP.

To delete a BGP group:

1. Select an existing BGP group that you want to delete on the BGP page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the BGP page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit Global Information | 532

Edit Global Information

You are here: Network > Routing > BGP.

To edit BGP global information:

1. Select an existing global information that you want to edit on the BGP page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Global Information table.
The Edit Global Settings page appears.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 148 on page 533.
4. Click OK to save the changes.
 533

Table 148: Fields on the Edit Global Settings Page

Field Action

General

Router ASN Enter the router ASN value.

Router Identifier Enter the router identification IP address.

BGP Status Select an option from the list: Enable or Disable.

Preference Enter the degree of preference value for an external route.

The route with the highest local preference value is preferred.

Description Enter the description.

Confederation Number Enter the router confederation ASN value.

 534

Table 148: Fields on the Edit Global Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Confederation Specifies the AS numbers for the confederation members.

Members
Select one of the following options:

1. To add a member ASN:

a. Click +.

The Confederation Members window appears.

b. Enter member ASN value in the Member ASN field.

c. Click OK to save changes.

2. To edit a member ASN:

a. Select an existing member ASN value and click the pencil icon.

The Confederation Members window appears.

b. Edit member ASN value in the Member ASN field.

c. Click OK to save changes.

3. To delete a member ASN:

a. Select an existing member ASN value.

The Confederation Members window appears.

b. Click the delete icon to delete the member ASN value.

Advance Options

Keep Route Specifies whether routes learned from a BGP peer must be retained in the routing
table even if they contain an AS number that was exported from the local AS.

Select All or None to configure keep routes.

TCP MSS Enter the maximum segment size (MSS) for the TCP connection.

Range: 1 through 4096.

MTU Discovery Select the check box to enable MTU discovery.

 535

Table 148: Fields on the Edit Global Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Remove Private ASN Select the check box to enable removal of private ASNs.

Graceful Restart Enter the following details:

• Restart Time—Enter the period of time after which a restart is expected to be

complete.

• Stale Routes Time—Enter the maximum time that stale routes are kept during
restart.

Multihop Specifies the maximum time-to-live (TTL) value for the TTL in the IP header of BGP
packets.

Enter the following details:

• Nexthop Change—Select the check box to allow unconnected third-party next

hops.

• TTL—Enter a TTL value.

Authentication Enter the following details:

• Authentication Algorithm—Select an option from the list: None, MD5, or SHA1.

• Authentication Key—Enter an MD5 authentication key (password). This option is

available if you select MD5 as authentication algorithm.

Policies Tab
NOTE: If you log in as a tenant user, Policy tab is not displayed.
 536

Table 148: Fields on the Edit Global Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

Import Policy Applies one or more policies to routes being imported into the local routing device
from the neighbors.

Select one of the following options:

• +—Adds an import policy.

• Move up—Moves the selected policy up the list of policies.

• Move down—Moves the selected policy down.

• X—Removes an import policy.

Export Policy Specifies one or more policies to control which summary LSAs are flooded into an
area.

Select one of the following options:

• +—Adds an import policy.

• Move up—Moves the selected policy up the list of policies.

• Move down—Moves the selected policy down.

• X—Removes an import policy.

Trace Options Tab

File Name Enter the name of the file to receive the output of the trace operation.

Number of Files Enter the maximum number of trace files.

File Size Enter the maximum size for each trace file.
 537

Table 148: Fields on the Edit Global Settings Page (Continued)

Field Action

World Readable Specifies whether the trace file can be read by any user.

Select an option:

• True—Allows any user to read the file.

• False—Prevents all users from reading.

Flags Select one or more flags from the Available Flags column and move it to the
Configured Flags column using the arrow.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the BGP Page | 522

 538

CHAPTER 47

Routing Instances

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Routing Instances Page | 538

Add a Routing Instance | 540

Edit a Routing Instance | 541

Delete Routing Instance | 542

About the Routing Instances Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 538

Field Descriptions | 539

You are here: Network > Routing > Routing Instances.

Use this page to configure routing instances.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Create a routing instance. See "Add a Routing Instance" on page 540.

• Edit a routing instance. See "Edit a Routing Instance" on page 541.

• Delete a routing instance. See "Delete Routing Instance" on page 542.

 539

• Show or hide columns in the Routing Instance table. To do this, use the Show Hide Columns icon in
the top right corner of the page and select the options you want to show or deselect to hide options
on the page.

• Advance search for a routing instance. To do this, use the search text box present above the table
grid. The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. In the search text box, when
you hover over the icon, it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search
string, the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a search criteria, only one character is
deleted.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

Field Descriptions

Table 149 on page 539 describes the fields on the Routing Instances page.

Table 149: Fields on the Routing Instances Page

Field Description

Name Name of the routing instance.

Type Identifies the routing instance type.

Assigned Interfaces Displays the selected interfaces assigned to the routing instance.

Description Displays the description of the routing instances.

 540

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Routing Instance | 540

Add a Routing Instance

You are here: Network > Routing > Routing Instances.

To add a routing interface:

1. Click the add icon (+) available on the upper right side of the Routing Instances page.
The Create Routing Instance page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 150 on page 540.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel instead.
If you click OK, a new routing instance is added with the provided configuration.

Table 150: Fields on the Add Routing Instance

Field Description

General Settings

Name Enter a unique name for the routing instance that contains a corresponding IP unicast table; no
special characters are allowed and the keyword default cannot be used.

Description Enter a description for the routing instance. We recommend that you enter a maximum of 255
characters.

Instance Type Select the type of routing instance from the list:

• Virtual Router—Used for non-VPN related applications.

• VPLS—This instance is applicable only for root or super admin. This option will not be
applicable for LSYS admin. Interfaces with Encapsulation Ethernet-VPLS will be listed when
VPLS instance type is selected.
 541

Table 150: Fields on the Add Routing Instance (Continued)

Field Description

Interfaces Select interfaces from the Available column and move it to the Selected column using the arrow.

• Name—Displays the interface name.

• Zone—Displays the zone name corresponding to the interface name.

This is used to validate that all the interfaces of the selected zone(s) must belong to the same
routing instance.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Routing Instances Page | 538

Edit a Routing Instance | 541

Edit a Routing Instance

You are here: Network > Routing > Routing Instances.

To edit a routing instance:

1. Select a routing instance that you want to edit on the Routing Instances page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Routing Instance page appears with editable fields. For more information on the fields, see
"Add a Routing Instance" on page 540.
3. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Routing Instances Page | 538

Delete Routing Instance | 542
 542

Delete Routing Instance

You are here: Network > Routing > Routing Instances.

To delete a routing instance:

1. Select one or more routing instance that you want to delete on the Routing Instances page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Routing Instances Page | 538

Add a Routing Instance | 540
Edit a Routing Instance | 541
 543

CHAPTER 48

Routing—Policies

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Policies Page | 543

Global Options | 545

Add a Policy | 546

Clone a Policy | 558

Edit a Policy | 558

Delete Policy | 558

Test a Policy | 559

About the Policies Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 543

Field Descriptions | 544

You are here: Network > Routing > Policies.

Use this page to configure policies.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Create global options. See "Global Options" on page 545.

• Create a policy. See "Add a Policy" on page 546.

 544

• Clone a policy. See "Clone a Policy" on page 558.

• Edit a policy. See "Edit a Policy" on page 558.

• Delete a policy. See "Delete Policy" on page 558.

• Term Up—Moves a term up in a selected list policies configuration.

• Term Down—Moves a term down in a selected list policies configuration.

• Test a policy. See "Test a Policy" on page 559.

Field Descriptions

Table 151 on page 544 describes the fields on the Policies page.

Table 151: Fields on the Policies Page

Field Description

Name Displays the name of the policy.

From: Prefix Displays the policy prefix.

From: Protocol Displays the selected source protocol.

From: Interface or Address Displays the selected source interface or IP address.

To: Protocol Displays the source destination protocol.

To: Interface or Address Displays the selected interface or address.

Action Displays the selected action.

Move To Displays if the action is to move to next policy or term.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Global Options | 545

 545

Global Options

You are here: Network > Routing > Policies.

To edit global options:

1. Select an existing configuration that you want to edit on the Global Options page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Global Options page appears. You can modify any previous changes done. For more
information on the options, see Table 152 on page 545.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

Table 152: Fields on the Global Options Page

Field Action

Add Prefix List

Name Enter the name of the prefix list.

Select an option from the list:

• Add—Adds the prefix list.

• Edit—Edits the prefix list.

• X—Removes the prefix list.

Members

IP Address To add prefix list members:

1. Click +.

The Add Prefix List Members page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• IP Address—Enter the prefix list IP address.

• Subnet Mask—Enter the subnet mask IP address

3. Click OK to save changes.

Click the pencil icon to edit the IP address. You can click X to delete the IP address.
 546

Table 152: Fields on the Global Options Page (Continued)

Field Action

As Path

As Path Click + to add As path.

As Path Name—Enter the name of the As path.

Regular Expression—Enter the regular expression of the As path.

Click the pencil icon to edit the As path. You can click X to delete the As path.

BGP Community

BGP Community Click + to add a BGP community.

Name—Enter the BGP community name.

Click the pencil icon to edit the As path. You can click X to delete the As path.

Members Click + to add a BGP community member.

Community ID—Enter the BGP community ID.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Policy | 546

Add a Policy

You are here: Network > Routing > Policies.

To add a policy:

1. Click + > New on the right side of the Policies page.

The Add Policy page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 153 on page 547.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel instead.
 547

If you click OK, a new policy is added with the provided configuration.

Table 153: Fields on the Policy Page

Field Description

Policy Name Enter the policy name.

Terms Click one of the following:

• +—Adds the term.

• Edit—Edits the term.

• X—Deletes the term,

Add Term

Term Name Enter the term name.

Source

Family Select a family protocol address from the list.

Routing Instance Select a routing instance from the list.

RIB Select a routing table from the list.

Preference Enter a preference value for the route.

Metric Enter the metric value.

You can specify up to four metric values.

 548

Table 153: Fields on the Policy Page (Continued)

Field Description

Interface Specifies the name or IP address of one or more routing device interfaces. Do not use this
qualifier with protocols that are not interface-specific, such as internal BGP (IBGP).

Choose one of the following options:

1. To add an interface

a. Click + and select Interface.

The Available Interfaces page appears.

b. Select an interface from the list and click OK.

The selected interface is added.

2. To add an IP address

a. Click + and select Address.

The Add IP Address page appears.

b. Enter IP address from the list and click OK.

The selected IP address is added.

3. To delete an interface or an IP address:

a. Select an existing interface or address from Interfaces.

b. Click X.

The selected interface or IP address is deleted.

 549

Table 153: Fields on the Policy Page (Continued)

Field Description

Prefix List Specifies a named list of IP addresses. You can specify an exact match with incoming routes.

Choose one of the following options:

1. To add a prefix list:

a. Click +.

The Available Prefix List page appears.

b. Select a prefix list from the list and click OK.

The selected prefix list is added.

2. To delete a prefix list:

a. Select an existing prefix list.

b. Click X.

The selected prefix list is deleted.

Protocol Specifies the name of the protocol from which the route was learned or to which the route is
being advertised.

Choose one of the following options:

1. To add a protocol:

a. Click +.

The Available Protocols page appears.

b. Select a protocol from the list and click OK.

The selected protocol is added.

2. To delete a protocol:

a. Select an existing protocol.

b. Click X.

The selected protocol is deleted.

 550

Table 153: Fields on the Policy Page (Continued)

Field Description

Policy Specifies the name of a policy to evaluate as a subroutine.

Choose one of the following options:

1. To add a policy:

a. Click +.

The Available Policies page appears.

b. Select a policy from the list and click OK.

The selected policy is added.

2. To delete a policy:

a. Select an existing policy.

b. Click X.

The selected policy is deleted.

More Click More for advanced configuration options for policies.

The More Options page appears.

Click OK to save changes after the configuration is complete.

More Options

OSPF Area ID Enter the IP address for the area identifier.

BGP Origin Select a value from the list to specify the origin of the AS path information.

Local Preference Type a BGP local preference value.

 551

Table 153: Fields on the Policy Page (Continued)

Field Description

AS Path Specifies the name of an AS path regular expression.

Choose one of the following options:

1. To add an As path:

a. Click +.

The Available AS Paths page appears.

b. Select an As path from the list and click OK.

The selected As path is added.

2. To delete an As path:

a. Select an existing As path.

b. Click X.

The selected As path is deleted.

Route Enter the following details:

• External—Select the check box to enable external routing.

• OSPF Type—Select an OSPF type from the list.

 552

Table 153: Fields on the Policy Page (Continued)

Field Description

Community Specifies the name of one or more communities.

Choose one of the following options:

1. To add a community:

a. Click +.

The Available Communities page appears.

b. Select a community from the list and click OK.

The selected community is added.

2. To delete a community:

a. Select an existing community.

b. Click X.

The selected community is deleted.

Destination

Family Select a value for address family protocol from the list.

Routing Instance Select a routing instance from the list.

RIB Select a name of a routing table from the list.

Preference Type a preference value for the route.

Metric Type a metric value.

 553

Table 153: Fields on the Policy Page (Continued)

Field Description

Interface Specifies the name or IP address of one or more routing device interfaces. Do not use this
qualifier with protocols that are not interface-specific, such as internal BGP (IBGP).

Choose one of the following options:

1. To add an interface:

a. Click + and select Interface.

The Available Interfaces page appears.

b. Select an interface from the list and click OK.

The selected interface is added.

2. To add an IP address:

a. Click + and select Address.

The Add IP Address page appears.

b. Enter IP address from the list and click OK.

The selected IP address is added.

3. To delete an interface or an IP address:

a. Select an existing interface or address from Interfaces.

b. Click X.

The selected interface or IP address is deleted.

 554

Table 153: Fields on the Policy Page (Continued)

Field Description

Protocol Specifies the name of the protocol from which the route was learned or to which the route is
being advertised.

Choose one of the following options:

1. To add a protocol:

a. Click +.

The Available Protocols page appears.

b. Select a protocol from the list and click OK.

The selected protocol is added.

2. To delete a protocol:

a. Select an existing protocol.

b. Click X.

The selected protocol is deleted.

Policy Displays the name of the policy.

Choose one of the following options:

1. To add a policy:

a. Click +.

The Available Policies page appears.

b. Select a policy from the list and click OK.

The selected policy is added.

2. To delete a policy:

a. Select an existing policy.

b. Click X.

The selected policy is deleted.

 555

Table 153: Fields on the Policy Page (Continued)

Field Description

More Click More for advanced configuration options for policies.

The More Options page appears.

Click OK to save changes after the configuration is complete.

Action

Action Select an action value from the list.

Default Action Select a value from the list.

Specifies that any action that is intrinsic to the protocol is overridden. This action is also non
terminating so that various policy terms can be evaluated before the policy is terminated.

Next Select a value from the list.

Specifies the default control action if a match occurs, and there are no further terms in the
current routing policy.

Priority Select a value from the list.

Specifies a priority for prefixes included in an OSPF import policy. Prefixes learned through
OSPF are installed in the routing table based on the priority assigned to the prefixes.

BGP Origin Select a value from the list.

Specifies the BGP origin attribute.

AS Path Prepend Enter AS path prepend value.

Affixes an AS number at the beginning of the AS path. AS numbers are added after the local
AS number has been added to the path. This action adds an AS number to AS sequences only,
not to AS sets. If the existing AS path begins with a confederation sequence or set, the
affixed AS number is placed within a confederation sequence. Otherwise, the affixed AS
number is placed with a non confederation sequence.
 556

Table 153: Fields on the Policy Page (Continued)

Field Description

AS Path Expand Enter the following details:

• Type—Select the type and type a value.

Extracts the last AS number in the existing AS path and affixes that AS number to the
beginning of the AS path n times, where n is a number from 1 through 32. The AS number
is added before the local AS number has been added to the path. This action adds AS
numbers to AS sequences only, not to AS sets. If the existing AS path begins with a
confederation sequence or set, the affixed AS numbers are placed within a confederation
sequence. Otherwise, the affixed AS numbers are placed within a non confederation
sequence. This option is typically used in non-IBGP export policies.

• Value—Enter the As path value.

Preference Enter the following details:

• Action—Select the preference action and type a value.

• Value—Enter the preference value.

Local Preference Enter the following details:

• Action—Select the preference action and type a value.

• Value—Enter the preference value.

Load Balance Select the check box to enable this option.

Per Packet
Specifies that all next-hop addresses in the forwarding table must be installed and have the
forwarding table perform per-packet load balancing. This policy action allows you to optimize
VPLS traffic flows across multiple paths.

Tag Enter the following details:

• Action—Select the action and type a value.

Changes the metric (MED) value by the specified negative or positive offset. This action is
useful only in an external BGP (EBGP) export policy.

• Value—Enter the tag value.

 557

Table 153: Fields on the Policy Page (Continued)

Field Description

Metric Enter the following details:

• Action—Select the action and type a value.

Specifies the tag value. The tag action sets the 32-bit tag field in OSPF external link-state
advertisement (LSA) packets.

• Value—Enter the metric value.

Route Enter the following details:

• External—Select the check box to enable this option.

• OSPF Type—Select an option from the list.

Class of Service Enter the following details:

• Class—Select None from the list.

Specifies the class-of-service parameters to be applied to routes installed into the routing
table.

• Source Class—Enter the source class.

Specifies that the value entered here maintains the packet counts for a route passing
through your network, based on the source address.

• Destination Class—Enter the destination class.

Specifies the value entered here maintains packet counts for a route passing through your
network, based on the destination address in the packet.

• Forwarding Class—Enter the forwarding class.

Specifies that the value of queue number entered here maintains packet counts for a
route passing through your network, based on the internal queue number assigned in the
packet.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Clone a Policy | 558

 558

Clone a Policy

You are here: Network > Routing > Policies.

To clone a policy:

1. Select a policy that you want to clone and select Clone from the More link.
The Clone Policy page appears with editable fields. For more information on the fields, see "Add a
Policy" on page 546.
2. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Policy | 558

Edit a Policy

You are here: Network > Routing > Policies.

To edit a policy:

1. Select a policy that you want to edit on the Policies page.

2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Policies page.
The Edit Policy page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add a
Policy" on page 546.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Policy | 558

Delete Policy

You are here: Network > Routing > Policies.

To delete a policy configuration:

 559

1. Select one or more policies that you want to delete from the Policies page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Policies page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Test a Policy | 559

Test a Policy

You are here: Network > Routing > Policies.

To test a policy:

1. Select a policy you want to test.

2. Click Test Policy at the upper right side of the Policies page.
The Test Policy page appears.
3. Click Start to test the policy.
You can click Generate Report to get the test reports.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Policy | 546

Edit a Policy | 558
Delete Policy | 558
 560

CHAPTER 49

Routing—Forwarding Mode

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Forwarding Mode Page | 560

About the Forwarding Mode Page

IN THIS SECTION

Field Descriptions | 560

You are here: Network > Routing > Forwarding Mode.

Use this page to view the forwarding configuration details.

Field Descriptions

Table 154 on page 561 describes the fields on the Forwarding Mode page.

Once the configuration is complete, click Save to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the
changes.
 561

Table 154: Fields on the Forwarding Mode Page

Field Description

Family IPv6 Supports IPv6 protocol traffic, including Routing Information Protocol for IPv6
(RIPng).

Select an option from the list:

• None

• drop—Drop IPv6 packets.

• flow-based—Perform flow-based packet forwarding.

• packet-based—Perform simple packet forwarding.

NOTE: For SRX5000 line of devices, only drop and flow-based options are
available.

Family ISO Supports IS-IS traffic.

NOTE: This option is not Select an option from the list:

available for SRX5000 line of
devices. • None

• packet-based

Family MPLS Supports MPLS traffic.

NOTE: This option is not Select an option from the list:

available for SRX5000 line of
devices. • None

• flow-based

• packet-based
 562

CHAPTER 50

CoS—Value Aliases

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Value Aliases Page | 562

Add a Code Point Alias | 563

Edit a Code Point Alias | 564

Delete Code Point Alias | 565

About the Value Aliases Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 562

Field Descriptions | 563

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Value Aliases.

Use this page to view, add, and remove value aliases details.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a code point alias. See "Add a Code Point Alias" on page 563.

• Edit a code point alias. See "Edit a Code Point Alias" on page 564.

• Delete a code point alias. See "Delete Code Point Alias" on page 565.
 563

Field Descriptions

Table 155 on page 563 describes the fields on the Value Alias page.

Table 155: Fields on the Value Alias Page

Field Description

Alias name Displays the name given to CoS values. For example, af11 or be.

Alias type Displays the code point type.

The following types of code points are supported:

• DSCP—Defines aliases for Differentiated Services code point (DSCP) for IPv4 values. You can
refer to these aliases when you configure classes and define classifiers.

• DSCP-IPv6—Defines aliases for DSCP IPv6 values. You can refer to these aliases when you
configure classes and define classifiers.

• EXP—Defines aliases for MPLS experimental (EXP) bits. You can map MPLS EXP bits to the
device forwarding classes.

• inet-precedence—Defines aliases for IPv4 precedence values. Precedence values are modified
in the IPv4 TOS field and mapped to values that correspond to levels of service.

CoS Value Displays the CoS value for which an alias is defined.
bits
NOTE: Changing this value alters the behavior of all classifiers that refer to this alias.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Code Point Alias | 563

Add a Code Point Alias

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Value Aliases.

To add a code point alias:

1. Click the add icon (+) available on the right side of the Value Aliases page.
 564

The Add Code Point Alias page appears.

2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 156 on page 564.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 156: Fields on the Add Code Point Alias Page

Field Description

Code point name Enter a name for the CoS point alias.

Code point type Select a code point type from the list.

Code point value bits Select a COS value for which an alias is defined.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Code Point Alias | 564

Edit a Code Point Alias

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Value Aliases.

To edit a code point alias:

1. Select a code point alias that you want to edit on the Value Aliases page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Value Aliases page.
The Code Point options appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add a
Code Point Alias" on page 563.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Code Point Alias | 565

 565

Delete Code Point Alias

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Value Aliases.

To delete a code point alias:

1. Select a code point alias that you want to delete on the Value Aliases page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Value Aliases page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Value Aliases Page | 562

 566

CHAPTER 51

CoS—Forwarding Classes

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Forwarding Classes Page | 566

Add a Forwarding Class | 567

Edit a Forwarding Class | 568

Delete Forwarding Class | 568

About the Forwarding Classes Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 566

Field Descriptions | 567

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Forwarding Classes.

Use this page to view, add, and delete Forwarding Classes.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a forwarding class. See "Add a Forwarding Class" on page 567.

• Edit a forwarding class. See "Edit a Forwarding Class" on page 568.

• Delete forwarding class. See "Delete Forwarding Class" on page 568.

 567

Field Descriptions

Table 157 on page 567 describes the fields on the Forwarding Classes page.

Table 157: Fields on the Forwarding Classes Page

Field Description

Forwarding class name Displays the forwarding class name assigned to the internal queue number.

By default, four forwarding classes are assigned to queue numbers: 0 (best-effort), 1

(assured-forwarding), 5 (expedited-forwarding), and 7 (network-connect).

Queue number Displays the internal queue numbers to which forwarding classes are assigned.

By default, if a packet is not classified, it is assigned to the class associated with queue
0. You can have more than one forwarding class assigned to a queue number.

Queue characteristics Displays the queue characteristics, for example, video or voice.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Forwarding Class | 567

Add a Forwarding Class

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Forwarding Classes.

To add a forwarding class:

1. Click the add icon (+) available on the right side of the Forwarding Class page.
The Add Forwarding Class page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 158 on page 568.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 568

Table 158: Fields on the Add Forwarding Class page

Field Description

Queue number Select the internal queue number to which a forwarding class is assigned.

Forwarding class name Enter the forwarding class name assigned to the internal queue number.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Forwarding Class | 568

Edit a Forwarding Class

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Forwarding Classes.

To edit a forwarding class:

1. Select an existing forwarding class that you want to edit on the Forwarding Classes page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Forwarding Classes page.
The Edit Forwarding Class options appears with editable fields. For more information on the options,
see "Add a Forwarding Class" on page 567 for options available for editing.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Forwarding Class | 568

Delete Forwarding Class

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Forwarding Classes.

To delete a forwarding class:

1. Select an existing forwarding class that you want to delete on the Forwarding Classes page.
 569

2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Forwarding Classes page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Forwarding Classes Page | 566

 570

CHAPTER 52

CoS Classifiers

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Classifiers Page | 570

Add a Classifier | 572

Edit a Classifier | 573

Delete Classifier | 574

About the Classifiers Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 570

Field Descriptions | 571

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Classifiers.

Use this page to view, add, and delete Classifier Page configuration.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a classifier. See "Add a Classifier" on page 572.

• Edit a classifier. See "Edit a Classifier" on page 573.

• Delete classifier. See "Delete Classifier" on page 574.

 571

Field Descriptions

Table 159 on page 571 describes the fields on the Classifiers page.

Table 159: Fields on the Classifiers Page

Field Description

Classifier name Displays the name of a classifier.

Classifier type Displays the classifier type.

The following type of classifiers are available:

• dscp—Differentiated Services code point classifier for IPv4.

• dscp-ipv6—Differentiated Services code point classifier for IPv6 (default and

compatibility).

NOTE: This option is not available on SRX4000 lines of devices.

• exp—MPLS experimental (EXP) bits classifier

NOTE: This option is not available on SRX4000 lines of devices and SRX5000 lines of
devices.

• ieee-802.1—IEEE-802.1 classifier

• ieee-802.1ad—IEEE-802.1ad classifier

NOTE: This option is not available on SRX4000 lines of devices.

• inet-precedence—IPv4 precedence classifier (default and compatibility)

Details of classifiers

Incoming code point Displays CoS values and the aliases to which the forwarding class and loss priority are
mapped.

Forwarding class Displays forwarding class names that are assigned to specific CoS values and aliases of a
name classifier.

Loss priority Displays loss priorities that are assigned to specific CoS values and aliases of a classifier.
 572

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Classifier | 572

Add a Classifier

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Classifiers.

To add a classifier:

1. Click the add icon (+) available on the right side of the Classifiers page.
The Add Classifier page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 160 on page 572.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 160: Fields on the Add Classifier Page

Field Description

Classifier name Enter the classifier name.

Classifier type Select a classifier type from the list.

• dscp—Differentiated Services code point classifier for IPv4.

• dscp-ipv6—Differentiated Services code point classifier for IPv6 (default and

compatibility).

NOTE: This option is not available on SRX4000 lines of devices.

• exp—MPLS experimental (EXP) bits classifier

NOTE: This option is not available on SRX4000 lines of devices and SRX5000 lines of
devices.

• ieee-802.1—IEEE-802.1 classifier

• ieee-802.1ad—IEEE-802.1ad classifier

NOTE: This option is not available on SRX4000 lines of devices.

• inet-precedence—IPv4 precedence classifier (default and compatibility)

 573

Table 160: Fields on the Add Classifier Page (Continued)

Field Description

Code point Specifies the code point mapping created.

mapping
The available options are as follows:

• Add—Click + to add a code point mapping.

• Edit—Click pencil icon to edit the selected code point mapping.

• Delete—Deletes the code point mapping.

Code point Select the CoS value in bits and the alias of a classifier from the list.

Forwarding class Select the forwarding class for the specified CoS value and alias from the list.

Loss priority Select the loss priority for the specified CoS value and alias from the list.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Classifier | 573

Edit a Classifier

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Classifiers.

To edit a classifier:

1. Select an existing classifier configuration that you want to edit on the Classifiers page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Classifiers page.
The Edit Classifiers page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add
a Classifier" on page 572.
3. Click OK to save the changes.
 574

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Classifier | 574

Delete Classifier

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Classifiers.

To delete a classifier:

1. Select a classifier that you want to delete on the Classifiers Page.

2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Classifiers page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Classifiers Page | 570

 575

CHAPTER 53

CoS—Rewrite Rules

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Rewrite Rules Page | 575

Add a Rewrite Rule | 576

Edit a Rewrite Rule | 578

Delete Rewrite Rule | 578

About the Rewrite Rules Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 575

Field Descriptions | 576

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Rewrite Rules.

Use this page to add, edit, or delete rewrite rule configurations.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a rewrite rule. See "Add a Rewrite Rule" on page 576.

• Edit a rewrite rule. See "Edit a Rewrite Rule" on page 578.

• Delete rewrite rule. See "Delete Rewrite Rule" on page 578.

 576

Field Descriptions

Table 161 on page 576 describes the fields on the Rewrite Rules page.

Table 161: Fields on the Rewrite Rules Page

Field Description

Rewrite rule name Displays the names of defined rewrite rules.

Rewrite rule type Displays the rewrite rule type.

Code Point Details

Egress/Outgoing Code point Displays the CoS values and aliases that a specific rewrite rule has set for a
specific forwarding class and loss priority.

Forwarding class name Displays the forwarding classes associated with a specific rewrite rule.

Loss priority Displays the loss priority values associated with a specific rewrite rule.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Rewrite Rule | 576

Add a Rewrite Rule

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Rewrite Rules.

To add a rule configuration:

1. Click the add icon (+) available on the right side of the Forwarding Class page.
The Add Rewrite Rule page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 162 on page 577.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 577

Table 162: Fields on the Add Rewrite Rule Page

Field Action

Rewrite rule name Enter the name of a defined rewrite rule.

Rewrite rule type Select a rewrite rule type from the list.

• dscp—Defines the Differentiated Services code point rewrite rule.

• ieee-802.1—Defines the IEEE-802.1 rewrite rule.

• inet-precedence—Defines the precedence rewrite rule for IPv4.

• exp—Defines the MPLS EXP rewrite rule.

NOTE: This option is not available on SRX4000 lines of devices and SRX5000 lines of
devices.

• dscp-ipv6—Defines the Differentiated Services code point rewrite rule for IPv6.

NOTE: This option is not available on SRX4000 lines of devices.

• ieee-802.1ad—Defines the IEEE-802.1ad rewrite rule.

NOTE: This option is not available on SRX4000 lines of devices.

• frame-relay-de—Defines the frame relay discard eligible bit rewrite rule.

NOTE: This option is not available on SRX4000 lines of devices and SRX5000 lines of
devices.

Code point mapping Specifies the code point mapping created.

Click one:

• Add—Click + to add a code point mapping.

• Edit—Click pencil icon to edit the selected code point mapping.

• Delete—Deletes the code point mapping.

Egress/Outgoing Select a CoS value and alias from the list.

Code point
 578

Table 162: Fields on the Add Rewrite Rule Page (Continued)

Field Action

Forwarding class Select the forwarding class of the rewrite rule from the list.

Loss priority Select the loss priority of the rewrite rule from the list.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Rewrite Rule | 578

Edit a Rewrite Rule

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Rewrite Rules.

To edit a rewrite rule:

1. Select an existing rule configuration you want to edit on the Rewrite Rules page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Rewrite Rules page.
The Edit Rewrite Rule page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see
"Add a Rewrite Rule" on page 576.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Rewrite Rule | 578

Delete Rewrite Rule

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Rewrite Rules.

To delete a rewrite rule:

1. Select an existing rule configuration you want to delete on the Rewrite Rules page.
 579

2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Rewrite Rules page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the previous configuration.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Rewrite Rules Page | 575

 580

CHAPTER 54

CoS—Schedulers

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Schedulers Page | 580

Add a Scheduler | 581

Edit a Scheduler | 583

Delete Scheduler | 584

About the Schedulers Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 580

Field Descriptions | 581

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Schedulers.

Use this page to add, edit or delete configuration of schedulers and enable or disable global settings.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a scheduler. See "Add a Scheduler" on page 581.

• Edit a scheduler. See "Edit a Scheduler" on page 583.

• Delete scheduler. See "Delete Scheduler" on page 584.

 581

Field Descriptions

Table 163 on page 581 describes the fields on the Schedulers page.

Table 163: Fields on the Schedulers Page

Field Description

Schedulers Global Setting

Enable Non Strict Priority Applies non-strict priority policy to all the schedulers.

Schedulers Configuration

Scheduler name Displays the names of defined schedulers.

Scheduler priority Displays the scheduler transmission priority, which determines the order in which an
output interface transmits traffic from the queues.

Details of scheduler

Name Displays the scheduler name.

Value Displays the CoS value.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Scheduler | 581

Add a Scheduler

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Schedulers.

To add a scheduler:

1. Click the add icon (+) available on the right side of the Scheduler page.
The Add Scheduler page appears.
 582

2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 164 on page 582.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 164: Fields on the Add Scheduler Page

Field Action

Scheduler Enter the scheduler name.

name

Scheduler Select an option from the list:

priority
• high—Packets in this queue have high priority.

• low—Packets in this queue are transmitted last.

• medium-low—Packets in this queue have medium-low priority.

• medium-high—Packets in this queue have medium-high priority.

• strict-high—Packets in this queue are transmitted first.

Buffer size Select an option from the list:

• exact—Exact buffer size.

• percent—Percentage of the total buffer. Select and type an integer from 1 through 100.

• remainder—Remaining available buffer size.

• temporal—Temporal value in microseconds.

Shaping rate Enter the minimum bandwidth allocated to a queue.

Select an option from the list:

• rate—Shaping rate as an absolute number of bits per second. Select and type an integer
from 3200 through 160,000,000,000 bits per second.

• percent—Shaping rate as a percentage. Select and type an integer from 0 through 100.
 583

Table 164: Fields on the Add Scheduler Page (Continued)

Field Action

Transmit rate Enter the transmission rate of a scheduler.

Select an option from the list:

• rate—Transmit rate. Select and type an integer from 3200 through 160,000,000,000 bits
per second.

• exact—Exact transmit rate.

• percent—Percentage of transmission capacity. Select and type an integer from 1 through

100.

• remainder—Remaining transmission capacity.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Scheduler | 583

Edit a Scheduler

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Schedulers.

To edit a scheduler:

1. Select an existing scheduler that you want to edit on the Schedulers page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Schedulers page.
The Edit Scheduler appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add a
Scheduler" on page 581.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Scheduler | 584

 584

Delete Scheduler

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Schedulers.

To delete a scheduler:

1. Select an existing scheduler that you want to delete on the Schedulers page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Schedulers page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Schedulers Page | 580

 585

CHAPTER 55

CoS—Scheduler Maps

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Scheduler Maps Page | 585

Add a Scheduler Map | 586

Edit a Scheduler Map | 587

Delete Scheduler Map | 588

About the Scheduler Maps Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 585

Field Descriptions | 586

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Scheduler Maps.

Use this page to add, edit, or delete schedulers maps configurations.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a scheduler map. See "Add a Scheduler Map" on page 586.

• Edit a scheduler map. See "Edit a Scheduler Map" on page 587.

• Delete a scheduler map. See "Delete Scheduler Map" on page 588.

 586

Field Descriptions

Table 165 on page 586 describes the fields on the Scheduler Maps page.

Table 165: Fields on the Scheduler Maps Page

Field Description

Scheduler map name Displays the names of defined scheduler maps. Scheduler maps link schedulers to
forwarding classes.

Schedulers Displays the schedulers assigned for each map.

Forwarding classes Displays the forwarding classes assigned for each map.

Details of Schedulers

Name Displays the scheduler assigned to the selected scheduler map.

Value Displays the CoS values.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Scheduler Map | 586

Add a Scheduler Map

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Scheduler Maps.

To add a scheduler map:

1. Click the add icon (+) available on the right side of the Scheduler Map page.
The Add Scheduler Map page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 166 on page 587.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 587

Table 166: Fields on the Add Scheduler Map Page

Field Action

Scheduler map name Enter a name for the scheduler map.

best-effort Select an option from the list.

Specifies no service profile. Loss priority is typically not carried in a CoS value.

expedited-forwarding Select an option from the list.

Specifies end-to-end service with low loss, low latency, low jitter, and assured
bandwidth.

assured-forwarding Select an option from the list.

Specifies the group of defined values.

network-control Select an option from the list.

Specifies CoS packet forwarding class of high priority.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Scheduler Map | 587

Edit a Scheduler Map

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Scheduler Maps.

To edit a scheduler map:

1. Select an existing scheduler map that you want to edit on the Schedulers page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Schedulers page.
The Edit Scheduler Map page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see
"Add a Scheduler Map" on page 586.
3. Click OK to save the changes.
 588

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Scheduler Map | 588

Delete Scheduler Map

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Scheduler Maps.

To delete a scheduler map:

1. Select an existing scheduler map that you want to delete on the Schedulers page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Schedulers page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Scheduler Maps Page | 585

 589

CHAPTER 56

CoS—Drop Profile

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Drop Profile Page | 589

Add a Drop Profile | 590

Edit a Drop Profile | 592

Delete Drop Profile | 592

About the Drop Profile Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 589

Field Descriptions | 590

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Drop Profile.

Use this page to configure drop profiles.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a drop profile. See "Add a Drop Profile" on page 590.

• Edit a drop profile. See "Edit a Drop Profile" on page 592.

• Delete a drop profile. See "Delete Drop Profile" on page 592.

 590

Field Descriptions

Table 167 on page 590 describes the fields on the Drop Profile page.

Table 167: Fields on the Drop Profile Page

Field Description

Drop profile name Displays the configured random early detection (RED) drop profile names.

Profile type Displays whether a RED drop profile type is interpolated or segmented.

Data points Displays information about the data point types.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Drop Profile Page | 589

Add a Drop Profile

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Drop Profile.

To add a drop profile:

1. Click the add icon (+) available on the right side of the Drop Profile page.
The Add Drop Profile page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 168 on page 590.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 168: Fields on the Add Drop Profile Page

Field Action

Drop Profile Enter a drop profile name.

Name
 591

Table 168: Fields on the Add Drop Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Interpolated Select the option to specify whether the value pairs are interpolated to produce a smooth
profile.

Segmented Select the option to specify whether the value pairs are represented by line fragments,
which connect each data point on the graph to produce a segmented profile.

Data point To add a data point:

1. Click +.

The Add Data Point page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Fill Level—Enter a percentage value for queue buffer fullness for the X-coordinate.
For example, 95.

• Drop Probability—Enter a percentage value for drop probability for the Y-coordinate.
For example, 85.

3. Click OK to save changes.

To edit a data point:

1. Select the existing data point and click the pencil icon.

The Edit Data Point page appears.

2. Enter a percentage value for Drop Probability.

3. Click OK to save changes.

To delete a data point, select the existing data point and click the delete (X) icon. Then, click
Yes to delete it.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Drop Profile | 592

 592

Edit a Drop Profile

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Drop Profile.

To edit a drop profile:

1. Select an existing drop profile that you want to edit on the Drop Profile page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Drop Profile page.
The Edit Drop Profile page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see
"Add a Drop Profile" on page 590.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Drop Profile | 592

Delete Drop Profile

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Drop Profile.

To delete a drop profile:

1. Select an existing drop profile that you want to delete on the Drop Profile page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Drop Profile page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Drop Profile Page | 589

 593

CHAPTER 57

CoS—Virtual Channel Groups

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Virtual Channel Groups Page | 593

Add a Virtual Channel | 594

Edit a Virtual Channel | 595

Delete Virtual Channel | 596

About the Virtual Channel Groups Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 593

Field Descriptions | 594

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Virtual Channel Groups.

NOTE: This menu is not available for SRX4000 line of devices and SRX5000 line of devices.

Use this page to configure virtual channel group.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a virtual channel. See "Add a Virtual Channel" on page 594.

• Edit a virtual channel. See "Edit a Virtual Channel" on page 595.

 594

• Delete a virtual channel. See "Delete Virtual Channel" on page 596.

Field Descriptions

Table 169 on page 594 describes the fields on the Virtual Channel Groups page.

Table 169: Fields on the Virtual Channel Groups Page

Field Description

Virtual Channel Group Name Displays the name of defined virtual channel groups.

Virtual Channel Name Displays the name of defined virtual channels.

Default Displays the default virtual channel of a group marking.

Scheduler Map Displays the scheduler map assigned to a particular virtual channel.

Shaping Rate Displays the shaping rate configured for a virtual channel.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Virtual Channel | 594

Add a Virtual Channel

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Virtual Channel Groups.

NOTE: This menu is not available for SRX4000 line of devices and SRX5000 line of devices.

To add a virtual channel to the virtual channel group:

1. Click Add on the Virtual Channel page.

The Virtual Channel Information page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 170 on page 595.
 595

3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 170: Fields on the Virtual Channel Information Page

Field Action

Virtual Channel Select a predefined name from the list or enter a new virtual channel name.
Name

Scheduler Map Select a scheduler map from the list.

Specifies a predefined scheduler map to assign to a virtual channel. The scheduler maps
associate schedulers with forwarding classes.

Shaping Rate Enter the shaping rate for a virtual channel.

Configuring a shaping rate is optional. If no shaping rate is configured, a virtual channel

without a shaper can use the full logical interface bandwidth. The options available are:

Select an option from the list:

• Unconfigured—Select the option for no shaping rate.

• Absolute Rate—Configures a shaping rate as an absolute number of bits per second.

Range: 3200 through 320000000000.

• Percent—Configures a shaping rate as a percentage.

Range: 0 through 100.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Virtual Channel | 595

Edit a Virtual Channel

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Virtual Channel Groups.
 596

NOTE: This menu is not available for SRX4000 line of devices and SRX5000 line of devices.

To edit a virtual channel in the virtual channel group:

1. Click on the existing virtual channel name that you want to edit on the Virtual Channel Groups page.
The Virtual Channel Information page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
options, see "Add a Virtual Channel" on page 594.
2. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Virtual Channel | 596

Delete Virtual Channel

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Virtual Channel Groups.

NOTE: This menu is not available for SRX4000 line of devices and SRX5000 line of devices.

To delete a virtual channel:

1. Select an existing virtual channel name that you want to delete on the Virtual Channel Groups page.
2. Click Delete on the Virtual Channel Groups page.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Virtual Channel Groups Page | 593

 597

CHAPTER 58

CoS—Assign To Interface

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Assign To Interface Page | 597

Edit a Port | 599

Add a Logical Interface | 599

Edit a Logical Interface | 601

Delete Logical Interface | 602

About the Assign To Interface Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 597

Field Descriptions | 598

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Assign To Interface.

Use this page to add, edit, or delete interface configuration.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Edit a port. See "Edit a Port" on page 599.

• Add a Logical Interface. See "Add a Logical Interface" on page 599.

• Edit a Logical Interface. See "Edit a Logical Interface" on page 601.

 598

• Delete Logical Interface. See "Delete Logical Interface" on page 602.

Field Descriptions

Table 171 on page 598 describes the fields on the Assign To Interface page.

Table 171: Fields on the Assign To Interface Page

Field Description

Port Displays the port and interface name.

Scheduler map Displays the predefined scheduler maps for the physical interface.

Details of Logical Interfaces

Unit Displays the name of a logical interface.

Forwarding class Displays the forwarding classes assigned to a particular interface.

Scheduler map Displays the scheduler maps assigned to a particular interface.

Virtual channel group Displays the virtual channel groups assigned to a particular interface.

Classifier[dscp,dscpv6,exp,inet] Displays the classifiers assigned to a particular interface—for example,

information about DSCP and DSCPv6, EXP, and IPv4 (inet precedence)
classifiers.

Rewrite rule[dscp,dscpv6,exp,inet] Displays the rewrite rules assigned to a particular interface—for example,
information about Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP and DSCPv6),
EXP, and IPv4 (inet precedence) rewrite rules.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Port | 599

 599

Edit a Port

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Assign To Interface.

To edit a port:

1. Select an existing port profile that you want to edit on the Assign To Interface page.
2. The Edit page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see Table 172 on
page 599.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

Table 172: Fields on the Edit Port Page

Field Action

Interface Name Displays the selected interface name.

Associate system default Select Associate system default scheduler map.

scheduler map
Specifies that you can associate the system default scheduler map with the
selected interface.

Select the scheduler map Select Select the scheduler map and select a value from the list.

Specifies the scheduler map to the selected interface.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Logical Interface | 599

Add a Logical Interface

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Assign To Interface.

To add a logical interface:

1. Click the add icon (+) available on the right side of the Logical Interface page.
The Add Logical Interface page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 173 on page 600.
 600

3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 173: Fields on the Add Logical Interface

Field Action

Unit Enter a logical interface name.

Scheduler map Select a scheduler map from the list.

Forwarding class Select a forwarding class from the list.

Virtual channel group Select a virtual channel group from the list.

Classifiers

dscp Select a classifier DSCP value from the list.

Specifies the Differentiated Services Code Point of the classifier type assigned to a
particular interface.

dscp v6 Select a classifier DSCPv6 value from the list.

Specifies the Differentiated Services Code Point version 6 of the classifier type assigned
to a particular interface.

exp Select an EXP classifier value from the list.

Specifies the EXP classifier type assigned to a particular interface.

inet precedence Select an IPv4 precedence classifier value from the list.

Specifies the IPv4 precedence classifier type assigned to a particular interface.

Rewrite rules

dscp Select a rewrite rule DSCP value from the list.

Specifies the Differentiated Services Code Point of the rewrite rule type assigned to a
particular interface
 601

Table 173: Fields on the Add Logical Interface (Continued)

Field Action

dscp v6 Select a rewrite rule DSCPv6 value from the list.

Specifies the Differentiated Services Code Point version 6 of the rewrite rule type
assigned to a particular interface.

exp Select an EXP rewrite rule value from the list.

Specifies the EXP rewrite rule type assigned to a particular interface.

inet precedence Select an IPv4 precedence rewrite rule value from the list.

Specifies the IPv4 precedence rewrite rule type assigned to a particular interface.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Logical Interface | 601

Edit a Logical Interface

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Assign To Interface.

To edit a logical interface:

1. Select an existing logical interface that you want to edit on the Logical Interface page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Logical Interface page.
The Edit Logical Interface page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see
"Add a Logical Interface" on page 599.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Logical Interface | 602

 602

Delete Logical Interface

You are here: Network > Class of Service(CoS) > Assign To Interface.

To delete a logical interface:

1. Select an existing logical interface that you want to delete on the Logical Interface page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Logical Interface page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Assign To Interface Page | 597

 603

CHAPTER 59

Application QoS

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Application QoS Page | 603

Add an Application QoS Profile | 606

Edit an Application QoS Profile | 608

Clone an Application QoS Profile | 608

Delete Application QoS Profile | 609

Add a Rate Limiter Profile | 609

Edit a Rate Limiter Profile | 610

Clone a Rate Limiter Profile | 611

Delete Rate Limiter Profile | 611

About the Application QoS Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 604

Field Descriptions | 605

You are here: Network > Application QoS.

Application quality of service (AppQoS) provides the ability to prioritize and meter application traffic to
provide better service to business-critical or high-priority application traffic.

The AppQoS feature expands the capability of Junos OS class of service (CoS) to include marking DSCP
values based on Layer-7 application types, honoring application-based traffic through loss priority
 604

settings, and controlling transfer rates on egress Physical Interface Cards (PICs) based on Layer-7
application types.

Use this page to add, edit, clone, and delete an AppQoS profile and a rate limiter profile.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add an AppQoS profile. See "Add an Application QoS Profile" on page 606.

• Edit an AppQoS profile. See "Edit an Application QoS Profile" on page 608.

• Clone an AppQoS profile. See "Clone an Application QoS Profile" on page 608.

• Delete AppQoS profile. See "Delete Application QoS Profile" on page 609.

• Add a rate limiter profile. See "Add a Rate Limiter Profile" on page 609.

• Edit a rate limiter profile. See "Edit a Rate Limiter Profile" on page 610.

• Clone a rate limiter profile. See "Clone a Rate Limiter Profile" on page 611.

• Delete rate limiter profile. See "Delete Rate Limiter Profile" on page 611.

• Show or hide columns in the AppQoS Profile or Rate Limiter Profile table. To do this, click Show Hide
Columns icon in the top right corner of the page and select the columns you want to display or
deselect to hide columns on the page.

• Advanced search for an AppQoS or rate limiter profile. To do this, use the search text box present
above the table grid. The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. An example
filter condition is displayed in the search text box when you hover over the Search icon. When you
start entering the search string, the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace to delete a character of the search string.
 605

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

Field Descriptions

Table 174 on page 605 describes the fields on the Application QoS page.

Table 174: Fields on the Application QoS Page

Field Description

AppQoS Profile

Name Displays the AppQoS profile name.

Traffic Direction Displays whether the traffic direction is client-to-server and server-to-client.

NOTE: If the same rate limiter profile is associated with client-to-server and server-
to-client traffic, then Both status will be displayed.

Rate Limiter Displays the rate limiter profile name.

Forwarding Class Displays the forwarding class name.

Rate Limiter Profile

Name Displays the rate limiter profile name.

Maximum Bandwidth Displays the maximum bandwidth (in Mbps) to be transmitted for the rate limiter.

Maximum Burst Size Displays maximum burst size (in MB) to be transferred in a single burst or time-
slice.

Associated AppQoS Profile Displays the AppQoS profile name associated with the rate limiter profile.
 606

Add an Application QoS Profile

You are here: Network > Application QoS.

To add an AppQoS profile:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Application QoS page.
The Add AppQoS Profile page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 175 on page 606 through
Table 176 on page 607.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 175: Fields on the Add AppQoS Profile Page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the AppQoS profile. The name must be a string beginning with a letter or
underscore and consisting of letters, numbers, dashes and underscores, and length should
be maximum 53 characters.

Rate Limiter

Traffic Direction

Client to Server Select a rate limiter from the list to be associated with client-to-server traffic for this
application.

Click Add New to add a new rate limiter profile. For more information on creating a new
rate limiter, see "Add a Rate Limiter Profile" on page 609.

Server to Client Select a rate limiter from the list to be associated with server-to-client traffic for this
application.

Click Add New to add a new rate limiter profile. For fields information, see "Add a Rate
Limiter Profile" on page 609.
 607

Table 175: Fields on the Add AppQoS Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Action Select one of the following actions to configure the AppQoS rules:

• Drop—Drops out-of-profile packets.

• Loss Priority High—Elevates the loss priority to maximum.

NOTE: This option is not supported for SRX4600 and SRX5000 line of devices.

QoS Marking

DSCP Select an option from the list to mark Differentiated Services code point (DSCP) alias or bit
map with matching applications to establish the output queue.

Forwarding Class Select an option from the list to mark the AppQoS class with matching applications.

Click Add New to add a new forwarding class. For more information in adding a new
forwarding class, see Table 176 on page 607.

NOTE: Add New is not supported for the logical systems and tenants. You can only select
the predefined value.

Packet Loss Select an option from the list to mark loss priority with matching applications.
Priority
Possible values are none, high, low, medium-high, and medium-low. A high loss priority
means that there is an 80% chance of packet loss in congestion.

Logs Enable this option to log AppQoS events.

Table 176: Fields on the Add Forwarding Class page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the forwarding class.

Queue Number Enter an output queue number to associate with the forwarding class.

Range is 0 through 7.
 608

Table 176: Fields on the Add Forwarding Class page (Continued)

Field Action

Priority Select the forwarding class queuing priority from the list.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Application QoS Page | 603

Edit an Application QoS Profile | 608
Clone an Application QoS Profile | 608
Delete Application QoS Profile | 609

Edit an Application QoS Profile

You are here: Network > Application QoS.

To edit an AppQoS profile:

1. Select an existing AppQoS profile that you want to edit on the Application QoS page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right-side of the page.
The Edit AppQoS Profile page appears with editable fields. For more information on editing the fields,
see "Add an Application QoS Profile" on page 606.
3. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Application QoS Page | 603

Clone an Application QoS Profile | 608
Delete Application QoS Profile | 609

Clone an Application QoS Profile

You are here: Network > Application QoS.

 609

To clone an AppQoS profile:

1. Select an existing AppQoS profile that you want to clone on the Application QoS page.
2. Click More > Clone available on the upper right-side of the page.
The Clone AppQoS Profile page appears with editable fields. For more information on editing the
fields, see "Add an Application QoS Profile" on page 606.
3. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Application QoS Page | 603

Edit an Application QoS Profile | 608
Delete Application QoS Profile | 609

Delete Application QoS Profile

You are here: Network > Application QoS.

To delete AppQoS profiles:

1. Select one or more AppQoS profiles that you want to delete on the Application QoS page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete the selected AppQoS profiles or click No to retain the profiles.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Application QoS Page | 603

Add an Application QoS Profile | 606
Edit an Application QoS Profile | 608
Clone an Application QoS Profile | 608

Add a Rate Limiter Profile

You are here: Network > Application QoS.

To add a rate limiter profile:

 610

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Application QoS page.
The Add Rate Limiter Profile page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 177 on page 610.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 177: Fields on the Add Rate Limiter Profile Page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the rate limiter profile. It is applied in AppQoS rules to share device
resources based on quality-of-service requirements.

Name must be a string beginning with a letter or underscore and consisting of letters,
numbers, dashes and underscores and length should be maximum 63 characters.

Maximum Enter the maximum bandwidth to be transmitted in Mbps, for this rate limiter. You can
Bandwidth provision up to 10240 Mbps of bandwidth among multiple rate limiters to share the resource
proportionally.

Range is 64 kbps through 10240 Mbps.

Maximum Burst Enter the maximum burst size (in MB) to be transferred in a single burst or time-slice. This
Size limit ensures that a high-priority transmission does not keep a lower priority transmission
from transmitting.

Range is 1 byte through 1280 MB.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Application QoS Page | 603

Edit a Rate Limiter Profile | 610
Clone a Rate Limiter Profile | 611
Delete Rate Limiter Profile | 611

Edit a Rate Limiter Profile

You are here: Network > Application QoS.

 611

To edit a rate limiter profile:

1. Select an existing rate limiter profile that you want to edit on the Application QoS page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right-side of the page.
The Edit Rate Limiter Profile page appears with editable fields. For more information on editing the
fields, see "Add a Rate Limiter Profile" on page 609.
3. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Application QoS Page | 603

Clone a Rate Limiter Profile | 611
Delete Rate Limiter Profile | 611

Clone a Rate Limiter Profile

You are here: Network > Application QoS.

To clone a rate limiter profile:

1. Select an existing rate limiter profile that you want to clone on the Application QoS page.
2. Click More > Clone available on the upper right-side of the page.
The Clone Rate Limiter Profile page appears with editable fields. For more information on editing the
fields, see "Add a Rate Limiter Profile" on page 609.
3. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Application QoS Page | 603

Edit a Rate Limiter Profile | 610
Delete Rate Limiter Profile | 611

Delete Rate Limiter Profile

You are here: Network > Application QoS.

 612

To delete rate limiter profiles:

1. Select one or more rate limiter profiles that you want to delete on the Application QoS page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete rate limiter profiles or click No to retain the profiles.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Application QoS Page | 603

Add a Rate Limiter Profile | 609
Edit a Rate Limiter Profile | 610
Clone a Rate Limiter Profile | 611
 613

CHAPTER 60

IPsec VPN

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the IPsec VPN Page | 613

IPsec VPN Global Settings | 616

Create a Site-to-Site VPN | 619

Create a Remote Access VPN—Juniper Secure Connect | 636

Create a Remote Access VPN—NCP Exclusive Client | 654

Edit an IPsec VPN | 667

Delete an IPsec VPN | 668

About the IPsec VPN Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 613

Field Descriptions | 614

You are here: Network > VPN > IPsec VPN.

A VPN is a private network that uses a public network to connect two or more remote sites. Instead of
using dedicated connections between networks, VPNs use virtual connections routed (tunneled)
through public networks. IPsec VPN is a protocol, consists of set of standards used to establish a VPN
connection. Use this page to configure IPsec VPN.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

 614

• Configure IPsec VPN global settings. See "IPsec VPN Global Settings" on page 616.

• Create a Site-to-Site VPN. See "Create a Site-to-Site VPN" on page 619.

• Create a remote access VPN. See "Create a Remote Access VPN—Juniper Secure Connect" on page
636 and "Create a Remote Access VPN—NCP Exclusive Client" on page 654.

• Edit an IPsec VPN configuration. See "Edit an IPsec VPN" on page 667.

• Delete an IPsec VPN configuration. See "Delete an IPsec VPN" on page 668.

• Show or hide columns in the IPsec VPN table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns icon in the
top right corner of the page and select the columns you want to display or deselect to hide columns
on the page.

• Advance search for an IPsec VPN. To do this, use the search text box present above the table grid.
The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. An example filter condition is
displayed in the search text box when you hover over the Search icon. When you start entering the
search string, the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and choose a valid operator for your advanced search.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace to delete a character of the search string.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

Field Descriptions

Table 178 on page 614 describes the fields on the IPsec VPN page.

Table 178: Fields on the IPsec VPN Page

Field Description

Name Displays the name of the IPsec VPN.

 615

Table 178: Fields on the IPsec VPN Page (Continued)

Field Description

IKE Status Displays the Phase I Internet Key Exchange (IKE) status.

VPN Topology Displays the name of the VPN topology:

• Site to Site VPN—Connects two sites in an organization together and allows secure
communications between the sites.

• Remote Access VPN—Allows a user who is working at home or traveling to connect to the
corporate office and its resources. This topology is sometimes referred to as an end-to-
site tunnel.

The options available are Remote Access VPN (Juniper Secure Connect) and Remote
Access VPN (NCP Exclusive Client).

• Other topologies which are displayed and you cannot add or edit are:

• Dynamic VPN—The dynamic VPN feature simplifies remote access by enabling users
to create IPsec VPN tunnels without having to manually configure settings on their
PCs or laptops. This feature is supported on SRX300, SRX320, SRX340, SRX345, and
SRX550HM devices.

• Hub-and-spoke VPNs—Connects branch offices to the corporate office in an

enterprise network. You can also use this topology to connect spokes together by
sending traffic through the hub.

• ADVPN Hub—Auto Discovery VPN (ADVPN) dynamically establishes VPN tunnels

between spokes to avoid routing traffic through the Hub.

• ADVPN Spoke—Allows the spokes to establish a shortcut tunnel between peers.

Dead Peer Displays if the dead peer detection (DPD) is enabled or disabled.
Detection

Routing Mode Displays the name of the routing mode to send traffic to the IPsec VPN.

Remote Access Displays the remote URL or address.

NOTE: This option is applicable only for Remote Access VPNs (Juniper Secure Connect).
 616

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Create a Site-to-Site VPN | 619

Edit an IPsec VPN | 667
Delete an IPsec VPN | 668

IPsec VPN Global Settings

IN THIS SECTION

Field Descriptions | 616

You are here: Network > VPN > IPsec VPN.

Use this page to view or add the VPN global configuration details. Click Global settings on the IPsec
VPN page.

Field Descriptions

Table 179 on page 616 describes the fields on the Global Settings page.

Table 179: Fields on the Global Settings Page

Field Description

General

IKE - Respond to Enable this option if you want the device to respond to IPsec packets with invalid IPsec
bad-spi Security Parameter Index (SPI) values.

Max Responses Enter a value from 1 through 30 to respond to invalid SPI values per gateway. The default
is 5. This option is available when Response Bad SPI is selected.

IPsec VPN Monitor Enable this option if you want the device to monitor VPN liveliness.
Options
 617

Table 179: Fields on the Global Settings Page (Continued)

Field Description

Interval (seconds) Enter a value from 2 through 3600 seconds after which Internet Control Message
Protocol (ICMP) requests are sent to the peer.

Threshold Enter a value from 1 through 65,536 to specify the number of consecutive unsuccessful
pings before the peer is declared unreachable.

Remote Access VPN

Default Profile Select a default profile name from the list.

Name
NOTE: This option is available when at least one Juniper Secure Connect VPN is created.

SSL VPN Tunnel Enable this option to track Encapsulated Security Payload (ESP) tunnels.
tracking
 618

Table 179: Fields on the Global Settings Page (Continued)

Field Description

SSL VPN Profiles Lists the SSL VPN profiles.

NOTE: This option displays associated IPsec VPNs when at least one Juniper Secure
Connect VPN is created.

To add a new SSL VPN profile:

1. Click +.

The Add SSL VPN Profile page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter the name for an SSL VPN profile.

• Logging—Enable this option to log for SSL VPN.

• SSL Termination Profile—Select an SSL termination profile from the list.

To add a new SSL termination profile:

a. Click Add.

The Create SSL Termination Profile page appears.

b. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter a name for the SSL termination profile.

• Server Certificate—Select a server certificate from the list.

To add a certificate, click Add. For more information on adding a device

certificate, see "Add a Device Certificate" on page 236.

To import a certificate, click Import. For more information on importing a

device certificate, see "Import a Device Certificate" on page 234.

• Click OK.

c. Click OK.

3. Click OK.

To edit an SSL termination profile, select the profile you want to edit and click on the
pencil icon.
 619

Table 179: Fields on the Global Settings Page (Continued)

Field Description

To delete an SSL termination profile, select the profile you want to delete and click on the
delete icon.

Internal SA

Internal SA Keys Enter the encryption key. You must ensure that the manual encryption key is in ASCII text
and 24 characters long; otherwise, the configuration will result in a commit failure.

NOTE: This option is available only for SRX5000 line of devices, SRX4100, SRX4200,
SRX4600 devices, and vSRX.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPsec VPN Page | 613

Edit an IPsec VPN | 667
Delete an IPsec VPN | 668

Create a Site-to-Site VPN

You are here: Network > VPN > IPsec VPN.

To create a site-to-site VPN:

1. Click Create VPN and select Site to Site on the upper right side of the IPsec VPN page.
The Create Site to Site VPN page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 180 on page 620 through
Table 185 on page 630.
The VPN connectivity will change from grey to blue line in the topology to show that the
configuration is complete.
3. Click Save to save the changes.
If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 620

Table 180: Fields on the Create IPsec VPN Page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the VPN.

Description Enter a description. This description will be used for

the IKE and IPsec proposals and policies. During edit,
the IPsec policy description will be displayed and
updated.

Routing Mode Select the routing mode to which this VPN will be
associated:

• Traffic Selector (Auto Route Insertion)

• Static Routing

• Dynamic Routing – OSPF

• Dynamic Routing – BGP

For each topology, J-Web auto generates the relevant

CLIs. Traffic Selector is the default mode.
 621

Table 180: Fields on the Create IPsec VPN Page (Continued)

Field Action

Authentication Method Select an authentication method from the list that the
device uses to authenticate the source of Internet Key
Exchange (IKE) messages:

• Certificate Based—Types of digital signatures,

which are certificates that confirm the identity of
the certificate holder.

The following are the authentication methods for a

certificate based:

• rsa-signatures—Specifies that a public key

algorithm, which supports encryption and
digital signatures, is used.

• dsa-signatures—Specifies that the Digital

Signature Algorithm (DSA) is used.

• ecdsa-signatures-256—Specifies that the Elliptic

Curve DSA (ECDSA) using the 256-bit elliptic
curve secp256r1, as specified in the Federal
Information Processing Standard (FIPS) Digital
Signature Standard (DSS) 186-3, is used.

• ecdsa-signatures-384—Specifies that the

ECDSA using the 384-bit elliptic curve
secp384r1, as specified in the FIPS DSS 186-3,
is used.

• ecdsa-signatures-521—Specifies that the

ECDSA using the 521-bit elliptic curve
secp521r1 is used.

NOTE: ecdsa-signatures-521 supports only

SRX5000 line of devices with SPC3 card and
junos-ike package installed.

• Pre-shared Key (default method)—Specifies that a

preshared key, which is a secret key shared
between the two peers, is used during
authentication to identify the peers to each other.
The same key must be configured for each peer.
This is the default method.
 622

Table 180: Fields on the Create IPsec VPN Page (Continued)

Field Action

Auto-create Firewall Policy If you select Yes, a firewall policy is automatically

between internal zone and tunnel interface zone with
local protected networks as source address and remote
protected networks as destination address.

Another firewall policy will be created visa-versa.

If you choose No, you don’t have a firewall policy

option. You need to manually create the required
firewall policy to make this VPN work.

NOTE: If you do not want to auto-create a firewall

policy in the VPN workflow, then the protected
network is hidden for dynamic routing in both local and
remote gateway.

Remote Gateway Displays the remote gateway icon in the topology.

Click the icon to configure the remote gateway.

The gateway identifies the remote peer with the IPsec

VPN peers and defines the appropriate parameters for
that IPsec VPN.

For fields information, see Table 181 on page 623.

Local Gateway Displays the local gateway icon in the topology. Click
the icon to configure the local gateway.

For fields information, see Table 183 on page 625.

 623

Table 180: Fields on the Create IPsec VPN Page (Continued)

Field Action

IKE and IPsec Settings Configure the custom IKE or IPsec proposal and the
custom IPsec proposal with recommended algorithms
or values.

For fields information, see Table 185 on page 630.

NOTE:

• J-Web supports only one custom IKE proposal and

does not support the predefined proposal-set.
Upon edit and save, J-Web deletes the predefined
proposal set if configured.

• On the remote gateway of the VPN tunnel, you

must configure the same custom proposal and
policy.

• Upon edit, J-Web shows the first custom IKE and

IPsec proposal when more than one custom
proposal is configured.

Table 181: Fields on the Remote Gateway Page

Field Action

Gateway is behind NAT If enabled, the configured external IP address (IPv4 or

IPv6) is referred to as the NAT device IP address.

IKE Identity Select an option from the list to configure remote

identity.

Host name Enter a remote host name.

IPv4 Address Enter a remote IPv4 address.

IPv6 Address Enter a remote IPv6 address.

 624

Table 181: Fields on the Remote Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

Key ID Enter a Key ID.

E-mail Address Enter an e-mail address.

External IP Address Enter the peer IPv4 or IPv6 address. You can create
one primary peer network with up to four backups.

You must enter one IPv4 or IPv6 address or you can

enter up to five IP addresses separated by comma.

Protected Networks When you select a routing mode, lists all the global
address(es).

Select the addresses from the Available column and

then click the right arrow to move it to the Selected
column.

When the routing mode is:

• Traffic Selector—The IP addresses will be used as

remote IP in traffic selector configuration.

• Static Routing:

• Static route will be configured for the selected

global address(es).

• The tunnel interface (st0.x) of the local gateway

will be used as the next-hop.

• Dynamic Routing—Default value is any. You can

also select specific global address(es). The selected
value is configured as destination address in the
firewall policy.

Add Click +.

The Create Global Address page appears. See Table

182 on page 625 for fields information.
 625

Table 182: Fields on the Create Global Address Page

Field Action

Name Enter a unique string that must begin with an

alphanumeric character and can include colons,
periods, dashes, and underscores; no spaces allowed;
63-character maximum.

IP Type Select IPv4 or IPv6.

IPv4 IPv4 Address—Enter a valid IPv4 address.

Subnet—Enter the subnet for IPv4 address.

IPv6 IPv6 Address—Enter a valid IPv6 address.

Subnet Prefix—Enter a subnet mask for the network

range. Once entered, the value is validated.

Table 183: Fields on the Local Gateway Page

Field Action

Gateway is behind NAT Enable this option when the local gateway is behind a
NAT device.

IKE Identity Select an option from the list to configure local

identity. When Gateway is behind NAT is enabled, you
can configure an IPv4 or IPv6 address to reference the
NAT device.

Host name Enter a host name.

NOTE: This option is available only if Gateway is

behind NAT is disabled.

IPv4 Address Enter an IPv4 address.

 626

Table 183: Fields on the Local Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

IPv6 Address Enter an IPv6 address.

Key ID Enter a Key ID.

NOTE: This option is available only if Gateway is

behind NAT is disabled.

E-mail Address Enter an E-mail address.

NOTE: This option is available only if Gateway is

behind NAT is disabled.

External Interface Select an outgoing interface from the list for IKE
negotiations.

The list contains all available IP addresses if more than

one IP address is configured to the specified interface.
The selected IP address will be configured as the local
address under the IKE gateway.

Tunnel Interface Select an interface from the list to bind it to the tunnel
interface (route-based VPN).

Click Add to add a new interface. The Create Tunnel

Interface page appears. See Table 184 on page 630.

Router ID Enter the routing device’s IP address.

NOTE: This option is available if the routing mode is

Dynamic Routing - OSPF or BGP.

Area ID Enter an area ID within the range of 0 to

4,294,967,295, where the tunnel interfaces of this
VPN need to be configured.

NOTE: This option is available if the routing mode is

Dynamic Routing - OSPF.
 627

Table 183: Fields on the Local Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

Tunnel Interface Passive Enable this option to bypass traffic of the usual active
IP checks.

NOTE: This option is available if the routing mode is

Dynamic Routing - OSPF.

ASN Enter the routing device’s AS number.

Use a number assigned to you by the NIC. Range: 1

through 4,294,967,295 (232 – 1) in plain-number
format for 4-byte AS numbers.

NOTE: This option is available if the routing mode is

Dynamic Routing - BGP.

Neighbor ID Enter IP address of a neighboring router.

NOTE: This option is available if the routing mode is

Dynamic Routing - BGP.

BGP Group Type Select the type of BGP peer group from the list:

• external—External group, which allows inter-AS

BGP routing.

• internal—Internal group, which allows intra-AS BGP

routing.

NOTE: This option is available if the routing mode is

Dynamic Routing - BGP.

Peer ASN Enter the neighbor (peer) autonomous system (AS)

number.

NOTE: This option is available if you choose external

as BGP Group Type.
 628

Table 183: Fields on the Local Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

Import Policies Select one or more routing policies from the list to
routes being imported into the routing table from BGP.

Click Clear All to clear the selected polices.

NOTE: This option is available if the routing mode is

Dynamic Routing - BGP.

Export Policies Select one or more policies from the list to routes
being exported from the routing table into BGP.

Click Clear All to clear the selected polices.

NOTE: This option is available if the routing mode is

Dynamic Routing - BGP.

Local certificate Select a local certificate identifier when the local

device has multiple loaded certificates.

NOTE: This option is available if the authentication

method is Certificate Based.

Click Add to generate a new certificate. Click Import to

import a device certificate. For more information see
Manage Device Certificates.

Trusted CA/Group Select the certificate authority (CA) profile from list to
associate it with the local certificate.

NOTE: This option is available if the authentication

method is Certificate Based.

Click Add to add a new CA profile. For more

information see Manage Trusted Certificate Authority.
 629

Table 183: Fields on the Local Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

Pre-shared Key Enter the value of the preshared key. The key can be
one of the following:

• ascii-text—ASCII text key.

• hexadecimal—Hexadecimal key.

NOTE: This option is available if the authentication

method is Pre-shared Key.

Protected Networks Click +. The Create Protected Networks page appears.

Create Protected Networks

Zone Select a security zone from the list that will be used as
a source zone in the firewall policy.

Global Address Select the addresses from the Available column and
then click the right arrow to move it to the Selected
column.

Add Click Add.

The Create Global Address page appears. See Table

182 on page 625.

Edit Select the protected network you want to edit and

click on the pencil icon.

The Edit Global Address page appears with editable

fields.

Delete Select the protected network you want to edit and

click on the delete icon.

The confirmation message pops up.

Click Yes to delete.

 630

Table 184: Fields on the Create Tunnel Interface Page

Field Action

Interface Unit Enter the logical unit number.

Description Enter a description for the logical interface.

Zone Select a zone for the logical interface from the list to
use as a source zone in the firewall policy.

Click Add to add a new zone. Enter zone name and

description and click OK on the Create Security Zone
page.

Routing Instance Select a routing instance from the list.

IPv4
NOTE: This option is available only if you select routing mode as Dynamic Routing - OSPF or BGP.

IPv4 Address Enter a valid IPv4 address.

Subnet Prefix Enter a subnet mask for the IPv4 address.

IPv6
NOTE: This option is available only if you select routing mode as Dynamic Routing - OSPF or BGP.

IPv6 Address Enter a valid IPv6 address.

Subnet Prefix Enter a subnet mask for the network range. Once
entered, the value is validated.

Table 185: IKE and IPsec Settings

Field Action

IKE Settings
 631

Table 185: IKE and IPsec Settings (Continued)

Field Action

IKE Version Select the required IKE version, either v1 or v2 to negotiate dynamic security
associations (SAs) for IPsec.

Default value is v2.

IKE Mode Select the IKE policy mode from the list:

• aggressive—Take half the number of messages of main mode, has less negotiation
power, and does not provide identity protection.

• main—Use six messages, in three peer-to-peer exchanges, to establish the IKE SA.
These three steps include the IKE SA negotiation, a Diffie-Hellman exchange, and
authentication of the peer. Also provides identity protection.

Encryption Select the appropriate encryption mechanism from the list.

Algorithm
Default value is aes-256-gcm.

Authentication Select the authentication algorithm from the list. For example, hmac-md5-96—Produces
Algorithm a 128-bit digest and hmac-sha1-96—Produces a 160-bit digest.

NOTE: This option is available when the encryption algorithm is not gcm.

DH group A Diffie-Hellman (DH) exchange allows participants to generate a shared secret value.
Select the appropriate DH group from the list. Default value is group19.

Lifetime Seconds Select a lifetime of an IKE security association (SA). Default: 28,800 seconds. Range: 180
through 86,400 seconds.

Dead Peer Detection Enable this option to send dead peer detection requests regardless of whether there is
outgoing IPsec traffic to the peer.
 632

Table 185: IKE and IPsec Settings (Continued)

Field Action

DPD Mode Select one of the options from the list:

• optimized—Send probes only when there is outgoing traffic and no incoming data
traffic - RFC3706 (default mode).

• probe-idle-tunnel—Send probes same as in optimized mode and also when there is no

outgoing and incoming data traffic.

• always-send—Send probes periodically regardless of incoming and outgoing data

traffic.

DPD Interval Select an interval in seconds to send dead peer detection messages. The default interval
is 10 seconds. Range is 2 to 60 seconds.

DPD Threshold Select a number from 1 to 5 to set the failure DPD threshold.

This specifies the maximum number of times the DPD messages must be sent when
there is no response from the peer. The default number of transmissions is 5 times.

Advance Configuration (Optional)

General IKE ID Enable this option to accept peer IKE ID.

IKEv2 Re- Configure the reauthentication frequency to trigger a new IKEv2 reauthentication.
authentication

IKEv2 Re- This option is enabled by default.

fragmentation

IKEv2 Re-fragment Select the maximum size, in bytes, of an IKEv2 message before it is split into fragments.
Size
The size applies to both IPv4 and IPv6 messages. Range: 570 to 1320 bytes.

Default values are:

• IPv4 messages—576 bytes.

• IPv6 messages—1280 bytes.

 633

Table 185: IKE and IPsec Settings (Continued)

Field Action

NAT-T Enable this option for IPsec traffic to pass through a NAT device.

NAT-T is an IKE phase 1 algorithm that is used when trying to establish a VPN
connection between two gateway devices, where there is a NAT device in front of one of
the SRX Series devices.

NAT Keep Alive Select appropriate keepalive interval in seconds. Range: 1 to 300.

If the VPN is expected to have large periods of inactivity, you can configure keepalive
values to generate artificial traffic to keep the session active on the NAT devices.

IPsec Settings

Protocol Select either Encapsulation Security Protocol (ESP) or Authentication Header (AH)
protocol from the list to establish VPN. Default value is ESP.

Encryption Select the encryption method. Default value is aes-256-gcm.

Algorithm
NOTE: This option is available only for the ESP protocol.

Authentication Select the IPsec authentication algorithm from the list. For example, hmac-md5-96—
Algorithm Produces a 128-bit digest and hmac-sha1-96—Produces a 160-bit digest.

NOTE: This option is available when the encryption algorithm is not gcm.

Perfect Forward Select Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) from the list. The device uses this method to
Secrecy generate the encryption key. Default value is group19.

PFS generates each new encryption key independently from the previous key. The higher
numbered groups provide more security, but require more processing time.

NOTE: group15, group16, and group21 support only the SRX5000 line of devices with
an SPC3 card and junos-ike package installed.

Lifetime Seconds Select the lifetime (in seconds) of an IPsec security association (SA). When the SA
expires, it is replaced by a new SA and security parameter index (SPI) or terminated.
Default is 3,600 seconds. Range: 180 through 86,400 seconds.
 634

Table 185: IKE and IPsec Settings (Continued)

Field Action

Lifetime Kilobytes Select the lifetime (in kilobytes) of an IPsec SA. Default is 128kb. Range: 64 through
4294967294.

Establish Tunnel Enable this option to establish the IPsec tunnel. IKE is activated immediately (default
value) after a VPN is configured and the configuration changes are committed.

Advanced Configuration

VPN Monitor Enable this option to use it in a destination IP address.

NOTE: This option is not available for Traffic Selectors routing mode.

Destination IP Enter the destination of the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) pings. The device
uses the peer's gateway address by default.

NOTE: This option is not available for Traffic Selectors routing mode.

Optimized Enable this option for the VPN object. If enabled, the SRX Series device only sends ICMP
echo requests (pings) when there is outgoing traffic and no incoming traffic from the
configured peer through the VPN tunnel. If there is incoming traffic through the VPN
tunnel, the SRX Series device considers the tunnel to be active and does not send pings
to the peer.

This option is disabled by default.

NOTE: This option is not available for Traffic Selectors routing mode.

Source Interface Select the source interface for ICMP requests from the list. If no source interface is
specified, the device automatically uses the local tunnel endpoint interface.

NOTE: This option is not available for Traffic Selectors routing mode.

Verify-path Enable this option to verify the IPsec datapath before the secure tunnel (st0) interface is
activated and route(s) associated with the interface are installed in the Junos OS
forwarding table.

This option is disabled by default.

NOTE: This option is not available for Traffic Selectors routing mode.
 635

Table 185: IKE and IPsec Settings (Continued)

Field Action

Destination IP Enter the destination IP address. Original, untranslated IP address of the peer tunnel
endpoint that is behind a NAT device. This IP address must not be the NAT translated IP
address. This option is required if the peer tunnel endpoint is behind a NAT device. The
verify-path ICMP request is sent to this IP address so that the peer can generate an
ICMP response.

NOTE: This option is not available for Traffic Selectors routing mode.

Packet size Enter the size of the packet that is used to verify an IPsec datapath before the st0
interface is brought up. Range: 64 to 1350 bytes. Default value is 64 bytes.

NOTE: This option is not available for Traffic Selectors routing mode.

Anti Replay IPsec protects against VPN attack by using a sequence of numbers built into the IPsec
packet—the system does not accept a packet with the same sequence number.

This option is enabled by default. The Anti-Replay checks the sequence numbers and
enforce the check, rather than just ignoring the sequence numbers.

Disable Anti-Replay if there is an error with the IPsec mechanism that results in out-of-
order packets, which prevents proper functionality.

Install Interval Select the maximum number of seconds to allow for the installation of a rekeyed
outbound security association (SA) on the device. Select a value from 1 to 10.

Idle Time Select the idle time interval. The sessions and their corresponding translations time out
after a certain period of time if no traffic is received. Range is 60 to 999999 seconds.

DF Bit Select how the device handles the Don't Fragment (DF) bit in the outer header:

• clear—Clear (disable) the DF bit from the outer header. This is the default.

• copy—Copy the DF bit to the outer header.

• set—Set (enable) the DF bit in the outer header.

 636

Table 185: IKE and IPsec Settings (Continued)

Field Action

Copy Outer DSCP This option enabled by default. This enables copying of Differentiated Services Code
Point (DSCP) (outer DSCP+ECN) from the outer IP header encrypted packet to the inner
IP header plain text message on the decryption path. Enabling this feature, after IPsec
decryption, clear text packets can follow the inner CoS (DSCP+ECN) rules.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPsec VPN Page | 613

IPsec VPN Global Settings | 616
Edit an IPsec VPN | 667
Delete an IPsec VPN | 668

Create a Remote Access VPN—Juniper Secure Connect

You are here: Network > VPN > IPsec VPN.

Juniper Secure Connect is Juniper’s client-based SSL-VPN solution that offers secure connectivity for
your network resources.

Juniper Secure Connect provides secure remote access for the users to connect to the corporate
networks and resources remotely using the Internet. Juniper Secure Connect downloads the
configuration from SRX Services devices and chooses the most effective transport protocols during
connection establishment to deliver a great administrator and user experience.

To create a remote access VPN for Juniper secure connect:

1. Choose Create VPN > Remote Access > Juniper Secure Connect on the upper right-side of the IPsec
VPN page.
The Create Remote Access (Juniper Secure Connect) page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 186 on page 637 through
Table 191 on page 650.
The VPN connectivity will change from grey to blue line in the topology to show that the
configuration is complete.
 637

3. Click Save to complete Secure Connect VPN Configuration and associated policy if you have selected
the auto policy creation option.
If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 186: Fields on the Create Remote Access (Juniper Secure Connect) Page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the remote access connection. This

name will be displayed as the end users realm name in
the Juniper Secure Connect Client.

Description Enter a description. This description will be used for

the IKE and IPsec proposals, policies, remote access
profile, client configuration, and NAT rule set.

During edit the IPsec policy description will be

displayed. IPsec policy and remote access profile
descriptions will be updated.

Routing Mode This option is disabled for the remote access.

Default mode is Traffic Selector (Auto Route Insertion).

Authentication Method Select an authentication method from the list that the
device uses to authenticate the source of Internet Key
Exchange (IKE) messages:

• Pre-shared Key (default method)—Specifies that a

preshared key, which is a secret key shared
between the two peers, is used during
authentication to identify the peers with each
other. The same key must be configured for each
peer. This is the default method.

• Certificate Based—Specifies the type of digital

signatures, which are certificates that confirm the
identity of the certificate holder.

The supported signature is rsa-signatures. rsa-

signatures specifies that a public key algorithm,
which supports encryption and digital signatures, is
used.
 638

Table 186: Fields on the Create Remote Access (Juniper Secure Connect) Page (Continued)

Field Action

Auto-create Firewall Policy If you select Yes, a firewall policy is automatically

created between internal zone and tunnel interface
zone with local protected networks as source address
and remote protected networks as destination address.

Another firewall policy will be created visa-versa.

If you choose No, you don’t have a firewall policy

option. You need to manually create the required
firewall policy to make this VPN work.

NOTE: If you do not want to auto-create a firewall

policy in the VPN workflow, then the protected
network is hidden for dynamic routing in both local and
remote gateway.

Remote User Displays the remote user icon in the topology. Click the
icon to configure the Juniper Secure Connect client
settings.

For more information on the fields, see Table 187 on

page 639.

NOTE: The J-Web UI displays the remote user's URL

once local gateway is configured.

Local Gateway Displays the local gateway icon in the topology. Click
the icon to configure the local gateway.

For more information on the fields, see Table 188 on

page 644.
 639

Table 186: Fields on the Create Remote Access (Juniper Secure Connect) Page (Continued)

Field Action

IKE and IPsec Settings Configure the custom IKE or IPsec proposal and the
custom IPsec proposal with recommended algorithms
or values.

For more information on the fields, see Table 191 on

page 650.

NOTE:

• J-Web supports only one custom IKE proposal and

does not support the predefined proposal-set.
Upon edit and save, J-Web deletes the predefined
proposal set if configured.

• On the remote gateway of the VPN tunnel, you

must configure the same custom proposal and
policy.

• Upon edit, J-Web shows the first custom IKE and

IPsec proposal when more than one custom
proposal is configured.

Table 187: Fields on the Remote User Page

Field Action

Default Profile Enable this option to use the configured VPN name as
remote access default profile.

NOTE:

• This option is not available if the default profile is

configured.

• You must enable the default profile. If not enabled,

configure the default profile under VPN > IPsec
VPN > Global Settings > Remote Access VPN.
 640

Table 187: Fields on the Remote User Page (Continued)

Field Action

Connection Mode Select one of the following options from the list to
establish the Juniper Secure Connect client
connection:

• Manual—You need manually connect to the VPN

tunnel every time you log in.

• Always—You are automatically connected to the

VPN tunnel every time you log in.

The default connection mode is Manual.

SSL VPN Enable this option to establish SSL VPN connection

from the Juniper Secure Connect Client to the SRX
Series device.

By default, this option is enabled.

NOTE: This is a fallback option when IPsec ports are

not reachable.

Biometric authentication Enable this option to authenticate the client system

using unique configured methods.

An authentication prompt is displayed when you

connect in the client system. The VPN connection will
only be initiated after successful authentication
through the method configured for Windows Hello
(fingerprint recognition, face recognition, PIN entry,
and so on).

Windows Hello must be preconfigured on the client

system if the Biometric authentication option is
enabled.
 641

Table 187: Fields on the Remote User Page (Continued)

Field Action

Dead Peer Detection Enable the dead peer detection (DPD) option to allow
the Juniper Secure Connect client to detect if the SRX
Series device is reachable.

Disable this option to allow the Juniper Secure

Connect client to detect till the SRX Series device
connection reachability is restored.

This option is enabled by default.

DPD Interval Enter the amount of time that the peer waits for traffic
from its destination peer before sending a dead-peer-
detection (DPD) request packet. The Range is 2
through 60 seconds and default is 60 seconds.

DPD Threshold Enter the maximum number of unsuccessful dead peer

detection (DPD) requests to be sent before the peer is
considered unavailable. The Range is 1 through 5 and
default is 5.

Certificates Enable Certificates to configure certificate options on

Secure Client Connect.

NOTE: This option is available only if you select the

Certificate Based authentication method.

Expiry Warning Enable this option to display the certificate expiry

warning on the Secure Connect Client.

This option is enabled by default.

NOTE: This option is available only if you enable

Certificates.
 642

Table 187: Fields on the Remote User Page (Continued)

Field Action

Warning Interval Enter the interval (days) at which the warning to be

displayed.

Range is 1 through 90. Default value is 60.

NOTE: This option is available only if you enable

Certificates.

Pin Req Per Connection Enable this option to enter the certificate pin on very
connection.

This option is enabled by default.

NOTE: This option is available only if you enable

Certificates.

EAP-TLS Enable this option for the authentication process.

IKEv2 requires EAP for user authentication. SRX Series
device cannot act as an EAP server. An external
RADIUS server must be used for IKEv2 EAP to do the
EAP authentication. SRX will act as a pass-through
authenticator relaying EAP messages between the
Juniper Secure Connect client and the RADIUS server.

This option is enabled by default.

NOTE: This option is available only if you select the

Certificate Based authentication method.

Windows Logon Enable this option to provide users to securely log on

to the Windows domain before logging on to the
Windows system. The client supports domain logon
using a credential service provider after establishing a
VPN connection to the company network.

Domain Name Enter the system domain name on to which the Users
Machine logs.
 643

Table 187: Fields on the Remote User Page (Continued)

Field Action

Mode Select one of the following options from the list to log
on to Windows domain.

• Manual—You must manually enter your logon data

on the Windows logon screen.

• Automatic—The client software transfers the data

entered here to the Microsoft logon interface
(Credential Provider) without your action.

Disconnect at Logoff Enable this option to shut down the connection when
the system switches to hibernation or standby mode.
When the system resumes from hibernation or standby
mode the connection has to be re-established.

Flush Credential at Logoff Enable this option to delete username and password
from the cache. You must reenter the username and
password.

Lead Time Duration Enter the lead time duration to initialize time between
network logon and domain logon.

After the connection is set up, the Windows logon will

only be executed after the initialization time set here
has elapsed.

EAP Authentication Enable this option to execute EAP authentication prior

to the destination dialog in the credential provider.
Then, system will ask for the necessary PIN, regardless
of whether EAP will be required for subsequent dial-in.

If this option is disabled, then EAP authentication will

be executed after the destination selection.
 644

Table 187: Fields on the Remote User Page (Continued)

Field Action

Auto Dialog Open Enable this option to select whether a dialog should
open automatically for connection establishment to a
remote domain.

If this option is disabled, then the password and PIN

for the client will only be queried after the Windows
logon.

Table 188: Fields on the Local Gateway Page

Field Action

Gateway is behind NAT Enable this option when the local gateway is behind a
NAT device.

NAT IP Address Enter the public (NAT) IP address of the SRX Series
device.

NOTE: This option is available only when Gateway is

behind NAT is enabled. You can configure an IPv4
address to reference the NAT device.

IKE ID This field is mandatory. Enter the IKE ID in the format

[email protected].

External Interface Select an outgoing interface from the list for which the
client will connect to.

The list contains all available IP addresses if more than

one IPv4 address is configured to the specified
interface. The selected IP address will be configured as
the local address under the IKE gateway.
 645

Table 188: Fields on the Local Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

Tunnel Interface Select an interface from the list for the client to
connect to.

Click Add to add a new interface. The Create Tunnel

Interface page appears. For more information on
creating a new tunnel interface, see Table 189 on page
649.

Click Edit to edit the selected tunnel interface.

Pre-shared Key Enter one of the following values of the preshared key:

• ascii-text—ASCII text key.

• hexadecimal—Hexadecimal key.

NOTE: This option is available if the authentication

method is Pre-shared Key.

Local certificate Select a local certificate from the list.

Local certificate lists only the RSA certificates.

To add a certificate, click Add. For more information on

adding a device certificate, see "Add a Device
Certificate" on page 236.

To import a certificate, click Import. For more

information on importing a device certificate, see
"Import a Device Certificate" on page 234.

NOTE: This option is available if the authentication

method is Certificated Based.
 646

Table 188: Fields on the Local Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

Trusted CA/Group Select a trusted Certificate Authority/group profile

from the list.

To add a CA profile, click Add CA Profile. For more

information on adding a CA profile, see "Add a
Certificate Authority Profile" on page 249.

NOTE: This option is available if the authentication

method is Certificated Based.

User Authentication This field is mandatory. Select the authentication

profile from the list that will be used to authenticate
user accessing the remote access VPN.

Click Add to create a new Profile. For more information

on creating a new access profile, see "Add an Access
Profile" on page 903.
 647

Table 188: Fields on the Local Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

SSL VPN Profile Select the SSL VPN Profile from the list that will be
used to terminate the remote access connections.

To create a new SSL VPN profile:

1. Click Add.

2. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter the name for an SSL VPN profile.

• Logging—Enable this option to log for SSL VPN.

• SSL Termination Profile—Select an SSL

termination profile from the list.

To add a new SSL termination profile:

a. Click Add.

The Create SSL Termination Profile page

appears.

b. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter a name for the SSL

termination profile.

• Server Certificate—Select a server

certificate from the list.

To add a certificate, click Add. For more

information on adding a device
certificate, see "Add a Device Certificate"
on page 236.

To import a certificate, click Import. For

more information on importing a device
certificate, see "Import a Device
Certificate" on page 234.
 648

Table 188: Fields on the Local Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

• Click OK.

c. Click OK.

3. Click OK.

Source NAT Traffic This option is enabled by default.

All traffic from the Juniper Secure Connect client is

NATed to the selected interface by default.

If disabled, you must ensure that you have a route from

your network pointing to the SRX Series devices for
handling the return traffic correctly.

Interface Select an interface from the list through which the

source NAT traffic pass through.

Protected Networks Click +. The Create Protected Networks page appears.

Create Protected Networks

Zone Select a security zone from the list that will be used as
a source zone in the firewall policy.

Global Address Select the addresses from the Available column and
then click the right arrow to move it to the Selected
column.

Click Add to select the networks the Client can

connect to.

The Create Global Address page appears. For more

information on the fields, see Table 190 on page 650.
 649

Table 188: Fields on the Local Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

Edit Select the protected network you want to edit and

click on the pencil icon.

The Edit Protected Networks page appears with

editable fields.

Delete Select the protected network you want to edit and

click on the delete icon.

The confirmation message pops up.

Click Yes to delete the protected network.

Table 189: Fields on the Create Tunnel Interface Page

Field Action

Interface Unit Enter the logical unit number.

Description Enter a description for the logical interface.

Zone Select a zone from the list to add it to the tunnel

interface.

This zone is used in the auto-creation of the firewall

policy.

Click Add to add a new zone. Enter zone name and

description and click OK on the Create Security Zone
page.

Routing Instance Select a routing instance from the list.

NOTE: The default routing instance, primary, refers to

the main inet.0 routing table in the logical system.
 650

Table 190: Fields on the Create Global Address Page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the global address. The name must be a unique string that must begin with an
alphanumeric character and can include colons, periods, dashes, and underscores; no spaces
allowed; 63-character maximum.

IP Type Select IPv4.

IPv4

IPv4 Address Enter a valid IPv4 address.

Subnet Enter the subnet for IPv4 address.

Table 191: IKE and IPsec Settings

Field Action

IKE Settings
NOTE: The following parameters are generated automatically and are not displayed in the J-Web UI:

• If the authentication method is Pre-Shared Key, the IKE version is v1, ike-user-type is shared-ike-id, and mode
is Aggressive.

• If the authentication method is Certificate Based, the IKE version is v2, ike-user-type is shared-ike-id, and
mode is Main.

Encryption Algorithm Select the appropriate encryption mechanism from the list.

Default value is AES-CBC 256-bit.

Authentication Algorithm Select the authentication algorithm from the list. For example, SHA 256-bit.

DH group A Diffie-Hellman (DH) exchange allows participants to generate a shared secret

value. Select the appropriate DH group from the list. Default value is group19.
 651

Table 191: IKE and IPsec Settings (Continued)

Field Action

Lifetime Seconds Select a lifetime duration (in seconds) of an IKE security association (SA).

Default value is 28,800 seconds. Range: 180 through 86,400 seconds.

Dead Peer Detection Enable this option to send dead peer detection requests regardless of whether there
is outgoing IPsec traffic to the peer.

DPD Mode Select one of the options from the list:

• optimized—Send probes only when there is outgoing traffic and no incoming data
traffic - RFC3706 (default mode).

• probe-idle-tunnel—Send probes same as in optimized mode and also when there

is no outgoing and incoming data traffic.

• always-send—Send probes periodically regardless of incoming and outgoing data

traffic.

DPD Interval Select an interval (in seconds) to send dead peer detection messages. The default
interval is 10 seconds. Range is 2 to 60 seconds.

DPD Threshold Select a number from 1 to 5 to set the failure DPD threshold.

This specifies the maximum number of times the DPD messages must be sent when
there is no response from the peer. The default number of transmissions is 5 times.

Advance Configuration (Optional)

NAT-T Enable this option for IPsec traffic to pass through a NAT device.

NAT-T is an IKE phase 1 algorithm that is used when trying to establish a VPN
connection between two gateway devices, where there is a NAT device in front of
one of the SRX Series devices.

NAT Keep Alive Select appropriate keepalive interval in seconds. Range: 1 to 300.

If the VPN is expected to have large periods of inactivity, you can configure keepalive
values to generate artificial traffic to keep the session active on the NAT devices.
 652

Table 191: IKE and IPsec Settings (Continued)

Field Action

IKE Connection Limit Enter the number of concurrent connections that the VPN profile supports.

Range is 1 through 4294967295.

When the maximum number of connections is reached, no more remote access user
(VPN) endpoints attempting to access an IPsec VPN can begin Internet Key Exchange
(IKE) negotiations.

IKEv2 Fragmentation This option is enabled by default. IKEv2 fragmentation splits a large IKEv2 message
into a set of smaller ones so that there is no fragmentation at the IP level.
Fragmentation takes place before the original message is encrypted and
authenticated, so that each fragment is separately encrypted and authenticated.

NOTE: This option is available if the authentication method is Certificated Based.

IKEv2 Fragment Size Select the maximum size, in bytes, of an IKEv2 message before it is split into
fragments.

The size applies to IPv4 message. Range: 570 to 1320 bytes.

Default value is 576 bytes.

NOTE: This option is available if the authentication method is Certificated Based.

IPsec Settings
NOTE: The authentication method is Pre-Shared Key or Certificate Based, it automatically generates protocol as
ESP.

Encryption Algorithm Select the encryption method. Default value is AES-GCM 256-bit.

Authentication Algorithm Select the IPsec authentication algorithm from the list. For example, HMAC-
SHA-256-128.

NOTE: This option is available when the encryption algorithm is not gcm.
 653

Table 191: IKE and IPsec Settings (Continued)

Field Action

Perfect Forward Secrecy Select Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) from the list. The device uses this method to
generate the encryption key. Default value is group19.

PFS generates each new encryption key independently from the previous key. The
higher numbered groups provide more security, but require more processing time.

NOTE: group15, group16, and group21 support only the SRX5000 line of devices
with an SPC3 card and junos-ike package installed.

Lifetime Seconds Select the lifetime (in seconds) of an IPsec security association (SA). When the SA
expires, it is replaced by a new SA and security parameter index (SPI) or terminated.
Default is 3,600 seconds. Range: 180 through 86,400 seconds.

Lifetime Kilobytes Select the lifetime (in kilobytes) of an IPsec SA. Default is 256kb. Range: 64 through
4294967294.

Advanced Configuration

Anti Replay IPsec protects against VPN attack by using a sequence of numbers built into the
IPsec packet—the system does not accept a packet with the same sequence number.

This option is enabled by default. The Anti-Replay checks the sequence numbers and
enforce the check, rather than just ignoring the sequence numbers.

Disable Anti-Replay if there is an error with the IPsec mechanism that results in out-
of-order packets, which prevents proper functionality.

Install Interval Select the maximum number of seconds to allow for the installation of a rekeyed
outbound security association (SA) on the device. Select a value from 1 to 10
seconds.

Idle Time Select the idle time interval. The sessions and their corresponding translations time
out after a certain period of time if no traffic is received. Range is 60 to 999999
seconds.
 654

Table 191: IKE and IPsec Settings (Continued)

Field Action

DF Bit Select how the device handles the Don't Fragment (DF) bit in the outer header:

• clear—Clear (disable) the DF bit from the outer header. This is the default.

• copy—Copy the DF bit to the outer header.

• set—Set (enable) the DF bit in the outer header.

Copy Outer DSCP This option enabled by default. This enables copying of Differentiated Services Code
Point (DSCP) (outer DSCP+ECN) from the outer IP header encrypted packet to the
inner IP header plain text message on the decryption path. Enabling this feature,
after IPsec decryption, clear text packets can follow the inner CoS (DSCP+ECN)
rules.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPsec VPN Page | 613

IPsec VPN Global Settings | 616
Edit an IPsec VPN | 667
Delete an IPsec VPN | 668

Create a Remote Access VPN—NCP Exclusive Client

You are here: Network > VPN > IPsec VPN.

The NCP Exclusive Remote Access Client is part of the NCP Exclusive Remote Access solution for
Juniper SRX Series Gateways. The VPN client is only available with NCP Exclusive Remote Access
Management. Use the NCP Exclusive Client to establish secure, IPsec-based data links from any location
when connected with SRX Series Gateways.

To create a remote access VPN for Juniper secure connect:

1. Choose Create VPN > Remote Access > NCP Exclusive Client on the upper right-side of the IPsec
VPN page.
The Create Remote Access (NCP Exclusive Client) page appears.
 655

2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 192 on page 655 through
Table 196 on page 663.
The VPN connectivity will change from grey to blue line in the topology to show that the
configuration is complete.
3. Click Save to save the changes.
If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 192: Fields on the Create Remote Access (NCP Exclusive Client) Page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the remote access connection. This

name will be displayed as the end users connection
name in the NCP exclusive client.

Description Enter a description. This description will be used for

the IKE and IPsec proposals, policies, remote access
profile, client configuration, and NAT rule set.

During edit the IPsec policy description will be

displayed. IPsec policy and remote access profile
descriptions will be updated.

Routing Mode This option is disabled for the remote access.

Default mode is Traffic Selector (Auto Route Insertion).

 656

Table 192: Fields on the Create Remote Access (NCP Exclusive Client) Page (Continued)

Field Action

Authentication Method Select an authentication method from the list that the
device uses to authenticate the source of Internet Key
Exchange (IKE) messages:

• Pre-shared Key (default method)—Specifies that a

preshared key, which is a secret key shared
between the two peers, is used during
authentication to identify the peers with each
other. The same key must be configured for each
peer. This is the default method.

• Certificate Based—Types of digital signatures,

which are certificates that confirm the identity of
the certificate holder.

The supported signature is rsa-signatures. rsa-

signatures specifies that a public key algorithm,
which supports encryption and digital signatures, is
used.

Auto-create Firewall Policy If you select Yes, a firewall policy is automatically

created between internal zone and tunnel interface
zone with local protected networks as source address
and remote protected networks as destination address.

Another firewall policy will be created visa-versa.

If you choose No, you don’t have a firewall policy

option. You need to manually create the required
firewall policy to make this VPN work.

NOTE: If you do not want to auto-create a firewall

policy in the VPN workflow, then the protected
network is hidden for dynamic routing in both local and
remote gateway.

Remote User Displays the remote user icon in the topology.

This option is disabled.

 657

Table 192: Fields on the Create Remote Access (NCP Exclusive Client) Page (Continued)

Field Action

Local Gateway Displays the local gateway icon in the topology. Click
the icon to configure the local gateway.

For more information on the fields, see Table 193 on

page 657.

IKE and IPsec Settings Configure the custom IKE or IPsec proposal and the
custom IPsec proposal with recommended algorithms
or values.

For more information on the fields, see Table 196 on

page 663.

NOTE:

• J-Web supports only one custom IKE proposal and

does not support the predefined proposal-set.
Upon edit and save, J-Web deletes the predefined
proposal set if configured.

• On the remote gateway of the VPN tunnel, you

must configure the same custom proposal and
policy.

• Upon edit, J-Web shows the first custom IKE and

IPsec proposal when more than one custom
proposal is configured.

Table 193: Fields on the Local Gateway Page

Field Action

Gateway is behind NAT Enable this option when the local gateway is behind a
NAT device.
 658

Table 193: Fields on the Local Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

NAT IP Address Enter the public (NAT) IP address of the SRX Series
device.

NOTE: This option is available only when Gateway is

behind NAT is enabled. You can configure an IPv4
address to reference the NAT device.

IKE ID This field is mandatory. Enter the IKE ID in the format

[email protected].

External Interface Select an outgoing interface from the list for which the
client will connect to.

The list contains all available IP addresses if more than

one IPv4 address is configured to the specified
interface. The selected IP address will be configured as
the local address under the IKE gateway.

Tunnel Interface Select an interface from the list for the client to
connect to.

Click Add to add a new interface. The Create Tunnel

Interface page appears. For more information on
creating a new tunnel interface, see Table 194 on page
662.

Click Edit to edit the selected tunnel interface.

Pre-shared Key Enter one of the following values of the preshared key:

• ascii-text—ASCII text key.

• hexadecimal—Hexadecimal key.

NOTE: This option is available if the authentication

method is Pre-shared Key.
 659

Table 193: Fields on the Local Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

Local certificate Select a local certificate from the list.

Local certificate lists only the RSA certificates.

To add a certificate, click Add. For more information on

adding a device certificate, see "Add a Device
Certificate" on page 236.

To import a certificate, click Import. For more

information on importing a device certificate, see
"Import a Device Certificate" on page 234.

NOTE: This option is available if the authentication

method is Certificated Based.

Trusted CA/Group Select a trusted Certificate Authority/group profile

from the list.

To add a CA profile, click Add CA Profile. For more

information on adding a CA profile, see "Add a
Certificate Authority Profile" on page 249.

NOTE: This option is available if the authentication

method is Certificated Based.

User Authentication This field is mandatory. Select the authentication

profile from the list that will be used to authenticate
user accessing the remote access VPN.

Click Add to create a new Profile. For more information

on creating a new access profile, see "Add an Access
Profile" on page 903.
 660

Table 193: Fields on the Local Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

SSL VPN Profile Select the SSL VPN Profile from the list that will be
used to terminate the remote access connections.

To create a new SSL VPN profile:

1. Click Add.

2. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter the name for an SSL VPN profile.

• Logging—Enable this option to log for SSL VPN.

• SSL Termination Profile—Select an SSL

termination profile from the list.

To add a new SSL termination profile:

a. Click Add.

b. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter a name for the SSL

termination profile.

• Server Certificate—Select a server

certificate from the list.

To add a certificate, click Add. For more

information on adding a device
certificate, see "Add a Device Certificate"
on page 236.

To import a certificate, click Import. For

more information on importing a device
certificate, see "Import a Device
Certificate" on page 234.

• Click OK.

c. Click OK.

3. Click OK.
 661

Table 193: Fields on the Local Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

Source NAT Traffic This option is enabled by default.

All traffic from the Juniper Secure Connect client is

NATed to the selected interface by default.

If disabled, you must ensure that you have a route from

your network pointing to the SRX Series devices for
handling the return traffic correctly.

Interface Select an interface from the list through which the

source NAT traffic pass through.

Protected Networks Click +. The Create Protected Networks page appears.

Create Protected Networks

Zone Select a security zone from the list that will be used as
a source zone in the firewall policy.

Global Address Select the addresses from the Available column and
then click the right arrow to move it to the Selected
column.

Click Add to select the networks the Client can

connect to.

The Create Global Address page appears. For more

information on the fields, see Table 195 on page 662.

Edit Select the protected network you want to edit and

click on the pencil icon.

The Edit Protected Networks page appears with

editable fields.
 662

Table 193: Fields on the Local Gateway Page (Continued)

Field Action

Delete Select the protected network you want to edit and

click on the delete icon.

The confirmation message pops up.

Click Yes to delete the protected network.

Table 194: Fields on the Create Tunnel Interface Page

Field Action

Interface Unit Enter the logical unit number.

Description Enter a description for the logical interface.

Zone Select a zone from the list to add it to the tunnel

interface.

This zone is used in the auto-creation of the firewall

policy.

Click Add to add a new zone. Enter zone name and

description and click OK on the Create Security Zone
page.

Routing Instance Select a routing instance from the list.

NOTE: The default routing instance, primary, refers to

the main inet.0 routing table in the logical system.

Table 195: Fields on the Create Global Address Page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the global address. The name must be a unique string that must begin with an
alphanumeric character and can include colons, periods, dashes, and underscores; no spaces
allowed; 63-character maximum.
 663

Table 195: Fields on the Create Global Address Page (Continued)

Field Action

IP Type Select IPv4.

IPv4

IPv4 Address Enter a valid IPv4 address.

Subnet Enter the subnet for IPv4 address.

Table 196: IKE and IPsec Settings

Field Action

IKE Settings
NOTE: The following parameters are generated automatically and are not displayed in the J-Web UI:

• If the authentication method is Pre-Shared Key, the IKE version is 1, ike-user-type is shared-ike-id, and mode
is Aggressive.

• If the authentication method is Certificate Based, the IKE version is 2, ike-user-type is group-ike-id, and mode
is Main.

Encryption Algorithm Select the appropriate encryption mechanism from the list.

Default value is AES-CBC 256-bit.

Authentication Algorithm Select the authentication algorithm from the list. For example, SHA 256-bit.

DH group A Diffie-Hellman (DH) exchange allows participants to generate a shared secret

value. Select the appropriate DH group from the list. Default value is group19.

Lifetime Seconds Select a lifetime duration (in seconds) of an IKE security association (SA).

Default value is 28,800 seconds. Range: 180 through 86,400 seconds.

 664

Table 196: IKE and IPsec Settings (Continued)

Field Action

Dead Peer Detection Enable this option to send dead peer detection requests regardless of whether there
is outgoing IPsec traffic to the peer.

DPD Mode Select one of the options from the list:

• optimized—Send probes only when there is outgoing traffic and no incoming data
traffic - RFC3706 (default mode).

• probe-idle-tunnel—Send probes same as in optimized mode and also when there

is no outgoing and incoming data traffic.

• always-send—Send probes periodically regardless of incoming and outgoing data

traffic.

DPD Interval Select an interval (in seconds) to send dead peer detection messages. The default
interval is 10 seconds. Range is 2 to 60 seconds.

DPD Threshold Select a number from 1 to 5 to set the failure DPD threshold.

This specifies the maximum number of times the DPD messages must be sent when
there is no response from the peer. The default number of transmissions is 5 times.

Advance Configuration (Optional)

NAT-T Enable this option for IPsec traffic to pass through a NAT device.

NAT-T is an IKE phase 1 algorithm that is used when trying to establish a VPN
connection between two gateway devices, where there is a NAT device in front of
one of the SRX Series devices.

NAT Keep Alive Select appropriate keepalive interval in seconds. Range: 1 to 300.

If the VPN is expected to have large periods of inactivity, you can configure keepalive
values to generate artificial traffic to keep the session active on the NAT devices.
 665

Table 196: IKE and IPsec Settings (Continued)

Field Action

IKE Connection Limit Enter the number of concurrent connections that the VPN profile supports.

Range is 1 through 4294967295.

When the maximum number of connections is reached, no more remote access user
(VPN) endpoints attempting to access an IPsec VPN can begin Internet Key Exchange
(IKE) negotiations.

IKEv2 Fragmentation This option is enabled by default. IKEv2 fragmentation splits a large IKEv2 message
into a set of smaller ones so that there is no fragmentation at the IP level.
Fragmentation takes place before the original message is encrypted and
authenticated, so that each fragment is separately encrypted and authenticated.

NOTE: This option is available if the authentication method is Certificated Based.

IKEv2 Fragment Size Select the maximum size, in bytes, of an IKEv2 message before it is split into
fragments.

The size applies to IPv4 message. Range: 570 to 1320 bytes.

Default value is 576 bytes.

NOTE: This option is available if the authentication method is Certificated Based.

IPsec Settings

Encryption Algorithm Select the encryption method. Default value is AES-GCM 256-bit.

Authentication Algorithm Select the IPsec authentication algorithm from the list. For example, HMAC-
SHA-256-128.

NOTE: This option is available when the encryption algorithm is not gcm.
 666

Table 196: IKE and IPsec Settings (Continued)

Field Action

Perfect Forward Secrecy Select Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) from the list. The device uses this method to
generate the encryption key. Default value is group19.

PFS generates each new encryption key independently from the previous key. The
higher numbered groups provide more security, but require more processing time.

NOTE: group15, group16, and group21 support only the SRX5000 line of devices
with an SPC3 card and junos-ike package installed.

Lifetime Seconds Select the lifetime (in seconds) of an IPsec security association (SA). When the SA
expires, it is replaced by a new SA and security parameter index (SPI) or terminated.
Default is 3,600 seconds. Range: 180 through 86,400 seconds.

Lifetime Kilobytes Select the lifetime (in kilobytes) of an IPsec SA. Default is 256kb. Range: 64 through
4294967294.

Advanced Configuration

Anti Replay IPsec protects against VPN attack by using a sequence of numbers built into the
IPsec packet—the system does not accept a packet with the same sequence number.

This option is enabled by default. The Anti-Replay checks the sequence numbers and
enforce the check, rather than just ignoring the sequence numbers.

Disable Anti-Replay if there is an error with the IPsec mechanism that results in out-
of-order packets, which prevents proper functionality.

Install Interval Select the maximum number of seconds to allow for the installation of a rekeyed
outbound security association (SA) on the device. Select a value from 1 to 10.

Idle Time Select the idle time interval. The sessions and their corresponding translations time
out after a certain period of time if no traffic is received. Range is 60 to 999999
seconds.
 667

Table 196: IKE and IPsec Settings (Continued)

Field Action

DF Bit Select how the device handles the Don't Fragment (DF) bit in the outer header:

• clear—Clear (disable) the DF bit from the outer header. This is the default.

• copy—Copy the DF bit to the outer header.

• set—Set (enable) the DF bit in the outer header.

Copy Outer DSCP This option enabled by default. This enables copying of Differentiated Services Code
Point (DSCP) (outer DSCP+ECN) from the outer IP header encrypted packet to the
inner IP header plain text message on the decryption path. Enabling this feature,
after IPsec decryption, clear text packets can follow the inner CoS (DSCP+ECN)
rules.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPsec VPN Page | 613

IPsec VPN Global Settings | 616
Edit an IPsec VPN | 667
Delete an IPsec VPN | 668

Edit an IPsec VPN

You are here: Network > VPN > IPsec VPN.

You can edit any of the following IPsec VPNs:

• Site-to-Site VPN

• Remote Access VPN (Juniper Secure Connect)

• Remote Access VPN (NCP Exclusive Client)

To edit IPsec VPN:

 668

NOTE:

• When the IKE status is up and if you edit the IPsec VPN, the topology diagram is shown in
green.

• All local gateway protected networks will form traffic selectors with all remote gateway
protected networks and vice-versa.

1. Select an existing IPsec VPN configuration that you want to edit on the IPsec VPN page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right-side of the page.
The edit page for the selected IPsec VPN page appears with editable fields. You can modify any
previous changes done to Site-to-Site VPN, Remote Access VPN (Juniper Secure Connect), and
Remote Access VPN (NCP Exclusive Client).
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

NOTE:

• During edit, Auto-create Firewall Policy and Gateway behind NAT options are not supported.
Gateway behind NAT is supported only for remote access VPN.

• The Source NAT Traffic option is only supported when creating remote access VPN. During
edit, this option is not supported.

• For Site-to-Site VPN, when the routing mode is Traffic Selector, the traffic selector creates the
complete mesh between the local and remote addresses.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Create a Site-to-Site VPN | 619

Create a Remote Access VPN—Juniper Secure Connect | 636
Create a Remote Access VPN—NCP Exclusive Client | 654
Delete an IPsec VPN | 668

Delete an IPsec VPN

You are here: Network > VPN > IPsec VPN.

 669

You can delete any of the VPN topologies.

To delete any IPsec VPN configurations:

1. Select existing an IPsec VPN configuration(s) that you want to delete on the IPsec VPN page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right-side of the page.
The Confirm Delete window appears.

NOTE:

• For Site-to-Site VPN, only the associated IPsec VPN routing configuration such as static
route or OSPF is deleted.

• Remote Access VPN default profile will be deleted only if the deleting VPN is configured
as default profile. You need to configure the default profile under VPN > IPsec VPN >
Global Settings > Remote Access VPN.

3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the configuration.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPsec VPN Page | 613

IPsec VPN Global Settings | 616
Create a Site-to-Site VPN | 619
Edit an IPsec VPN | 667
 670

CHAPTER 61

Manual Key VPN

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Manual Key VPN Page | 670

Add a Manual Key VPN | 671

Edit a Manual Key VPN | 674

Delete Manual Key VPN | 675

About the Manual Key VPN Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 670

Field Descriptions | 671

You are here: Network > VPN > Manual Key VPN.

Use this page to configure manual key VPN.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a manual key VPN. See "Add a Manual Key VPN" on page 671.

• Edit a manual key VPN. See "Edit a Manual Key VPN" on page 674.

• Delete a manual key VPN. See "Delete Manual Key VPN" on page 675.
 671

Field Descriptions

Table 197 on page 671 describes the fields on the Manual Key VPN page.

Table 197: Fields on the Manual Key VPN Page

Field Description

Name Displays the name of the manual tunnel.

Gateway Displays the selected gateway.

Bind Interface Displays the tunnel interface to which the route-based VPN is bound.

Df Bit Displays the DF bit in the outer header.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Manual Key VPN | 671

Edit a Manual Key VPN | 674
Delete Manual Key VPN | 675

Add a Manual Key VPN

You are here: Network > VPN > Manual Key VPN.

To add a manual key VPN:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Manual Key VPN page.
The Add Manual Key VPN page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 198 on page 672.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 672

Table 198: Fields on the Manual Key VPN Configuration Page

Field Action

VPN Manual Key

VPN Name Enter the VPN name for the IPsec tunnel.

Remote Gateway Enter the name for the remote gateway.

External Interface Select an interface from the list.

Protocol Select an option from the list to specify the types of protocols available for
configuration:

• ESP

• AH

SPI Enter a SPI value.

Range: 256 through 16639.

Bind to tunnel interface Select an interface from the list to which the route-based VPN is bound.

Do not fragment bit Select an option from the list to specify how the device handles the DF bit in the outer
header.

• clear—Clear (disable) the DF bit from the outer header. This is the default.

• Set—Set the DF bit to the outer header.

• copy—Copy the DF bit to the outer header.

Enable VPN Monitor Select this option to configure VPN monitoring.

Destination IP Enter an IP address for the destination peer.

 673

Table 198: Fields on the Manual Key VPN Configuration Page (Continued)

Field Action

Optimized Select the check box to enable optimization for the device to use traffic patterns as
evidence of peer liveliness. If enabled, ICMP requests are suppressed. This feature is
disabled by default.

Source Interface Enter a source interface for ICMP requests (VPN monitoring “hellos”). If no source
interface is specified, the device automatically uses the local tunnel endpoint interface.

Key Values

Authentication

Algorithm Specifies the hash algorithm that authenticates packet data. Select a hash algorithm
from the list:

• hmac-md5-96—Produces a 128-bit digest.

• hmac-sha1-96—Produces a 160-bit digest.

• hmac-sha-256-128

ASCII Text Select the ASCII Text option, and enter the key in the appropriate format.

Hexadecimal Select the Hexadecimal option, and enter the key in the appropriate format.

Encryption

Encryption Specifies the supported Internet Key Exchange (IKE) proposals. Select an option from
the list:

• 3des-cbc—3DES-CBC encryption algorithm.

• aes-128-cbc—AES-CBC 128-bit encryption algorithm.

• aes-192-cbc—AES-CBC 192-bit encryption algorithm.

• aes-256-cbc—AES-CBC 256-bit encryption algorithm.

• des-cbc—DES-CBC encryption algorithm.

 674

Table 198: Fields on the Manual Key VPN Configuration Page (Continued)

Field Action

ASCII Text Enable this option and enter the key in the appropriate format.

Hexadecimal Enable this option and enter the key in the appropriate format.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Manual Key VPN Page | 670

Edit a Manual Key VPN | 674
Delete Manual Key VPN | 675

Edit a Manual Key VPN

You are here: Network > VPN > Manual Key VPN.

To edit a manual key VPN:

1. Select the existing manual key VPN that you want to edit on the Manual Key VPN page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit a Manual Key VPN page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options,
see "Add a Manual Key VPN" on page 671.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Manual Key VPN Page | 670

Add a Manual Key VPN | 671
Delete Manual Key VPN | 675
 675

Delete Manual Key VPN

You are here: Network > VPN > Manual Key VPN.

To delete a manual key VPN:

1. Select a manual key VPN that you want to delete on the Manual Key VPN page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Manual Key VPN Page | 670

Add a Manual Key VPN | 671
Edit a Manual Key VPN | 674
 676

CHAPTER 62

Dynamic VPN

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Dynamic VPN Page | 676

Global Settings | 678

IPsec Template | 680

Add a Dynamic VPN | 681

Edit a Dynamic VPN | 682

Delete Dynamic VPN | 683

About the Dynamic VPN Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 676

Field Descriptions | 677

You are here: Network > VPN > Dynamic VPN.

You can view and add, edit, or delete dynamic VPN global configuration options.

NOTE: This menu is available only for SRX300 line of devices and SRX550M devices.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

 677

• Configure global settings. See "Global Settings" on page 678.

• Add DVPN IPsec template. See "IPsec Template" on page 680.

• Add a dynamic VPN. See "Add a Dynamic VPN" on page 681.

• Edit a dynamic VPN. See "Edit a Dynamic VPN" on page 682.

• Delete dynamic VPN. See "Delete Dynamic VPN" on page 683.

• Launch VPN wizard. To do this, click Launch Wizard available on the upper right corner of the
Dynamic VPN table. Follow the guided steps to configure the VPN wizard.

Field Descriptions

Table 199 on page 677 describes the fields on the Dynamic VPN page.

Table 199: Fields on the Dynamic VPN Page

Field Description

Access Profile Select a previously created access profile from the list displayed in Global Settings.

Specify the access profile to use for Extended Authentication for remote users trying to
download the Access Manager.

NOTE: This Access Profile option does not control authentication for VPN sessions. For
more information, see Add a Gateway and Add a VPN.

Client VPNs Create a client configuration for the dynamic VPN feature.

Name Enter a name for dynamic VPN.

User Enter an username. Specifies the list of users who can use this client configuration.

IP Address Enter an IP address and netmask for the users.

IPsec VPN Select a previously configured IKE AutoKey configuration from the list.
 678

Table 199: Fields on the Dynamic VPN Page (Continued)

Field Description

Remote Protected Enter an IP address and netmask of a resource behind the firewall. Traffic to the specified
Resources resource will go through the VPN tunnel and therefore will be protected by the firewall’s
security policies.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Global Settings | 678

Edit a Dynamic VPN | 682
Delete Dynamic VPN | 683

Global Settings

You are here: VPN > Dynamic VPN.

To add global settings:

1. Click Global Settings on the upper right side of the Resource Profiles page.
The DVPN - Global Settings page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 200 on page 678.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 200: Fields on the Global Settings page

Field Action

Access Profile Select an access profile from the list to use for Extended Authentication for remote
users trying to download the Access Manager.

Address Profile Settings

Address Pool Select an address pool from the list

 679

Table 200: Fields on the Global Settings page (Continued)

Field Action

+ Click + to add a new address pool.

The New Address Pool page appears.

New Address Pool

Name Enter a name for address pool.

Network Address Enter the network prefix for the address pool for IPv4 or IPv6 addresses.

Address Ranges

+ Click + to add the address range for DVPN.

Address Range Name Enter an address range name.

Lower Limit Enter the lower boundary for the IPv4 or IPv6 address range.

High Limit Enter the upper boundary for the IPv4 or IPv6 address range.

X Click X to delete the address ranges of DVPN.

XAUTH Attributes

Primary DNS Sever Enter the primary DNS IP address.

Secondary DNS Sever Enter the secondary DNS IP address.

Primary WINS Sever Enter the primary WINS IP address.

Secondary WINS Sever Enter the secondary WINS IP address.

 680

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Dynamic VPN Page | 676

IPsec Template | 680
Add a Dynamic VPN | 681

IPsec Template

You are here: VPN > Dynamic VPN.

To add a dynamic VPN IPsec template:

1. Click IPsec Template on the upper right side of the Dynamic VPN page.
The DVPN IPsec Template page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 201 on page 680.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 201: Fields on the DVPN IPsec Template Page

Field Action

Clone IPsec from DVPN template

Name Displays the name of the cloned DVPN template.

Preshared Key Enter the authorization key.

IKE ID Specify the IKE IDs for the DVPN.

External Interface Select the external interface from the list.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Dynamic VPN Page | 676

Global Settings | 678
Add a Dynamic VPN | 681
 681

Add a Dynamic VPN

You are here: Network > VPN > Dynamic VPN.

To add a dynamic VPN:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Dynamic VPN page.
The Add DVPN page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 202 on page 681.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 202: Fields on the DVPN Page

Field Action

Name Enter the name of the client configuration.

IPsec VPN Select a previously configured IKE AutoKey

configuration from the list to use when establishing the
VPN tunnel.

Access Users

Local Users in Profile Specifies the list of users who can use this client
configuration.

Select the users and click on the arrow button to move

to copy to DVPN.

NOTE: The server does not validate the names that

you enter here, but the names must be the names that
the users use to log in to the device when downloading
the client.

Users in DVPN Specifies the list of users copied from the local users in
profile or the newly added users.

Username Enter a username.

Password Enter a password for the username.

 682

Table 202: Fields on the DVPN Page (Continued)

Field Action

IP Enter an IP address for the user.

+ Click + and select Add to DVPN or Add to Both to add

the user to either in Users in DVPN or to both DVPN
and Local Users in Profile.

Remote Protected Resources Enter an IP address and net mask and click +. Specifies
the IP address and net mask of a resource behind the
firewall. Traffic to the specified resource will go
through the VPN tunnel and therefore will be
protected by the firewall’s security policies.

NOTE: The device does not validate that the IP/net

mask combination that you enter here matches up with
your security policies.

Remote Exceptions Enter an IP address and net mask and click +. Specifies
the IP address and net mask of exceptions to the
remote protected resources list.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Dynamic VPN Page | 676

Edit a Dynamic VPN | 682
Delete Dynamic VPN | 683

Edit a Dynamic VPN

You are here: Network > VPN > Dynamic VPN.

To edit a dynamic VPN setting:

1. Select the existing a dynamic VPN settings policy that you want to edit on the Dynamic VPN page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
 683

The Edit DVPN page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add a
Dynamic VPN" on page 681.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Dynamic VPN Page | 676

Global Settings | 678
IPsec Template | 680
Add a Dynamic VPN | 681

Delete Dynamic VPN

You are here: Network > VPN > Dynamic VPN.

To delete a dynamic VPN:

1. Select a dynamic VPN policy that you want to delete on the Dynamic VPN page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Dynamic VPN Page | 676

Global Settings | 678
IPsec Template | 680
Add a Dynamic VPN | 681
Edit a Dynamic VPN | 682
7 PART

Security Policies and Objects

Security Policies | 685

Zones/Screens | 711

Zone Addresses | 729

Global Addresses | 736

Services | 742

Dynamic Applications | 751

Application Tracking | 766

Schedules | 768

Proxy Profiles | 774

 685

CHAPTER 63

Security Policies

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Security Policies Page | 685

Global Options | 690

Add a Rule | 693

Clone a Rule | 709

Edit a Rule | 710

Delete Rules | 710

About the Security Policies Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 686

Field Descriptions | 689

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Security Policies.

Use this page to get a high-level view of your firewall policy rules settings. The security policy applies
the security rules to the transit traffic within a context (from-zone to to-zone). The traffic is classified by
matching its source and destination zones, the source and destination addresses, and the application
that the traffic carries in its protocol headers with the policy database in the data plane.

Using a global policy, you can regulate traffic with addresses and applications, regardless of their security
zones, by referencing user-defined addresses or the predefined address “any.” These addresses can span
multiple security zones.
 686

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add Global Options. See "Global Options" on page 690.

• Add a Rule. See "Add a Rule" on page 693.

• Edit a Rule. See "Edit a Rule" on page 710.

• Clone a Rule. See "Clone a Rule" on page 709.

• Delete a Rule. See "Delete Rules" on page 710.

• To save the rules configuration, click Save.

• To delete the rules configuration, click Discard.

• Drag and drop the rules within a zone context. To do this, select the rule you want to place in a
different sequence number within a zone context, drag and drop it using the cursor.

NOTE: If you drag and drop a rule outside the zone context, J-Web will display a warning
message that you cannot move the rule into another zone context.

• Advanced search for policy rule. To do this, use the search text box present above the table grid. The
search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. An example filter condition is
displayed in the search text box when you hover over the Search icon. When you start entering the
search string, the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace to delete a character of the search string.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

The supported search scenarios and its examples are as follows:

 687

1. Logical operators:

• AND operator for multiple parameters

Example: Name = Rule1 AND Dynamic Application = Malware

• OR operator for same and different parameters

Example for same parameters: Name = Rule1 OR Name = Rule2

Example for different parameters: Name = Rule1 OR Dynamic Application = Malware

• Combination of AND and OR operators

Example: Name = Rule1 AND (Dynamic Application = Malware OR Action = Reject)

• Comma (,) separated value

Example: Name = Rule1, Rule2

• != operator for single parameter

Example: Name != Rule1

2. Dynamic applications or service objects with matching characters of Junos

When you search for the matching characters of Junos, such as, jun, un, nos, and os, the result
displays all the matched objects but without junos prefix. For example, if the configured dynamic
application is junos:01NET, the search for dynamic applications with jun characters display only
01NET.

3. Saved policy rules

When you add or edit a rule, click Save to save the configuration. To search for this saved
configuration, you must wait for the device to synchronize the configuration.

• Show or hide columns in the policy rule table. To do this, click Show Hide Columns icon in the top
right corner of the policy rule table and select the columns you want to display or deselect the
columns you want to hide on the page.

Table 203 on page 688 describes few more options on Rules.

 688

Table 203: More Options on the Security Policies Page

Field Description

Create Rule Adds a new rule before the selected rule.

Before
To add a new rule before the selected rule:

1. Select an existing rule before which you want to create a rule.

2. Click More > Create Rule Before.

Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected rule and select Create Rule Before.

NOTE:

• When you create a new rule, it inherits the name, source zone, and destination zone same
as parent (selected) rule. Source address and destination address will be any and the action
will be Deny.

• For global policy, source zone and destination zone will not be available.

3. Click tick mark to create the new rule.

Create Rule Adds a new rule after the selected rule.

After
To add a new rule after the selected rule:

1. Select an existing rule after which you want to create a rule.

2. Click More > Create Rule After.

Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected rule and select Create Rule After.

NOTE:

• When you create a new rule, it inherits the name, source zone, and destination zone same
as parent (selected) rule. Source address and destination address will be any and the action
will be Deny.

• For global policy, source zone and destination zone will not be available.

3. Click tick mark to create the new rule.

Clone Clones or copies the selected firewall policy configuration and enables you to update the details of
the rule.

Clear All Clears the selection of those rules that are selected.
 689

Field Descriptions

Table 204 on page 689 describes the fields on the Security Policies page.

NOTE: On the Security Policies page:

• For logical systems and tenants, the URL Categories option will not be displayed.

• For tenants, the Dynamic Application option will not be displayed.

Table 204: Fields on the Security Policies Page

Field Description

Seq Displays the sequence number of rules in a zone pair.

Hits Displays the number of hits the rule has encountered.

Rule Name Displays the rule name.

You can hover over the name column to view the rule name and its description.

Source Zone Displays the source zone that is specified in the zone pair for the rule.

Source Address Displays the name of the source address or address set for the rule.

Source Identity Displays the user identity of the rule.

Destination Zone Displays the destination zone that is specified in the zone pair for the rule.

Destination Address Displays the name of the destination address or address set for the rule.

Dynamic Application Displays the dynamic application names for match criteria in application firewall rule set.

An application firewall configuration permits, rejects, or denies traffic based on the

application of the traffic.
 690

Table 204: Fields on the Security Policies Page (Continued)

Field Description

Services Displays the type of service for the destination of the rule.

URL Category Displays the URL category that you want to match criteria for web filtering category.

Action Displays the actions that need to take place on the traffic as it passes through the firewall.

Advanced Security Displays the security option that apply for this rule.

Rule Options Displays the rule option while permitting the traffic.

Schedule Displays the scheduler details that allow a policy to be activated for a specified duration.

You can define schedulers for a single (nonrecurrent) or recurrent time slot within which a
policy is active.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Global Options | 690

Global Options

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Security Policies.

To add global options:

1. Click Global Options available on the upper right side of the Security Policies page.
The Global Options page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 205 on page 691.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 205 on page 691 describes the fields on the Global Options page.
 691

Table 205: Fields on the Global Options Page

Field Action

Pre-id Default Policy

Session Timeout

ICMP Enter the timeout value for ICMP sessions ranging from 4 through 86400 seconds.

ICMP6 Enter the timeout value for ICMP6 sessions ranging from 4 through 86400 seconds.

OSPF Enter the timeout value for OSPF sessions ranging from 4 through 86400 seconds.

TCP Enter the timeout value for TCP sessions ranging from 4 through 86400 seconds.

UDP Enter the timeout value for UDP sessions ranging from 4 through 86400 seconds.

Others Enter the timeout value for other sessions ranging from 4 through 86400 seconds.

Logging

Session Initiate Enable this option to start logging at the beginning of a session.

WARNING: Configuring session-init logging for the pre-id-default-policy can

generate a large number of logs.

Session Close Enable this option to start logging at the closure of a session.

NOTE: Configuring session-close logging ensures that the SRX device generates the
security logs if a flow is unable to leave the pre-id-default-policy.

Flow

Aggressive Session Aging

NOTE: This option is not supported for logical systems and tenants.
 692

Table 205: Fields on the Global Options Page (Continued)

Field Action

Early Ageout Enter a value from 1 through 65,535 seconds. The default value is 20 seconds.

Specifies the amount of time before the device aggressively ages out a session from its
session table.

Low watermark Enter a value from 0 through 100 percent. The default value is 100 percent.

Specifies the percentage of session table capacity at which the aggressive aging-out
process ends.

High watermark Enter a value from 0 through 100 percent. The default value is 100 percent.

Specifies the percentage of session table capacity at which the aggressive aging-out
process begins.

SYN Flood Protection

SYN Flood Protection Enable this option to defend against SYN attacks.

Mode Select one of the following options:

• Cookie—Uses a cryptographic hash to generate a unique Initial Sequence Number

(ISN). This is enabled by default.

• Proxy—Uses a proxy to handle the SYN attack.

TCP MSS

All TCP Packets Enter a maximum segment size value from 64 through 65,535 to override all TCP
packets for network traffic.

Packets entering IPsec Enter a maximum segment size value from 64 through 65,535 bytes to override all
Tunnel packets entering an IPsec tunnel. The default value is 1320 bytes.

GRE Packets entering Enter a maximum segment size value from 64 through 65,535 bytes to override all
IPsec Tunnel generic routing encapsulation packets entering an IPsec tunnel. The default value is
1320 bytes.
 693

Table 205: Fields on the Global Options Page (Continued)

Field Action

GRE Packets exiting Enter a maximum segment size value from 64 through 65,535 bytes to override all
IPsec Tunnel generic routing encapsulation packets exiting an IPsec tunnel. The default value is
1320 bytes.

TCP Session

Sequence number By default, this option is enabled to check sequence numbers in TCP segments during
check stateful inspections. The device monitors the sequence numbers in TCP segments.

SYN flag check By default, this option is enabled to check the TCP SYN bit before creating a session.
The device checks that the SYN bit is set in the first packet of a session. If it is not set,
the device drops the packet.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Rule | 693

Add a Rule

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Security Policies.

NOTE: To reference the UTM policies and the AppQoS profiles in a security policy rules, create
UTM polices and AppQoS profiles before creating or editing security policy rules if required. To
create UTM policies, go to Security Services > UTM > UTM Policies and to create AppQoS
profiles, go to Network > Application QoS.

To add a rule:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Security Policies page.
The inline editable fields will appear.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 206 on page 694.
3. Click the tick icon on the right-side of the row once done with the configuration.
 694

NOTE: Scroll back the horizontal bar if the inline tick and the cancel icons are not available
when creating a new rule.

4. Click Save to save the changes or click Discard to discard the changes.

NOTE: You must perform Step 3 and Step 4 before performing any further actions in the J-
Web UI.

Table 206: Fields on the Security Policies Page

Field Action

Rule Name Enter a name for the new rule or policy.

Rule Description Enter a description for the security policy.

Global Policy Enable this option to specify that the policy defined is a global policy and zones are not
required.
 695

Table 206: Fields on the Security Policies Page (Continued)

Field Action

Source Zone To add sources:

1. Click +.

The Select Sources page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Zone—Select the source zone from the list to which you want the rule to be
associated.

• Addresses—Select any or Specific.

NOTE:

• Starting in Juons OS Release 21.4R1, you can select the IP feeds to define the
matching criteria for a policy. Also, you can view source type (Address,
Address group, Wild card, Range, IP feeds) in the new Type column.

• Feeds are only displayed if you have enrolled to Juniper ATP Cloud. You can
also download the feeds using the command, request services security-
intelligence download.

To select a specific address or IP feed, select the addresses or IP feeds from the
Available column and then click the right arrow to move it to the Selected
column. You can select Exclude Selected to exclude only the selected address
from the list.

To create a new address, click +. The Create Address page appears. For more
information on fields, see Table 207 on page 704.

• Source identity—Select the user identity from the Available column and then click
the right arrow to move it to the Selected column.

To create a source identity, click +. Enter a new username or identity in the

Create Source Identity page and click OK.

• Source identity feed—Starting in Juons OS Release 21.4R1, you can select user
identity threat feed to define the matching criteria for a policy.

Select the user identity threat feed from the Available column and then click the
right arrow to move it to the Selected column.
 696

Table 206: Fields on the Security Policies Page (Continued)

Field Action

Maximum user identity threat feed count is 1024. That is, sum of source identity
feed and destination identity feed per policy.

NOTE: Feeds are only displayed if you have enrolled to Juniper ATP Cloud. You
can also download the feeds using the command, request services security-
intelligence download.
 697

Table 206: Fields on the Security Policies Page (Continued)

Field Action

Destination Zone To add a destination:

1. Click +.

The Select Destination page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Zone—Select the destination zone from the list to which you want the rule to be
associated.

• Addresses—Select any or Specific.

NOTE:

• Starting in Juons OS Release 21.4R1, you can select the IP feeds to define the
matching criteria for a policy. Also, you can view source type (Address,
Address group, Wild card, Range, IP feeds) in the new Type column.

• Feeds are only displayed if you have enrolled to Juniper ATP Cloud. You can
also download the feeds using the command, request services security-
intelligence download.

To select a specific address or IP feed, select the addresses or IP feeds from the
Available column and then click the right arrow to move it to the Selected
column. You can select Exclude Selected to exclude only the selected address
from the list.

To create a new address, click +. For more information on fields, see Table 207 on
page 704.

• Dynamic applications—Select Any, Specific, or None.

NOTE: The Dynamic Applications option is not supported for tenants.

To select a specific application, select the application from the Available column
and then click the right arrow to move it to the Selected column.

NOTE: The select all check box is only available when you search for specific
dynamic applications.
 698

Table 206: Fields on the Security Policies Page (Continued)

Field Action

To create a new application, click +. The Create Application Signature page

appears. For more information on fields, see "Add Application Signatures" on
page 757.

NOTE: For logical systems, you cannot create a dynamic application inline.

• Services—Select Any, Specific, or None.

To select a specific service, select the service from the Available column and then
click the right arrow to move it to the Selected column.

To create a new service, click +. The Create Service page appears. For more
information on fields, see Table 208 on page 705.

• URL category—Select any, Specific, or None to match criteria for a web filtering
category.

To select a specific URL category, select the URL category from the Available
column and then click the right arrow to move it to the Selected column.

NOTE: This option is not available for logical systems and tenants.

• Destination identity feed—Starting in Juons OS Release 21.4R1, you can select

user identity threat feed to define the matching criteria for a policy.

Select the user identity threat feed from the Available column and then click the
right arrow to move it to the Selected column.

Maximum user identity threat feed count is 1024. That is, sum of source identity
feed and destination identity feed per policy.

NOTE: Feeds are only displayed if you have enrolled to Juniper ATP Cloud. You
can also download the feeds using the command, request services security-
intelligence download.

Action Select an action to take when traffic matches the criteria:

• Permit—Allows packet to pass through the firewall.

• Deny—Block and drop the packet, but do not send notification back to the source.

• Reject—Block and drop the packet and send a notice to the source host.
 699

Table 206: Fields on the Security Policies Page (Continued)

Field Action

Advanced Services
Click +. The Select Advanced Services page appears.

NOTE:

• When the action is Reject:

• You can configure only the SSL Proxy and Redirect Profile options.

• You can configure only the SSL Proxy option if the dynamic application is None.

• Advanced Security option is not supported for logical systems and tenants.

• When the action is Permit:

• For logical systems, only IPS, IPS policy, UTM, threat prevention policy, ICAP redirect profile, and AppQOS
options are supported.

• For tenant systems, only threat prevention policy and AppQOS are supported.

SSL proxy Select the SSL proxy policy to associate with this rule from the list.

UTM Select the UTM policy you want to associate with this rule from the list. The list displays
all the UTM policies available.

If you want to create a new UTM policy, click Add New. The Create UTM Policies page
appears. For more information on creating a new UTM policy, see "Add a UTM Policy"
on page 835.

IPS policy Select the IPS policy from the list.

Threat prevention Select the configured threat prevention policy from the list.
policy

ICAP redirect profile Select the configured ICAP redirect profile name from the list.
 700

Table 206: Fields on the Security Policies Page (Continued)

Field Action

IPsec VPN Select the IPsec VPN tunnel from the list.

NOTE: If you select Dynamic applications in the destination, IPsec VPN option is not
supported.

Pair policy name Enter the name of the policy with the same IPsec VPN in the opposite direction to
create a pair policy.

NOTE: If you select Dynamic applications in the destination, Pair Policy Name option is
not supported.

Application QoS Select the configured AppQoS profile from the list.
profile
If you want to create a new AppQoS profile, click Add New. The Add AppQoS Profile
page appears. For more information on creating a new AppQoS profile, see "Add an
Application QoS Profile" on page 606.

Threat profiling Starting in Juons OS Release 21.4R1, you can enable this option to generate threat
profiling feeds.

NOTE: Feeds are only displayed if you have enrolled to Juniper ATP Cloud. You can also
download the feeds using the command, request services security-intelligence
download.

You can add source and destination addresses, and source and destination identities to
the threat feeds. After the feeds are generated, you can configure other security policies
to use the feeds to match designated traffic and perform policy actions.

• Add source IP to feed—Select the threat feed from the list to add it to the source IP
address.

• Add source identity to feed—Select the threat feed from the list to add it to the
source user identity.

• Add destination IP to feed—Select the threat feed from the list to add it to the
destination IP address.

• Add destination identity to feed—Select the threat feed from the list to add it to the
destination user identity.
 701

Table 206: Fields on the Security Policies Page (Continued)

Field Action

Packet capture Enable to capture unknown application traffic specific to a security policy rule.

By default, this option is disabled. Once enabled, you can view the packet capture
(PCAP) file details or download the PCAP file on the Monitor > Log > Sessions page.

Rule Options
Click on Rule Options. The SELECT RULE OPTIONS page appears.

Logging

Session initiate Enable this option to log an event when a session is created.

Session close Enable this option to log an event when the session closes.

Count Enable this option to collect statistics of the number of packets, bytes, and sessions that
pass through the firewall with this policy.

Specifies statistical counts. An alarm is triggered whenever traffic exceeds specified

packet and byte thresholds.

NOTE: Alarm threshold fields are disabled if Enable Count is not enabled.

Authentication
NOTE:

• If you select Dynamic applications in the destination, Authentication option is not supported.

• This option is not supported for logical systems and tenant systems.

Push auth entry to Enable this option to push authentication entries from firewall authentication, that are
JIMS in auth-success state, to Juniper Identity Management Server (JIMS). This will enable
the SRX device to query JIMS to get IP/user mapping and device information.

This is not a mandatory option. You can select it when at least one domain is configured
on local Active Directory or configure identity management.
 702

Table 206: Fields on the Security Policies Page (Continued)

Field Action

Type Select the firewall authentication type from the list. The options available are: None,
Pass-through, User-firewall, and Web-authentication.

Access profile Select an access profile from the list.

NOTE: This option is not supported if you select the authentication type as Web-
authentication.

Client name Enter the client username or client user group name.

NOTE: This option is not supported if you select the authentication type as User-
firewall.

Domain Select a domain name that must be in a client name from the list.

NOTE: This option is supported only if you select the authentication type as User-
firewall.

Web redirect (http) Enable this option to redirect HTTP requests to the device’s internal webserver by
sending a redirect HTTP response to the client system to reconnect to the webserver
for user authentication.

NOTE: This option is not supported if you select the authentication type as Web-
authentication.

Captive portal Enable this option to redirect a client HTTP or HTTPS request to the internal HTTPS
webserver of the device. The HTTPS client requests are redirected when SSL
termination profile is configured.

NOTE: This option is not supported if you select the authentication type as Web-
authentication.

Interface Select an interface for the webserver where the client HTTP or HTTPS request is
redirected.

NOTE: You cannot edit this once the policy is created. To edit the interface, go to
Network > Connectivity > Interfaces.
 703

Table 206: Fields on the Security Policies Page (Continued)

Field Action

IPv4 address Enter IPv4 address of the webserver where the client HTTP or HTTPS request is
redirected.

NOTE: You cannot edit this once the policy is created. To edit the interface, go to
Network > Connectivity > Interfaces.

SSL termination Select an SSL termination profile from the list which contains the SSL terminated
profile connection settings. SSL termination is a process where the SRX Series device acts as an
SSL proxy server, terminates the SSL session from the client.

To add a new SSL termination profile:

1. Click Add.

The Create SSL Termination Profile page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter SSL termination profile name; 63-character maximum.

• Server certificate—Select a server certificate from the list that is used to

authenticate the server identity.

To add a certificate, click Add. For more information on adding a device

certificate, see "Add a Device Certificate" on page 236.

To import a certificate, click Import. For more information on importing a device

certificate, see, "Import a Device Certificate" on page 234.

Auth only browser Enable this option to drop non-browser HTTP traffic to allow for captive portal to be
presented to unauthenticated users who request access using a browser.

NOTE: This option is not supported if you select the authentication type as Web-
authentication.

User agents Enter a user-agent value which is used to verify that the user’s browser traffic is HTTP/
HTTPS traffic.

NOTE: This option is not supported if you select the authentication type as Web-
authentication.

Advanced Settings
 704

Table 206: Fields on the Security Policies Page (Continued)

Field Action

Destination address Select the action to be taken on a destination address translation from the list. The
translation options available are: None, Drop Translated, and Drop Untranslated.

Redirect options Select a redirect action from the list. The options available are: None, Redirect Wx, and
Reverse Redirect Wx.

NOTE: This option is not supported for SRX5000 line of devices.

TCP Session Options

Sequence number Enable or disable checking of sequence numbers in TCP segments during stateful
check inspections at policy rule level. By default, the check happens at the global level. To
avoid commit failure, turn off Sequence number check under Global Options > Flow >
TCP Session.

SYN flag check Enable or disable the checking of the TCP SYN bit before creating a session at policy
rule level. By default, the check happens at the global level. To avoid commit failure, turn
off SYN flag check under Global Options > Flow > TCP Session.

Schedule

Schedule Click Schedule and select one of the configured schedules from the list.

To add a new schedule, click Add New Schedule. The Add New Schedule page appears.
For more information on creating a new schedule, see Table 209 on page 707.

Table 207: Fields on the Create Address Page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the address. The name must be a unique string that must begin with an
alphanumeric character and can include colons, periods, dashes, and underscores; no spaces
allowed; 63-character maximum.

IP type Select IPv4 or IPv6.

 705

Table 207: Fields on the Create Address Page (Continued)

Field Action

IPv4

IPv4 address Enter a valid IPv4 address.

Subnet Enter a subnet mask for the IPv4 address.

IPv6

IPv6 address Enter a valid IPv6 address.

Subnet prefix Enter a subnet prefix for the IPv6 address.

Table 208: Fields on the Create Service Page

Field Action

Global Settings

Name Enter a unique name for the application.

Description Enter description of the application.

Application protocol Select an option from the list for application protocol.

Match IP protocol Select an option from the list to match IP protocol.

Source port Select an option from the list for source port.

Destination port Select an option from the list for destination port.

ICMP type Select an option from the list for ICMP message type.
 706

Table 208: Fields on the Create Service Page (Continued)

Field Action

ICMP code Select an option from the list for ICMP message code.

RPC program numbers Enter a value for RPC program numbers.

The format of the value must be W or X-Y. Where, W, X, and Y are integers between 0
and 65535.

Inactivity timeout Select an option from the list for application specific inactivity timeout.

UUID Enter a value for DCE RPC objects.

NOTE: The format of the value must be 12345678-1234-1234-1234-123456789012.

Custom application Select an application set name from the list.

group

Terms
Click +. The Create Term page appears.

Name Enter a name for the term.

ALG Select an option from the list for ALG.

Match IP protocol Select an option from the list to match IP protocol.

Source port Select an option from the list for source port.

Destination port Select an option from the list for destination port.

ICMP type Select an option from the list for ICMP message type.

ICMP code Select an option from the list for ICMP message code.
 707

Table 208: Fields on the Create Service Page (Continued)

Field Action

RPC program numbers Enter a value for RPC program numbers.

NOTE: The format of the value must be W or X-Y. Where, W, X, and Y are integers
between 0 and 65535.

Inactivity timeout Select an option from the list for application specific inactivity timeout.

UUID Enter a value for DCE RPC objects.

NOTE: The format of the value must be 12345678-1234-1234-1234-123456789012.

Table 209: Fields on the Add New Schedule Page

Field Action

Name Enter the name for the schedule.

Description Enter a description for the schedule.

Repeats Select an option from the list to repeat the schedule:

• Never

• Daily

• Weekly

All Day Enable this option to schedule an event for an entire day.

This option is available only for Never and Daily repeat type schedule.

Start date Select the schedule start date in the YYYY-MM-DD format.

This option is available only for Never repeat type schedule.

 708

Table 209: Fields on the Add New Schedule Page (Continued)

Field Action

Stop date Select the schedule stop date in the YYYY-MM-DD format.

This option is available only for Never repeat type schedule.

Start time Enter the start time for the schedule in HH:MM:SS 24 hours format.

This option is available only for Daily repeat type schedule.

Stop time Enter the end time for the schedule in HH:MM:SS 24 hours format.

This option is available only for Daily repeat type schedule.

Repeat on Select the days and time on which you want to repeat the schedule.

To set time for the selected day(s):

1. Click Set Time or Set Time to Selected Days.

The Set Time to Selected Days page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Name—Displays the day(s) you have selected.

• All day—Enable this option for the event to run for the entire day.

• Start time—Enter the start time in HH:MM:SS 24 hours format.

• Stop time—Enter the stop time in HH:MM:SS 24 hours format.

3. Click OK to save changes.

This option is available only for Weekly repeat type schedule.

 709

Table 209: Fields on the Add New Schedule Page (Continued)

Field Action

Schedule criteria Select any of the following options:

• Schedule Never Stops—Schedule can be active forever (recurrent), but only as specified by
the daily or weekly schedule.

• Schedule Specify Window—Schedule can be active during a single time slot, as specified
by a start date and a stop date.

Enter the following details:

• Schedule starts—Enter the schedule start date in the YYYY-MM-DD format.

• Schedule ends—Enter the schedule start date in the YYYY-MM-DD format.

This option is available only for Daily and Weekly repeat type schedule.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Rule | 710

Clone a Rule | 709

Clone a Rule

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Security Policies.

To clone a rule:

1. Select a rule that you want to clone on the Security Policies page.
2. Click More > Clone available on the upper right-side of the page.
The Security Policies page appears with inline editable fields. For more information on editing the
fields, see "Add a Rule" on page 693.
3. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.
A cloned rule is created for the selected rule. By default, the name of the cloned rule is in the format:
<rule name>_clone.
 710

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Rules | 710

Edit a Rule

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Security Policies.

To edit a rule:

1. Select an existing rule configuration that you want to edit on the Security Policies page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right-side of the page.
The Security Policies page appears with inline editable fields. For more information on editing the
fields, see "Add a Rule" on page 693.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Rules | 710

Delete Rules

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Security Policies.

To delete a rule:

1. Select one or more rules that you want to delete on the Security Policies page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right-side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete the rules or click No to retain the rules.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Security Policies Page | 685

 711

CHAPTER 64

Zones/Screens

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Zones/Screens Page | 711

Add a Zone | 713

Edit a Zone | 716

Delete Zone | 716

Add a Screen | 716

Edit a Screen | 727

Delete Screen | 728

About the Zones/Screens Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 711

Field Descriptions | 712

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Zones/Screens.

Use this page to configure zones and screens.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a Zone. See "Add a Zone" on page 713.

• Edit a Zone. See "Edit a Zone" on page 716.

 712

• Delete Zone. See "Delete Zone" on page 716.

• Add a Screen. See "Add a Screen" on page 716.

• Edit a Screen. See "Edit a Screen" on page 727.

• Delete Screen. See "Delete Screen" on page 728.

Field Descriptions

Table 210 on page 712 describes the fields on Zones/Screens page.

Table 210: Fields on Zones/Screens Page

Field Description

Zone List

Zone name Displays the name of the zone.

Type Displays the type of zone.

Host-inbound Services Displays the services that permit inbound traffic.

Host-inbound Protocols Displays the protocol that permit inbound traffic.

Interfaces Displays the interfaces that are part of this zone.

Screen Displays name of the option objects applied to the zone.

Description Displays a description of the zone.

Screen List

Screen name Displays the name of the screen object.

Type Displays the type of screen.

 713

Table 210: Fields on Zones/Screens Page (Continued)

Field Description

Description Displays a description of the screen.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Zone | 713

Add a Zone

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Zones/Screens.

To add a zone:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Zone List page.
The Add Zone page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 211 on page 713.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 211: Fields on the Add Zone page

Field Action

Main

Zone name Enter a name for the zone.

Zone description Enter a description for the zone.

Zone type Select a zone type: Security or Functional.

Application Select the check box to enable application tracking support for the zone.
Tracking
 714

Table 211: Fields on the Add Zone page (Continued)

Field Action

Source Identity Select the check box to enable it to trigger user identity logging when that zone is used as
Log the source zone (from-zone) in a security policy.

Traffic Control Enter the following details:

Options
• Send RST for Non Matching Session—Select the check box to enable this option.

Specifies that when the reset feature is enabled, the system sends a TCP segment with
the RESET flag set when traffic arrives. This does not match an existing session and does
not have the Synchronize flag set.

• Binding Screen—Select a binding screen from the list.

NOTE: If you have already configured screens, the list shows the screen names and
allows you to select or delete a screen.

Interfaces Select interfaces from the Available column and move it to the Selected column using the
arrow to include in the security zone.

Starting in Junos OS Release 19.4R1, J-Web supports Wi–Fi Mini-PIM for SRX320, SRX340,
SRX345, and SRX550M devices. The physical interface for the Wi-Fi Mini-PIM uses the
name wl-x/0/0, where x identifies the slot on the services gateway where the Mini-PIM is
installed.

Host inbound traffic - Zone

Protocols Specifies the protocols that permit inbound traffic of the selected type to be transmitted to
hosts within the zone.

Select the protocols from the Available column and move it to the Selected column using
the right arrow.

Select all to permit all protocols.

NOTE: To deselect protocols, select the protocols in the Selected column and then use the
left arrow to move them to the Available column.
 715

Table 211: Fields on the Add Zone page (Continued)

Field Action

Services Specifies the interface services that permit inbound traffic of the selected type to be
transmitted to hosts within the zone.

Select the services from the Available column and move it to the Selected column using the
right arrow.

Select all to permit all services.

NOTE: To deselect services, select the services in the Selected column and then use the left
arrow to move them to the Available column.

Host inbound traffic - Interface

Selected Displays the list of selected interfaces.

Interfaces

Interface Services Specifies the interfaced services that permit inbound traffic from the selected interface to
be transmitted to hosts within the zone.

Select the interface services from the Available column and move it to the Selected column
using the right arrow. Select all to permit all interface services.

NOTE: If you select multiple interfaces, the existing interface services and protocols are
cleared and are applied to the selected interfaces.

Interface Specifies the interfaced protocols that permit inbound traffic from the selected interface to
Protocols be transmitted to hosts within the zone.

Select the interface protocols from the Available column and move it to the Selected
column using the right arrow. Select all to permit all interface protocols.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Zone | 716

 716

Edit a Zone

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Zones/Screens.

To edit a zone:

1. Select an existing zone configuration that you want to edit on the Zones/Screens page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Zone List page.
The Edit Zone page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add a
Zone" on page 713.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Zone | 716

Delete Zone

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Zones/Screens.

To delete a zone:

1. Select a zone that you want to delete on the Zones/Screens page.

2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Zone List page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Screen | 716

Add a Screen

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Zones/Screens.

To add a screen:
 717

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Screen List page.
The Add Screen page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 212 on page 717.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 212 on page 717 describes the fields on the Add Screen page.

Table 212: Fields on the Add Screen Page

Field Action

Main

Screen name Enter a name for the screen object.

Screen description Enter a description for the screen object.

Generate alarms Select the check box to enable this feature.

without dropping
packet

IP spoofing Select the check box to enable this feature.

Specifies that you can enable IP address spoofing. IP spoofing is when a false source
address is inserted in the packet header to make the packet appear to come from a trusted
source.

IP sweep Select the check box to enable this feature.

Specifies the number of ICMP address sweeps. An IP address sweep can occur with the
intent of triggering responses from active hosts.

Threshold Enter the time interval for an IP sweep.

NOTE: If a remote host sends ICMP traffic to 10 addresses within this interval, an IP
address sweep attack is flagged and further ICMP packets from the remote host are
rejected.
Range: 1000 through 1000000 microseconds. The default value is 5000 microseconds.
 718

Table 212: Fields on the Add Screen Page (Continued)

Field Action

Port scan Select the check box to enable this feature.

Specifies the number of TCP port scans. The purpose of this attack is to scan the available
services in the hopes that at least one port will respond, thus identifying a service to target.

Threshold Enter the time interval for a TCP port scan.

NOTE: If a remote host scans 10 ports within this interval, a port scan attack is flagged and
further packets from the remote host are rejected.
Range: 1000 through 1000000 microseconds. The default value is 5000 microseconds.

MS-Windows WinNuke attack protection—Select the check box to enable this feature.
Defense
NOTE: WinNuke is a DoS attack targeting any computer on the Internet running Windows
operating system.

IPv6 Check Enter the following details:

• Malformed IPv6—Select this check box to enable the IPv6 malformed header intrusion
detection service (IDS) option.

• Malformed ICMPv6—Select this check box to enable the ICMPv6 malformed IDS
option.

Denial of Service

Land attack Select the check box to enable this feature.

protection
NOTE: Land attacks occur when an attacker sends spoofed SYN packets containing the IP
address of the victim as both the destination and source IP address.

Teardrop attack Select the check box to enable this feature.

protection
NOTE: Teardrop attacks exploit the reassembly of fragmented IP packets.

ICMP fragment Select the check box to enable this feature.

protection
NOTE: ICMP packets contain very short messages. There is no legitimate reason for ICMP
packets to be fragmented.
 719

Table 212: Fields on the Add Screen Page (Continued)

Field Action

Ping of death Select the check box to enable this feature.

attack protection
NOTE: A ping of death occurs when IP packets are sent that exceed the maximum legal
length (65,535 bytes).

Large size ICMP Select the check box to enable this feature.
packet protection

Block fragment Select the check box to enable this feature.

traffic

SYN-ACK-ACK Select the check box to enable this feature.

proxy protection

Threshold Enter the threshold value for SYN-ACK-ACK proxy protection.

NOTE: The range is from 1 through 250000 sessions. The default value is 512 sessions.

Anomalies
 720

Table 212: Fields on the Add Screen Page (Continued)

Field Action

IP Enter the following details:

• Bad option—Select the check box to specify the number of bad options counter.

• Security—Select the check box to enable the method for hosts to send security.

• Unknown protocol—Select the check box to enable the IP address with security option.

• Strict source route—Select the check box to enable the complete route list for a packet
to take on its journey from source to destination.

• Source route—Select the check box to enable this feature.

Specifies the number of IP addresses of the devices set at the source that an IP
transmission is allowed to take on its way to its destination.

• Timestamp—Select the check box to enable the time recorded (in UTC) when each
network device receives the packet during its trip from the point of origin to its
destination.

• Stream—Select the check box to enable a method for the 16-bit SATNET stream
identifier to be carried through networks that do not support streaming.

• Loose source route—Select the check box to enable a partial route list for a packet to
take on its journey from source to destination.

• Record route—Select the check box to enable that IP addresses of network devices
along the path that the IP packet travels can be recorded.
 721

Table 212: Fields on the Add Screen Page (Continued)

Field Action

TCP Enter the following details:

• SYN Fragment Protection—Select the check box to enable the number of TCP SYN
fragments.

• SYN and FIN Flags Set Protection—Select the check box to enable the number of TCP
SYN and FIN flags.

NOTE: When you enable this option, Junos OS checks if the SYN and FIN flags are set
in TCP headers. If it discovers such a header, it drops the packet.

• FIN Flag Without ACK Flag Set Protection—Select the check box to enable the number
of TCP FIN flags set without an ACK flag set.

• TCP Packet Without Flag Set Protection—Select the check box to enable the number of
TCP headers without flags set.

NOTE: A normal TCP segment header has at least one flag control set.

Flood Defense

Limit sessions from Enter the range within which the sessions are limited from the same source IP.
the same source
Range: 1 through 50000 sessions.

Limit sessions from Enter the range within which the sessions are limited from the same destination IP. The
the same range is from 1 through 50000 sessions.
destination
Range: 1 through 8000000 sessions per second. The default value is 128 sessions.

ICMP flood Select the check box to enable the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) flood
protection counter.

NOTE: An ICMP flood typically occurs when ICMP echo requests use all resources in
responding, such that valid network traffic can no longer be processed.

Threshold Enter the threshold value for ICMP flood protection.

NOTE: Range: 1 through 4000000 ICMP pps.

 722

Table 212: Fields on the Add Screen Page (Continued)

Field Action

UDP flood Select the check box to enable the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) flood counter.
protection
NOTE: UDP flooding occurs when an attacker sends IP packets containing UDP datagrams
to slow system resources, such that valid connections can no longer be handled.

Threshold Enter the threshold value for UDP flood protection.

NOTE: Range: 1 through 100000 session. The default value is 1000 sessions.
 723

Table 212: Fields on the Add Screen Page (Continued)

Field Action

UDP allowlist 1. Click Select.

The UDP Allowlist window appears.

2. Click + to add IP addresses that you wish to allowlist.

The Add Allowlist window appears.

3. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter a Name to identify the group of IP addresses.

• IPv4/IPv6 Address—Enter IPv4 or IPv6 address.

• IPv4/IPv6 Address(es)—Lists the address that you have entered.

NOTE: You can select the IP address and click X to delete it.

4. Click OK to save the changes.

5. Select the allowlist name in the UDP Allowlist page that you associated with the group
of IP addresses that you entered in the Add Allowlist window from the Available column
and move it to the Selected column using the right arrow.

6. Click OK to save the changes.

NOTE:

• The UDP Allowlist option is enabled only if you select UDP flood protection.

• The allowlist that you created in the UDP Allowlist window will be available in the TCP
Allowlist window also for selection.

To edit an allowlist in the UDP Allowlist page, select the allowlist name and click on the
pencil icon.

To delete an allowlist in the UDP Allowlist page, select the allowlist name and click on the
delete icon.

SYN flood Select the check box to enable all the threshold and ager timeout options.
protection
Specifies that SYN flooding occurs when a host becomes so overwhelmed by SYN
segments initiating incomplete connection requests that it can no longer process legitimate
connection requests.
 724

Table 212: Fields on the Add Screen Page (Continued)

Field Action

TCP allowlist 1. Click Select.

The TCP Allowlist window appears.

2. Click + to add IP addresses that you wish to allowist.

The Add Allowlist window appears.

3. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter a Name to identify the group of IP addresses.

• IPv4/IPv6 Address—Enter IPv4 or IPv6 address.

• IPv4/IPv6 Address(es)—Lists the address that you have entered.

NOTE: You can select the IP address and click X to delete it.

4. Click OK to save the changes.

5. Select the allowlist name in the TCP Allowlist page that you associated with the group
of IP addresses that you entered in the Add Allowlist window from the Available column
and move it to the Selected column using the right arrow.

6. Click OK to save the changes.

NOTE:

• The TCP Allowlist option is enabled only if you select SYN flood protection.

• The allowlist that you created in the TCP allowlist window will be available in the UDP
Allowlist window also for selection.

To edit a allowlist in the TCP Allowlist page, select the allowlist name and click on the
pencil icon.

To delete a allowlist in the TCP Allowlist page, select the allowlist name and click on the
delete icon.

Attack threshold Enter a value to specify the number of SYN packets per second required to trigger the SYN
proxy mechanism.

NOTE: Range: 1 through 1000000 proxied requests per second. The default attack
threshold value is 625 pps.
 725

Table 212: Fields on the Add Screen Page (Continued)

Field Action

Alarm threshold Enter a value to specify the number of half-complete proxy connections per second at
which the device makes entries in the event alarm log.

NOTE: Range: 1 through 1000000 segments per second. The default alarm threshold value
is 250 pps.

Source threshold Enter a value to specify the number of SYN segments received per second from a single
source IP address (regardless of the destination IP address and port number), before the
device begins dropping connection requests from that source.

NOTE: Range: 4 through 1000000 segments per second. The default source threshold
value is 25 pps.

Destination Enter a value to specify the number of SYN segments received per second for a single
threshold destination IP address before the device begins dropping connection requests to that
destination. If a protected host runs multiple services, you might want to set a threshold
based only on destination IP address, regardless of the destination port number.

NOTE: Range: 4 through 1000000 segments per second. The default destination threshold
value is 0 pps.

Ager timeout Enter a value to specify the maximum length of time before a half-completed connection is
dropped from the queue. You can decrease the timeout value until you see any
connections dropped during normal traffic conditions.

Range: 1 through 50 seconds. The default value is 20 seconds.

NOTE: 20 seconds is a reasonable length of time to hold incomplete connection requests.

IPv6 EXT Header

 726

Table 212: Fields on the Add Screen Page (Continued)

Field Action

Predefined Header Configure the following screen options:

Type
• Hop-by-Hop header—Select an option from the list and enter the value and click + to
add it.

To delete, select one or more headers and click X.

• Destination header—Select an option from the list and enter the value and click + to
add it.

To delete, select one or more headers and click X.

Routing header Select the check box to enable the IPv6 routing header screen option.

ESP header Select the check box to enable the IPv6 Encapsulating Security Payload header screen
option.

No-Next header Select the check box to enable the IPv6 no next header screen option.

Mobility header Select the check box to enable the IPv6 mobility header screen option.

Fragment header Select the check box to enable the IPv6 fragment header screen option.

AH header Select the check box to enable the IPv6 Authentication Header screen option.

Shim6 header Select the check box to enable the IPv6 shim header screen option.

HIP header Select the check box to enable the IPv6 Host Identify Protocol header screen option.

Customer Defined Enter a value to define the type of header range and click + to add it.
Header Type
Range: 0 through 255.

To delete, select one or more header types and click X.

 727

Table 212: Fields on the Add Screen Page (Continued)

Field Action

IPv6 ext header Enter a value to set the number of IPv6 extension headers that can pass through the
limit screen.

Range: 0 through 32.

Apply to Zones

Apply to Zones Select zones from the Available column and move them to the Selected column using the
right arrow.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Screen | 727

Edit a Screen

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Zones/Screens.

To edit a screen:

1. Select an existing screen that you want to edit on the Zones/Screens page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Screen List page.
The Edit Screen page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add a
Screen" on page 716.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Screen | 728

 728

Delete Screen

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Zones/Screens.

To delete a screen:

1. Select a screen that you want to delete on the Zones/Screens page.

2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Screen List page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Zones/Screens Page | 711

 729

CHAPTER 65

Zone Addresses

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Zone Addresses Page | 729

Add Zone Addresses | 731

Clone Zone Addresses | 733

Edit Zone Addresses | 734

Delete Zone Addresses | 734

Search Text in a Zone Addresses Table | 734

About the Zone Addresses Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 729

Field Descriptions | 730

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Zone Addresses.

Use this page to configure zone address or address set.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add addresses or address sets. See "Add Zone Addresses" on page 731.

• Edit addresses or address sets. See "Edit Zone Addresses" on page 734.

• Delete addresses or address sets. See "Delete Zone Addresses" on page 734.
 730

• Clone addresses or address sets. See "Clone Zone Addresses" on page 733.

• View the details of addresses or address sets—To do this, select the address or address set for which
you want to view the details and follow the available options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Click the detailed view icon available to the left of the selected address or address set.

• Deselect the selected address or address set. To do this, click More and select Clear All Selections.

• Search text in the Addresses table. See "Search Text in a Zone Addresses Table" on page 734.

• Show or hide columns in the Web filtering profiles table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns
icon in the top right corner of the Web filtering profiles table and select the options you want to view
or deselect the options you want to hide on the page.

Field Descriptions

Table 213 on page 730 describes the fields on the Zone Addresses page.

Table 213: Fields on the Zone Addresses Page

Field Description

Addresses

Zone Displays the zone name to which the address is applied.

Name Displays the address name.

Type Displays the selected address type.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the zone address.

Description Displays the description of the address.

Address Sets

Zone Displays the zone name to which the address set is applied.
 731

Table 213: Fields on the Zone Addresses Page (Continued)

Field Description

Name Displays the address sets name.

Type Displays the selected address type.

Address List Displays the preexisting addresses that should be included from the address set.

Address Set List Displays the preexisting addresses that should be included from the list.

Description Displays the description of the address set.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add Zone Addresses | 731

Add Zone Addresses

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Zone Addresses.

To create a zone address or address set:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Zone Addresses page.
The Create Addresses page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 214 on page 731.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 214: Fields on the Create Addresses Page

Field Action

Object Type Select an option from the list: Address or Address Group.
 732

Table 214: Fields on the Create Addresses Page (Continued)

Field Action

Addresses or Address Sets

Zone Select a zone from the list to which the address is applied.

Name Enter the address name.

Description Enter the description for the address.

Type Select an option from the list: Host, Range, or DNS host.

Host IP Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address.

NOTE: This option is available if you have selected Host type.

Start Address Enter the start IPv4 or IPv6 address.

NOTE: This option is available if you have selected Range type.

End Address Enter the end IPv4 or IPv6 address.

NOTE: This option is available if you have selected Range type.

DNS Name Enter a domain hostname.

The string must include alphanumeric characters, periods, dashes, no spaces are allowed
and must end with an alphanumeric character.

NOTE: This option is available if you have selected DNS Host type.

Address Sets Displays the address set name. Select the address set.

Create Address Set Enter the address set name and click + to add the address set in the Address Sets.

Address Set Name Enter a name for address set.

NOTE: This option is available if you have selected Address Group for Object type.
 733

Table 214: Fields on the Create Addresses Page (Continued)

Field Action

Description Enter a description for address set.

NOTE: This option is available if you have selected Address Group for Object type.

Address List Specifies which of the preexisting addresses should be included or excluded from the
address set.

Select the addresses from the list in the Available column and then click the right arrow to
move it to the Selected column.

NOTE: This option is available if you have selected Address Group for Object type.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit Zone Addresses | 734

Clone Zone Addresses

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Zone Addresses.

To clone a zone address or address set:

1. Select an existing zone address or address set that you want to clone and select Clone from the More
link.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Zone Addresses page.
The Clone Addresses page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see
"Add Zone Addresses" on page 731.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Zone Addresses | 734

 734

Edit Zone Addresses

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Zone Addresses.

To edit a zone address or address set:

1. Select an existing zone address or address set that you want to edit on the Zone Addresses page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Zone Addresses page.
The Edit Addresses page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add
Zone Addresses" on page 731.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Zone Addresses | 734

Delete Zone Addresses

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Zone Addresses.

To delete a zone address or address set:

1. Select a zone address or address set that you want to delete on the Zone Addresses page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Zone Addresses page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Search Text in a Zone Addresses Table | 734

Search Text in a Zone Addresses Table

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Zone Addresses.

You can use the search icon in the top right corner of the Zone Addresses page to search for text
containing letters and special characters on that page.
 735

To search for text:

1. Click the search icon and enter partial text or full text of the keyword in the search bar.
The search results are displayed.
2. Click X next to a search keyword or click Clear All to clear the search results.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Zone Addresses Page | 729

 736

CHAPTER 66

Global Addresses

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Global Addresses Page | 736

Add an Address Book | 737

Edit an Address Book | 741

Delete Address Book | 741

About the Global Addresses Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 736

Field Descriptions | 737

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Global Addresses.

Use this page to configure global address books for security policies.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add an Address Book. See "Add an Address Book" on page 737.

• Edit an Address Book. See "Edit an Address Book" on page 741.

• Delete an Address Book. See "Delete Address Book" on page 741.

 737

• Upgrade the old zone-based address book to global address books. To do this, click Upgrade available
on the right-side corner of the Global Addresses table. Click Yes to proceed with the upgrade to
global address books and click OK.

Field Descriptions

Table 215 on page 737 describes the fields on the Global Addresses Page.

Table 215: Fields on the Global Addresses Page

Field Description

Address Book Name Displays the address book name.

Attached Zone Displays the name of the zone that is attached to the address book.

Global Displays information about the predefined address book.

The global address book is available by default to all security zones. You do not
need to attach a security zone to the global address book.

Address/Address-Set Name Displays the addresses and address sets associated with the selected address
book.

Address Value Displays the IP address.

Address-Set Members Displays the addresses in an address set.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add an Address Book | 737

Add an Address Book

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Global Addresses.

To add an address book:

 738

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Global Addresses page.
The Add Address Book page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 216 on page 738.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 216: Fields on the Global Addresses Page

Field Action

Address Book Enter a name for the address book.

Name

Address Book Enter a description for the address book.

Description

Attach Zones You can select more than one zone from the list for one address book.

NOTE: Ensure that each zone has only one address book attached to it. If there is more than
one address book attached to a zone, you will get the following error when you commit the
configuration.
Security zone must be unique in address books.

Addresses
 739

Table 216: Fields on the Global Addresses Page (Continued)

Field Action

+ To add an address:

1. Click + available at the upper right side of the Addresses table.

The Add Address page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Address Name—Enter a name for the address.

• Description—Enter a description for the address.

• Address Type—Select one of the following address types from the list:

• IP Address

• Wildcard Address

• Domain Name

• Ranged Address

• Value—Enter an address that matches the selected address type.

3. Click OK to save the changes.

Edit To edit an address:

1. Select an existing address and click the pencil icon available at the upper right side of the
Addresses table.

The Add Address page appears with editable fields.

2. Click OK to save the changes.

Delete Select an existing address and click the delete (X) icon available at the upper right side of the
Addresses table to delete it.

Address Set
 740

Table 216: Fields on the Global Addresses Page (Continued)

Field Action

+ To add an address set:

1. Click + available at the upper right side of the Addresses table.

The Add Address Set page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Address Set Name—Enter a name for the address set.

• Description—Enter a description for the address set.

• Address List—Select the address from the list in the Available column and then click
the right arrow to move it to the Selected column.

Specifies which of the preexisting addresses should be included or excluded from the
address set.

• Address Set List—Select the address sets from the list in the Available column and then
click the right arrow to move it to the Selected column.

Specifies which of the preexisting address sets should be included or excluded from
the list.

3. Click OK to save the changes.

Edit To edit an address set:

1. Select an existing address and click the pencil icon available at the upper right side of the
Address Set table.

The Add Address Set page appears with editable fields.

2. Click OK to save the changes.

Delete Select an existing address set and click the delete (X) icon available at the upper right side of
the Address Set table to delete it.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit an Address Book | 741

 741

Edit an Address Book

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Global Addresses.

To edit an address book:

1. Select an existing address book that you want to edit on the Global Addresses page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Global Addresses page.
The Edit Address Book page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see
"Add an Address Book" on page 737.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Address Book | 741

Delete Address Book

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Global Addresses.

To delete an address book:

1. Select an existing address book that you want to delete on the Global Addresses page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Global Addresses page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Global Addresses Page | 736

 742

CHAPTER 67

Services

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Services Page | 742

Add a Custom Application | 744

Edit a Custom Application | 747

Delete Custom Application | 747

Add an Application Group | 748

Edit an Application Group | 749

Delete Application Group | 750

About the Services Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 742

Field Descriptions | 743

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Services.

Use services in policies to manage applications across devices.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a custom application. See "Add a Custom Application" on page 744.

• Edit a custom application. See "Edit a Custom Application" on page 747.

 743

• Delete custom application. See "Delete Custom Application" on page 747.

• Add an application group. See "Add an Application Group" on page 748.

• Edit an application group. See "Edit an Application Group" on page 749.

• Delete an application group. See "Delete Application Group" on page 750.

Field Descriptions

Table 217 on page 743 describes the fields on the Services Page.

Table 217: Fields on the Services Page

Field Description

Custom-Applications

Application Name Displays the custom application name.

Application Description Displays a description of the custom application.

Application-Protocol Displays the custom application protocol.

IP-Protocol Displays the custom network protocol.

Source-Port Displays the custom source port identifier.

Destination-Port Displays the custom destination port identifier.

Pre-defined Applications

Application Name Displays the predefined application name.

Application-Protocol Displays the predefined application protocol.

IP-Protocol Displays the predefined network protocol.

 744

Table 217: Fields on the Services Page (Continued)

Field Description

Source-Port Displays the predefined source port identifier.

Destination-Port Displays the predefined destination port identifier.

Application Group

Application Group Name Displays the application group name.

Members Displays members in the set.

Description Displays a description of the application group.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Custom Application | 744

Add a Custom Application

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Services.

To add a custom application:

1. Click the Custom-Applications tab.

2. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Services page.
The Add an Application page appears.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 218 on page 745.
4. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 745

Table 218: Fields on the Add an Application Page

Field Action

Global

Application Name Enter a custom application name.

Application Description Enter a description for the custom application.

Application-protocol Select a custom application protocol from the list.

Match IP protocol Select a custom network protocol from the list.

Destination Port Select a custom destination port identifier from the list.

Source Port Select a custom source port identifier from the list.

Inactivity-timeout Enter a value from 4 through 86400.

Specifies the length of time (in seconds) that the application is inactive before it
times out.

RPC-program-number Enter a remote procedure call value from 0 through 65535.

Match ICMP message code Select an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) message code value from the
list.

Match ICMP message type Select an Internet Control Message Protocol message type value from the list.

UUID Enter a universal unique identifier (UUID).

Application Group Select an option from the list.

Specifies the set to which this application belongs.

Terms
 746

Table 218: Fields on the Add an Application Page (Continued)

Field Action

Add Click +.

The Add new term page appears.

Term Name Enter an application term name.

ALG Select an option from the list.

Specifies the Application Layer Gateway (ALG) for the application protocol.

Match IP protocol Select a network protocol from the list.

Destination Port Enter the destination port identifier.

Source Port Specifies the source port identifier.

Inactivity-timeout Enter a value from 4 through 86400.

Specifies the length of time (in seconds) that the application is inactive before it
times out.

RPC-program-number Enter a remote procedure call value from 0 through 65535.

Match ICMP message code Select an ICMP message code value from the list.

Match ICMP message type Select an ICMP message type value from the list.

UUID Select an option from the list.

Specifies the set to which this application belongs.

Edit Select a term and click the pencil icon at the right corner of the table to modify the
configuration.
 747

Table 218: Fields on the Add an Application Page (Continued)

Field Action

Delete Select a term and click the delete (X) icon at the right corner of the table to delete
the selected term.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Custom Application | 747

Edit a Custom Application

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Services.

To edit a custom application:

1. Click the Custom-Applications tab.

2. Select an existing application that you want to edit on the Services page.
3. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Services page.
The Edit an Application page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see
"Add a Custom Application" on page 744.
4. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Custom Application | 747

Delete Custom Application

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Services.

To delete a custom application:

1. Click the Custom-Applications tab.

 748

2. Select an application that you want to delete on the Services page.

3. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Services page.
A confirmation message window appears.
4. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Custom Application | 744

Add an Application Group | 748

Add an Application Group

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Services.

To add an application group:

1. Click the Application Group tab.

2. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Application Group page.
The Add New Application Set page appears.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 219 on page 748.
4. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 219: Fields on the Add New Application Set Page

Field Action

Application Group Enter a name for application group.

Name

Description Enter a description for application group.

 749

Table 219: Fields on the Add New Application Set Page (Continued)

Field Action

Application Using the right arrow, select values from Applications out of this set and move them to
Applications in this set.

NOTE:

• Enter the application name in the search box and press Enter to search for the required
application.

• Click Clear to remove the selected applications from the list of Applications in this set
column.

Application Group Using the right arrow, select values from Application groups out of this group and move
them to Application groups in this group.

NOTE:

• Enter the application name in the search box and press Enter to search for the required
application.

• Click Clear to remove the selected applications from the list of Application groups in this
group column.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit an Application Group | 749

Edit an Application Group

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Services.

To edit an application group:

1. Click the Application Group tab.

2. Select an existing application group that you want to edit on the Services page.
3. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Services page.
The Edit Application Set page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see
"Add an Application Group" on page 748.
 750

4. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Application Group | 750

Delete Application Group

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Services.

To delete an application group:

1. Click the Application Group tab.

2. Select an application group name that you want to delete on the Services page.
3. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Services page.
A confirmation message window appears.
4. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Services Page | 742

 751

CHAPTER 68

Dynamic Applications

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Dynamic Applications Page | 751

Global Settings | 754

Add Application Signatures | 757

Clone Application Signatures | 762

Add Application Signatures Group | 763

Edit Application Signatures | 764

Delete Application Signatures | 764

Search Text in an Application Signatures Table | 765

About the Dynamic Applications Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 752

Field Descriptions | 753

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Dynamic Applications.

Use this page to create, modify, clone, and delete application signature groups. You can view the details
of predefined application signatures that are already downloaded.

All enabled and disabled application signatures on the device are displayed in a grid format. A message
Once a new custom application signature is created or modified, the configuration is committed immediately to the
device. is displayed at the top of the page.
 752

A status message is displayed just above the grid. It shows the version number of the installed
application, the latest version available, and whether you have downloaded or installed an application
package.

Installed application package version : 0 | Latest version 3207 available | No application

package is downloaded yet

NOTE: If you successfully download an application package, the Install button is displayed. If you
successfully install a downloaded application package, an Uninstall button is displayed.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Global Settings. See "Global Settings" on page 754.

• Create application signatures. See "Add Application Signatures" on page 757.

• Create application signatures group. See "Add Application Signatures Group" on page 763.

• Edit application signatures. See "Edit Application Signatures" on page 764.

• Delete application signatures. See "Delete Application Signatures" on page 764.

• Clone application signatures. See "Clone Application Signatures" on page 762.

• Search text in an application signature. See "Search Text in an Application Signatures Table" on page
765.

• View the details of application signatures—To do this, select the application signature for which you
want to view the details and follow the available options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Right-click on the selected application signature profile and select Detailed View.

• Mouse over to the left of the selected application signature and click Detailed View.

• Filter the application signatures based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top
right-hand corner of the application signatures table. The columns in the grid change to accept filter
options. Type the filter options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.
 753

• Show or hide columns in the application signature profiles table. To do this, click the Show Hide
Columns icon in the top right corner of the application signatures table and select the options you
want to view or deselect the options you want to hide on the page.

• More—Clone an existing application signature package, create group, or configure the page to show a
detailed view.

• Create Group—Create a new application signature or application signatures group.

Field Descriptions

Table 220 on page 753 describes the fields on the Application Signatures page.

Table 220: Fields on the Application Signatures Page

Field Description

Name Displays the application signature name.

Object Type Displays the application signature object type.

Category Specifies the category of the application signature.

Subcategory Specifies the subcategory of the application signature.

Risk Displays the risk as critical, high, moderate, low, or unsafe.

Characteristic Specifies the characteristic of the application signature.

Predefined or Custom Displays the predefined or custom application signatures and settings that are
configured on your device.

Status Displays the status of the application signature.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Global Settings | 754

 754

Add Application Signatures | 757

Add Application Signatures Group | 763
Edit Application Signatures | 764
Delete Application Signatures | 764
Clone Application Signatures | 762
Search Text in an Application Signatures Table | 765

Global Settings

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Dynamic Applications.

To add global settings:

1. Click the Global Settings on the upper right side of the Application Signatures page.
The Global Settings page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 221 on page 754.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 221: Fields on the Global Settings Option Page

Field Action

General

Custom Application Byte Select the byte limit in the range 0 through 10000. This helps in understanding
Limit when to stop the identification of custom applications.

Micro Applications Enable micro-application detection in application identification and then use them
as matching criteria in a security policy.

Application System Cache

Enable or disable storing of AI result in application cache, configure ASC security services, configure
miscellaneous services such as ABPR, or set the cache entry timeout.

Application Cache Enable this option to save the mapping between an application type and the
corresponding destination IP address, destination port, protocol type, and service.
 755

Table 221: Fields on the Global Settings Option Page (Continued)

Field Action

Security Services Enable this option for security services, such as security policies, application firewall
(AppFW), Juniper ATP Cloud, IDP, and UTM

Miscellaneous Services Enable this option for miscellaneous services, such as APBR and AppTrack.

Cache entry timeout Enter the timeout value in seconds for the application system cache (ASC) entries.

Range: 0 through 1000000 seconds. Default is 3600 seconds.

Packet Capture

Global packet capture Enable packet capture globally to capture all unknown application traffic.

You can also enable this option specific to a security policy at the rule level. For
more information, see "Add a Rule" on page 693.

Aggressive mode Enable to capture all traffic before AppID classifies the applications. In this mode,
the system captures all application traffic regardless of the application system cache
(ASC) entry. Packet capture starts for the first packet of the first session.

Exclude inconclusive Disable packet capture of inconclusive traffic. This option is available when you
traffic enable the Aggressive mode option.

This option disables the packet capture for the following sessions:

• Sessions closed before the application identification or classification completes.

• Sessions not classified even though they reach the maximum packet capture
limit.

If you do not configure this option, by default, the system captures packets for
inconclusive sessions.

Advanced

Maximum packets Maximum number of UDP packets per session.

Range: 1 through 1000. Default is 10 packets.

 756

Table 221: Fields on the Global Settings Option Page (Continued)

Field Action

Maximum bytes Maximum number of TCP bytes per session. For TCP sessions, the count includes
the actual payload data length and excludes IP/TCP headers for the maximum bytes
limit.

Range: 40 through 1,073,741,824. Default is 6000 bytes.

Maximum files Maximum number of unique packet capture files to create before the oldest file is
overwritten by a new file created.

Range: 1 through 2500. Default is 100.

Maximum storage Maximum disk space (bytes) that can be used in the Routing Engine for packet
capture files.

Range: 1 through 4096 MB. Default is 50 MB.

Maximum memory Maximum memory limit for deep packet inspection (DPI).

Range: 1 KB through maximum bytes (depending on the available space on the

device).

Packet capture interval Timeout value in minutes to avoid repetitive capture of same traffic. After this
interval, the system continues to capture newer packet details for unknown
applications until the capture limit is reached.

Range: 1 through 525,600 minutes. Default is 1440 minutes (24 hours).

Repeat traffic capture Number of repetitive captures of same traffic. Use this option to limit the number of
times the same traffic can be repeatedly captured before the cache entry times out.

Range: 1 through 1000. Default is 5.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Dynamic Applications Page | 751

Add Application Signatures | 757
Add Application Signatures Group | 763
 757

Edit Application Signatures | 764

Delete Application Signatures | 764
Clone Application Signatures | 762
Search Text in an Application Signatures Table | 765

Add Application Signatures

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Dynamic Applications.

To add an application signature:

1. Click Create > Signature on the upper right side of the Dynamic Applications page.
The Create Application Signatures page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 222 on page 757.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 222: Fields on the Add Application Signatures Page

Field Action

Name Enter the application signature name.

Description Enter the application signature description.

Order Enter the order of the custom application.

Lower order has higher priority.

The range is 1 through 50,000.

 758

Table 222: Fields on the Add Application Signatures Page (Continued)

Field Action

Priority Enter the priority over other signature applications.

Select an option from the list:

• High

• Low

Starting in Junos OS Release 20.2R1, by default, the priority for the custom application
is set to Low. This allows a predefined application to take precedence. If you want to
override a predefined application, you must set the priority to High.

Risk Enter the risk as critical, high, moderate, low, or unsafe.

Application Select one or more options from the list:

Identification match
criteria • ICMP Mapping

• IP Protocol Mapping

• Address Mapping

• L7 Signature

ICMP Mapping Select a value from the list.

• ICMP Type—Select the numeric value of an ICMP type. The type identifies the ICMP
message, such as Unassigned or Destination Unreachable.

The range is from 0 through 254.

• Select the numeric value of an ICMP code. The code field provides further
information (such as RFCs) about the associated type field.

The range is from 0 through 254.

IP Protocol Mapping Select the numeric value of an ICMP type. The type identifies the ICMP message, such
as Unassigned or Destination Unreachable.

The range is from 0 through 254.

 759

Table 222: Fields on the Add Application Signatures Page (Continued)

Field Action

Address Mapping To add a new address mapping:

1. Click Add.

The Add Address Mapping page appears.

Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter the name of the address mapping.

• IP Address—Enter an IPv4 or IPv6 address.

• CIDR Range—Enter an IPv4 or IPV6 address prefix for classless IP addressing.

• TCP Port range—Enter the TCP port range for the application.

• UDP Port Range—Enter the UDP port range for the application.

2. Click the pencil icon at the top right side of the Address Mapping table. Then, edit
the address mapping and click OK.

3. To delete an existing Address Mapping, select it and click the delete icon or right-
click on it and click Delete.

L7 Signature

Cacheable Set this option to True only when L7 signatures are configured in a custom signature.
This option is not supported for address-based, IP protocol-based, and ICMP-based
custom application signatures.

Add L7 Signature Click Add L7 Signature list and select an option from the following:

• Over HTTP

• Over SSL

• Over TCP

• Over UDP

The Add Signature page appears.

 760

Table 222: Fields on the Add Application Signatures Page (Continued)

Field Action

Add Signature

Over Protocol Displays the signature that matches the application protocol.

Example: HTTP

Signature Name Enter a unique name that is a string of alphanumeric characters, colons, periods, dashes,
and underscores. No spaces are allowed and the maximum length is 63 characters.

Port Range Enter the port range for the application.

Range is 0-65535.

Add Members
Custom signatures can contain multiple members that define attributes of an application. The supported member
name range is m01 through m15.

+ Click + to create a member.

Context (Over HTTP) Select the service-specific context from the following list:

• http-get-url-parsed-param-parsed

• http-header-content-type

• http-header-cookie

• http-header-host

• http-header-user-agent

• http-post-url-parsed-param-parsed

• http-post-variable-parsed

• http-url-parsed

• http-url-parsed-param-parsed
 761

Table 222: Fields on the Add Application Signatures Page (Continued)

Field Action

Context (Over SSL) Select the service-specific context as ssl-server-name.

Context (Over TCP) Select the service-specific context as stream.

Context (Over UDP) Select the service-specific context as stream.

Direction Select the direction of the packet flow to match the signature:

• any—The direction of the packet flow can either be from the client-side to the
server-side or from the server-side to the client-side.

• client-to-server—The direction of packet flow is from the client-side to the server-

side.

• server-to-client—The direction of packet flow is from the server-side to the client-

side.

Depth Enter the maximum number of bytes to check for context match. Use the byte limit for
AppID to identify custom application pattern for applications running over TCP or UDP
or Layer 7 applications.

Range is 1 through 8000. The Depth is set to 1000 by default, if not explicitly
configured.

NOTE: Starting in Junos OS Release 20.2R1, Depth option is supported.

Pattern Enter the deterministic finite automaton (DFA) pattern matched the context. The DFA
pattern specifies the pattern to be matched for the signature. The maximum length is
128.

Release History Table

Release Description

20.2R1 Starting in Junos OS Release 20.2R1, Depth option is supported.

 762

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Dynamic Applications Page | 751

Global Settings | 754
Add Application Signatures Group | 763
Edit Application Signatures | 764
Delete Application Signatures | 764
Clone Application Signatures | 762
Search Text in an Application Signatures Table | 765

Clone Application Signatures

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Dynamic Applications.

To clone an application signature:

1. Select the application signature profile that you want to clone and select Clone from the More link.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected application signature profile and
select Clone.

The Clone Application Signature page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
fields, see "Add Application Signatures" on page 757.
2. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Dynamic Applications Page | 751

Global Settings | 754
Add Application Signatures | 757
Add Application Signatures Group | 763
Edit Application Signatures | 764
Delete Application Signatures | 764
Search Text in an Application Signatures Table | 765
 763

Add Application Signatures Group

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Dynamic Applications.

To add an application signature group:

1. Click Create > Signature Group on the upper right side of the Dynamic Applications page. You can
also click More and select Create Group.
The Create Application Signature Group page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 223 on page 763.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 223: Fields on the Add Application Signature Group Page

Field Action

Name Enter the application signature group name.

Group Enter the add or remove applications associated with the application signature group.
Members
Click one of the following options:

• Add—Click + to create an application signature group.

• Delete—Select an existing application signature group that you want to delete and click the
delete icon available at the upper right of the application signature group table.

• Detailed View—Hover over the application signature group name and click the Detailed
View icon to view the signature group.

You can also click More and select Detailed View for the selected signature group.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Dynamic Applications Page | 751

Edit Application Signatures | 764
Delete Application Signatures | 764
Clone Application Signatures | 762
Search Text in an Application Signatures Table | 765
 764

Edit Application Signatures

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Dynamic Applications.

To edit an application signature:

1. Select an existing application signature that you want to edit on the Dynamic Applications page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Application Signatures page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
options, see "Add Application Signatures" on page 757.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Dynamic Applications Page | 751

Global Settings | 754
Add Application Signatures | 757
Add Application Signatures Group | 763
Add Application Signatures Group | 763
Delete Application Signatures | 764
Clone Application Signatures | 762
Search Text in an Application Signatures Table | 765

Delete Application Signatures

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Dynamic Applications.

To delete application signatures:

1. Select an application signature that you want to delete on the Dynamic Applications page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Dynamic Applications Page | 751

 765

Global Settings | 754

Add Application Signatures | 757
Add Application Signatures Group | 763
Edit Application Signatures | 764
Clone Application Signatures | 762
Search Text in an Application Signatures Table | 765

Search Text in an Application Signatures Table

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Dynamic Applications.

You can use the search icon in the top right corner of the Dynamic Applications page to search for text
containing letters and special characters on that page.

To search for text:

1. Click the search icon and enter partial text or full text of the keyword in the search bar.
The search results are displayed.
2. Click X next to a search keyword or click Clear All to clear the search results.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Dynamic Applications Page | 751

Global Settings | 754
Add Application Signatures | 757
Add Application Signatures Group | 763
Edit Application Signatures | 764
Delete Application Signatures | 764
Clone Application Signatures | 762
 766

CHAPTER 69

Application Tracking

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Application Tracking Page | 766

About the Application Tracking Page

IN THIS SECTION

Field Description | 766

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Application Tracking.

Use this page to configure application tracking.

Field Description

To configure application tracking:

1. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 224 on page 766.

2. Click Save to save the changes.

Table 224 on page 766 describes the fields on the Application Tracking page.

Table 224: Fields on the Application Tracking Page

Field Description

Application tracking Select this option to enable application tracking.

 767

Table 224: Fields on the Application Tracking Page (Continued)

Field Description

Logging Type Select an option:

• Log as session(s) created—Generates a log message when a session is created. By

default, this option is disabled.

• Delay logging first session—Enables you to specify the length of time that must
pass before the first log message is created. The default is 1 minute.

First Update Interval Use the up/down arrow to set the interval time.
(min)

Session Update Use the up/down arrow to set the interval time.
Interval (min)

Application Tracking By Lists the available zones.

Zone
• To enable application tracking, select the zone and click the right arrow to move it
to the tracking enabled list.

• To disable application tracking, select the zone and then click the left arrow to
move the zone back into the available list.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Address Pools Page | 910

 768

CHAPTER 70

Schedules

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Schedules Page | 768

Add a Schedule | 770

Clone a Schedule | 772

Edit a Schedule | 772

Delete Schedule | 773

Search Text in Schedules Table | 773

About the Schedules Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 768

Field Descriptions | 769

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Schedules.

Use this page to configure security policy schedules.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a schedule. See "Add a Schedule" on page 770.

• Clone a schedule. See "Clone a Schedule" on page 772.

• Edit a schedule. See "Edit a Schedule" on page 772.

 769

• Delete a schedule. See "Delete Schedule" on page 773.

• View the details of schedules—To do this, select the schedule for which you want to view the details
and follow the available options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Right-click on the selected custom object and select Detailed View.

• Mouse over to the left of the selected custom object and click Detailed View.

• Deselect the selected schedules. To do this, click More and select Clear All Selections.

• Search text in the Schedules table. See "Search Text in Schedules Table" on page 773.

• Show or hide columns in the Schedules table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns icon in the top
right corner of the Schedules table and select the options you want to view or deselect the options
you want to hide on the page.

Field Descriptions

Table 225 on page 769 describes the fields on the Schedules Page.

Table 225: Fields on the Schedules Page

Field Description

Name Displays the name of the policy schedule.

Description Displays a description of the policy schedule.

Start Date Displays the start date for the first day.

End Date Displays the stop date for the first day.

Second Start Date Displays the start date for the second day.

Second End Date Displays the stop date for the second day.

Schedules On expanding, displays the days of the schedule, exclusion days if any, and the start and end
time of the schedule.
 770

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Schedule | 770

Add a Schedule

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Schedules.

To add a schedule:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Schedules page.
The Create Schedule page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 226 on page 770.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 226: Fields on the Create Schedule Page

Field Action

General

Name Enter the name of the scheduler.

Description Enter a description for the scheduler.

Dates

Start Date Select the start date for the first day from the calendar and select the time in AM, PM, or 24
ours format.

Stop Date Select the stop date for the first day from the calendar and select the time in AM, PM, or 24
ours format.

Second Start Date Select the start date for the second day from the calendar and select the time in AM, PM, or
24 ours format.

Second End Date Select the stop date for the second day from the calendar and select the time in AM, PM, or
24 ours format.
 771

Table 226: Fields on the Create Schedule Page (Continued)

Field Action

Time Ranges

Time Ranges Select the check box to specify the time range.

Daily Options 1. Click on the day to specify the time for a particular day.

The Specify Time for <Selected Day> page appears.

NOTE: Click Specify the same time for all days to configure the same time options to all
days.

2. Select an option for time:

• All Day—Specifies time options for an entire day.

• Exclude Day—Excludes a specific day.

• Time Ranges—Enter time ranges for the selected day:

• Start Time—Enter the first day start time in HH:MM:SS and select AM, PM, or 24
hours format.

• End Time—Enter the first day end time first day in HH:MM:SS and select AM, PM,
or 24 hours format.

• Second Start Time—Click + and enter the second day start time in HH:MM:SS,
and then select AM, PM, or 24 hours format.

• Second End Time—Enter the second day end time in HH:MM:SS and select AM,
PM, or 24 hours format.

NOTE: Click X to delete the second day start and end time.

3. Click OK to save changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Schedule | 772

 772

Clone a Schedule

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Schedules.

To clone a schedule:

1. Select a schedule that you want to clone and select Clone from the More link.
The Clone Schedule page appears with editable fields. For more information on the fields, see "Add a
Schedule" on page 770.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected schedule and select Clone.

2. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Schedule | 772

Edit a Schedule

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Schedules.

To edit a schedule:

1. Select an existing schedule that you want to edit on the Schedules page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Schedules page.
The Edit Schedules page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add
a Schedule" on page 770.
3. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Schedule | 773

 773

Delete Schedule

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Schedules.

To delete a schedule:

1. Select a schedule that you want to delete on the Schedules page.

2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Schedules page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Search Text in Schedules Table | 773

Search Text in Schedules Table

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Schedules.

You can use the search icon in the top right corner of the Schedules page to search for text containing
letters and special characters on that page.

To search for text:

1. Click the search icon and enter partial text or full text of the keyword in the search bar.
The search results are displayed.
2. Click X next to a search keyword or click Clear All to clear the search results.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Schedules Page | 768

 774

CHAPTER 71

Proxy Profiles

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Proxy Profiles Page | 774

Add a Proxy Profile | 776

Edit a Proxy Profile | 777

Delete Proxy Profile | 777

About the Proxy Profiles Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 774

Field Descriptions | 775

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Proxy Profiles.

Use this page to configure the proxy profiles.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a proxy profile. See "Add a Proxy Profile" on page 776.

• Edit a proxy profile. See "Edit a Proxy Profile" on page 777.

• Delete a proxy profile. See "Delete Proxy Profile" on page 777.

 775

• Filter the proxy profile based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top right-hand
corner of the Proxy Profiles table. The columns in the grid change to accept filter options. Type the
filter options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the Proxy Profiles table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns icon in the
top right corner of the Proxy Profiles table and select the options you want to view or deselect the
options you want to hide on the page.

• Advanced search for proxy profiles. To do this, use the search text box present above the table grid.
The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. In the search text box, when you
hover over the icon, it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search string,
the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a search criteria, only one character is
deleted.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

Field Descriptions

Table 227 on page 775 describes the fields on the Proxy Profiles Page.

Table 227: Fields on the Proxy Profiles Page

Field Description

Profile Name Displays the name of the proxy profile.

Server IP / Host Name Displays the connection type used by the proxy profile.

Port Number Displays the port number.

 776

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Proxy Profile | 776

Add a Proxy Profile

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Proxy Profiles.

To add a proxy profile:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Proxy Profiles page.
The Create Proxy Profile page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 228 on page 776.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 228 on page 776 describes the fields on the Create Proxy Profile Page.

Table 228: Fields on the Create Proxy Profile Page

Field Action

Profile Name Enter a name of the proxy profile.

Connection Type Select the type of connection used by the proxy profile:

• Server IP—Enter the server IP address.

• Host Name—Enter a hostname.

Port Number Enter the port number used by the proxy profile.

Range: 0 through 65535.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Proxy Profile | 777

 777

Edit a Proxy Profile

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Proxy Profiles.

To edit a proxy profile:

1. Select an existing proxy profile that you want to edit on the Proxy Profiles page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the Proxy Profiles page.
The Edit Proxy Profile page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see
"Add a Proxy Profile" on page 776.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Delete Proxy Profile | 777

Delete Proxy Profile

You are here: Security Policies & Objects > Proxy Profiles.

To delete a proxy profile:

1. Select a proxy profile that you want to delete on the Proxy Profiles page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Proxy Profiles page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Proxy Profile | 776

Edit a Proxy Profile | 777
8 PART

Security Services

UTM Default Configuration | 780

UTM Antivirus Profiles | 784

UTM Web Filtering Profiles | 794

UTM Antispam Profiles | 805

UTM Content Filtering Profiles | 811

UTM Custom Objects | 820

UTM Policies | 833

IPS Policies | 841

IPS Sensor | 858

ALG | 866

Advanced Threat Prevention | 877

SSL Initiation Profiles | 882

SSL Proxy Profiles | 889

Firewall Authentication—Access Profile | 901

Firewall Authentication—Address Pools | 910

Firewall Authentication Settings | 916

Firewall Authentication—UAC Settings | 919

Firewall Authentication—Active Directory | 923

Firewall Authentication—Local Authentication | 929

Firewall Authentication—Authentication Priority | 932

Firewall Authentication—JIMS | 934

ICAP Redirect | 941

 780

CHAPTER 72

UTM Default Configuration

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Default Configuration Page | 780

Edit a Default Configuration | 782

Delete Default Configuration | 782

About the Default Configuration Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 781

Field Descriptions | 781

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Default Configuration.

The Default Configuration page describes the security features of Unified Treat Management (UTM).

This default configuration will be used, if there are multiple UTM policies present in the potential list.
The global configuration will be used till the exact match is found in the potential list.

The following security features are parts of UTM default configuration:

• Antivirus—Antivirus is an in-the-cloud antivirus solution. The virus pattern and malware database are
located on external servers maintained by Sophos (Sophos Extensible List) servers.

• Web Filtering—Web filtering lets you to manage Internet usage by preventing access to inappropriate
Web content.

• Antispam—This feature examines transmitted messages to identify any e-mail spam.

 781

• Content Filtering—This feature blocks or permits certain types of traffic based on the MIME type, file
extension, protocol command, and embedded object type.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• View the collapsed or expanded details of the UTM default configuration options. To do this, select
any one of the UTM default configurations and click Expand All or Collapse All available on the upper
right side of the page.

• Edit a default configuration. See "Edit a Default Configuration" on page 782.

• Delete a default configuration. See "Delete Default Configuration" on page 782.

Field Descriptions

Table 229 on page 781 describes the fields on the Default Configuration page.

Table 229: Fields on the Default Configuration Page

Field Function

Anti-Virus Displays the configured antivirus. You can edit the configured
antivirus.

Web Filtering Displays the configured Web filtering. You can edit the
configured web filtering.

Anti-Spam Displays the configured antispam. You can edit the configured
antispam.

Content Filtering Displays the configured content filtering. You can edit the
configured content filtering.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Edit a Default Configuration | 782

Delete Default Configuration | 782
 782

Edit a Default Configuration

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Default Configuration.

You can edit all of the following UTM default configurations:

• Antivirus

• Web filtering

• Antispam

• Content filtering

To edit a default configuration:

1. Select any of the existing UTM default configurations that you want to edit on the Default
Configuration page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The edit page for the selected default configuration appears with editable fields. You can modify any
previous changes done to Antivirus, Web Filtering, Antispam, and Content Filtering.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Default Configuration Page | 780

Delete Default Configuration | 782

Delete Default Configuration

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Default Configuration.

You can delete all of the following UTM default configurations:

• Antivirus

• Web filtering

• Antispam

• Content filtering

To delete an individual default configuration:

 783

1. Select any of the existing UTM default configurations that you want to delete on the Default
Configuration page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Confirm Delete window appears.

NOTE: You can only delete the configured data and not the junos-default configuration.

3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

To delete all the default configuration at the same time:

1. Click Delete All Default Configurations available on the upper right side of the page.

The Confirm Delete window appears.

NOTE: You can only delete the configured data and not the junos-default configuration.

2. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Default Configuration Page | 780

Edit a Default Configuration | 782
 784

CHAPTER 73

UTM Antivirus Profiles

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Antivirus Profiles Page | 784

Add an Antivirus Profile | 786

Clone an Antivirus Profile | 792

Edit an Antivirus Profile | 792

Delete Antivirus Profile | 793

About the Antivirus Profiles Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 784

Field Descriptions | 785

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Antivirus Profiles.

Use this page to configure antivirus.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add an antivirus profile. See "Add an Antivirus Profile" on page 786.

• Clone an antivirus profile. See "Clone an Antivirus Profile" on page 792.

• Edit an antivirus profile. See "Edit an Antivirus Profile" on page 792.

 785

• Delete antivirus profile. See "Delete Antivirus Profile" on page 793.

• View the details of an antivirus profile—To do this, select the antivirus profile for which you want to
view the details and follow the available options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Right-click on the selected antivirus profile and select Detailed View.

• Mouse over to the left of the selected antivirus profile and click Detailed View.

• Advanced search for antivirus profiles. To do this, use the search text box present above the table
grid. The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. In the search text box, when
you hover over the icon, it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search
string, the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a search criteria, only one character is
deleted.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

• Filter the antivirus profiles based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top right-
hand corner of the antivirus profiles table. The columns in the grid change to accept filter options.
Type the filter options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the antivirus profiles table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns icon in
the top right corner of the antivirus profiles table and select the options you want to view or deselect
the options you want to hide on the page.

Field Descriptions

Table 230 on page 786 describes the fields on the Antivirus Profiles page.
 786

Table 230: Fields on the Antivirus Profiles Page

Field Function

Name Displays the unique name of the antispam profile.

URL Allowlist Specifies a unique customized list of all URLs or IP addresses

for a given category that are to be bypassed for scanning.

Default Action Displays the default fallback action taken when the antivirus
system encounters errors.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add an Antivirus Profile | 786

Edit an Antivirus Profile | 792
Delete Antivirus Profile | 793

Add an Antivirus Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Antivirus Profiles.

To add an antivirus profile:

1. Click the add icon (+) available on the upper right side of the Antivirus Profiles page.
The Create Antivirus Profiles wizard appears, displaying brief instructions about creating an antivirus
profile.
2. Click Next to navigate to the next page.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 231 on page 787.
4. Click Finish.
The Summary page is displayed with the configurations you have made.
5. Review the settings, and if you need to make any modifications, click the Edit link or the Back button.
6. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
A new antivirus profile is created. You can assign this antivirus profile to a UTM policy. Within the
UTM policy, you can apply either the same or different antivirus profiles to the Web, file transfer and
E-mail traffic.
 787

Table 231: Fields on the Create Antivirus Profile Page

Field Function

General

Name Enter a unique name for the antivirus profile.

The maximum length is 29 characters.

URL Allowlist Select the customized object from the list for a given category
that are to be bypassed for scanning.

MIME Allowlist
 788

Table 231: Fields on the Create Antivirus Profile Page (Continued)

Field Function

MIME Allowlist Select a MIME allowlist from the list.

To create a MIME list inline and add it to the MIME allowlist:

1. Click Create New MIME List.

The Add MIME Pattern List window appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter a unique name for the MIME pattern list.

You can use a string beginning with an alphabet or

underscore and consisting of alphanumeric characters,
special characters such as dashes and underscores. The
maximum length is 40 characters.

• Values—Click + and enter a value in the value list and

click the tick mark.

NOTE: Value must be two strings separated by slash(/):

• The first string beginning with a letter or number and

consisting of alphanumeric characters, underscores
and dashes. Dashes cannot be used consecutively in
the string.

• The second string can be null or begin with a letter or

number and consisting of alphanumeric characters,
underscores, dashes, dots and pluses. Dashes, dots,
and pluses cannot be used consecutively in the
string.

If you want to delete any MIME pattern values, select

the value and click the delete icon.

3. Click OK.

A new MIME list is created and added to the MIME allowlist.

Exception MIME Allowlist Select an exception MIME allowlist from the list.

Click Create New MIME list to create and add a MIME pattern
list inline.
 789

Table 231: Fields on the Create Antivirus Profile Page (Continued)

Field Function

Fallback Options

Fallback options are used when the antivirus system experiences errors and must fall back to one of the
previously configured actions to either deny (block) or permit the object.

Content Size Select Block or Log and Permit.

If the content size exceeds a set limit, the content is either

passed or blocked. The default action is Block.

Engine Error Select Block or Log and Permit to specify whether the scan
engine should be blocked (default) or logged and permitted if it
is not ready during certain processes. For example, while the
signature database is loading.

Trickling Timeout Select Block or Log and Permit to specify whether the time
taken to scan should be blocked (default) or logged and
permitted if the scan process exceeds the timeout setting in the
antivirus profile.

Out of Resources Select Block or Log and Permit to specify whether the resource
constraints should be blocked (default) or logged and permitted
if the error is received during virus scanning.

Decompress Layer Select Block or Log and Permit to specify whether the number
of layers of nested compressed files that the internal antivirus
scanner can decompress before the execution of the virus scan.
The default action is Block.

Too many Requests Select an option to specify whether the number of messages
should be blocked (default) or logged and permitted if the
messages received concurrently exceeds the device limits.

Default Action Select a default action to take when an error occurs; Block or
Log and Permit.
 790

Table 231: Fields on the Create Antivirus Profile Page (Continued)

Field Function

Notification Options

Use the notification options to configure a method of notifying the user when a fallback occurs or a virus is
detected.

Fallback Deny

Notify Mail Sender Select this option to configure e-mail notifications to notify the
administrator about the errors returned by either the scan
engine or the scan manager when a fallback action occurs.

Notification Type Select None, Protocol, or Message from the list to specify the
type of notification sent when a fallback option of deny is
triggered.

Custom Message Subject Enter the subject line text for your custom message for the
fallback deny notification.

The maximum character length is 255.

Custom Message Enter the customized message text for the fallback deny
notification.

The maximum character length is 512.

Fallback Non-Deny

Notify Mail Recipient Select this option to configure E-mail notifications to notify the
recipient when a fallback e-mail option without a deny action is
triggered.

Custom Message Subject Enter the subject line for your custom message for the fallback
non-deny notification.

The maximum character length is 255.

 791

Table 231: Fields on the Create Antivirus Profile Page (Continued)

Field Function

Custom Message Enter the customized message text for the fallback non-deny
notification.

The maximum character length is 512.

Virus Detection

Notify Mail Sender Select this option to configure E-mail notifications to notify the
administrator when a virus is detected.

Notification Type Specifies the type of notification to be sent when a virus is

detected.

Select None, Protocol, or Message from the list to specify the

type of notification sent when a virus is detected.

Custom Message Subject Enter the subject line text for your custom message for the
virus detection notification.

The maximum character length is 255.

Custom Message Enter the customized message text for the virus detection
notification.

The maximum character length is 512.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Antivirus Profiles Page | 784

Edit an Antivirus Profile | 792
Delete Antivirus Profile | 793
 792

Clone an Antivirus Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Antivirus Profiles.

To clone an antivirus profile:

1. Select an antivirus profile that you want to clone and select Clone from the More link.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected antivirus profile and select Clone.

The Clone Antivirus Profiles page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options,
see "Add an Antivirus Profile" on page 786.
2. Click OK to save the changes.
A cloned antivirus profile is created for the selected antivirus profile. By default, the name of the
cloned antivirus profile is in the format: <Antivirus profile name>_clone.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Antivirus Profiles Page | 784

Edit an Antivirus Profile | 792
Delete Antivirus Profile | 793

Edit an Antivirus Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Antivirus Profiles.

To edit an antivirus profile:

1. Select an existing antivirus profile that you want to edit on the Antivirus Profiles page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Antivirus Profiles page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options,
see "Add an Antivirus Profile" on page 786.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected antivirus profile and select Edit
Antivirus Profiles.

3. Click OK to save the changes.

 793

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Antivirus Profiles Page | 784

Edit an Antivirus Profile | 792
Delete Antivirus Profile | 793

Delete Antivirus Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Antivirus Profiles.

To delete an antivirus profile:

1. Select an antivirus profile that you want to delete on the Antivirus Profiles page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected antivirus profile and select Delete
Antivirus Profiles.

3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Antivirus Profiles Page | 784

Add an Antivirus Profile | 786
Edit an Antivirus Profile | 792
 794

CHAPTER 74

UTM Web Filtering Profiles

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Web Filtering Profiles Page | 794

Add a Web Filtering Profile | 796

Clone a Web Filtering Profile | 802

Edit a Web Filtering Profile | 803

Delete Web Filtering Profile | 804

About the Web Filtering Profiles Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 794

Field Descriptions | 796

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Web Filtering Profiles.

Use this page to manage Internet usage by preventing access to inappropriate Web content.

A Web filtering profile defines a set of permissions and actions to take based on Web connections
predefined by website categories. In addition, you can create custom URL categories and URL pattern
lists during this process.

For an example use case, see Allow or Block Websites by Using J-Web Integrated UTM Web Filtering.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

 795

• Add a Web filtering profile. See "Add a Web Filtering Profile" on page 796.

• Edit a Web filtering profile. See "Edit a Web Filtering Profile" on page 803.

• Clone a Web filtering profile. See "Clone a Web Filtering Profile" on page 802.

• Delete a Web filtering profile. See "Delete Web Filtering Profile" on page 804.

• Filter the Web filtering profiles based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top
right-hand corner of the Web filtering profiles table. The columns in the grid change to accept filter
options. Type the filter options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the Web filtering profiles table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns
icon in the top right corner of the Web filtering profiles table and select the columns you want to
view or deselect the columns you want to hide on the page.

• View the details of a Web filtering profile—To do this, select the Web filtering profile for which you
want to view the details and follow the available options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Right-click on the selected Web filtering profile and select Detailed View.

• Mouse over to the left of the selected Web filtering profile and click Detailed View.

• Advanced search for Web filtering profiles. To do this, use the search text box present above the
table grid. The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. An example filter
condition is displayed in the search text box when you hover over the Search icon. When you start
entering the search string, the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace to delete a character of the search string.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

 796

Field Descriptions

Table 232 on page 796 describes the fields on the Web filtering page.

Table 232: Fields on the Web Filtering Page

Field Action

Name Displays the name for the Web filtering profile.

Profile type Displays the type of profile based on the filtering type selected.

Default action Displays the default action to be taken for the web filtering profile.

Timeout Displays the time interval to wait before the connection to the server is closed.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Web Filtering Profile | 796

Edit a Web Filtering Profile | 803
Delete Web Filtering Profile | 804

Add a Web Filtering Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Web Filtering Profiles.

To create a new web filtering profile:

1. Click the add icon (+) available on the upper right side of the Web Filtering Profiles page.
The Create Web Filtering Profiles page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 233 on page 797 through
Table 235 on page 801.
3. Click Finish to save the changes or click Back to go to the previous tab. If you want to discard your
changes, click Cancel.
If you click Finish, a new web filtering profile is created.
 797

Table 233: Fields on the General tab

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the Web filtering profile.

The maximum length is 29 characters.

Timeout Enter a timeout value to wait for a response from the Websense server.

The maximum value is 1800 seconds. Default value is 15 seconds.

Engine type Select an engine type for Web filtering:

The available options are

• Juniper Enhanced—Specifies that the Juniper Enhanced Web filtering intercepts the HTTP
and the HTTPS requests and sends the HTTP URL or the HTTPS source IP to the
Websense ThreatSeeker Cloud (TSC).

• Websense Redirect—Specifies that the Web filtering module intercepts an HTTP request.
The URL in the request is then sent to the external Websense server which makes a
permit or a deny decision.

• Local—Specifies that the Web filtering module intercepts URLs and makes a permit or
deny decision locally.

NOTE: The default value is Juniper Enhanced.

Safe search Enable a safe search solution to ensure that the embedded objects such as images on the
URLs received from the search engines are safe and that no undesirable content is returned
to the client.

NOTE: This option is available only for the Juniper Enhanced engine type. By default, this
option is enabled.

Account Enter the user account associated with the Websense Web filtering profile.

NOTE: This option is available only for the Websense Redirect engine type.

Server Enter the hostname or IP address for the Websense server.

NOTE: This option is available only for the Websense Redirect engine type.
 798

Table 233: Fields on the General tab (Continued)

Field Action

Port Enter the port number for communicating with the Websense server.

The default port is 15868.

NOTE: This option is available only for the Websense Redirect engine type.

Sockets Enter the number of sockets used for communication between the client and the server.

The default value is 8.

NOTE: This option is available only for the Websense Redirect engine type.

Custom Block Specify the redirect URL or a custom message to be sent when HTTP requests are blocked.
Message/URL
Maximum length is 512 characters.

Custom Define a custom message to allow or deny access to a blocked site based on a user response
Quarantine to the message.
Message
Maximum length is 512 characters.

NOTE: This option is available only for the Juniper Enhanced and the Local engine types.

Base Filter Select a predefined base filter, which has default actions for all categories, for Web filtering.

Click Clear All to discard the changes.

NOTE: This option is available only for the Juniper Enhanced engine type.
 799

Table 234: Fields on the URL Categories Tab

Field Action

Apply actions To apply actions that the device must take for the selected category:

1. Click Apply Actions.

The Apply Actions page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Action—Select an action for the URL category from the list. The options are Permit, Log
and Permit, Block or Quarantine.

• Custom Message—Select a custom message for the URL category.

NOTE:

• This option is applicable only when the action is Block or Quarantine.

• Click Clear all to clear the custom message.

To add a custom message list inline:

a. Click Create New.

b. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter a unique name for the custom message list.

Special characters such as hyphen, underscore, !, @, $, *, + are allowed. The

maximum length is 29 characters.

• Type—Select an option from the list. The options are Redirect URL or User
Message.

• Content—Enter a content for the custom message list. The maximum length is 512
characters.

c. Click OK to add a new custom message list. Else, click Cancel.

3. Click OK to apply actions for the category. Else, click Cancel.

 800

Table 234: Fields on the URL Categories Tab (Continued)

Field Action

Create To add a new URL category:

1. Click +.

The Select URL Categories page appears.

2. Select one or more predefined and custom URL categories to apply to the list.

The Name column displays the list of URL categories to choose from.

Click the search icon in the top right corner of the table to search for any particular URL
category in the list.

3. Enter the following details:

• Action—Select an action for the URL category from the list. The options available are
Permit, Log and Permit, Block, and Quarantine.

NOTE: The default action is Log and Permit.

• Custom Message—Select a custom message for the URL category.

NOTE:

• This option is applicable only when the action is Block or Quarantine.

• Click Clear all to clear the custom message.

• Click Create New to add a custom message list inline.

4. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Delete Select a URL category that you want to delete and click the delete icon in the top right corner of
the table

Search Click the search icon in the top right corner of the table and the URL category you want to
search.

Category Displays the URL category names.

name
Select one or more categories from the list.
 801

Table 234: Fields on the URL Categories Tab (Continued)

Field Action

Action Displays the action taken for the URL category.

Custom Displays the respective custom messages for the URL categories.
message

Table 235: Fields on the Fallback Options Tab

Field Action

Global Select to choose the action you want to take for each reputation level.
Reputation
URLs can be processed using their reputation score if there is no category available.
Actions

Very Safe Select an option from the list for the device must take appropriate action if the site reputation
reaches the % score that is defined by you.

NOTE: If you have not defined the percentage, the default score is 90 through 100.

The options are Permit, Log and Permit, Block, and Quarantine.

Moderately Safe Select an option from the list for the device must take appropriate action if the site reputation
reaches the % score that is defined by you.

NOTE: If you have not defined the percentage, the default score is 80 through 89.

The options are Permit, Log and Permit, Block, and Quarantine.

Fairly Safe Select an option from the list for the device must take appropriate action if the site reputation
reaches the % score that is defined by you.

NOTE: If you have not defined the percentage, the default score is 70 through 79.

The options are Permit, Log and Permit, Block, and Quarantine.
 802

Table 235: Fields on the Fallback Options Tab (Continued)

Field Action

Suspicious Select an option from the list for the device must take appropriate action if the site reputation
reaches the % score that is defined by you.

NOTE: If you have not defined the percentage, the default score is 60 through 69.

The options are Permit, Log and Permit, Block, and Quarantine.

Harmful Select an option from the list for the device must take appropriate action if the site reputation
reaches the % score that is defined by you.

NOTE: If you have not defined the percentage, the default score is 50 through 59.

The options are Permit, Log and Permit, Block, and Quarantine.

Default Action Select an option from the list for the actions to be taken for URL categories with no assigned
action and for uncategorized URLs.

The options are Permit, Log and Permit, Block, and Quarantine.

Fallback Action Select an option from the list. The options are Log and Permit and Block.

Use this option when the ThreatSeeker Websense Cloud servers are unreachable. A timeout
occurs for requests to ThreatSeeker Cloud.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Web Filtering Profiles Page | 794

Clone a Web Filtering Profile | 802
Edit a Web Filtering Profile | 803
Delete Web Filtering Profile | 804

Clone a Web Filtering Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Web Filtering Profiles.

To clone a Web filtering profile:

 803

1. Select a Web filtering profile that you want to clone and select Clone from the More link.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected Web filtering profile and select Clone.

The Clone Web Filtering Profiles page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
options, see "Add a Web Filtering Profile" on page 796.
2. Click OK to save the changes.
A cloned Web filtering profile is created for the selected Web filtering profile. By default, the name of
the cloned Web filtering profile is in the format: <Web filtering profile name>_clone.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Web Filtering Profiles Page | 794

Add a Web Filtering Profile | 796
Edit a Web Filtering Profile | 803
Delete Web Filtering Profile | 804

Edit a Web Filtering Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Web Filtering Profiles.

To edit a Web filtering profile:

1. Select a Web filtering profile that you want to edit on the Web Filtering page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Web Filtering Profiles page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
options, see "Add a Web Filtering Profile" on page 796.
3. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Web Filtering Profiles Page | 794

Add a Web Filtering Profile | 796
Clone a Web Filtering Profile | 802
Delete Web Filtering Profile | 804
 804

Delete Web Filtering Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Web Filtering Profiles.

To delete Web filtering profiles:

1. Select one or more Web filtering profiles that you want to delete from the Web Filtering page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Web Filtering Profiles Page | 794

Add a Web Filtering Profile | 796
Clone a Web Filtering Profile | 802
Edit a Web Filtering Profile | 803
 805

CHAPTER 75

UTM Antispam Profiles

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Antispam Profiles Page | 805

Add an Antispam Profile | 807

Clone an Antispam Profile | 808

Edit an Antispam Profile | 809

Delete Antispam Profile | 810

About the Antispam Profiles Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 805

Field Descriptions | 806

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Antispam Profiles.

Use the Antispam Profiles page to view and manage antispam profiles. An antispam profile is used to
examine transmitted e-mail messages to identify e-mail spam by using a constantly updated spam block
list.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Create an antispam profile. See "Add an Antispam Profile" on page 807.

• Edit an antispam profile. See "Edit an Antispam Profile" on page 809.

 806

• Delete an antispam profile. See "Delete Antispam Profile" on page 810.

• Clone an antispam profile. See "Clone an Antispam Profile" on page 808

• View the details of an antispam profile—To do this, select the antispam profile for which you want to
view the details and follow the available options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Right-click on the selected antispam profile and select Detailed View.

• Mouse over to the left of the selected antispam profile and click Detailed View.

• Advanced search for antispam profiles. To do this, use the search text box present above the table
grid. The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. In the search text box, when
you hover over the icon, it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search
string, the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a search criteria, only one character is
deleted.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

• Filter the antispam profiles based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top right-
hand corner of the antispam profiles table. The columns in the grid change to accept filter options.
Type the filter options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the antispam profiles table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns icon in
the top right corner of the antispam profiles table and select the options you want to view or
deselect the options you want to hide on the page.

Field Descriptions

Table 236 on page 807 describes the fields on the Antispam Profiles page.
 807

Table 236: Fields on the Antispam Profiles Page

Field Description

Name Name of the antispam profile.

Sophos Blocklist Indicates whether Sophos Blocklist is enabled (server-based filtering) or disabled (local
filtering).

Action Action to be taken when spam is detected.

Custom Tag Custom-defined tag that identifies an e-mail message as spam.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add an Antispam Profile | 807

Clone an Antispam Profile | 808
Edit an Antispam Profile | 809
Delete Antispam Profile | 810

Add an Antispam Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Antispam Profiles.

To add an antispam profile:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Antispam Profiles page.
The Create Antispam Profiles page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 237 on page 808.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 808

Table 237: Fields on the Create Antispam Profiles Page

Field Action

General Information

Name Enter a unique name for your antispam profile.

Sophos Blocklist Enable this option to use server-based spam filtering. By default, this option is enabled.

NOTE: If you disable this option, then local spam filtering is used.

Action

Default Action Select an option to be taken when a spam message is detected. The options available are:

• Tag E-Mail Subject Line—Adds a custom string at the beginning of the subject of the e-
mail.

• Tag SMTP Header—Adds a custom string to the e-mail header.

• Block E-Mail—Blocks the spam e-mail.

• None—No action taken.

Custom Tag Enter a custom string for identifying a message as spam. By default, the device uses
***SPAM***.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Antispam Profiles Page | 805

Clone an Antispam Profile | 808
Edit an Antispam Profile | 809
Delete Antispam Profile | 810

Clone an Antispam Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Antispam Profiles.
 809

To clone an antispam profile:

1. Select an antispam profile that you want to clone and select Clone from the More link.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected antispam profile and select Clone.

The Clone Antispam Profiles page appears with editable fields. For more information on the fields,
see "Add an Antispam Profile" on page 807.
2. Click OK to save the changes.
A cloned antispam profile is created for the selected antispam profile. By default, the name of the
cloned antispam profile is in the format: <Antispam profile name>_clone.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Antispam Profiles Page | 805

Add an Antispam Profile | 807
Edit an Antispam Profile | 809
Delete Antispam Profile | 810

Edit an Antispam Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Antispam Profiles.

To edit an antispam profile:

1. Select an existing antispam profile that you want to edit on the Antispam Profiles page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Antispam Profiles page appears. You can modify any previous changes done to Sophos
Blocklist, Default Action, and Custom Tag for the selected antispam profile. For more information on
the options, see "Add an Antispam Profile" on page 807.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Antispam Profiles Page | 805

Add an Antispam Profile | 807
 810

Clone an Antispam Profile | 808

Delete Antispam Profile | 810

Delete Antispam Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Antispam Profiles.

To delete antispam profiles:

1. Select one or more antispam profiles that you want to delete on the Antispam Profiles page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Antispam Profiles Page | 805

Add an Antispam Profile | 807
Clone an Antispam Profile | 808
Edit an Antispam Profile | 809
 811

CHAPTER 76

UTM Content Filtering Profiles

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Content Filtering Profiles Page | 811

Add a Content Filtering Profile | 813

Clone a Content Filtering Profile | 817

Edit a Content Filtering Profile | 818

Delete Content Filtering Profile | 819

About the Content Filtering Profiles Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 811

Field Descriptions | 812

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Content Filtering Profiles.

Use this page to configure content filtering.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a content filtering profile. See "Add a Content Filtering Profile" on page 813.

• Clone a content filtering profile. See "Clone a Content Filtering Profile" on page 817

• Edit a content filtering profile. See "Edit a Content Filtering Profile" on page 818.
 812

• Delete a content filtering profile. See "Delete Content Filtering Profile" on page 819.

• View the details of a content filtering profile—To do this, select the content filtering profile for which
you want to view the details and follow the available options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Right-click on the selected content filtering profile and select Detailed View.

• Mouse over to the left of the selected content filtering profile and click Detailed View.

• Advanced search for content filtering profiles. To do this, use the search text box present above the
table grid. The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. In the search text box,
when you hover over the icon, it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the
search string, the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a search criteria, only one character is
deleted.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

• Filter the content filtering profiles based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top
right-hand corner of the content filtering profiles table. The columns in the grid change to accept
filter options. Type the filter options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the content filtering profiles table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns
icon in the top right corner of the content filtering profiles table and select the options you want to
view or deselect the options you want to hide on the page.

Field Descriptions

Table 238 on page 813 describes the fields on the Content Filtering Profiles page.
 813

Table 238: Fields on the Content Filtering Profiles Page

Field Description

Name Displays the unique name of the content filtering profile.

Permit Command List Displays the permitted protocol command name.

Block Command List Displays the blocked protocol command.

Notification Type Displays the notification type opted.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Content Filtering Profile | 813

Edit a Content Filtering Profile | 818
Delete Content Filtering Profile | 819

Add a Content Filtering Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Content Filtering Profiles.

To add a content filtering profile:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Content Filtering Profiles page.
The Create Content Filtering page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 239 on page 814.
3. Click Finish.
The Summary page is displayed with the configurations you have made.
4. Review the settings, and if you need to make any modifications, click the Edit link or the Back button.
5. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
A new content filter profile is created.
 814

Table 239: Fields on the Create Content Filtering Profiles Page

Field Action

General - General Information

Name Enter a unique name for the content filtering profile.

Notification Options

Notification Mail Select the Notify Mail Sender check box to send an e-mail when a virus is detected and a
Sender content block is triggered.

Notification Type Select the None, Protocol Only, or Message options from the list to specify the type of
notification sent when a content block is triggered.

Custom Specifies the customized message text for the content-block notification.
Notification
Enter the text for this custom notification message (if you are using one).
Message

Protocol Commands
 815

Table 239: Fields on the Create Content Filtering Profiles Page (Continued)

Field Action

Command Block Select the protocol command name to be blocked from the list. By blocking certain
List commands, traffic can be controlled on the protocol command level.

To create a protocol command inline and add it to the command block list:

1. Click Create Protocol Command.

The Add Protocol Command List window appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter a unique name for the protocol command list.

You can use a string beginning with an alphabet or underscore and consisting of
alphanumeric characters, special characters such as dashes and underscores. The
maximum length is 29 characters.

• Values—Click + and enter a value in the value list and click the tick mark.

To delete any value list, select the value and click on the delete icon.

3. Click OK.

A new protocol command is created and added to the command block list.

Command Permit Select the protocol command name to be permitted from the list.
List
Click Create Protocol Command to create a protocol command inline and add it to the
permitted list.

Content Types
 816

Table 239: Fields on the Create Content Filtering Profiles Page (Continued)

Field Action

Block Content Select the content type you want to block.

Type
The available options are:

• ActiveX

• Windows executables (.exe)

• HTTP Cookie

• Java Applet

• ZIP files

File Extensions

Extension Block Select an extension from the list that you want to block.
List
To create a file extension inline and add it to the extension block list:

1. Click Create File Extensions.

The Add File Extension List window appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter a unique name for the file extension list.

You can use a string beginning with an alphabet or underscore and consisting of
alphanumeric characters, special characters such as dashes and underscores. The
maximum length is 29 characters.

• Values—Select one or more values in the Available Column and move it to the
Selected Column using the right arrow.

3. Click OK.

A new file extension is created and added to the extension block list.

MIME Types
 817

Table 239: Fields on the Create Content Filtering Profiles Page (Continued)

Field Action

MIME Block List Select the MIME type from the list.

To create a MIME list inline and add it to the MIME block list:

1. Click Create MIME List.

The Add MIME Pattern List window appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Name—Enter an unique name for the MIME pattern list.

You can use a string beginning with an alphabet or underscore and consisting of
alphanumeric characters, special characters such as dashes and underscores. The
maximum length is 40 characters.

• Values—Click + and enter a value in the value list and click the tick mark.

To delete any value list, select the value and click on the delete icon.

3. Click OK.

A new MIME list is created and added to the MIME block list.

MIME Permit List Select the MIME type from the list.

Click Create MIME List to create a MIME list inline and add it to the MIME permit list.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Content Filtering Profiles Page | 811

Edit a Content Filtering Profile | 818
Delete Content Filtering Profile | 819

Clone a Content Filtering Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Content Filtering Profiles.

To clone a content filtering profile:

 818

1. Select a content filtering profile that you want to clone and select Clone from the More link.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected content filtering profile and select
Clone.

The Clone Content Filtering Profiles page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
fields, see "Add a Content Filtering Profile" on page 813.
2. Click OK to save the changes.
A cloned content filtering profile is created for the selected content filtering profile. By default, the
name of the cloned content filtering profile is in the format: <Content filtering profile name>_clone.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Content Filtering Profiles Page | 811

Edit a Content Filtering Profile | 818
Delete Content Filtering Profile | 819

Edit a Content Filtering Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Content Filtering Profiles.

To edit a content filtering profile:

1. Select an existing content filtering profile that you want to edit on the Content Filtering profiles page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Content Filtering Profiles page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
options, see "Add a Content Filtering Profile" on page 813.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected content filtering profile and select
Edit Profile.

3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Content Filtering Profiles Page | 811

 819

Add a Content Filtering Profile | 813

Delete Content Filtering Profile | 819

Delete Content Filtering Profile

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Content Filtering Profiles.

To delete a content filtering profile:

1. Select a content filtering profile that you want to delete on the Content Filtering Profiles page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected content filtering profile and select
Delete Profile.

3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Content Filtering Profiles Page | 811

Add a Content Filtering Profile | 813
Edit a Content Filtering Profile | 818
 820

CHAPTER 77

UTM Custom Objects

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Custom Objects Page | 820

Add a MIME Pattern List | 823

Add a File Extension List | 825

Add a Protocol Command List | 825

Add a URL Pattern List | 826

Add a URL Category List | 827

Add a Custom Message List | 829

Clone Custom Objects | 830

Edit Custom Objects | 830

Delete Custom Objects | 831

About the Custom Objects Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 821

Field Descriptions | 822

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Custom Objects.

Use the Custom Objects page to define your own objects for URL filtering, antivirus filtering, and
content filtering.
 821

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a MIME pattern list. See "Add a MIME Pattern List" on page 823.

• Add a file extension list. See "Add a File Extension List" on page 825.

• Add a protocol command list. See "Add a Protocol Command List" on page 825.

• Add an URL pattern list. See "Add a URL Pattern List" on page 826.

• Add an URL category list. See "Add a URL Category List" on page 827.

• Add a custom message list. See "Add a Custom Message List" on page 829.

• Edit custom objects. See "Edit Custom Objects" on page 830.

• Delete custom objects. See "Delete Custom Objects" on page 831.

• Clone custom objects. See "Clone Custom Objects" on page 830

• View the details of custom objects—To do this, select the custom object for which you want to view
the details and follow the available options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Right-click on the selected custom object and select Detailed View.

• Mouse over to the left of the selected custom object and click Detailed View.

• Filter the custom objects based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top right-
hand corner of the custom objects table. The columns in the grid change to accept filter options.
Type the filter options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the custom objects table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns icon in
the top right corner of the custom objects table and select the options you want to view or deselect
the options you want to hide on the page.

• Advance search for custom objects. To do this, use the search text box present above the table grid.
The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. In the search text box, when you
hover over the icon, it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search string,
the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.
 822

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a search criteria, only one character is
deleted.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

Field Descriptions

Table 240 on page 822 describes the fields on the Custom Objects page.

Table 240: Fields on the Custom Objects Page

Field Description

MIME Pattern List

Name Displays the user-defined name or a predefined MIME pattern name.

Value Displays the user-defined value or a predefined MIME pattern value.

Filename Extension List

Name Displays the user-defined name or a predefined file extension name.

Value Displays the user-defined value or a predefined file extension value.

Protocol Command List

Name Displays only the user-defined protocol command names.

Value Displays only the user-defined protocol command values.

URL Pattern List

 823

Table 240: Fields on the Custom Objects Page (Continued)

Field Description

Name Displays only the user-defined URL pattern names.

Value Displays only the user-defined URL pattern values.

URL Category List

Name Displays only the predefined URL categories.

Value Displays only the predefined URL categories from the SurfControl server. You can also
configure URLs. The URLs configured in the URL pattern list are displayed here.

Custom Message List

The Custom Message List displays the custom messages that you have created. It also displays the type of action
taken when you create block message or URL, or quarantine message or URL for each category.

Name Displays the name of the custom message that you have created.

Type Displays the type of custom message. The options are Redirect-URL or User Message.

Content Displays the content of the custom message. It is either a user message or a URL to
which you will be redirected.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a MIME Pattern List | 823

Add a MIME Pattern List

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Custom Objects.

To add a MIME pattern list:

 824

1. Click the MIME Pattern List tab.

2. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the MIME Pattern List tab.
The Add MIME Pattern List page appears.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 241 on page 824.
4. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 241: Fields on the Add MIME Pattern List Page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the MIME pattern list.

You can use a string beginning with a letter or underscore and consisting of alphanumeric characters,
special characters such as dashes and underscores. The maximum length is 40 characters.

Value To add a MIME pattern value:

1. Click +.

2. Enter the MIME pattern value in the Value List.

NOTE: Value must be two strings separated by slash(/):

• The first string beginning with a letter or number and consisting of alphanumeric characters,
underscores and dashes. Dashes cannot be shown continuously in the string.

• The second string can be null or begin with a letter or number and consisting of alphanumeric
characters, underscores, dashes, dots and pluses. Dashes, dots, and pluses cannot be shown
continuously in the string.

3. Click the tick mark.

If you want to delete any MIME pattern values, select the value and click the delete icon.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Clone Custom Objects | 830

Edit Custom Objects | 830
Delete Custom Objects | 831
 825

Add a File Extension List

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Custom Objects.

To add a file extension list:

1. Click the File Extension List tab.

2. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the File Extension List tab.
The Add File Extension List page appears.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 242 on page 825.
4. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 242: Fields on the Add File Extension List Page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the file extension list.

You can use a string beginning with a letter or underscore and consisting of alphanumeric characters,
special characters such as dashes and underscores. The maximum length is 29 characters.

Value Select values from the list in the Available column to associate it with the file extension name and then
click the right arrow to move it to the Selected column.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Clone Custom Objects | 830

Edit Custom Objects | 830
Delete Custom Objects | 831

Add a Protocol Command List

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Custom Objects.

To add a protocol command list:

1. Click the Protocol Command List tab.

2. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Protocol Command List tab.
 826

The Add Protocol Command List page appears.

3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 243 on page 826.
4. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 243: Fields on the Add Protocol Command List Page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the protocol command list.

You can use a string beginning with a letter or underscore and consisting of alphanumeric characters,
special characters such as dashes and underscores. The maximum length is 29 characters.

Value To add a protocol command value:

1. Click +.

2. Enter the protocol command value in the Value List.

3. Click the tick mark.

If you want to delete any protocol command values, select the value and click the delete icon.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Clone Custom Objects | 830

Edit Custom Objects | 830
Delete Custom Objects | 831

Add a URL Pattern List

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Custom Objects.

To add a URL pattern list:

1. Click the URL Pattern List tab.

2. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the URL Pattern List tab.
The Add URL Pattern List page appears.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 244 on page 827.
 827

4. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 244: Fields on the Add URL Pattern List Page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the URL pattern list.

You can use a string beginning with a letter or underscore and consisting of alphanumeric characters,
special characters such as dashes and underscores. The maximum length is 29 characters.

NOTE: Multiple URLs are supported in a pattern.

Value To add a URL pattern value:

1. Click +.

2. Enter the URL pattern value in the Value List.

3. Click the tick mark.

If you want to delete any URL pattern values, select the value and click the delete icon.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Clone Custom Objects | 830

Edit Custom Objects | 830
Delete Custom Objects | 831

Add a URL Category List

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Custom Objects.

To add a URL category list:

1. Click the URL Category List tab.

2. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the URL Category List tab.
The Add URL Category List page appears.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 245 on page 828.
4. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 828

Table 245 on page 828 provides guidelines on using the fields on the Add URL Category List page.

Table 245: Fields on the Add URL Category List Page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the URL category list.

You can use a string beginning with a letter or underscore and consisting of alphanumeric characters,
special characters such as dashes and underscores. The maximum length is 59 characters.

Value Select values from the list in the Available column to associate it with the URL category list name and
then click the right arrow to move it to the Selected column.

To add a new URL pattern inline:

1. Click Create New URL Pattern.

The Add URL Pattern List page appears.

2. Enter a URL pattern name.

You can use a string beginning with a letter or underscore and consisting of alphanumeric characters,
special characters such as dashes and underscores. The maximum length is 29 characters.

3. Click + to add a URL pattern value.

4. Enter the URL pattern value in the Value List.

5. Click the tick mark.

6. Optional. If you want to delete any URL pattern values, select the value and click the delete icon.

7. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Clone Custom Objects | 830

Edit Custom Objects | 830
Delete Custom Objects | 831
 829

Add a Custom Message List

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Custom Objects.

To add a custom message list:

1. Click the Custom Message List tab.

2. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Custom Message List tab.
The Add Custom Message List page appears.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 246 on page 829.
4. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 246: Fields on the Add Custom Message List Page

Field Action

Name Enter a name for the custom message list.

You can use a string beginning with a letter or underscore and consisting of alphanumeric characters,
special characters such as dashes and underscores. The maximum length is 59 characters.

Type Select an option:

• Redirect URL—Specifies custom redirect URL server.

• User Message—Specifies that website access has been blocked by an organization's access policy.

Content Enter content of the custom message; maximum length is 1024 characters. It is either a user message
or a URL to which you will be redirected.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Clone Custom Objects | 830

Edit Custom Objects | 830
Delete Custom Objects | 831
 830

Clone Custom Objects

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Custom Objects.

You can clone all of the following custom objects:

• MIME pattern list

• File extension list

• Protocol command list

• URL pattern list

• URL category list

• Custom message list

To clone a custom object:

1. Right-click any of the custom objects and select Clone. You can also select Clone from the More link.
The clone page for the selected custom object appears with editable fields.
2. Make the required changes in the editable fields.
3. Click OK to save the changes.
A cloned custom object is created for the selected custom objects. By default, the name of the
cloned custom objects is in the format: <custom objects name>_clone.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a MIME Pattern List | 823

Add a File Extension List | 825
Add a Protocol Command List | 825
Add a URL Pattern List | 826
Add a URL Category List | 827
Add a Custom Message List | 829

Edit Custom Objects

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Custom Objects.
 831

You can edit all of the following custom objects:

• MIME pattern list

• File extension list

• Protocol command list

• URL pattern list

• URL category list

• Custom message list

To edit a custom objects:

1. Select any of the existing custom objects that you want to edit on the Custom Objects page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The edit page for the selected custom object appears with editable fields. You can modify the
parameters of the custom object as required.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a MIME Pattern List | 823

Add a File Extension List | 825
Add a Protocol Command List | 825
Add a URL Pattern List | 826
Add a URL Category List | 827
Add a Custom Message List | 829

Delete Custom Objects

You are here: Security Services > UTM > Custom Objects.

You can delete all of the following custom objects:

• MIME pattern list

• File extension list

• Protocol command list

 832

• URL pattern list

• URL category list

• Custom message list

To delete a custom object:

1. Select any of the existing custom objects that you want to delete from the Custom Objects page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the selected custom object.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Custom Objects Page | 820

Clone Custom Objects | 830
Edit Custom Objects | 830
 833

CHAPTER 78

UTM Policies

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the UTM Policies Page | 833

Add a UTM Policy | 835

Clone a UTM Policy | 838

Edit a UTM Policy | 839

Delete UTM Policy | 839

About the UTM Policies Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 833

Field Descriptions | 834

You are here: Security Services > UTM > UTM Policies.

Use this page to configure UTM Policies.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Create a UTM policy. See "Add a UTM Policy" on page 835.

• Clone a UTM policy. See "Clone a UTM Policy" on page 838.

• Edit a UTM policy. See "Edit a UTM Policy" on page 839.

 834

• Delete a UTM policy. See "Delete UTM Policy" on page 839.

• View the details of a UTM policy—To do this, select the UTM policy for which you want to view the
details and select any of the following options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Right-click on the selected UTM policy and select Detailed View.

• Mouse over to the left of the selected UTM policy and click Detailed View.

• Advanced search for UTM policy. To do this, use the search text box present above the table grid.
The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. In the search text box, when you
hover over the icon, it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search string,
the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a search criteria, only one character is
deleted.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

• Show or hide columns in the UTM policy table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns icon in the
top right corner of the UTM policies table and select the options you want to view or deselect the
options you want to hide on the page.

Field Descriptions

Table 247 on page 835 describes the fields on the UTM policy page.
 835

Table 247: Fields on the UTM Policy Page

Field Description

Name Displays the UTM policy name.

Antivirus Displays the antivirus profile.

Web Filtering Displays the Web filtering profile.

Antispam Displays the antispam profile.

Content Filtering Displays the content filtering profiles.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a UTM Policy | 835

Add a UTM Policy

You are here: Security Services > UTM > UTM Policies.

To add a UTM policy:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the UTM Policy page.
The Create UTM Policies page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 248 on page 836.
3. Click Finish.
The Summary page is displayed with the configurations you have made.
4. Review the settings, and if you need to make any modifications, click the Edit link or the Back button.
5. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
A UTM policy is created.
 836

Table 248: Fields on the Create UTM Policies Page

Field Action

General—General Information

Name Enter a UTM policy name.

Antivirus—Antivirus Profiles by Traffic Protocol

Apply to all protocols Select the check box to apply the default profile to all protocols such as HTTP, FTP,
IMAP, SMTP, and POP3.

If you do not select the check box, you can apply different profiles to different
protocols.

HTTP Select an option from the list to specify the UTM policy for the HTTP protocol to be
scanned.

FTP Upload Select an option from the list to specify the UTM policy for the FTP protocol to be
scanned.

FTP Download Select an option from the list to specify the UTM policy for the FTP protocol to be
scanned.

IMAP Select an option from the list to specify the UTM policy for the IMAP protocol to be
scanned.

SMTP Select an option from the list to specify the UTM policy for the SMTP protocol to be
scanned.

POP3 Select an option from the list to specify the UTM policy for the POP3 protocol to be
scanned.

Create Another Profile Click Create Another Profile to create an antivirus profile inline. For more information
on the fields, see "Add an Antivirus Profile" on page 786.

Web Filterings—Web Filtering Profiles by Traffic Protocol

 837

Table 248: Fields on the Create UTM Policies Page (Continued)

Field Action

HTTP Select an option from the list to specify the UTM policy for the HTTP protocol to be
scanned.

Create Another Profile Click Create Another Profile to create Web filtering profile inline. For more information
on the fields, see "Add a Web Filtering Profile" on page 796.

Antispam—Antispam Profiles by Traffic Protocol

SMTP profile Select an option from the list to specify the UTM policy for the SMTP protocol to be
scanned.

Create Another Profile Click Create Another Profile to create antispam profile inline. For more information on
the fields, see "Add an Antispam Profile" on page 807.

Content Filtering—Content Filtering Profiles by Traffic Protocol

Apply to all protocols Select the check box to apply the default profile to all protocols such as HTTP, FTP,
IMAP, SMTP, and POP3.

If you do not select the check box, you can apply different profiles to different
protocols.

HTTP Select an option from the list to specify the UTM policy for the HTTP protocol to be
scanned.

FTP Upload Select an option from the list to specify the UTM policy for the FTP protocol to be
scanned.

FTP Download Select an option from the list to specify the UTM policy for the FTP protocol to be
scanned.

IMAP Select an option from the list to specify the UTM policy for the IMAP protocol to be
scanned.
 838

Table 248: Fields on the Create UTM Policies Page (Continued)

Field Action

SMTP Select an option from the list to specify the UTM policy for the SMTP protocol to be
scanned.

POP3 Select an option from the list to specify the UTM policy for the POP3 protocol to be
scanned.

Create Another Profile Click Create Another Profile to create content filtering Profile inline. For more
information on the fields, see "Add a Content Filtering Profile" on page 813.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the UTM Policies Page | 833

Clone a UTM Policy | 838
Edit a UTM Policy | 839
Delete UTM Policy | 839

Clone a UTM Policy

You are here: Security Services > UTM > UTM Policies.

To clone a UTM policy:

1. Select a UTM policy that you want to clone and select Clone from the More link.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected UTM policy and select Clone.

The Clone UTM Policies page appears with editable fields. For more information on the fields, see
"Add a UTM Policy" on page 835.
2. Click OK to save the changes.
A cloned UTM policy is created for the selected UTM policy. By default, the name of the cloned UTM
policy is in the format: <UTM policy name>_clone.
 839

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the UTM Policies Page | 833

Edit a UTM Policy | 839
Delete UTM Policy | 839

Edit a UTM Policy

You are here: Security Services > UTM > UTM Policies.

To edit a UTM policy:

1. Select an existing UTM policy that you want to edit on the UTM Policy page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit UTM Policy page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see
"Add a UTM Policy" on page 835.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected UTM policy and select Edit Policy.

3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the UTM Policies Page | 833

Delete UTM Policy | 839

Delete UTM Policy

You are here: Security Services > UTM > UTM Policies.

To delete a UTM policy:

1. Select a UTM policy that you want to delete on the UTM Policy page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected UTM policy and select Delete Policy.
 840

3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the UTM Policies Page | 833

Clone a UTM Policy | 838
Add a UTM Policy | 835
 841

CHAPTER 79

IPS Policies

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the IPS Policies Page | 841

Import IPS Predefined Policies | 843

Add an IPS Policy | 844

Clone an IPS Policy | 844

Edit an IPS Policy | 845

Delete an IPS Policy | 846

Add Rules to an IPS Policy | 846

Edit an IPS Policy Rule | 856

Delete IPS Policy Rule | 857

About the IPS Policies Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 842

Field Descriptions | 842

You are here: Security Services > IPS > Policies.

An intrusion prevention system (IPS) policy defines how your device handles the network traffic. It
allows you to enforce various attack detection and prevention techniques on traffic traversing your
network. You can define policy rules to match a section of traffic based on a zone, network, and
application, and then take active or passive preventive actions on that traffic.
 842

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Import predefined policies. See "Import IPS Predefined Policies" on page 843.

• Set an IPS policy as default policy. To do this, select an existing IPS policy and click More > Set
Default.

• Create an IPS policy. See "Add an IPS Policy" on page 844.

NOTE: IPS policies that are created by root users in root-logical-system are not displayed in
security profile advanced settings if you have logged in as a logical system user.

• Edit an IPS policy. See "Edit an IPS Policy" on page 845.

• Delete an IPS policy. See "Delete an IPS Policy" on page 846.

• Clone an IPS policy. See "Clone an IPS Policy" on page 844.

• Add rules to the IPS policy. See "Add Rules to an IPS Policy" on page 846.

• Edit an IPS policy rule. See "Edit an IPS Policy Rule" on page 856.

• Delete an IPS policy rule. See "Delete IPS Policy Rule" on page 857.

• Search a policy. To do this:

1. Click the search icon in the top right corner of the IPS Policies table.

2. Enter the policy name that you want to find and click the search icon.

Based on your input, a list of matching policies appears.

• Show or hide columns in the IPS Policies table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns icon in the
top right corner of the IPS Policies table and select the options you want to view or deselect the
options you want to hide on the page.

Field Descriptions

Table 249 on page 843 describes the fields on the IPS Policies page.
 843

Table 249: Fields on the IPS Policies Page

Field Description

Policy Name Displays the IPS policy name.

Rules Displays the number of rules that are configured for the policy or allows you to add new
rules to the policy.

Predefined or Custom Displays if the IPS policy is a predefined or a custom policy.

NOTE: This option is not available for logical systems and tenants.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add an IPS Policy | 844

Add Rules to an IPS Policy | 846
Edit an IPS Policy | 845
Delete an IPS Policy | 846
Clone an IPS Policy | 844

Import IPS Predefined Policies

The predefined policies are templates which can be used as a guideline. Each template is set of rules of a
specific rulebase type that you can clone and then update to meet your needs. Use this page to import
the IPS predefined policies.

NOTE: This option is not available for logical systems and tenants.

To import the predefined policy templates:

1. Click Import Predefined Policies at the top-right of the IPS Policies page.
The Import Predefined Policies page appears.
2. Select the predefined policy templates from the Available column that you want to import.
3. Click on the right arrow to move the selected predefined policy templates to the Selected column.
 844

4. Click OK.
The imported predefined policy template are displayed in the IPS Policies page.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPS Policies Page | 841

Add an IPS Policy | 844
Add Rules to an IPS Policy | 846

Add an IPS Policy

You are here: Security Services > IPS > Policies.

To add an IPS policy:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the IPS Policies page.
The Create IPS Policy page appears.
2. Enter a name for the IPS policy.
Name of the IPS policy must be a unique string of alphanumeric and special characters, including
colons, periods, hyphens, and underscores; 250-character maximum.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
The IPS policy is displayed on the IPS Policies page.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPS Policies Page | 841

Add Rules to an IPS Policy | 846
Edit an IPS Policy | 845
Delete an IPS Policy | 846
Clone an IPS Policy | 844

Clone an IPS Policy

You are here: Security Services > IPS > Policies.

 845

To clone an IDP policy:

1. Select an IPS policy that you want to clone and click More > Clone on the upper right side of the IPS
Policies page.
The Clone IPS Policy page appears with the editable name field. By default, the clone name will show
as <IPS policy name>_clone.
2. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
You can see the cloned IPS policy on the IPS Policies page. You can edit the rules of the cloned IPS
policy. For more information on the IPS policy and its rules, see "Add an IPS Policy" on page 844 and
"Add Rules to an IPS Policy" on page 846.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPS Policies Page | 841

Edit an IPS Policy | 845
Delete an IPS Policy | 846
Add Rules to an IPS Policy | 846
Edit an IPS Policy Rule | 856

Edit an IPS Policy

You are here: Security Services > IPS > Policies.

To edit an IPS policy:

1. Select an existing IPS policy that you want to edit on the IPS Policies page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit IPS Policy page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see "Add
an IPS Policy" on page 844.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected IPS policy and select Edit.

3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPS Policies Page | 841

 846

Add an IPS Policy | 844

Add Rules to an IPS Policy | 846
Clone an IPS Policy | 844
Delete an IPS Policy | 846

Delete an IPS Policy

You are here: Security Services > IPS > Policies.

To delete an IPS policy:

1. Select an IPS policy that you want to delete on the IPS Policies page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected IPS policy and select Delete.

3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the policy.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPS Policies Page | 841

Add an IPS Policy | 844
Add Rules to an IPS Policy | 846
Edit an IPS Policy | 845
Clone an IPS Policy | 844

Add Rules to an IPS Policy

You are here: Security Services > IPS > Policies.

To add rules to an IPS policy:

NOTE: You can only add rules for the custom IPS policies.
 847

1. Click Add Rules or on the rule number available next to the column of your IPS policy name.
The IPS Rules page appears.
2. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the IPS Rules or Exempt Rules page.
The IPS Rules or Exempt Rules page with the inline editable fields will appear.
3. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 250 on page 847.
4. Click the tick icon on the right-side of the row once done with the configuration.
Once you configure the IPS policy rules, you can associate the IPS policy with the security policy.

Table 250: Fields on the IPS Rules or Exempt Rules Page

Field Action

Rule Name Enter the rule name for the IPS policy.

Description Enter the description for the rule.

Network Criteria

Sources

Source zone Select a source zone to be associated with the IPS policy:

• Not configured—Matches the configured source zone from firewall policy.

• Any—Matches any source zone from firewall policy.

• Specific—Select a source zone from the list where network traffic originates.

Source addresses Select a source address to be associated with the IPS policy:

• Not configured—Matches the configured source IP address from firewall policy.

• Any—Matches any source IP address from firewall policy.

• Specific—A source IP address from which network traffic originates.

Select the addresses from the Available column and then click the right arrow to
move it to the Selected column. You can select Exclude Selected to exclude only
the selected address from the list.

Destinations
 848

Table 250: Fields on the IPS Rules or Exempt Rules Page (Continued)

Field Action

Destination zone Select a destination zone to be associated with the IPS policy:

• Not configured—Matches the configured destination zone from firewall policy.

• Any—Matches any destination zone from firewall policy.

• Specific—Select a destination zone from the list to which network traffic is sent.

Destination addresses Select a destination address to be associated with the IPS policy:

• Not configured—Matches the configured destination IP address from firewall

policy.

• Any—Matches any destination IP address from firewall policy.

• Specific—A destination IP address to which the network traffic is sent.

Select the addresses from the Available column and then click the right arrow to
move it to the Selected column. You can select Exclude Selected to exclude only
the selected address from the list.

IPS Signatures

Add Select predefined or custom signatures from the list to add it to the IPS policy rules.

Delete Select the IPS signatures you do not want to add to the IPS policy rules and click the
delete icon.

Name Displays name of the IPS predefined or custom signatures.

Category Displays the predefined attack or attack groups categories. For example, App, HTTP,
and LDAP.

Severity Displays the attack severity level that the signature reports.

Attack Type Displays the attack type (signature or anomaly).

 849

Table 250: Fields on the IPS Rules or Exempt Rules Page (Continued)

Field Action

Recommended Action Displays the specified action taken from the device when it detects an attack. For
example, ignore and drop.

Type Displays if the IPS signature type is predefined or custom.

Add Predefined Signatures

View by View and select the desired predefined attacks or attack groups and click OK to add
it to the selected IPS policy.

Show or Hide Columns Use the Show Hide Columns icon in the top right corner of the page and select the
options you want to show or deselect to hide options on the page.

Name Displays name of the predefined attack objects or attack object group.

Category Displays the predefined attack or attack groups categories. For example, App, HTTP,
and LDAP.

Severity Displays the attack severity level that the signature reports.

Type Attack Displays the attack type (signature or anomaly).

Recommended Displays the added predefined attacks recommended by Juniper Networks to the
dynamic attack group.

Recommended Action Displays the specified action taken from the device when it detects an attack. For
example, ignore and drop.

Performance Displays a performance filter (fast, normal, slow, and unknown) to add attack objects
based on the performance level that is vulnerable to the attack.

Direction Displays the connection direction (any, client-to-server, or server-to-client) of the

attack.
 850

Table 250: Fields on the IPS Rules or Exempt Rules Page (Continued)

Field Action

Add Custom Signatures

View by View and select the desired custom attacks, static groups, or dynamic groups and
click OK to add it to the selected IPS policy.

Custom Signatures—Custom Attacks

Name Displays the custom attack object name.

Severity Displays the attack severity level that the signature reports.

Attack Type Displays the attack type (signature or anomaly).

Recommended Action Displays the specified action taken from the device when it detects an attack. For
example, ignore and drop.

Custom Signatures—Static Group

Name Displays static group name for the custom signatures.

Group Members Displays the name of the attack object or group attack object. The members can be
predefined attacks, predefined attack groups, custom attacks, or custom dynamic
groups.

Custom Signatures—Dynamic Groups

Name Displays dynamic group name for the custom signatures.

Attack Prefix Displays prefix match for attack names. For example: HTTP:*

Severity Displays the attack severity level that the signature reports.
 851

Table 250: Fields on the IPS Rules or Exempt Rules Page (Continued)

Field Action

Attack Type Displays the attack type (signature or anomaly).

Category Displays the dynamic attack groups categories. For example, App, HTTP, and LDAP.

Direction Displays the connection direction (any, client-to-server, or server-to-client) of the

attack.
 852

Table 250: Fields on the IPS Rules or Exempt Rules Page (Continued)

Field Action

Action NOTE: This option is not available for exempt rules.

Select any one of the actions from the list:

• Recommended (default)—All predefined attack objects have a default action

associated with them. This is the action that we recommend when that attack is
detected.

• No Action—No action is taken. Use this action when you want to only generate
logs for some traffic.

• Drop Connection—Drops all packets associated with the connection, preventing

traffic for the connection from reaching its destination. Use this action to drop
connections for traffic that is not prone to spoofing.

• Drop Packet—Drops a matching packet before it can reach its destination but
does not close the connection. Use this action to drop packets for attacks in
traffic that is prone to spoofing, such as UDP traffic. Dropping a connection for
such traffic could result in a denial of service that prevents you from receiving
traffic from a legitimate source-IP address.

• Close Client—Closes the connection and sends an RST packet to the client but
not to the server.

• Close Server—Closes the connection and sends an RST packet to the server but
not to the client.

• Close Client & Server—Closes the connection and sends an RST packet to both
the client and the server.

• Ignore Connection—Stops scanning traffic for the rest of the connection if an

attack match is found. IPS disables the rulebase for the specific connection.

• Mark DiffServ—Assigns the indicated service-differentiation value to the packet

in an attack, then passes them on normally.

Options

NOTE: This option is not available for exempt rules.

Log Attacks Enable the log attacks to create a log record that appears in the log viewer.
 853

Table 250: Fields on the IPS Rules or Exempt Rules Page (Continued)

Field Action

Log Packets Enable the log packets to capture the packets received before and after the attack for
further offline analysis of attacker behavior.

Advanced
NOTE: This option is not available for exempt rules.

Threat Profiling

NOTE: Feeds are only displayed if you have enrolled to Juniper ATP Cloud. You can also download the feeds
using the command, request services security-intelligence download.

Add attacker to feed Select from the list to add the attackers IP addresses to the feed to configure IPS rule
with threat profiles.

Add target to feed Select from the list to add the target IP addresses to the feed to configure IPS rule
with threat profiles.

Notifications

Packets before Enter the number of packets processed before the attack is captured.

Range: 1 through 255. Default is 1.

NOTE: This option is available when you enable Log Packets.

Packets after Enter the number of packets processed after the attack is captured.

Range: 0 through 255. Default is 1.

NOTE: This option is available when you enable Log Packets.

Post window timeout Enter the time limit for capturing post-attack packets for a session. No packet
capture is conducted after the timeout has expired.

Range: 0 through 1800 seconds. Default is 1 second.

NOTE: This option is available when you enable Log Packets.

 854

Table 250: Fields on the IPS Rules or Exempt Rules Page (Continued)

Field Action

Alert Flag Enable this option to set an alert flag in the Alert column of the Log Viewer for the
matching log record.

NOTE: This option is available when you enable Log Attacks.

IP Actions

Action Specifies the action that IPS takes against future connections that use the same IP
address.

Select an IP action from the list:

• None—Do not take any action, which is the default setting.

• Notify—Don't take any action on future traffic but log the event.

• Close—Close future connections of new sessions that match the IP address by

sending RST packets to the client and server.

• Block—Block future connections of any session that matches the IP address.

 855

Table 250: Fields on the IPS Rules or Exempt Rules Page (Continued)

Field Action

IP Target Configure how the traffic should be matched to the configured IP actions.

Select an IP target from the list:

• None—Do not match any traffic.

• Destination address—Match traffic based on the destination IP address of the

attack traffic.

• Service—For TCP and UDP, match traffic based on the source IP address, source
port, destination IP address, and destination port of the attack traffic.

• Source address—Match traffic based on the source IP address of the attack

traffic.

• Source zone—Match traffic based on the source zone of the attack traffic.

• Source zone address—Match traffic based on the source zone and source IP
address of the attack traffic.

• Zone service—Match traffic based on the source zone, destination IP address,

destination port, and protocol of the attack traffic.

Refresh timeout Enable refresh of the IP action timeout (that you specify in the Timeout field) if
future traffic matches the configured IP actions.

Timeout Specifies the number of seconds the IP action should remain effective before new
sessions are initiated within that specified timeout value.

Enter the timeout value, in seconds. The maximum value is 65,535 seconds. Default
is 300 seconds.

Log IP-Action hits Enable to log information about the IP action against the traffic that matches a rule.
By default, this setting is disabled.

Log IP-Action rule Enable to generate an event when the IP action filter is triggered. By default, this
creation setting is disabled.

Rule Modifiers
 856

Table 250: Fields on the IPS Rules or Exempt Rules Page (Continued)

Field Action

Severity override Severity level (None, Critical, Info, Major, Minor, Warning) to override the inherited
attack severity in the rules. The most dangerous level is critical, which attempts to
crash your server or gain control of your network. Informational level is least
dangerous and is used by network administrators to find flaws in their security
systems.

Terminal matching Enable to mark an IPS rule as terminal. When a terminal rule is matched, the device
stops matching for the remaining rules in that IPS policy.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPS Policies Page | 841

Edit an IPS Policy Rule | 856
Delete IPS Policy Rule | 857
Add an IPS Policy | 844
Clone an IPS Policy | 844
Delete an IPS Policy | 846

Edit an IPS Policy Rule

You are here: Security Services > IPS > Policies.

To edit an IPS policy rule:

1. Click on the existing IPS policy rule on the IPS Policies page.
The IPS Rules page appears.
2. Select the IPS or exempt rules you want to edit.
3. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
Editable fields on the IPS Rules or Exempt Rules page appears.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected IPS policy and select Edit.
 857

4. Edit the required options and click the tick icon on the right-side of the row once done with the
configuration.
For more information on the rules options, see "Add Rules to an IPS Policy" on page 846.

The selected IPS policy rules are edited.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPS Policies Page | 841

Delete IPS Policy Rule | 857
Add an IPS Policy | 844
Add Rules to an IPS Policy | 846
Clone an IPS Policy | 844
Delete an IPS Policy | 846

Delete IPS Policy Rule

You are here: Security Services > IPS > Policies.

To delete an IPS policy rule:

1. Click on the existing IPS policy rule on the IPS Policies page.
The IPS Rules page appears.
2. Select the IPS or exempt rules you want to delete.
3. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
4. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the rule.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPS Policies Page | 841

Edit an IPS Policy Rule | 856
Add an IPS Policy | 844
Add Rules to an IPS Policy | 846
Clone an IPS Policy | 844
Delete an IPS Policy | 846
 858

CHAPTER 80

IPS Sensor

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Sensor Page | 858

About the Sensor Page

IN THIS SECTION

Field Descriptions | 858

You are here: Security Services > IPS > Sensor.

You can configure sensor settings to limit the number of sessions running application identification and
also to limit memory usage for application identification.

Field Descriptions

Table 251 on page 858 describes the fields on the Sensor page.

Table 251: Fields on the Sensor Page

Field Description

Basic Settings Select to configure basic IPS sensor settings.

IDP Protection Mode

 859

Table 251: Fields on the Sensor Page (Continued)

Field Description

Protection Mode Select an option to specify the inspection parameters for efficient inspection of traffic
in the device. The options available are:

• DataCenter—Disables all STC traffic inspection.

• Datacenter Full—Disables all STC traffic inspection.

• Perimeter—Inspects all STC (Server To Client) traffic.

• Perimeter Full—Inspects all STC traffic.

Intelligent Inspection

IDP By Pass Enable or disable the IDP Intelligent Bypass option.

IDP By Pass CPU Enter the threshold value.

Threshold
Range: 0 through 99. Default value: 85.

IDP By Pass CPU Enter the CPU tolerance value.

Tolerance
Range: 1 through 99. Default value: 5.
 860

Table 251: Fields on the Sensor Page (Continued)

Field Description

Intelligent Inspection Enable or disable this option.

If you enable this option, enter the following details:

• Ignore Content Decompression— Enable this option to enable payload content

decompression.

• Signature Severity—Select the severity level of the attack from the list that the
signature will report for IDP processing. The available options are minor, major,
and critical.

NOTE: Click Clear All to clear all the selected severity values.

• Protocols—Select the protocols from the list that needs to be processed in

Intelligent Inspection mode.

NOTE: Click Clear All to clear all the selected protocols.

• CPU Threshold (%)—Enter the value of CPU usage threshold percentage for
intelligent inspection.

Range: 0 through 99 percent.

• CPU Tolerance (%)—Enter the value of CPU usage tolerance percentage for
intelligent inspection.

Range: 1 through 99 percent.

• Memory Tolerance—Enter the value of memory tolerance percentage for

intelligent inspection.

Range: 1 through 100 percent.

• Free Memory Threshold—Enter the value of free memory threshold percentage

for intelligent inspection.

Range: 1 through 100 percent.

• Session Bytes Depth—Enter the value of session bytes scanning depth.

Range: 1 through 1000000 bytes.

Memory Lower Enter the memory lower threshold limit percentage.

Threshold
Range: 1 through 100.
 861

Table 251: Fields on the Sensor Page (Continued)

Field Description

Memory Upper Enter the memory upper threshold limit percentage.

Threshold
Range: 1 through 100.

Flow

Drop On Limit Enable this option to specify the dropped connections on exceeding resource limits.

Drop On Failover Enable this option to specify the dropped traffic on HA failover sessions.

Drop If No Policy Enable this option to specify all the dropped traffic till IDP policy gets loaded.
Loaded

Packet Log
NOTE: Starting in Junos OS Release 19.2R1, Packet Log configuration is available.

IP Address Enter the IP address of the destination host to send packet log.

Port Enter the UDP port number.

Range: 0 through 65535.

Source Address Enter the source IP address used to transport packet log to a host.

Advanced Settings

IDP Flow

Log Errors Enable this option to specify if the flow errors have to be logged.

Select an option from the list.

Flow FIFO Max Size Enter a value to specify the maximum FIFO size.

Range: : 1 through 65535. Default value is 1.

 862

Table 251: Fields on the Sensor Page (Continued)

Field Description

Hash Table Size Enter a value to specify the hash table size.

Range: 1024 through 1,000,000. Default value is 1024.

Max Timers Poll Ticks Enter a value to specify the maximum amount of time at which the timer ticks at a
regular interval.

Range: 0 through 1000 ticks. Default value is 1000 ticks.

Reject Timeout Enter a value to specify the amount of time in milliseconds within which a response
must be received.

Range: 1 through 65,535 seconds. Default value is 300 seconds.

Global

Enable All Qmodules Select an option from the list to specify all the qmodules of the global rulebase IDP
security policy are enabled.

Enable Packet Pool Select an option from the list to specify the packet pool is enabled to be used when
the current pool is exhausted.

Policy Lookup Cache Select an option from the list to specify the cache is enabled to accelerate IDP policy
lookup.

Memory Limit Percent Enter a value to specify the limit IDP memory usage at this percent of available
memory.

Range: 10 through 90 percent.

HTTP X-Forwarded When you enable this option, during traffic flow, IDP saves the source IP addresses
(IPv4 or IPv6) from the contexts of HTTP traffic, and displays it in the attack logs.

NOTE: Starting in Junos OS Release 20.2R1, HTTP X-Forwarded option is supported.

IPS
 863

Table 251: Fields on the Sensor Page (Continued)

Field Description

Detect Shellcode Select an option from the list to specify if shellcode detection has to be applied.

Ignore Regular Select an option from the list to specify if the sensor has to bypass DFA and PCRE
Expression matching.

Process Ignore Server- Select an option from the list to specify if the sensor has to bypass IPS processing for
to-Client server-to-client flows.

Process Override Select an option from the list to specify if the sensor has to execute protocol
decoders even without an IDP policy.

Process Port Enter an integer to specify a port on which the sensor executes protocol decoders.

Range: 0 through 65535.

IPS FIFO Max Size Enter an integer to specify the maximum allocated size of the IPS FIFO.

Range: 1 through 65535.

Minimum Log Supercade Enter an integer to specify the minimum number of logs to trigger the signature
hierarchy feature.

Range: 0 through 65535.

Log

Cache Size Enter a value to specify the size in bytes for each user’s log cache.

Disable Suppression Enable this option to specify if the log suppression has to be disabled.

Include Destination Select an option from the list to specify if combine log records for events with a
Address matching source address.

Max Logs Operate Enter a value to specify the maximum number of logs on which log suppression can
operate. Range is 255 through 65536.
 864

Table 251: Fields on the Sensor Page (Continued)

Field Description

Max Time Report Enter a value to specify the time (seconds) after which suppressed logs will be
reported. IDP reports suppressed logs after 5 seconds by default.

Start Log Enter a value to specify the number of log occurrences after which log suppression
begins. Log suppression begins with the first occurrence by default.

Range is 1 through 128.

Reassembler

Ignore Memory Select an option from the list to specify if the user has to allow per-flow memory to
Overflow go out of limit.

Ignore Reassembly Select an option from the list to specify if the user has to allow per-flow reassembly
Memory Overflow memory to go out of limit.

Ignore Reassembly Enable this option to specify the TCP reassembler to ignore the global reassembly
Overflow overflow to prevent the dropping of application traffic.

Max Flow Memory Enter an integer to specify the maximum per-flow memory for TCP reassembly in
kilobytes.

Range: 64 through 4,294,967,295 kilobytes.

Max Packet Memory Enter an integer to specify the maximum packet memory for TCP reassembly in
kilobytes.

Range: 64 through 4,294,967,295 kilobytes

Max Synacks Queued Enter an integer to specify the maximum limit for queuing Syn/Ack packets with
different SEQ numbers.

Range: 0 through 5

Packet Log
 865

Table 251: Fields on the Sensor Page (Continued)

Field Description

Max Sessions Enter an integer to specify the maximum number of sessions actively conducting pre-
attack packet captures on a device at one time.

Range: 1 through 100 percent

Total Memory Enter an integer to specify the maximum amount of memory to be allocated to packet
capture for the device.

Range: 1 through 100 percent

Detectors Click + and enter the following fields.

Protocol Select the name of the protocol from the list to enable or disable the detector.

Tunable Name Select the name of the specific tunable parameter from the list to enable or disable
the protocol detector for each of the services.

Tunable Value Enter the protocol value of the specific tunable parameter to enable or disable the
protocol detector for each of the services.

Range: 0 to 4294967295

Release History Table

Release Description

20.2R1 Starting in Junos OS Release 20.2R1, HTTP X-Forwarded option is supported.

19.2R1 Starting in Junos OS Release 19.2R1, Packet Log configuration is available.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the IPS Policies Page | 841

 866

CHAPTER 81

ALG

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the ALG Page | 866

About the ALG Page

IN THIS SECTION

Field Descriptions | 866

You are here: Security Services > ALG.

Use this page to configure Application Layer Gateway (ALG).

Field Descriptions

Table 252 on page 866 describes the fields on the ALG page.

Once the configuration is complete, click OK to save the changes or click Reset to revert back the
changes.

Table 252: Fields on the ALG Page

Field Description

Main
 867

Table 252: Fields on the ALG Page (Continued)

Field Description

Enable PPTP Select the check box to enable the Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) for ALG.

PPTP is a Layer 2 protocol that tunnels PPP data across TCP/IP networks. The PPTP client is
freely available on Windows systems and is widely deployed for building VPNs.

Enable RSH Select the check box to enable RSH for ALG.

The RSH ALG handles TCP packets destined for port 514 and processes the RSH port
command. The RSH ALG performs NAT on the port in the port command and opens gates as
necessary.

Enable RTSP Select the check box to enable the Real-Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) for ALG.

Enable SQL Select the check box to enable Structured Query Language (SQL) for ALG.

The SQLNET ALG processes SQL TNS response frames from the server side. It parses the
packet and looks for the (HOST=ipaddress), (PORT=port) pattern and performs NAT and gate
opening on the client side for the TCP data channel.

Enable TALK Select the check box to enable the TALK protocol for ALG.

The TALK protocol uses UDP port 517 and port 518 for control-channel connections. The
talk program consists of a server and a client. The server handles client notifications and
helps to establish talk sessions. There are two types of talk servers: ntalk and talkd. The TALK
ALG processes packets of both ntalk and talkd formats. It also performs NAT and gate
opening as necessary.

Enable TFTP Select the check box to enable the Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) for ALG.

The TFTP ALG processes TFTP packets that initiate a request and opens a gate to allow
return packets from the reverse direction to the port that sends the request.

DNS

Enable DNS Select the check box to enable the domain name system (DNS) for ALG.

The DNS ALG monitors DNS query and reply packets and closes the session if the DNS flag
indicates the packet is a reply message.
 868

Table 252: Fields on the ALG Page (Continued)

Field Description

Doctoring Select one of the following options:

• Sanity Check—Performs only DNS ALG sanity checks.

• None—Disables all DNS ALG doctoring.

Maximum Select a number to specify the maximum DNS message length.

Message length
Range: 512 through 8192 bytes.

Enable Oversize Select the check box to enable oversize message drop.
message drop.

FTP

Enable FTP Select the check box to enable the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) for ALG.

The FTP ALG monitors PORT, PASV, and 227 commands. It performs Network Address
Translation (NAT) on IP/port in the message and gate opening on the device as necessary.
The FTP ALG supports FTP put and FTP get command blocking. When FTP_NO_PUT or
FTP_NO_GET is set in the policy, the FTP ALG sends back a blocking command and closes
the associated opened gate when it detects an FTP STOR or FTP RETR command.

Enable allow Select the check box to allow any mismatch in IP address.
mismatch IP
address

Enable FTPs Select the check box to enable secure FTP and FTP SSL protocols.
Extension

Enable line Break Select the check box to enable line-break-extension.

Extension
This option will enable the FTP ALG to recognize the LF as line break in addition to the
standard CR+LF (carriage return, followed by line feed).

H323
 869

Table 252: Fields on the ALG Page (Continued)

Field Description

Enable H323 Select the check box to enable the H.323 ALG.

Application Specify the security screens for the H.323 protocol ALG.
Screen
Enter the following details:

• Message Flood Gatekeeper Threshold—Enter a value. The value range is 1 to 50000

messages per second.

Limits the rate per second at which remote access server (RAS) requests to the
gatekeeper are processed. Messages exceeding the threshold are dropped. This feature is
disabled by default.

• Action on receiving unknown message:

• Enable Permit NAT Applied—Select the check box to specify how unidentified H.323
(unsupported) messages are handled by the device.

The default is to drop unknown messages. Permitting unknown messages can

compromise security and is not recommended. However, in a secure test or
production environment, this statement can be useful for resolving interoperability
issues with disparate vendor equipment. By permitting unknown H.323 messages,
you can get your network operational and later analyze your VoIP traffic to determine
why some messages were being dropped.

This statement applies only to received packets identified as supported VoIP packets.
If a packet cannot be identified, it is always dropped. If a packet is identified as a
supported protocol, the message is forwarded without processing.

• Enable Permit Routed—Select the check box to specify that unknown messages be
allowed to pass if the session is in route mode.

Sessions in transparent mode are treated as though they are in route mode.

DSCP Code Code Point—Select a 6-bit string from the list.

Rewrite
Specifies a rewrite-rule for the traffic that passes through a voice over IP Application Layer
Gateway (VoIP ALG). The value of code point is in binary format.

The VoIP rewrite rules modifies the appropriate class of service (CoS) bits in an outgoing
packet through Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) mechanism that improves the
VoIP quality in a congested network.
 870

Table 252: Fields on the ALG Page (Continued)

Field Description

Endpoints Enter the following details:

• Timeout For Endpoint—Enter a timeout value in seconds for entries in the NAT table.

Range: 10 through 50,000 seconds

Controls the duration of the entries in the NAT table.

• Enable Permit Media From Any Source Port—Select this option to allow media traffic
from any port number.

IKE-ESP

Enable IKE-ESP Select the check box to enable IKE-ESP.

ESP Gate Select the gate timeout from 2 to 30 seconds.

Timeout (sec)

ESP Session Select the ESP timeout session from 60 to 2400 seconds.
Timeout (sec)

ALG State Select the ALG state time out from 180 to 86400 sec.
Timeout (Sec)

MGCP

Enable MGCP Select the check box to enable the Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP).

Inactive Media Select a value to specify the maximum amount of time that the temporary openings in the
Timeout firewall (pinholes) remain open for media if no activity is detected. range is from 10 through
2,550 seconds.

Specifies the maximum time (in seconds) a call can remain active without any media (RTP or
RTCP) traffic within a group. Each time an RTP or RTCP packet occurs within a call, this
timeout resets. When the period of inactivity exceeds this setting, the temporary openings
(pinholes) in the firewall MGCP ALG opened for media are closed. The default setting is 120
seconds; the range is from 10 to 2550 seconds. Note that, upon timeout, while resources for
media (sessions and pinholes) are removed, the call is not terminated.
 871

Table 252: Fields on the ALG Page (Continued)

Field Description

Maximum Call Select a value from 3 through 720 minutes.

Duration
Sets the maximum length of a call. When a call exceeds this parameter setting, the MGCP
ALG tears down the call and releases the media sessions. The default setting is 720 minutes;
the range is from 3 to 720 minutes.

Transaction Enter a value from 3 through 50 seconds to specify

Timeout
Specifies a timeout value for MGCP transactions. A transaction is a signaling message, for
example, a NTFY from the gateway to the call agent or a 200 OK from the call agent to the
gateway. The device tracks these transactions and clears them when they time out.

Application Enter the following details:

Screen
• Message Flood Threshold—Enter a value from 2 through 50,000 seconds per media
gateway.

Limits the rate per second at which message requests to the Media Gateway are
processed. Messages exceeding the threshold are dropped by the Media Gateway
Control Protocol (MGCP). This feature is disabled by default.

• Connection Flood Threshold—Enter a value from 2 through 10,000.

Limits the number of new connection requests allowed per Media Gateway (MG) per
second. Messages exceeding the ALG.

• Action On Receiving Unknown Message—Enter any of the following:

• Enable Permit NAT Applied—Select the check box to specify how unidentified MGCP
messages are handled by the Juniper Networks device.

The default is to drop unknown (unsupported) messages. Permitting unknown

messages can compromise security and is not recommended. However, in a secure
test or production environment, this statement can be useful for resolving
interoperability issues with disparate vendor equipment. By permitting unknown
MGCP (unsupported) messages, you can get your network operational and later
analyze your VoIP traffic to determine why some messages were being dropped.

• Enable Permit Routed—Select the check box.

Specifies that unknown messages be allowed to pass if the session is in route mode.
(Sessions in transparent mode are treated as route mode.)
 872

Table 252: Fields on the ALG Page (Continued)

Field Description

DSCP Code Specifies a code-point alias or bit set to apply to a forwarding class for a rewrite rule.
Rewrite
Code Point—Enter a six-bit DSCP code point value.

MSRPC

Enable MSRPC Select the check box to enable the MSRPC.

Provides a method for a program running on one host to call procedures in a program
running on another host. Because of the large number of RPC services and the need to
broadcast, the transport address of an RPC service is dynamically negotiated based on the
service program's Universal Unique IDentifier (UUID). The specific UUID is mapped to a
transport address.

Maximum Group Select the group usage % from 10 to 100%.

Usage (%)

Map Entry Select the map entry timeout session from 5 to 4320 minutes.
Timeout (min)

SCCP

Enable SCCP Select the check box to enable the Skinny Client Control Protocol.

Inactive Media Select a value from 10 through 600 seconds.

Timeout
Indicates the maximum length of time (in seconds) a call can remain active without any media
(RTP or RTCP) traffic within a group. Each time an RTP or RTCP packet occurs within a call,
this timeout resets. When the period of inactivity exceeds this setting, the gates opened for
media are closed.

Application Call Flood Threshold—Select a value from 2 through 1,000.

Screen
Protects SCCP ALG clients from flood attacks by limiting the number of calls they attempt to
process.
 873

Table 252: Fields on the ALG Page (Continued)

Field Description

Action On • Enable Permit NAT Applied—Select the check box.

Receiving
Unknown Specifies how unidentified SCCP messages are handled by the device. The default is to
Messages drop unknown (unsupported) messages. Permitting unknown messages can compromise
security and is not recommended. However, in a secure test or production environment,
this statement can be useful for resolving interoperability issues with disparate vendor
equipment. By permitting unknown SCCP (unsupported) messages, you can get your
network operational and later analyze your VoIP traffic to determine why some messages
were being dropped.

This statement applies only to received packets identified as supported VoIP packets. If a
packet cannot be identified, it is always dropped. If a packet is identified as a supported
protocol, the message is forwarded without processing.

• Enable Permit Routed—Select the check box.

Specifies that unknown messages be allowed to pass if the session is in route mode.
(Sessions in transparent mode are treated as though they are in route mode.)

DSCP Code Code Point—Enter a six-bit DSCP code point value.

Rewrite

SIP

Enable SIP Select the check box to enable Session Initiation Protocol (SIP).

Enable Retain Select the check box to enable whether the device frees media resources for a SIP, even
Hold Resource when a media stream is placed on hold.

By default, media stream resources are released when the media stream is held.

Maximum Call Select a value from 3 through 720 minutes.

Duration
Sets the absolute maximum length of a call. When a call exceeds this parameter setting, the
SIP ALG tears down the call and releases the media sessions. The default setting is 720
minutes, the range is from 3 to 720 minutes.
 874

Table 252: Fields on the ALG Page (Continued)

Field Description

C Timeout Select a value from 3 through 10 minutes.

Specifies the INVITE transaction timeout at the proxy, in minutes; the default is 3. Because
the SIP ALG is in the middle, instead of using the INVITE transaction timer value B (which is
(64 * T1) = 32 seconds), the SIP ALG gets its timer value from the proxy.

T4 Interval Select a value from 5 through 10 seconds.

Specifies the maximum time a message remains in the network. The default is 5 seconds; the
range is 5 through 10 seconds. Because many SIP timers scale with the T4-Interval (as
described in RFC 3261), when you change the value of the T4-Interval timer, those SIP
timers also are adjusted.

Inactive Media Select a value from 10 through 2,550 seconds.

Timeout
Specifies the maximum time (in seconds) a call can remain active without any media (RTP or
RTCP) traffic within a group. Each time an RTP or RTCP packet occurs within a call, this
timeout resets. When the period of inactivity exceeds this setting, the temporary openings
(pinholes) in the firewall SIP ALG opened for media are closed. The default setting is 120
seconds; the range is 10 through 2550 seconds. Note that, upon timeout, while resources for
media (sessions and pinholes) are removed, the call is not terminated.

T1 Interval Select a value from 500 through 5000 milliseconds.

Specifies the round-trip time estimate, in seconds, of a transaction between endpoints. The
default is 500 milliseconds. Because many SIP timers scale with the T1-Interval (as described
in RFC 3261), when you change the value of the T1-Interval timer, those SIP timers also are
adjusted.
 875

Table 252: Fields on the ALG Page (Continued)

Field Description

Application Action On Receiving Unknown Message:

Screen
• Enable Permit NAT Applied—Select the check box to enable handling unidentified SIP
messages by the device.

This statement applies only to received packets identified as supported VoIP packets. If a
packet cannot be identified, it is always dropped. If a packet is identified as a supported
protocol, the message is forwarded without processing.

• Enable Permit Routed—Select the check box to enable to allow unknown messages to
pass if the session is in route mode. (Sessions in transparent mode are treated as route
mode.)

Protect Options • SIP Invite Attack Table Entry Timeout—Enter a value from 1 through 3,600 seconds.

Specifies the time (in seconds) to make an attack table entry for each INVITE, which is
listed in the application screen.

• Enable Attack Protection—Select one of the options: All Servers, Selected Servers, or
None.

Protects servers against INVITE attacks. Configures the SIP application screen to protect
the server at some or all destination IP addresses against INVITE attacks.

When you select Selected Servers, enter the destination IP address and click +. You can
select the destination IP address and click X to delete it.

DSCP Code Code Point—Enter a six-bit DSCP code point value.

Rewrite

SUNRPC

Enable SUNRPC Select the check box to enable SUNRPC.

Because of the large number of RPC services and the need to broadcast, the transport
address of an RPC service is dynamically negotiated based on the service's program number
and version number. Several binding protocols are defined for mapping the RPC program
number and version number to a transport address.
 876

Table 252: Fields on the ALG Page (Continued)

Field Description

Maximum Group Select the maximum group usage % from 10 to 100%.

Usage (%)

Map Entry Select the map entry timeout session from 5 to 4320 minutes.
Timeout
 877

CHAPTER 82

Advanced Threat Prevention

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Advanced Threat Prevention Page | 877

Add a Threat Prevention Policy | 879

Edit a Threat Prevention Policy | 881

Delete Threat Prevention Policy | 881

About the Advanced Threat Prevention Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 877

Field Descriptions | 878

You are here: Security Services > Advanced Threat Prevention.

You can view and configure threat prevention policies. Threat prevention policies provide protection and
monitoring for configured threat profiles, including command and control server, infected hosts, and
malware. Using threat intelligence feeds in policies, ingress and egress traffic is monitored for suspicious
content and behavior.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Create a threat prevention policy. See "Add a Threat Prevention Policy" on page 879.

• Edit a threat prevention policy. See "Edit a Threat Prevention Policy" on page 881.
 878

• Delete a threat prevention policy. See "Delete Threat Prevention Policy" on page 881.

• Filter the threat prevention policies based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top
right-hand corner of the Threat Prevention Policies table. The columns in the grid change to accept
filter options. Type the filter options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the Threat Prevention Policies table. To do this, use the Show Hide Columns
icon in the top right corner of the page and select the options you want to show or deselect to hide
options on the page.

• Advance search for threat prevention policies. To do this, use the search text box present above the
table grid. The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. In the search text box,
when you hover over the icon, it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the
search string, the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a search criteria, only one character is
deleted.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

Field Descriptions

Table 253 on page 878 describes the fields on the Threat Prevention Policies page.

Table 253: Fields on the Threat Prevention Policies Page

Field Description

Name Enter a threat prevention policy name.

Name must begin with an alphanumeric character; dashes and underscores are allowed; cannot
exceed 63 characters.
 879

Table 253: Fields on the Threat Prevention Policies Page (Continued)

Field Description

C&C Server Displays the range value of threat score set for this policy on a C&C server. A C&C profile
would provide information on C&C servers that have attempted to contact and compromise
hosts on your network. If the threat score of a feed is between this range, the feed will be
blocked or permitted based on the threat score.

Infected Host Displays the range value of threat score set for this policy if . An infected host profile would
provide information on compromised hosts and their associated threat levels.

Malware HTTP A malware profile would provide information on files downloaded by hosts and found to be
suspicious based on known signatures or URLs.

Malware SMTP A malware profile would provide information on files downloaded by hosts and found to be
suspicious based on known signatures or URLs.

Log All traffic is logged by default. Use the pulldown to narrow the types of traffic to be logged.

Description Enter a description for the threat prevention policy.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Threat Prevention Policy | 879

Edit a Threat Prevention Policy | 881
Delete Threat Prevention Policy | 881

Add a Threat Prevention Policy

You are here: Security Services > Advanced Threat Prevention.

To add a threat prevention policy:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Threat Prevention Policy page.
The Create Threat Prevention Policy page appears.
 880

2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 254 on page 880.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 254: Fields on the Create Threat Prevention Policy Page

Field Action

Name Displays the threat prevention policy name.

Description Displays the threat prevention policy description.

Profiles

Include C&C profile in policy Select the check box.

Include infected host profile in policy Select the check box.

Include malware profile in policy Select the check box.

Log Setting

Log Setting Select an option from the list. The available options are:

• Log all traffic

• Log only blocked traffic

• Do not log any traffic

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Advanced Threat Prevention Page | 877

Edit a Threat Prevention Policy | 881
Delete Threat Prevention Policy | 881
 881

Edit a Threat Prevention Policy

You are here: Security Services > Advanced Threat Prevention.

To edit a threat prevention policy:

1. Select the existing a threat prevention that you want to edit on the Threat Prevention Policies page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit a Threat Prevention page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options,
see "Add a Threat Prevention Policy" on page 879.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Advanced Threat Prevention Page | 877

Add a Threat Prevention Policy | 879
Delete Threat Prevention Policy | 881

Delete Threat Prevention Policy

You are here: Security Services > Advanced Threat Prevention.

To delete a threat prevention policy:

1. Select a threat prevention policy that you want to delete on the Threat Prevention Policies page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Advanced Threat Prevention Page | 877

Add a Threat Prevention Policy | 879
Edit a Threat Prevention Policy | 881
 882

CHAPTER 83

SSL Initiation Profiles

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the SSL Initiation Profile Page | 882

Add an SSL Initiation Profile | 884

Edit an SSL Initiation Profile | 887

Delete SSL Initiation Profile | 888

About the SSL Initiation Profile Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 882

Field Descriptions | 883

You are here: Security Services > SSL Profiles > SSL Initiation.

You can configure SSL Initiation profiles.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add an SSL initiation profile. See "Add an SSL Initiation Profile" on page 884.

• Edit an SSL initiation profile. See "Edit an SSL Initiation Profile" on page 887.

• Delete SSL initiation profile. See "Delete SSL Initiation Profile" on page 888.
 883

• Show or hide columns in the SSL Initiation Profile table. To do this, use the Show Hide Columns icon
in the top right corner of the page and select the options you want to show or deselect to hide
options on the page.

• Advance search for SSL initiation profile. To do this, use the search text box present above the table
grid. The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. In the search text box, when
you hover over the icon, it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search
string, the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a search criteria, only one character is
deleted.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

Field Descriptions

Table 255 on page 883 describes the fields on the SSL Initiation Profile page.

Table 255: Fields on the SSL Initiation Profile Page

Field Description

Name Displays the name of the SSL initiation profile.

Flow Tracing Displays whether flow trace is enabled or disabled for troubleshooting policy-
related issues.

Protocol Version Displays the accepted protocol SSL version.

 884

Table 255: Fields on the SSL Initiation Profile Page (Continued)

Field Description

Preferred Cipher Displays the preferred cipher which the SSH server uses to perform encryption
and decryption function.

Session Cache Displays whether SSL session cache is enabled or not.

Server Authentication Failure Displays the action that will be performed if errors are encountered during the
server certificate verification process (such as CA signature verification failure,
self-signed certificates, and certificate expiry).

Certificate Revocation Displays the criterion for certificate revocation for the SSL initiation profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add an SSL Initiation Profile | 884

Edit an SSL Initiation Profile | 887
Delete SSL Initiation Profile | 888

Add an SSL Initiation Profile

You are here: Security Services > SSL Profiles > SSL Initiation.

To add an SSL initiation profile:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the SSL Initiation Profile page.
The Create SSL Initiation Profile page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 256 on page 885.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 885

Table 256: Fields on the Create SSL Initiation Profile Page

Field Action

General Information

Name Enter a unique name of the SSL initiation profile.

The string must consist of alphanumeric characters,

colons, periods, dashes, and underscores. No spaces
are allowed; maximum length is 63 characters.

Flow Tracing Select this option to enable flow trace for

troubleshooting policy-related issues for this profile.

Protocol Version Specifies the accepted protocol SSL version.

Select the protocol from the list: None, All, TSLv1,

TSLv1.1, or TSLv1.2.

Preferred Cipher Specify the cipher depending on their key strength.

Select a preferred cipher from the list:

• Custom—Configure custom cipher suite and order

of preference.

• Medium—Use ciphers with key strength of 128 bits

or greater.

• Strong—Use ciphers with key strength of 168 bits

or greater.

• Weak—Use ciphers with key strength of 40 bits or

greater.

Custom Ciphers Select one or more Ciphers from the list.

Click Clear All to clear the selected ciphers from the

list.

Session Cache Select this option to enable SSL session cache.

Certificate
 886

Table 256: Fields on the Create SSL Initiation Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Trusted CA Select the trusted certificate authority profile from the

list.

Specify the set of ciphers the SSH server can use to

perform encryption and decryption functions. If this
option is not configured, the server accepts any
supported suite that is available.

Client Certificate Specify a client certificate that is required to effectively

authenticate the client.

Select the appropriate client certificate from the list.

• None

• SSLRP_Automation_Cert_2

• SSLFP_Automation_Cert_1

• SSLRP_Automation_Cert_1

• SSLFP_Automation_Cert_2

• SSL2

Actions

Server Authentication Failure Select this option to ignore server authentication

completely.

In this case, SSL forward proxy ignores errors

encountered during the server certificate verification
process (such as CA signature verification failure, self-
signed certificates, and certificate expiry).

We do not recommend this option for authentication,

because configuring it results in websites not being
authenticated at all. However, you can use this option
to effectively identify the root cause for dropped SSL
sessions.
 887

Table 256: Fields on the Create SSL Initiation Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

CRL Validation Enable this option to disable CRL validation.

Action Select an action from the list if CRL info is not present:

• None

• Allow

• Drop

Hold Instruction Code Select Ignore if you want to keep the instruction code
on hold for this profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the SSL Initiation Profile Page | 882

Edit an SSL Initiation Profile | 887
Delete SSL Initiation Profile | 888

Edit an SSL Initiation Profile

You are here: Security Services > SSL Profiles > SSL Initiation.

To edit an SSL initiation profile:

1. Select the existing SSL initiation profile that you want to edit on the SSL Initiation Profile page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit an SSL Initiation Profile page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
options, see "Add an SSL Initiation Profile" on page 884.
3. Click OK to save the changes.
 888

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the SSL Initiation Profile Page | 882

Add an SSL Initiation Profile | 884
Delete SSL Initiation Profile | 888

Delete SSL Initiation Profile

You are here: Security Services > SSL Profiles > SSL Initiation.

To delete an SSL initiation profile:

1. Select an SSL initiation profile that you want to delete on the SSL Initiation Profile page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the SSL Initiation Profile Page | 882

Add an SSL Initiation Profile | 884
Edit an SSL Initiation Profile | 887
 889

CHAPTER 84

SSL Proxy Profiles

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the SSL Proxy Page | 889

Add an SSL Proxy Profile | 892

Clone an SSL Proxy Profile | 898

Edit an SSL Proxy Profile | 899

Delete SSL Proxy Profile | 899

About the SSL Proxy Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 889

Field Descriptions | 890

You are here: Security Services > SSL Profiles > SSL Proxy.

You can create, add, edit, and delete SSL proxy or global policy configurations.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Configure global policy. To do this, click Global Config at the upper right of the table and enter the
session cache timeout in seconds.

• Add an SSL proxy profile. See "Add an SSL Proxy Profile" on page 892.

• Edit na SSL proxy profile. See "Edit an SSL Proxy Profile" on page 899.
 890

• Delete SSL proxy profile. See "Delete SSL Proxy Profile" on page 899.

• Clone an SSL proxy profile. See "Clone an SSL Proxy Profile" on page 898.

• View the details of an SSL proxy profile—To do this, select the SSL proxy profile for which you want
to view the details and follow the available options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Right-click on the selected SSL proxy profile and select Detailed View.

• Mouse over to the left of the selected SSL proxy profile and click Detailed View.

• Deselect the selected SSL proxy profiles. To do this, click More and select Clear All Selections.

• Show or hide columns in the SSL Proxy Profiles table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns icon in
the top right corner of the custom objects table and select the options you want to view or deselect
the options you want to hide on the page.

• Advance search for SSL proxy profiles. To do this, use the search text box present above the table
grid. The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. In the search text box, when
you hover over the icon, it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search
string, the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a search criteria, only one character is
deleted.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

Field Descriptions

Table 257 on page 891 describes the fields on the SSL Proxy page.
 891

Table 257: Fields on the SSL Proxy Page

Field Description

Name Displays the name of the SSL Proxy profile.

Protection Type Displays the type of protection the profile provides. One is
client protection and the other one is server protection.
Client protection is for SSL forward proxy and server
protection is for reverse proxy.

Preferred Cipher Displays the category of the profile depending on their key
strength.

Custom Cipher Displays the custom cipher which the SSH server uses to
perform encryption and decryption function.

Flow Tracing Displays whether flow trace is enabled or disabled for

troubleshooting policy-related issues.

Exempted Addresses Displays the addresses to whitelists that bypass SSL forward
proxy processing.

Server Auth Failure Displays the action that will be performed if errors are
encountered during the server certificate verification process
(such as CA signature verification failure, self-signed
certificates, and certificate expiry).

Session Resumption Displays whether the session resumption is disabled or not.

Interface Displays the name of the interface associated with the

VLAN.

MAC Address Displays the MAC address associated with the VLAN.
 892

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add an SSL Proxy Profile | 892

Add an SSL Proxy Profile

You are here: Security Services > SSL Profiles > SSL Proxy.

To add an SSL proxy profile:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the SSL Proxy Profile page.
The Create SSL Proxy Profile page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 258 on page 892.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 258: Fields on the Create SSL Proxy Profile Page

Field Action

General Information

Name Enter a name of the SSL proxy profile.

The string must contain alphanumeric characters,

colons, periods, dashes, and underscores. No spaces
are allowed; maximum length is 63 characters.

Preferred Cipher Specifies the cipher depending on their key strength.

Select a preferred cipher from the list:

• Medium—Use ciphers with key strength of 128 bits

or greater.

• Strong—Use ciphers with key strength of 168 bits

or greater.

• Weak—Use ciphers with key strength of 40 bits or

greater.

• Custom—Configure custom cipher suite and order

of preference.
 893

Table 258: Fields on the Create SSL Proxy Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Custom Ciphers Specifies the set of ciphers the SSH server can use to
perform encryption and decryption functions. If this
option is not configured, the server accepts any
supported suite that is available.

Select the set of ciphers from the list:

1. rsa-with-RC4-128-md5—RSA, 128-bit RC4, MD5

hash

2. rsa-with-RC4-128-sha—RSA, 128-bit RC4, SHA

hash

3. rsa-with-des-cbc-sha—RSA, DES/CBC, SHA hash

4. rsa-with-3DES-ede-cbc-sha—RSA, 3DES EDE/

CBC, SHA hash

5. rsa-with-aes-128-cbc-sha—RSA, 128-bit AES/

CBC, SHA hash

6. rsa-with-aes-256-cbc-sha—RSA, 256-bit AES/

CBC, SHA hash

7. rsa-export-with-rc4-40-md5—RSA-export, 40-bit
RC4, MD5 hash

8. rsa-export-with-des40-cbc-sha—RSA-export, 40-
bit DES/CBC, SHA hash

9. rsa-with-aes-256-gcm-sha384—RSA, 256-bit
AES/GCM, SHA384 hash

10. rsa-with-aes-256-cbc-sha256—RSA, 256-bit AES/

CBC, SHA256 hash

11. rsa-with-aes-128-gcm-sha256—RSA, 128-bit

AES/GCM, SHA256 hash

12. rsa-with-aes-128-cbc-sha256—RSA, 256-bit AES/

CBC, SHA256 hash

13. ecdhe-rsa-with-aes-256-gcm-sha384—ECDHE,
RSA, 256-bit AES/GCM, SHA384 hash
 894

Table 258: Fields on the Create SSL Proxy Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

14. ecdhe-rsa-with-aes-256-cbc-sha—ECDHE, RSA,

256-bit AES/CBC, SHA hash

15. ecdhe-rsa-with-aes-256-cbc-sha384—ECDHE,
RSA, 256-bit AES/CBC, SHA384 hash

16. ecdhe-rsa-with-aes-3des-ede-cbc-sha—ECDHE,
RSA, 3DES, EDE/CBC, SHA hash

17. ecdhe-rsa-with-aes-128-gcm-sha256—ECDHE,
RSA, 128-bit AES/GCM, SHA256 hash

18. ecdhe-rsa-with-aes-128-cbc-sha—ECDHE, RSA,

128-bit AES/CBC, SHA hash

19. ecdhe-rsa-with-aes-128-cbc-sha256—ECDHE,
RSA, 128-bit AES/CBC, SHA256 hash

Flow Trace Select the check box to enable flow trace for
troubleshooting policy-related issues. Else leave it
blank.

Certificate Type Specifies whether the certificate that you want to

associate with this profile is a root CA or server
certificate. Server certificate is used for SSL reverse
proxy. If you choose server certificate, the trusted CA,
CRL, and server auth failure options will not be
available. For forward proxy profile, choose the root CA

In a public key infrastructure (PKI) hierarchy, the root

CA is at the top of the trust path. The root CA
identifies the server certificate as a trusted certificate.

Certificate Select the certificate that you want to associate with

this SSL proxy profile from the list.

Specifies the certificate that you created in the

Administration > Certificate Management page of J-
Web. In a public key infrastructure (PKI) hierarchy, the
CA is at the top of the trust path. The CA identifies the
server certificate as a trusted certificate.
 895

Table 258: Fields on the Create SSL Proxy Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Trusted Certificate Authorities Select the trusted CA that are available on the device
from the following options: All, None, Select specific.

If you choose Select specific, you need to select the

Certificate Authorities from the Available column and
move it to the Selected column.

Exempted Addresses Specifies addresses to create whitelists that bypass SSL

forward proxy processing.

Select the addresses from the from the Available

column and move it to the Selected column.

Because SSL encryption and decryption are

complicated and expensive procedures, network
administrators can selectively bypass SSL proxy
processing for some sessions. Such sessions mostly
include connections and transactions with trusted
servers or domains with which network administrators
are very familiar. There are also legal requirements to
exempt financial and banking sites. Such exemptions
are achieved by configuring the IP addresses or domain
names of the servers under whitelists.

Exempted URL Categories Specifies URL categories to create whitelists that

bypass SSL forward proxy processing.

Select URL categories from the from the Available

column and move it to the Selected column.

These URL categories are exempted during SSL

inspection. Only the predefined URL categories can be
selected for the exemption.

Actions
 896

Table 258: Fields on the Create SSL Proxy Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Server Auth Failure Select the check box to ignore server authentication
completely.

In this case, SSL forward proxy ignores errors

encountered during the server certificate verification
process (such as CA signature verification failure, self-
signed certificates, and certificate expiry).

We do not recommend this option for authentication,

because configuring it results in websites not being
authenticated at all. However, you can use this option
to effectively identify the root cause for dropped SSL
sessions.

Session Resumption Select the check box if you do not want session
resumption.

To improve throughput and still maintain an

appropriate level of security, SSL session resumption
provides a session caching mechanism so that session
information, such as the pre-master secret key and
agreed-upon ciphers, can be cached for both the client
and server.

Logging Select an option from the list to generate logs.

You can choose to log All events, Warning, Info, Errors,

or different sessions (whitelisted, Allowed, Dropped, or
Ignored).
 897

Table 258: Fields on the Create SSL Proxy Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Renegotiation After a session is created and SSL tunnel transport has

been established, a change in SSL parameters requires
renegotiation. SSL forward proxy supports both secure
(RFC 5746) and nonsecure (TLS v1.0 and SSL v3)
renegotiation.

You can specify whether to Allow nonsecure

renegotiation, Allow-secure renegotiation, or Drop
renegotiation.

When session resumption is enabled, session

renegotiation is useful in the following situations:

• Cipher keys need to be refreshed after a prolonged

SSL session.

• Stronger ciphers need to be applied for a more

secure connection.

Select if a change in SSL parameters requires

renegotiation. The options are: None (selected by
default), Allow, Allow-secure, and Drop.

Certificate Revocation Select the check box if you want to revoke the
certificate.

If CRL info not present Specifies if you want to allow or drop if CRL info is not
present.

Select the following actions from the list if CRL info is

not present : Allow session, Drop session, or None.

Hold Instruction Code Select Ignore if you want to keep the instruction code
on hold.

Mirror Decrypt Traffic

 898

Table 258: Fields on the Create SSL Proxy Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Interface Select an SSL decryption port mirroring interface from

the list. This is an Ethernet interface on SRX Series
device through which the copy of the SSL decrypted
traffic is forwarded to a mirror port.

Only after Security Policies Enforcement Select the check box to enable forwarding the copy of
the decrypted traffic to the external mirror traffic
collector after enforcing the Layer 7 security services
through a security policy.

MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the external mirror traffic
collector port.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the SSL Proxy Page | 889

Edit an SSL Proxy Profile | 899
Delete SSL Proxy Profile | 899
Clone an SSL Proxy Profile | 898

Clone an SSL Proxy Profile

You are here: Security Services > SSL Profiles > SSL Proxy.

To clone an SSL proxy profile:

1. Select an SSL Proxy profile that you want to clone and select Clone from the More link.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can right-click on the selected SSL Proxy profile and select Clone.

The Clone SSL Proxy Profile page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options,
see "Add an SSL Proxy Profile" on page 892.
 899

2. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the SSL Proxy Page | 889

Edit an SSL Proxy Profile | 899
Delete SSL Proxy Profile | 899

Edit an SSL Proxy Profile

You are here: Security Services > SSL Profiles > SSL Proxy.

To edit an SSL proxy profile:

1. Select the existing SSL proxy profile that you want to edit on the SSL Proxy Profile page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Update SSL Initiation Profile page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
options, see "Add an SSL Proxy Profile" on page 892.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the SSL Proxy Page | 889

Delete SSL Proxy Profile | 899
Clone an SSL Proxy Profile | 898

Delete SSL Proxy Profile

You are here: Security Services > SSL Profiles > SSL Proxy.

To delete SSL proxy profile:

1. Select one or more SSL proxy profiles that you want to delete on the SSL Proxy page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.
 900

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the SSL Proxy Page | 889

Add an SSL Proxy Profile | 892
Edit an SSL Proxy Profile | 899
Clone an SSL Proxy Profile | 898
 901

CHAPTER 85

Firewall Authentication—Access Profile

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Access Profile Page | 901

Add an Access Profile | 903

Edit an Access Profile | 908

Delete an Access Profile | 909

About the Access Profile Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 901

Field Descriptions | 902

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Access Profile.

Use this page to configure Access Profile. Access profiles enable you to define the authentication and
accounting servers and their priorities.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Create an access profile. See "Add an Access Profile" on page 903.

• Edit an access profile. See "Edit an Access Profile" on page 908.

• Delete an access profile. See "Delete an Access Profile" on page 909.

 902

• View the details of the Access profile—To do this, select the Access profile for which you want to
view the details and follow the available options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Right-click on the selected Access profile and select Detailed View.

• Mouse over to the left of the selected Access profiles and click Detailed View.

• Show or hide columns in the Access Profile table. To do this, click Show Hide Columns icon in the top
right corner of the Access Profiles table and select the columns you want to display or deselect the
columns you want to hide on the page.

• Advance search for Access profile. To do this, use the search text box present above the table grid.
The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. An example filter condition is
displayed in the search text box when you hover over the Search icon. When you start entering the
search string, the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace to delete a character of the search string.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

Field Descriptions

Table 259 on page 902 describes the fields on the Access Profile page.

Table 259: Fields on the Access Profile Page

Field Description

Profile Name Displays the name of an access profile.

 903

Table 259: Fields on the Access Profile Page (Continued)

Field Description

Order 1 Shows the order in which Junos OS tries different authentication methods when verifying that
a client can access the devices.

Order 2 Shows the next authentication method if the authentication method included in the
authentication order option is not available, or if the authentication is available but returns a
reject response.

Local Users Displays the usernames that are created for accessing the application.

LDAP Servers Displays the IP address of the LDAP authentication server.

RADIUS Servers Displays the RADIUS server configuration.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add an Access Profile | 903

Edit an Access Profile | 908
Delete an Access Profile | 909

Add an Access Profile

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Access Profile.

To add an access profile:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right-side of the Access Profile page.
The Create Access Profile page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 260 on page 904.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 904

Table 260: Fields on the Access Profile Page

Field Description

Access Profile Enter a name for the access profile. The name must be a unique string of alphanumeric
Name characters, colons, periods, dashes, and underscores. Maximum length is 64 characters.

Address Select an address pool from the list that can be used by different client applications.
Assignment
Click Create Address Pool to add a new address pool. For more information on creating a
new address pool, see "Add an Address Pool" on page 912.

Authentication

Local Select Local to configure local authentication services.

To create a new local authentication user:

1. Click +.

The Create Local Authentication User page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Username—Enter the user name of the user requesting access.

• Password—Enter the user password.

• XAUTH IP Address—Enter the IPv4 address for the client.

• Group—Enter the group name to store several user accounts together.

3. Click OK to save changes.

To edit, select the local authentication user configuration and click the pencil icon.

To delete, select the local authentication user configuration and click the delete icon.
 905

Table 260: Fields on the Access Profile Page (Continued)

Field Description

RADIUS Select RADIUS to configure RADIUS authentication services.

To create a new RADIUS server:

1. Click +.

The Create RADIUS Server page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Address—Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the RADIUS server.

• Secret—Enter the secret password to access the RADIUS server.

• Port—Enter the port number on which to contact the RADIUS server.

Range is 1 through 65535. Default is 1812.

• Retry—Enter the number of retries that a device can attempt to contact a RADIUS
server.

Range is 1 through 100 seconds.

• Routing Instance—Select the routing instance from the list for managing the routing
instance.

• Source Address—Enter a source IP address configured on one of the device’s

interfaces.

• Timeout—Enter the amount of time that the local device waits to receive a response
from a RADIUS authentication server.

Range is 1 through 1000 seconds.

3. Click OK to save changes.

To edit, select the RADIUS server configuration and click the pencil icon.

To delete, select the RADIUS server configuration and click the delete icon.
 906

Table 260: Fields on the Access Profile Page (Continued)

Field Description

LDAP Select LDAP to configure LDAP authentication services.

To create a new LDAP server:

1. Click +.

The Create LDAP Server page appears.

2. Enter the following details:

• Address—Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the LDAP server.

• Port—Enter the port number on which to contact the LDAP server.

Range is 1 through 65535. Default is 389.

• Retry—Enter the number of retries that a device can attempt to contact an LDAP
server.

Range is 1 through 10 seconds.

• Routing Instance—Select the routing instance from the list for managing the routing
instance.

• Source Address—Enter a source IP address configured on one of the device’s

interfaces.

• Timeout—Enter the amount of time that the local device waits to receive a response
from an LDAP authentication server.

Range is 3 through 90.

3. Click OK to save changes.

To edit, select the LDAP server configuration and click the pencil icon.

To delete, select the LDAP server configuration and click the delete icon.

LDAP Options

Base Enter the base distinguished name that defines user’s basic properties.
Distinguished
For example, in the base distinguished name o=juniper, c=us, where c stands for country,
Name
and o for organization.
 907

Table 260: Fields on the Access Profile Page (Continued)

Field Description

Revert Interval Specifies the amount of time that elapses before the primary server is contacted if a backup
server is being used.

Use top/bottom arrows to provide the revert interval.

Range is 60 through 4294967295.

LDAP Option Select an LDAP option from the list:

Type
• None—No user LDAP distinguished name (DN).

• Assemble—Indicates that a user’s LDAP DN is assembled through the use of a common

name identifier, the username, and base distinguished name.

• Search—Indicates that a search is used to get a user's LDAP DN. The search is
performed based on the search filter and the search text typed in by the user during
authentication.

Common Name Enter a common name identifier used as a prefix for the username during the assembly of
the users distinguished name.

This option is available when you select Assemble LDAP option type.

Search Filter Enter the name of the filter to find the users LDAP distinguished name.

This option is available when you select Search LDAP option type.

Admin Search Enable this option to perform an LDAP administrator search. By default, the search is an
anonymous search.

This option is available when you select Search LDAP option type.

Distinguished Enter the distinguished name of an administrative user. The distinguished name is used in
Name the bind for performing the LDAP search.

This option is available when you select Admin Search is enabled.

Secret Enter the plain-text password for the administrative user.

This option is available when you select Admin Search is enabled.

 908

Table 260: Fields on the Access Profile Page (Continued)

Field Description

Authentication Order

Order 1 Select one or more of the following authentication methods:

• NONE—No authentication for the specified user.

• Local—Use local authentication services.

• LDAP—Use LDAP. The SRX device uses this protocol to get user and group information
necessary to implement the integrated user firewall feature.

• Radius—Use RADIUS authentication services.

If RADIUS servers fail to respond or return a reject response, try local authentication,
because it is explicitly configured in the authentication order.

Order 2 Select the authentication method from the list.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Access Profile Page | 901

Edit an Access Profile | 908
Delete an Access Profile | 909

Edit an Access Profile

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Access Profile.

To edit an access profile:

1. Select an existing access profile that you want to edit on the Access Profile page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right-side of the page.
The Edit Access Profiles page appears with editable fields. For more information on editing the fields,
see "Add an Access Profile" on page 903.
3. Click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes.
 909

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Access Profile Page | 901

Add an Access Profile | 903
Delete an Access Profile | 909

Delete an Access Profile

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Access Profile.

To delete an access profile:

1. Select an access profile that you want to delete on the Access Profiles page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right-side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete access profiles or click No to retain access profiles.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Access Profile Page | 901

Add an Access Profile | 903
Edit an Access Profile | 908
 910

CHAPTER 86

Firewall Authentication—Address Pools

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Address Pools Page | 910

Add an Address Pool | 912

Edit an Address Pool | 913

Delete Address Pool | 914

Search for Text in an Address Pools Table | 914

About the Address Pools Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 910

Field Descriptions | 911

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Address Pools.

Use this page to get configure Address Pools.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add Address Pool. See "Add an Address Pool" on page 912.

• Edit Address Pool. See "Edit an Address Pool" on page 913.

• Delete Address Pool. See "Delete Address Pool" on page 914.

 911

• Search for Text in an Address Pools table. See "Search for Text in an Address Pools Table" on page
914.

• View the details of an address pool—To do this, select the address pool for which you want to view
the details and follow the available options:

• Click More and select Detailed View.

• Right-click on the selected address pool and select Detailed View.

• Mouse over to the left of the selected address pool and click Action_Detail_View.

• Filter the address pool based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top right-hand
corner of the address pool table. The columns in the grid change to accept filter options. Type the
filter options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the address pool table. To do this, use the Show Hide Columns icon in the
top right corner of the page and select the options you want to show or deselect to hide options on
the page.

Field Descriptions

Table 261 on page 911 describes the fields on the Address Pools page.

Table 261: Fields on the Address Pools Page

Field Description

Name Specifies the name of the address pool.

Network Address Specifies the network address used by the address pool.

Primary DNS Specifies the primary-dns IP address.

Secondary DNS Specifies the secondary-dns IP address.

Primary WINS Specifies the primary-wins IP address.

Secondary WINS Specifies the secondary-wins IP address.

 912

Table 261: Fields on the Address Pools Page (Continued)

Field Description

Address Range Specifies the name of the address range.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add an Address Pool | 912

Edit an Address Pool | 913
Delete Address Pool | 914
Search for Text in an Address Pools Table | 914

Add an Address Pool

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Address Pools.

To add an address pool:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Address Pools page.
The Create Address Pool page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 262 on page 912.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 262: Fields on the Create Address Pool Page

Field Description

General

Pool Name Enter the address pool name.

Network Address Enter an IPv4 address for the address pool.

XAUTH Attributes
 913

Table 262: Fields on the Create Address Pool Page (Continued)

Field Description

Primary DNS Server Enter the primary-dns IPv4 address.

Secondary DNS Server Enter the secondary-dns IPv4 address.

Primary WINS Server Enter the primary-wins IPv4 address.

Secondary WINS Server Enter the secondary-wins IPv4 address.

Address Ranges

Add Click + to add a new address range for the address pool.

Name Enter a name for the IP address range.

Lower Limit Enter the lower limit of the address range.

High Limit Enter the upper limit of the address range.

Delete Click the delete icon to delete the address range for the address pool.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Address Pools Page | 910

Edit an Address Pool | 913
Delete Address Pool | 914
Search for Text in an Address Pools Table | 914

Edit an Address Pool

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Address Pools.
 914

To edit an address pool:

1. Select an existing address pool that you want to edit on the Address Pools page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit Address Pool page appears with editable fields. For more information on the options, see
"Add an Address Pool" on page 912.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Address Pools Page | 910

Add an Address Pool | 912
Delete Address Pool | 914
Search for Text in an Address Pools Table | 914

Delete Address Pool

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Address Pools.

To delete an address pool:

1. Select an address pool that you want to delete on the Address Pools page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Address Pools Page | 910

Add an Address Pool | 912
Edit an Address Pool | 913
Search for Text in an Address Pools Table | 914

Search for Text in an Address Pools Table

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Address Pools.
 915

You can use the search icon in the top right corner of the Address Pools page to search for text
containing letters and special characters on that page.

To search for text:

1. Click the search icon and enter partial text or full text of the keyword in the search bar.
The search results are displayed.
2. Click X next to a search keyword or click Clear All to clear the search results.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Address Pools Page | 910

Add an Address Pool | 912
Edit an Address Pool | 913
Delete Address Pool | 914
 916

CHAPTER 87

Firewall Authentication Settings

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Authentication Settings Page | 916

About the Authentication Settings Page

IN THIS SECTION

Field Description | 916

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Authentication Settings.

Use this page to configure firewall authentication. You can click the arrow pointing outwards icon to
expand all the options or click the arrow pointing inwards to collapse or hide all the options.

To edit this page, configure minimum one access profile under Security Services > Firewall
Authentication > Access Profile.

Field Description

To configure a firewall authentication:

1. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 263 on page 917.

2. Click Save to save the changes.

Table 263 on page 917 describes the fields on the Firewall Authentication page.
 917

Table 263: Fields on the Firewall Authentication Page

Field Description

Pass-through Settings

Default Profile Select a profile from the list that the policies use to authenticate users.

FTP Banners

Login Displays the login prompt for users logging in using FTP.

Maximum characters are 250.

Success Displays a successful login prompt for users logging in using FTP.

Maximum characters are 250.

Fail Displays failed login prompt for users logging in using FTP.

Maximum characters are 250.

Telnet Banners

Login Displays the login prompt for users logging in using telnet.

Maximum characters are 250.

Success Displays a successful login prompt for users logging in using telnet.

Maximum characters are 250.

Fail Displays failed login prompt for users logging in using telnet.

Maximum characters are 250.

HTTP Banner

Login Displays the login prompt for users logging in using HTTP.
 918

Table 263: Fields on the Firewall Authentication Page (Continued)

Field Description

Success Displays a successful login prompt for users logging in using HTTP.

Fail Displays failed login prompt for users logging in using HTTP.

Web-auth-settings

Default Profile Select a profile that the policies use to authenticate users.

Success Displays a successful login prompt for users logging in using Web authentication banner.

Logo Image Upload

Logo File Indicates an image to be chosen for the Web authentication logo.

NOTE: For the good logo image, the image format must be in .gif and the resolution must be
172x65.

Browse Click the button to navigate to the logo image on the user's local disk.

Sync Click the button to sync the logo image.

Restore Click the button to restore the Web authentication logo.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the UAC Settings Page | 919

 919

CHAPTER 88

Firewall Authentication—UAC Settings

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the UAC Settings Page | 919

About the UAC Settings Page

IN THIS SECTION

Field Description | 919

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > UAC Settings.

Use this page to configure UAC Settings.

Field Description

To configure UAC settings:

1. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 264 on page 919.

2. Click Save to save the changes.

Table 264 on page 919 describes the fields on the UAC Setting page.

Table 264: Fields on the UAC Setting Page

Field Description

Global Settings
 920

Table 264: Fields on the UAC Setting Page (Continued)

Field Description

Certificate Determines whether server certificate verification is required when initiating a connection
Verification between a device and an Access Control Service in a UAC configuration.

Select the following options from the list:

• None—Certificate verification is not required.

• Optional—Certificate verification is not required. If the CA certificate is not specified

in the ca-profile option, the commit check passes and no warning is issued.

• Required—Certificate verification is required. If the CA certificate is not specified in

the ca-profile option, an error message is displayed, and the commit check fails. Use
this option to ensure strict security.

• Warning—Certificate verification is not required. A warning message is displayed

during commit check if the CA certificate is not specified in the ca-profile option.

Interval Specifies the value in seconds that the device should expect to receive a heartbeat signal
from the IC Series device.

Enter the heartbeat interval in seconds. Range: 1 through 9999.

Test Only Mode Allows all traffic and log enforcement result.

Enable the Test Only Mode option.

Timeout Specifies (in seconds) that the device should wait to get a heartbeat response from an IC
Series UAC Appliance.

Enter the timeout in seconds. Range: 2 through 10000.

Timeout Action Specifies the action to be performed when a timeout occurs and the device cannot
connect to an Infranet Enforcer.

Select the timeout action from the list.

Infranet Controller
 921

Table 264: Fields on the UAC Setting Page (Continued)

Field Description

Infranet Controller Click + to add an infranet controller.

Click pencil icon to edit a selected infranet controller.

Click delete icon to delete the selected infranet controller.

Name Enter a name for the Infranet Controller.

IP address Enter an IP address for the Infranet Controller.

Interface Select an interface used for the Infranet Controller.

Interface Enter the password to use for the Infranet Controller

CA Profiles Select a CA from the list in the CA Profiles column and then click the right arrow to move
them to the Selected column.

NOTE: To deselect a CA, select the CA in the Selected column and then click the left
arrow to move them to the CA Profiles column.

Port Specifies the port number to be associated with this Infranet Controller for data traffic.

Enter a value from 1 through 65,535.

Server Certificate Enter the server certificate subject name of the Infranet Controller certificate to match.
Subject

Captive Portal

Captive Portal Specifies the preconfigured security policy for captive portal on the Junos OS Enforcer.

Click + to add a captive portal.

Click pencil icon to edit a selected captive portal.

Click delete icon to delete the selected captive portal.

 922

Table 264: Fields on the UAC Setting Page (Continued)

Field Description

Name Enter a name for the captive portal.

Redirect Traffic Select a traffic type to be redirected.

Redirect URL Enter the URL to which the captive portal should be directed.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Application Tracking Page | 766

 923

CHAPTER 89

Firewall Authentication—Active Directory

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Active Directory Page | 923

About the Active Directory Page

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Active Directory.

You can configure Active directory.

Table 265 on page 923 describes the fields on the Active Directory page.

Table 265: Fields on the Active Directory Page

Field Description

General Information

General

No on Demand Enable the manual on-demand probing of a domain PC as an alternate method for the
Probe SRX Series device to retrieve address-to-user mapping information.

Timeout
 924

Table 265: Fields on the Active Directory Page (Continued)

Field Description

Authentication Entry Set the timeout to 0 to avoid having the user's entry being removed from the
Timeout authentication table after the timeout.

NOTE: When a user is no longer active, a timer is started for that user’s entry in the
Active Directory authentication table. When the time is up, the user’s entry is removed
from the table. Entries in the table remain active as long as there are sessions associated
with the entry.

The default authentication entry timeout is 30 minutes. Starting in Junos OS Release

19.2R1, the default value is 60 minutes.

To disable timeout, set the interval to zero. The range is 10 through 1440 minutes.

WMI Timeout Enter the number of seconds that the domain PC has to respond to the SRX Series
device’s query through Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) or Distributed
Component Object Module (DCOM).

If no response is received from the domain PC within the wmi-timeoutinterval, the probe
fails and the system either creates an invalid authentication entry or updates the existing
authentication entry as invalid. If an authentication table entry already exists for the
probed IP address, and no response is received from the domain PC within the wmi-
timeout interval, the probe fails and that entry is deleted from the table.

The range is 3 through 120 seconds.

Invalid Enter a value. The range is 10 through 1440 minutes. When a user is no longer active, a
Authentication Entry timer is started for that user’s entry in the Active Directory authentication table. When
Timeout the time is up, the user’s entry is removed from the table.

If this value is not configured, all the invalid auth entry from Active Directory will use the
default value as 30 minutes.

The range is 10 through 1440 minutes.

Firewall Enter a value. The range is 10 through 1440 minutes. This is the firewall authentication
Authentication fallback time. Set the timeout to 0 to avoid having the user's entry being removed from
Forced Timeout the authentication table after the timeout.

Filter
 925

Table 265: Fields on the Active Directory Page (Continued)

Field Description

Include Enable to include IP addresses from the Available column.

Click the Add icon (+) to create a new IP address and add it as either include or exclude
from monitoring.

Click the Delete icon to delete a new IP address and add it as either include or exclude
from monitoring.

Exclude Enable to exclude IP addresses from the Available column.

Click the Add icon (+) to create a new IP address and add it as either include or exclude
from monitoring.

Click the Delete icon to delete a new IP address and add it as either include or exclude
from monitoring.

Domain Settings

Test Click Test to check the Domain Connection status.

test:Status page appears and displays the status.

+ Click + to add a domain.

The Add Domain page appears.

NOTE:

• Starting in Junos OS Release 19.2R1, for SRX4200, SRX1500, SRX550M, and vSRX
devices, and for the SRX5000 and SRX3000 lines of devices, you can configure the
integrated user firewall in a maximum of two domains. For the other SRX Series
devices, you can create only one domain.

You can select the pencil icon to edit the domain or select delete icon to delete the
domain.

General

Domain Name Enter the name of the domain.

The range for the domain name is 1 through 64 characters.

 926

Table 265: Fields on the Active Directory Page (Continued)

Field Description

Username Enter the password for the Active Directory account password.

The range for the username is 1 through 64 characters. Example: admin

Password Enter the username for the Active Directory account name.

The range for the password is 1 through 128 characters. Example: A$BC123

Domain Controller(s)

Domain Controller(s) Click the add icon (+) to add domain controller settings.

• Domain Controller Name—Enter the domain controller name. Name can range from 1
through 64 characters.

You can configure up to maximum of 10 domain controllers.

• IP Address—Enter the IP address of the domain controller.

User Group Mapping (LDAP)

User Group Mapping Click the add icon (+):

(LDAP)
• IP Address—Enter the IP address of the LDAP server. If no address is specified, the
system uses one of the configured Active Directory domain controllers.

• Port—Enter the port number of the LDAP server. If no port number is specified, the
system uses port 389 for plaintext or port 636 for encrypted text.

Default value is port 443.

Base Distinguish Enter the LDAP base distinguished name (DN).

Name
Example: DC=example,DC=net

Username Enter the username of the LDAP account. If no username is specified, the system will use
the configured domain controller’s username.
 927

Table 265: Fields on the Active Directory Page (Continued)

Field Description

Password Enter the password for the account. If no password is specified, the system uses the
configured domain controller’s password.

Use SSL Enable Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) to ensure secure transmission with the LDAP server.
Disabled by default, then the password is sent in plaintext.

Authentication Enable this option to specify the algorithm used while the SRX Series device
Algorithm communicates with the LDAP server. By default, simple is selected to configure
simple(plaintext) authentication mode.

IP User Mapping

Discovery Method Enable the method of discovering IP address-to-user mappings.

(WMI)
WMI—Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) is the discovery method used to
access the domain controller. This option should be enabled only for internal hosts or
trusted hosts.

Event Log Scanning Enter the scanning interval at which the SRX Series device scans the event log on the
Interval domain controller. The range is 5 through 60 seconds.

Default value is 60 seconds.

Initial Event Log Enter the time of the earliest event log on the domain controller that the SRX Series
TimeSpan device will initially scan. This scan applies to the initial deployment only. After WMIC and
the user identification start working, the SRX Series device scans only the latest event
log.

The range is 1 through 168 hours. Default value is 1 hour.

Release History Table

Release Description

19.2R1 Starting in Junos OS Release 19.2R1, the default value is 60 minutes.

 928

19.2R1 Starting in Junos OS Release 19.2R1, for SRX4200, SRX1500, SRX550M, and vSRX devices, and for the
SRX5000 and SRX3000 lines of devices, you can configure the integrated user firewall in a maximum of
two domains. For the other SRX Series devices, you can create only one domain.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Authentication Priority Page | 932

 929

CHAPTER 90

Firewall Authentication—Local Authentication

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Local Authentication Page | 929

Add a Local Auth Entry | 930

Delete a Local Auth Entry | 931

About the Local Authentication Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 929

Field Descriptions | 930

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Local Authentication.

Use this page to enable or disable authentication priority configuration options.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Create a local auth entry. See "Add a Local Auth Entry" on page 930.

• Delete a local auth entry. See "Delete a Local Auth Entry" on page 931.

• Clear all the local auth entry. To do this, select the local auth entries you want to clear and click Clear
All at the top right of the table.
 930

Field Descriptions

Table 266 on page 930 describes the fields on the Local Auth page.

Table 266: Fields on the Local Auth Page

Field Description

Filter by Displays the local authentication configuration based on the selected filter.

IP Displays the IP address.

Username Displays the name of the user.

Role Name Displays the list of roles assigned to the username.

Search Select the filter you want and enter your inputs based on the filter type. Then, click the search icon
to display the output based on your selected filter.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Local Auth Entry | 930

Delete a Local Auth Entry | 931

Add a Local Auth Entry

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Local Authentication.

To add a local auth entry:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the Local Auth page.
The Add Local Auth Entry page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 267 on page 931.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.
 931

Table 267: Fields on the Add Local Auth Page

Field Action

IP Address Enter an IP address for the local authentication.

Username Enter a username for the local authentication.

Role List Enter roles for the local authentication entry. Enter the role and click + to add a role.

To delete a role, select the role and click the delete (X) icon.

To edit a role, hover over the role name and click the pencil icon.

NOTE: You can configure only maximum of 200 roles for a local authentication entry.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Local Authentication Page | 929

Delete a Local Auth Entry | 931

Delete a Local Auth Entry

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Local Authentication.

To delete a local auth entry:

1. Select a local auth entry that you want to delete on the Local Auth Entry page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Local Authentication Page | 929

Add a Local Auth Entry | 930
 932

CHAPTER 91

Firewall Authentication—Authentication Priority

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Authentication Priority Page | 932

About the Authentication Priority Page

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > Authentication Priority.

Use this page to enable or disable authentication priority configuration options.

Table 268 on page 932 describes the fields on the Auth Priority page.

Table 268: Fields on the Auth Priority Page

Field Description

Enable local authentication Select the Enable local authentication check box to enable local authentication.

Priority Enter a priority value (1 through 65,535) in the Priority field.

NOTE: The default local authentication priority value is 100.

Enable firewall Select the check box to enable firewall authentication.

authentication

Priority Enter a priority value (1 through 65,535) in the Priority field.

NOTE: The default firewall authentication priority value is 150.

Enable unified access Select the check box to enable UAC authentication.
control
 933

Table 268: Fields on the Auth Priority Page (Continued)

Field Description

Priority Enter a priority value (1 through 65,535) in the Priority field.

NOTE: The default local authentication priority value is 200.

Enable active directory Select the check box to enable UAC authentication.

Priority Enter a priority value (1 through 65,535) in the Priority field.

NOTE: The default local authentication priority value is 125.

OK Click OK to save the configuration changes.

Reset Click Reset to set the priority values and enable options to the default
configuration.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Local Authentication Page | 929

 934

CHAPTER 92

Firewall Authentication—JIMS

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the Juniper Identity Management Service Page | 934

Add a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile | 935

Edit a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile | 939

Delete a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile | 940

About the Juniper Identity Management Service Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 934

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > JIMS.

NOTE: Starting in Junos OS Release 21.4R1, the Identity Management menu is renamed as JIMS.

You can add, edit or delete a Juniper Identity Management Services (JIMS) profile. You can also view the
connection status of this SRX device with the JIMS.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Add a Juniper Identity Management Service profile. See "Add a Juniper Identity Management Service
Profile" on page 935.
 935

• Edit a Juniper Identity Management Service profile. See "Edit a Juniper Identity Management Service
Profile" on page 939.

• Delete a Juniper Identity Management Service profile. See "Delete a Juniper Identity Management
Service Profile" on page 940.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile | 935

Add a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > JIMS.

To add a Juniper Identity Management Service (JIMS) profile:

1. Click Configure on the Juniper Identity Management Service page.

The Configure Juniper Identity Management Service Profile page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 269 on page 935.
3. Click Finish to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 269: Fields on the Configure Juniper Identity Management Service Profile Page

Field Action

General Information

Connection for Primary and Secondary Juniper Identity Management Service

Connection Type Select a connection type from the list. The options
available are: HTTPS and HTTP.

Port Enter the port number or press up or down arrow to

either increment or decrement the port number. The
default value is 443.

Primary IP Address Enter a primary IP address of JIMS server.

 936

Table 269: Fields on the Configure Juniper Identity Management Service Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Primary CA Certificate Specifies the primary certificate of the JIMS. SRX

device will use it to verify JIMS’s certificate for SSL
connection.

Select Upload CA certificate to device or specify the

path of the file on device.

Primary CA Certificate file upload Enables you to locate and upload the CA certificate.

Click Browse to locate the CA certificate on your

device and click Upload the selected CA certificate.

Primary CA Certificate file path Enter a file path of the primary CA certificate.

Primary Client ID Enter a primary client ID of the SRX device to obtain

access token. It must be consistent with the
configuration of the API client created on JIMS.

Primary Client Secret Enter a password which enables you to access the
primary identity management server.

Specifies the client secret of the SRX device to obtain

access token. It must be consistent with the
configuration of the API client created on JIMS.

Secondary Juniper Identity Management Service Enables a secondary JIMS server, its IP address, CA
Server certificate, client ID, and client secret.

NOTE: If you enable, the Secondary IP Address,

Secondary CA Certificate file upload, Secondary Client
ID, Secondary Client Secret rows are displayed. Enter
the IP address of the secondary server, browse and
upload the secondary CA certificate, enter the
secondary client ID and secret in the respective fields.
 937

Table 269: Fields on the Configure Juniper Identity Management Service Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Token API Enter the token API to specify the path of the URL for
acquiring access token.

Default is ’oauth_token/oauth’.

Query API Enter the path where the URL for querying user
identities is located. Default is ‘user_query/v2’.

Click Next. The Advanced Settings page is displayed.

Advanced Settings

Batch Query

Item Per Batch Specifies the maximum number of items in one batch
query.

Enter the number of items. Range is 100 to 1000 and

the default number is 200.

Query Interval Specifies the interval for querying the newly generated
user identities.

Enter the number of seconds you need between each

query. The range is 1 through 60 (seconds), and the
default value is 5.

IP Query

Query Delay Time Specifies the time delay to send individual IP query.

Enter the time in seconds. The range is 0~60 (seconds).

The default value is 15 seconds, which depends on the
delay time of auth entry retrieved from JIMS to SRX.

No IP Query Select the check box if you want to disable the IP

query function that is enabled by default.
 938

Table 269: Fields on the Configure Juniper Identity Management Service Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Authentication Timeout

Authentication Entry Timeout Enter the value in minutes. The value range is 0 or
10~1440 (minutes). 0 means no need for a timeout. the
default value is 60.

Specifies the time out value for authentication entry in

identity management. The timeout interval begins from
when the authentication entry is added to the identity-
management authentication table. If a value of 0 is
specified, the entries will never expire.

Invalid Authentication Entry Timeout Enter the value in minutes. The value range is 0 or
10~1440 (minutes). 0 means no need for a timeout. the
default value is 60.

Specifies the timeout value of invalid auth entry in the

SRX Series authentication table for either Windows
active directory or Aruba ClearPass.

Filter
NOTE: You can select address set with maximum of 20 IP addresses and address set with wild card addresses.

Include IP Address Book Select an IP address book from the predefined address
book in which an address set must be selected as IP
filter.

Include IP Address Set Specifies the predefined address set selected as IP

filter.

Select an IP address set from the list.

To add a new address set for the IP address book, click

Add New Address Set.

Exclude IP Address Book Select an IP address book that you want identity
management profile to exclude.
 939

Table 269: Fields on the Configure Juniper Identity Management Service Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

Exclude IP Address Set Select the predefined address set that you want
identity management profile to exclude.

Filter to Domain Enter one or more active directory domains, to the SRX
Series device. You can specify up to twenty domain
names for the filter.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Juniper Identity Management Service Page | 934

Edit a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile | 939
Delete a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile | 940

Edit a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > JIMS.

To edit a Juniper Identity Management Service (JIMS) profile:

1. Select the existing JIMS profile that you want to edit on the Juniper Identity Management Service
page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile page appears with editable fields. For more
information on the options, see "Add a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile" on page 935.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Juniper Identity Management Service Page | 934

Add a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile | 935
Delete a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile | 940
 940

Delete a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile

You are here: Security Services > Firewall Authentication > JIMS.

To delete a Juniper Identity Management Service (JIMS) profile:

1. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the Juniper Identity Management Service
page.
2. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the Juniper Identity Management Service Page | 934

Add a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile | 935
Edit a Juniper Identity Management Service Profile | 939
 941

CHAPTER 93

ICAP Redirect

IN THIS CHAPTER

About the ICAP Redirect Profile Page | 941

Add an ICAP Redirect Profile | 943

Edit an ICAP Redirect Profile | 946

Delete ICAP Redirect Profile | 946

About the ICAP Redirect Profile Page

IN THIS SECTION

Tasks You Can Perform | 941

Field Descriptions | 942

You are here: Security Services > ICAP Redirect.

You can configure ICAP Redirect Profile.

Tasks You Can Perform

You can perform the following tasks from this page:

• Create an ICAP redirect profile. See "Add an ICAP Redirect Profile" on page 943.

• Edit an ICAP redirect profile. See "Edit an ICAP Redirect Profile" on page 946.

• Delete an ICAP redirect profile. See "Delete ICAP Redirect Profile" on page 946.
 942

• Filter the ICAP redirect profiles based on select criteria. To do this, select the filter icon at the top
right-hand corner of the ICAP redirect profiles table. The columns in the grid change to accept filter
options. Type the filter options; the table displays only the data that fits the filtering criteria.

• Show or hide columns in the ICAP redirect profiles table. To do this, click the Show Hide Columns
icon in the top right corner of the ICAP redirect profiles table and select the options you want to
view or deselect the options you want to hide on the page.

• Advance search for ICAP redirect profiles. To do this, use the search text box present above the table
grid. The search includes the logical operators as part of the filter string. In the search text box, when
you hover over the icon, it displays an example filter condition. When you start entering the search
string, the icon indicates whether the filter string is valid or not.

For an advanced search:

1. Enter the search string in the text box.

Based on your input, a list of items from the filter context menu appears.

2. Select a value from the list and then select a valid operator based on which you want to perform
the advanced search operation.

NOTE: Press Spacebar to add an AND operator or OR operator to the search string. Press
backspace at any point of time while entering a search criteria, only one character is
deleted.

3. Press Enter to display the search results in the grid.

Field Descriptions

Table 270 on page 942 describes the fields on the ICAP Redirect Profile page.

Table 270: Fields on the ICAP Redirect Profile Page

Field Description

Name Displays the ICAP Service profile name.

Timeout Displays the server response timeout in milliseconds.

Server Displays the ICAP Redirection Server.

 943

Table 270: Fields on the ICAP Redirect Profile Page (Continued)

Field Description

Fallback Option Specifies the request timeout action when the request is sent to the server.

HTTP Redirect Enables redirect service on HTTP request/HTTP response.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Add an ICAP Redirect Profile | 943

Edit an ICAP Redirect Profile | 946
Delete ICAP Redirect Profile | 946

Add an ICAP Redirect Profile

You are here: Security Services > ICAP Redirect.

To add an ICAP redirect profile:

1. Click the add icon (+) on the upper right side of the ICAP Redirect Profiles page.
The Create ICAP Redirect Profile page appears.
2. Complete the configuration according to the guidelines provided in Table 271 on page 943.
3. Click OK to save the changes. If you want to discard your changes, click Cancel.

Table 271: Fields on the Create ICAP Redirect Profile Page

Field Action

Name Enter a unique ICAP Service profile name. The string must contain alphanumeric
characters, colons, periods, dashes, and underscores. No spaces are allowed; maximum
length is 63 characters.

Timeout Enter the server response timeout in milliseconds. The range is between 100 milliseconds
to 50000 milliseconds.
 944

Table 271: Fields on the Create ICAP Redirect Profile Page (Continued)

Field Action

HTTP Redirect Option

Request Select to enable redirect service on HTTP request.

Response Select to enable redirect service on HTTP response.

ICAP Server
You can configure ICAP Redirection server by the following options:

Add—Create an ICAP Redirect server. Enter information as specified in Table 272 on page 944.

Edit—Edit an ICAP Redirect server configuration. Enter information as specified in Table 272 on page 944.

Fallback Option

Timeout Action Select the timeout action from the list. The available options are: None, Permit, Log Permit,
and Block.

Connectivity Action Select the connectivity action from the list that the request cannot be sent out due to
connection issues.

Default Action Select a default action from the list to be taken when there are scenarios other than the
above two mentioned ones.

Table 272: Fields on the Create ICAP Redirect Server Page

Field Action

Name Enter an ICAP Redirect server name.

The string must contain alphanumeric characters, colons, periods, dashes, and
underscores. No spaces are allowed; maximum length is 63 characters.

Host Type* Select Name or IP address.

 945

Table 272: Fields on the Create ICAP Redirect Server Page (Continued)

Field Action

Host Enter the host name or host IP address depending on what host type you choose.

Port Specifies the port in the server. This is the server listening post and the default port will be
reached according to protocol defined.

Enter the port number. The range is 1025 through 65534.

Sockets Specifies the number of connections to be created.

Enter the number of connections. The range is 1 through 64.

Authentication

Authorization Type Specifies the type of authentication.

Credentials Type Select the credential type as ASCII or Base64.

Based on the Credential Type that you choose, enter the ASCII string or Base64 string.

URL

Request MOD Enter the reqmod uri that can be configured for ICAP server only.

Response MOD Enter the respmod uri that can be configured for ICAP server only.

Routing Instance Specifies the virtual router that is used for launching.

Select a routing instance from the list.

SSL Initiation Profile Select an SSL initiation profile from the list.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the ICAP Redirect Profile Page | 941

 946

Edit an ICAP Redirect Profile | 946

Delete ICAP Redirect Profile | 946

Edit an ICAP Redirect Profile

You are here: Security Services > ICAP Redirect.

To edit an ICAP redirect profile:

1. Select the existing ICAP redirect profile that you want to edit on the ICAP Redirect page.
2. Click the pencil icon available on the upper right side of the page.
The Edit ICAP Redirect Profile page appears with editable fields. For more information on the
options, see "Add an ICAP Redirect Profile" on page 943.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the ICAP Redirect Profile Page | 941

Delete ICAP Redirect Profile | 946

Delete ICAP Redirect Profile

You are here: Security Services > ICAP Redirect.

To delete ICAP redirect profile:

1. Select one or more ICAP redirect profile that you want to delete on the ICAP Redirect page.
2. Click the delete icon available on the upper right side of the page.
3. Click Yes to delete or click No to retain the profile.

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

About the ICAP Redirect Profile Page | 941

Add an ICAP Redirect Profile | 943
Edit an ICAP Redirect Profile | 946